Service Manual X677

HP Color LaserJet Enterprise 6700, 6701
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise X654, X65455, X65465

HP Color LaserJet Enterprise MFP 6800, 6801
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise MFP X677, X67755, X67765
Service Manual
www.hp.com/support/colorlj6700 www.hp.com/support/colorlj6800MFP
www.hp.com/support/colorljX654 www.hp.com/support/colorljX677MFP
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise 6700, HP Color
LaserJet Enterprise X654, HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise MFP 6800, and HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise MFP X677 Service Manual
SUMMARY
This guide provides theory of operation, troubleshooting, and repair information.

Legal information
Copyright and License
© Copyright 2023 HP Development Company,

L.P.
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation

without prior written permission is prohibited,
except as allowed under the copyright laws.
The information contained herein is subject to

change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and

services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products and
services. Nothing herein should be construed
as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall
not be liable for technical or editorial errors or
omissions contained herein.
Edition 1, 3/2023
Revision history
View a list of document revisions.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products
and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services.
Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical
or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
Table Revision history
Revision number Revision date Revision notes
1 03/2023 Service manual initial release.
iii
Conventions used in this guide
Learn about the conventions used in this publication.
TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts.
NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.
CAUTION: Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the
product.
WARNING! Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid personal injury,
catastrophic loss of data, or extensive damage to the product.
iv Conventions used in this guide

HP service and support
Learn about access to additional service and support information.
Additional service and support for channel partners
Channel partners can use the HP Partner Portal or the Channel Services Delivery Platform (CSDP) to access the
HP Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE).
Find information about the following topics.
● Service manuals, service cost data, and service advisories
● The latest control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting information
● Remove and replace part instructions and videos
● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues
● Printer specifications, warranty, and regulatory information
● Install, configure, and how to information
View a video of how to use the HP Partner First Portal to access WISE.
Access WISE for Channel partners (HP Partner Portal)
1. Sign-in to the HP Partner Portal (click https://partner.hp.com to access the sign-in page).
2. Select the Services & Support item (near the top of the screen).
3. Select the Technical Support (WISE) item.
4. Select the Technical Documentation item.
5. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.
Access WISE for Channel partners (CSDP)
1. Sign-in to the CSDP portal (click csdp.hp.com to access the sign-in page).
2. Select the Knowledge and Training item.
3. Select theHP Technical Documentation item.
Additional service and support for HP internal personnel
v
HP internal personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE) sites:
View a video of how to access WISE for internal HP users.
Americas (AMS)
● WISE - English
● WISE - Spanish
● WISE - Portuguese
● WISE - French
Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)
● WISE - English
● WISE - Japanese
● WISE - Korean
● WISE - Chinese (simplified)
● WISE - Chinese (traditional)
● WISE - Thai
Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)
● WISE - English
Additional technical support WISE videos
The videos below provide additional ways to access printer information using WISE.
View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (model number search).
View a video of ow to use WISE to find technical support videos (Product detail page [PDP] search).
vi HP service and support

Table of contents
1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications .......................................................................................................1

Document feeder / scanner...............................................................................................................................................1
Information (document feeder and scanner)............................................................................................................1
Document feeder and scanner front view ........................................................................................................1
Technical specifications.....................................................................................................................................1
Information (base printer) .................................................................................................................................................3
Printer front view (6700 models)..............................................................................................................................3
Printer front view (X654 models)..............................................................................................................................3
Printer back view (6700/X654 models) ....................................................................................................................4
Printer front view (6800 models)..............................................................................................................................5
Printer front view (X677 models)..............................................................................................................................7
Printer back view (6800/X677 models) ..................................................................................................................10
Configuration (base printer) ............................................................................................................................................10
Configuration (base printer SFP) .............................................................................................................................11
Configuration (base printer MFP) ............................................................................................................................12
Specifications (base printer)............................................................................................................................................14
Technical specifications (6700/6701 models) ........................................................................................................14
Technical specifications (X654/X65455/X65465 models) .....................................................................................16
Technical specifications (6800/6801 models) ........................................................................................................17
Technical specifications (X677/X67755/X67765 models) .....................................................................................20
Printer dimensions ..................................................................................................................................................23
Printer space requirements.....................................................................................................................................30
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions .................................................................30
Operating-environment range ................................................................................................................................30
Information (input devices) .............................................................................................................................................31
550-sheet paper feeder front view.........................................................................................................................31
High capacity input (HCI) paper feeder front view ..................................................................................................32
Information (output devices)...........................................................................................................................................33
3-bin stapler-stacker front view .............................................................................................................................33
Floor-standing stapler-stacker front view..............................................................................................................34
Intermediate paper transfer unit (IPTU) front view ................................................................................................37
2 Printer installation and maintenance..................................................................................................................................39
vii
Document feeder / scanner.............................................................................................................................................39
Clean the pickup rollers and separation pad in the document feeder (MFP) .........................................................39
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges .......................................................................................................40
Base printer .....................................................................................................................................................................41
Remove and replace the toner cartridges (6700/6800 models)............................................................................42
Remove and replace the toner cartridges (X654/X677 models)............................................................................43
Remove and replace the imaging drums (X654/X677 models) .............................................................................45
Clean the Tray 1 pickup and separation rollers.......................................................................................................48
Clean the Tray 2 pickup and separation rollers.......................................................................................................51
3 Theory of operation .............................................................................................................................................................53

Document feeder / scanner.............................................................................................................................................53
Document feeder simplex operation ......................................................................................................................53
Scanning and image capture system ......................................................................................................................54
Base printer .....................................................................................................................................................................54
Basic operation ........................................................................................................................................................54
Sequence of operation ....................................................................................................................................55
Formatter-control system.......................................................................................................................................56
Power management ........................................................................................................................................57
Set the sleep timer and configure the printer to use 1 watt or less of power........................................58
Set the sleep schedule ............................................................................................................................58
Printer job language (PJL) ...............................................................................................................................58
Control panel ...................................................................................................................................................59
Walk-up USB ....................................................................................................................................................59
Low end data model (LEDM) overview ............................................................................................................59
CPU...................................................................................................................................................................59
Input/output (I/O) ............................................................................................................................................59
Memory............................................................................................................................................................60
Engine-control unit..................................................................................................................................................61
DC controller ....................................................................................................................................................61
Motors......................................................................................................................................................65
Fans..........................................................................................................................................................67
Low-voltage power supply..............................................................................................................................67
Low-voltage power supply voltages description....................................................................................68
Over-current/over-voltage protection ....................................................................................................69
Low-voltage power supply safety...........................................................................................................69
Low-voltage power supply functions .....................................................................................................69
High-voltage power supply .............................................................................................................................70
Fuser control....................................................................................................................................................71
Fuser heater protection...........................................................................................................................76
Fuser control functions ...........................................................................................................................77
Engine laser/scanner system ..................................................................................................................................77
Laser scanner failure detection.......................................................................................................................78
Laser scanner safety .......................................................................................................................................78
Image-formation process................................................................................................................................79
Step 1: Pre-exposure (X654/X677 models only)....................................................................................81
Step 2: Primary charging .........................................................................................................................82
Step 3: Laser-beam exposure .................................................................................................................82
viii
Step 4: Development ...............................................................................................................................83
Step 5: Primary transfer ..........................................................................................................................83
Step 6: Secondary transfer......................................................................................................................84
Step 7: Separation ...................................................................................................................................84
Step 8: Fusing ..........................................................................................................................................85
Step 9: ITB cleaning .................................................................................................................................85
Toner cartridges ..............................................................................................................................................86
Design ......................................................................................................................................................86
Toner cartridge functions........................................................................................................................88
Intermediate transfer belt assembly ..............................................................................................................88
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) functions..............................................................................................89
Secondary transfer roller assembly................................................................................................................90
Secondary transfer roller functions ........................................................................................................90
Calibration .......................................................................................................................................................90
Calibration functions ...............................................................................................................................90
Engine pickup, feed, and delivery system...............................................................................................................91
Sensors and switches ......................................................................................................................................93
Motors, clutches, and solenoids......................................................................................................................95
Feed speed control ..................................................................................................................................97
Pickup and feed delivery features...........................................................................................................97
Media detection .......................................................................................................................................98
Jam detection/prevention ...............................................................................................................................99
Input devices..................................................................................................................................................................102
550-sheet paper feeder ........................................................................................................................................102
550-sheet paper feeder paper path .............................................................................................................102
Paper feeder controller .................................................................................................................................103
550-sheet paper feeder electrical components ...........................................................................................103
550-sheet paper feeder motor control.........................................................................................................104
550-sheet paper feeder other functions ......................................................................................................105
550-sheet feeder jam detection ...................................................................................................................105
High capacity input (HCI) paper feeder .................................................................................................................105
HCI paper path ...............................................................................................................................................105
HCI controller .................................................................................................................................................106
HCI electrical components.............................................................................................................................107
HCI motor control ..........................................................................................................................................108
HCI other functions........................................................................................................................................108
HCI jam detection...........................................................................................................................................109
Output devices ...............................................................................................................................................................109
3-bin stapler-stacker.............................................................................................................................................109
3-bin stapler-stacker paper path ..................................................................................................................109
3-bin stapler-stacker controller....................................................................................................................110
3-bin stapler-stacker electrical components................................................................................................111
3-bin stapler-stacker motor control .............................................................................................................113
3-bin stapler-stacker fan control ..................................................................................................................113
3-bin stapler-stacker other functions...........................................................................................................113
3-bin stapler-stacker jam detection .............................................................................................................114
Floor-standing stapler-stacker .............................................................................................................................114
Floor-standing stapler-stacker paper path ..................................................................................................114
ix
Floor-standing stapler-stacker controller ....................................................................................................115
Floor-standing stapler-stacker electrical components ................................................................................116
Floor-standing stapler-stacker motor control..............................................................................................120
Floor-standing stapler-stacker fan control ..................................................................................................121
Floor-standing stapler-stacker other functions ...........................................................................................121
550-sheet feeder jam detection ...................................................................................................................122
4 Solve problems ..................................................................................................................................................................123

How to search for printer documentation.....................................................................................................................123
How to search WISE for printer documentation ...................................................................................................123
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (CSDP)...................................................................................................124
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (HP Partner Portal) ..............................................................................126
Determine the problem source......................................................................................................................................128
Pre-troubleshooting checklist...............................................................................................................................128
Troubleshooting flowchart....................................................................................................................................129
Firmware upgrades................................................................................................................................................131
Determine the installed revision of firmware ...............................................................................................132
HP Embedded Web Server.............................................................................................................................132
USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) ...................................................................................................133
USB flash drive firmware (control panel menu) ............................................................................................134
Comprehensive list of troubleshooting tools................................................................................................................134
Engine test .............................................................................................................................................................134
Control panel checks .............................................................................................................................................135
Touchscreen diagnostic mode.......................................................................................................................135
Open the control panel system diagnostic tests ..........................................................................................136
Screen test .....................................................................................................................................................138
Touch test ......................................................................................................................................................142
SoftKey test ...................................................................................................................................................143
Backlight test.................................................................................................................................................145
Sound test......................................................................................................................................................145
Keyboard test (flow models only) .................................................................................................................146
Version ...........................................................................................................................................................147
Control panel diagnostic flowcharts .............................................................................................................148
Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image) .......................................................................................148
Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone ...............................................................................................149
No control panel sound .........................................................................................................................150
Home button is unresponsive ...............................................................................................................151
Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)................................152
Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) ......................................................................................................153
Defeating interlocks ..............................................................................................................................................174
LED diagnostics (formatter) ..................................................................................................................................175
Scanner tests (MFP)...............................................................................................................................................176
Disable cartridge check .........................................................................................................................................177
Print/stop test........................................................................................................................................................177
Individual component diagnostics ........................................................................................................................178
Paper path test ..............................................................................................................................................178
Paper path sensors test ................................................................................................................................179
Individual component test ............................................................................................................................179
x
Manual sensor test ........................................................................................................................................179
Tray/bin manual sensor test .........................................................................................................................180
Diagrams: Block diagrams.....................................................................................................................................180
Diagrams: External plug and port locations .................................................................................................180
Sensors and switches ....................................................................................................................................181
Diagrams: Major component locations .........................................................................................................187
Printed circuit assembly (PCA) connector locations .....................................................................................208
Diagrams: General timing chart ....................................................................................................................216
Diagrams: General circuit diagrams ..............................................................................................................217
Internal test and information pages .....................................................................................................................228
Reports menu ........................................................................................................................................................232
Settings menu .......................................................................................................................................................233
General menu ................................................................................................................................................234
Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) .......................................................................................................240
Fax menu (MFP) .............................................................................................................................................249
Manage Supplies menu .................................................................................................................................260
Networking menu ..........................................................................................................................................263
Support Tools menu ..............................................................................................................................................268
Maintenance menu ........................................................................................................................................268
Backup/Restore menu ...........................................................................................................................268
Calibration/Cleaning menu....................................................................................................................269
USB Firmware Upgrade menu ...............................................................................................................270
Service menu .........................................................................................................................................270
Troubleshooting menu ..................................................................................................................................271
Service menu .........................................................................................................................................................275
Printer resets .........................................................................................................................................................279
Format Disk and Partial Clean functions...............................................................................................................281
Power on troubleshooting.............................................................................................................................................284
Power-on checks ...................................................................................................................................................284
Power on troubleshooting overview .....................................................................................................................284
Troubleshooting power-on or blank control panel problems ......................................................................285
Engine diagnostics.................................................................................................................................................286
Engine test.....................................................................................................................................................286
Defeating interlocks ......................................................................................................................................287
Disable cartridge check .................................................................................................................................289
LED diagnostics (formatter) ..................................................................................................................................289
Use the solve problems checklist..........................................................................................................................290
Control panel troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................................292
Control panel system diagnostics .........................................................................................................................292
Open the control panel system diagnostic tests ..........................................................................................293
Screen test .....................................................................................................................................................295
Touch test ......................................................................................................................................................298
SoftKey test ...................................................................................................................................................300
Backlight test.................................................................................................................................................301
Sound test......................................................................................................................................................302
Version ...........................................................................................................................................................303
How to search for printer documentation.............................................................................................................304
How to search WISE for printer documentation ...........................................................................................304
xi
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (CSDP)...........................................................................................305
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (HP Partner Portal) ......................................................................307
Control panel messages document (CPMD) ..................................................................................................................309
Print the supplies status page ..............................................................................................................................309
Pre-boot menu options .........................................................................................................................................309
Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel........................................................................309
Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel ......................................................311
Remote Admin ...............................................................................................................................................311
Required software and network connection.........................................................................................311
Connect a remote connection ...............................................................................................................313
Disconnect a remote connection...........................................................................................................317
Print the event log .................................................................................................................................................319
How to search for printer documentation.............................................................................................................319
How to search WISE for printer documentation ...........................................................................................319
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (CSDP)...........................................................................................321
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (HP Partner Portal) ......................................................................323
Error-code and control-panel-message troubleshooting overview.....................................................................325
Error codes (types and structure) .................................................................................................................325
Solve paper handling problems.....................................................................................................................................327
Clear paper jams (SFP models)..............................................................................................................................327
Paper jam locations .......................................................................................................................................327
Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams ......................................................................................................327
Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams? ..........................................................................................328
13.B2.D1 jam error in Tray 1 (multipurpose tray).........................................................................................328
13.B2.D2 jam error in Tray 2 .........................................................................................................................332
13.A3 jam error in Tray 3 ...............................................................................................................................337
13.A4 jam error in Tray 4 (2,100 sheet feeder HCI) ......................................................................................350
13.B2 jam error in right door.........................................................................................................................357
13.B4 jam errors in the right door ................................................................................................................360
13.B9 jam errors in the fuser ........................................................................................................................362
13.D3 jam errors in the duplexer ..................................................................................................................366
13.E1 jam error in the output bin ..................................................................................................................368
Clear paper jams (MFP models).............................................................................................................................369
Paper jam locations .......................................................................................................................................369
Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams ......................................................................................................371
Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams? ..........................................................................................371
31.13.yz jam error in the document feeder..................................................................................................371
13.B2.D1 jam error in Tray 1 (multipurpose tray).........................................................................................376
13.B2.D2 jam error in Tray 2 .........................................................................................................................379
13.A4 jam error in Tray 4 (2,100 sheet feeder HCI) ......................................................................................397
13.B2 jam error in right door.........................................................................................................................404
13.B4 jam errors in the right door ................................................................................................................407
13.B9 jam errors in the fuser ........................................................................................................................409
13.D3 jam errors in the duplexer ..................................................................................................................413
13.E1 jam error in the output bin ..................................................................................................................415
xii
13.E2 jam error in top cover ..........................................................................................................................416
13.60 jam errors in the fuser exit area when printing to a stapler/stacker or floor-standing finisher .......418
13.80, 13.83, or 13.84 jam errors in the 3 Bin Stapler/Stacker....................................................................420
13.40 or 13.47 Punch jam error in the Floor-standing finisher....................................................................424
13.6, 13.7, or 13.8 jam error in the Floor-standing finisher.........................................................................427
Printer feeds incorrect page size...........................................................................................................................431
Printer pulls from incorrect tray............................................................................................................................431
Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly (duplex models)..........................................................................432
Paper does not feed from Tray 2-X .......................................................................................................................432
Output is curled or wrinkled ..................................................................................................................................433
The printer does not pick up paper .......................................................................................................................433
The printer picks up multiple sheets of paper ......................................................................................................434
The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper (MFP) .................................................434
Paper does not feed automatically .......................................................................................................................435
Image-quality troubleshooting .....................................................................................................................................435
Print-quality troubleshooting ...............................................................................................................................436
Repetitive image defect ruler........................................................................................................................436
Use a ruler to measure between repetitive defects .............................................................................437
Print from a different software program ......................................................................................................440
Check the paper-type setting for the print job .............................................................................................440
Check the paper type setting on the control panel ..............................................................................440
Check the paper type setting (Windows) ..............................................................................................441
Check the paper type setting (macOS)..................................................................................................441
Check toner-cartridge status ........................................................................................................................441
Step one: Print the Supplies Status Page..............................................................................................441
Step two: Check supplies status ...........................................................................................................442
Print a cleaning page .....................................................................................................................................442
Check paper and the printing environment ..................................................................................................442
Step one: Use paper that meets HP specifications ...............................................................................442
Step two: Check the environment .........................................................................................................443
Step three: Set the individual tray alignment.......................................................................................443
Try a different print driver .............................................................................................................................443
Troubleshoot image defects .........................................................................................................................443
Copy-quality troubleshooting ...............................................................................................................................451
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges .............................................................................................452
Vertical lines, bands, or streaks ....................................................................................................................453
Modify printer settings to improve scan or copy quality..............................................................................457
Light or faint copies (color models)...............................................................................................................458
Performance and connectivity troubleshooting ...........................................................................................................460
Solve fax or email problems..................................................................................................................................460
Solve performance problems ................................................................................................................................461
Factors affecting print performance .............................................................................................................461
Print speeds...................................................................................................................................................462
The printer does not print .............................................................................................................................463
The printer prints slowly ...............................................................................................................................463
Solve connectivity problems .................................................................................................................................464
Solve USB connection problems....................................................................................................................464
Solve wired network problems......................................................................................................................464
xiii
Introduction ...........................................................................................................................................464
Poor physical connection ......................................................................................................................464
The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the printer............................................................465
The computer is unable to communicate with the printer ...................................................................465
The printer is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network ..............................................465
New software programs might be causing compatibility problems ....................................................465
The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly...................................................................465
The printer is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect..........................................................465
5 Removal and replacement.................................................................................................................................................466

1 Customer self-repair (CSR) A parts and accessories .................................................................................................466
Customer-replaceable units ..................................................................................................................................466
Internal parts and assemblies.......................................................................................................................466
Removal and replacement: Toner cartridges (6700/6800 models).....................................................466
Removal and replacement: Toner cartridges (X654/X677 models).....................................................470
Removal and replacement: Imaging drums (X654/X677 models).......................................................474
Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU)........................................................................478
Removal and replacement: 3-bin stapler-stacker staple cartridge (3-bin stapler-stacker) ...............481
Removal and replacement: Finisher staple cartridge (floor-standing stapler-stacker) ......................483
Removal and replacement: Convenience staple cartridge (convenience stapler models) ..................486
Removal and replacement: Fuser .........................................................................................................488
Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB)...........................................................................491
Removal and replacement: Secondary transfer roller..........................................................................493
Removal and replacement: Document feeder rollers (MFP models) ...................................................496
Installation: Keyboard overlay (Flow MFP models) ..............................................................................498
Removal and replacement: Tray 1 pickup and separation rollers ........................................................501
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 paper pickup roller and separation roller assemblies ..................506
2 Customer self-repair (CSR) B parts and accessories .................................................................................................509
Customer-replaceable units ..................................................................................................................................509
Removal and replacement: Keyboard (Flow MFP models) ...................................................................509
Removal and replacement: Hard-disk drive (HDD) ...............................................................................514
Removal and replacement: Dual in-line memory module (DIMM) (SFP models) .................................518
Removal and replacement: Fax PCA (fax models) ................................................................................522
Removal and replacement: Workflow accelerator................................................................................525
Removal and replacement: USB expansion kit .....................................................................................529
Removal and replacement: Solid state drive (SSD) ..............................................................................533
Installation: Near field communication (NFC) PCA ................................................................................551
Removal and replacement: embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC) (SFP models)...................................554
3 Document feeder / scanner .......................................................................................................................................558
Field-replaceable units (FRUs) ..............................................................................................................................558
Removal and replacement: Scanner control board (SCB) (MFP models)..............................................558
Removal and replacement: White backing (MFP models) ....................................................................563
Whole-unit replacement (WUR) ............................................................................................................................565
Automatic document feeder (WUR) ..............................................................................................................565
Removal and replacement: Document feeder (MFP models)...............................................................565
Integrated scanner assembly (WUR).............................................................................................................569
xiv
Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner assembly (MFP models).................................................569
4 Removal and replacement: Internal parts and assemblies (base printer) ...............................................................575
Covers, panels, and doors .............................................................................................................................575
Removal and replacement: Formatter cover ........................................................................................575
Removal and replacement: Front door .................................................................................................577
Removal and replacement: Toner cartridge access door (X654/X677 models) ..................................580
Removal and replacement: Rear cover .................................................................................................583
Removal and replacement: Rear upper cover (MFP models)................................................................586
Removal and replacement: Left upper cover (MFP models).................................................................589
Removal and replacement: Left cover ..................................................................................................591
Removal and replacement: Left handle ................................................................................................595
Removal and replacement: Front left cover .........................................................................................599
Removal and replacement: Front right cover .......................................................................................601
Removal and replacement: Right door .................................................................................................603
Removal and replacement: Right lower door (X654/X677 models) ....................................................608
Removal and replacement: Rear lower cover (X654/X677 models) ....................................................611
Removal and replacement: Left lower cover (X654/X677 models) .....................................................614
Removal and replacement: Output bin .................................................................................................619
Removal and replacement: Right handle..............................................................................................622
Removal and replacement: Top cover (SFP models) ............................................................................628
Removal and replacement: Top cover (MFP models)............................................................................634
Removal and replacement: Top front cover (MFP models)...................................................................637
Removal and replacement: Hardware Integration Pocket (HIP) cover .................................................643
Removal and replacement: Control panel (SFP models) ......................................................................645
Removal and replacement: Control panel (MFP models) .....................................................................648
Removal and replacement: Secondary transfer assembly...................................................................650
Removal and replacement: Registration density sensor assembly .....................................................654
Removal and replacement: Registration assembly..............................................................................660
Removal and replacement: Paper pickup assembly (6700/6800 models) ..........................................665
Removal and replacement: Paper pickup assembly (X654/X677 models)..........................................670
Removal and replacement: Delivery assembly.....................................................................................674
Removal and replacement: Laser scanner assembly ...........................................................................678
Removal and replacement: DC controller (DCC)....................................................................................682
Removal and replacement: Formatter..................................................................................................686
Removal and replacement: Formatter case assembly (SFP models)...................................................689
Removal and replacement: Formatter case assembly (MFP) models ..................................................693
Removal and replacement: Feed drive assembly (X654/X677 models) ..............................................697
Removal and replacement: Pickup drive assembly (6700/6800 models) ...........................................703
Removal and replacement: Pickup drive assembly (X654/X677 models) ...........................................709
Removal and replacement: Toner supply motor assembly (X654/X677 models) ...............................715
Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly (6700/6800 models) .............................................719
Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly (X654/X677 models) .............................................724
Removal and replacement: Auto close assembly (6700/6800 models) ..............................................729
Removal and replacement: Auto close assembly (X654/X677 models) ..............................................734
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 media size detect assembly (6700/6800 models)........................739
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 media size detect assembly (X654/X677 models) .......................744
xv
Removal and replacement: Fuser drive assembly................................................................................749
Removal and replacement: Main-drive assembly ................................................................................758
Removal and replacement: Interlock assembly....................................................................................775
Removal and replacement: Waste toner duct assembly (X654/X677 models) ...................................793
Removal and replacement: Waste toner duct assembly (6700/6800 models) ...................................810
Removal and replacement: Pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (6700/6800 models) ......................817
Removal and replacement: Pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (X654/X677 models) ......................830
Removal and replacement: Toner supply drive assembly (X654/X677 models).................................845
Removal and replacement: Toner supply assembly (X654/X677 models) ..........................................850
Removal and replacement: Toner supply buffer assembly/intermediate pipe (X654/X677
models)..................................................................................................................................................852
Removal and replacement: Feed assembly (X654/X677 models) .......................................................859
Removal and replacement: Low-voltage power supply (LVPS)............................................................866
Removal and replacement: High-voltage power supply (HVPS) ..........................................................871
Removal and replacement: Drive PCA...................................................................................................878
Removal and replacement: Feed/toner supply controller PCA (X654/X677 models) .........................884
Removal and replacement: Right PCA...................................................................................................888
Removal and replacement: Rear PCA....................................................................................................890
Removal and replacement: Environmental sensor PCA .......................................................................897
Removal and replacement: Drum home position PCA..........................................................................900
Removal and replacement: Drum motor ..............................................................................................905
Removal and replacement: Developer motor.......................................................................................910
Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB) motor................................................................915
Removal and replacement: Developer alienation motor......................................................................921
Removal and replacement: Fuser motor ..............................................................................................928
Removal and replacement: Duplex motor ............................................................................................934
Removal and replacement: Power-supply fan......................................................................................940
Removal and replacement: Cartridge fan .............................................................................................945
Removal and replacement: Fuser fan ...................................................................................................951
Removal and replacement: Exhaust fan ...............................................................................................957
5 Input device - 550-sheet paper feeder .....................................................................................................................960
Covers, panels, and doors .............................................................................................................................960
Removal and replacement: Front left cover (550-sheet paper feeder) ...............................................960
Removal and replacement: Front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder) .............................................962
Removal and replacement: Right door (550-sheet paper feeder) .......................................................963
Removal and replacement: Rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder) .......................................................966
Removal and replacement: Left cover (550-sheet paper feeder) ........................................................969
Removal and replacement: Pickup assembly (550-sheet paper feeder) .............................................973
Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)......................................978
Removal and replacement: Pickup drive assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)....................................982
Removal and replacement: Auto close assembly (550-sheet paper feeder).......................................988
Removal and replacement: Media size detection assembly (550-sheet paper feeder) ......................993
Removal and replacement: Controller PCA (550-sheet paper feeder).................................................998
Removal and replacement: Separation roller assembly (550-sheet paper feeder) ......................... 1002
Removal and replacement: Pickup roller assembly (550-sheet paper feeder) ................................ 1004
6 Removal and replacement: 2,100-sheet paper deck............................................................................................. 1006
xvi
Field-replaceable units (FRUs) ........................................................................................................................... 1006
Covers, panels, and doors .......................................................................................................................... 1006
Removal and replacement: Right door (HCI)...................................................................................... 1006
Removal and replacement: Front left cover/left cover (HCI) ............................................................. 1008
Removal and replacement: Rear cover (HCI)...................................................................................... 1011
Removal and replacement: Rear lower cover (HCI)............................................................................ 1013
Internal parts and assemblies.................................................................................................................... 1016
Removal and replacement: Cassette assembly (HCI) ........................................................................ 1016
Removal and replacement: Pickup assembly (HCI)............................................................................ 1018
Removal and replacement: Auto close assembly (HCI) ..................................................................... 1021
Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly (HCI) .................................................................... 1024
Removal and replacement: Pickup alienation assembly (HCI) .......................................................... 1028
Removal and replacement: Pickup drive assembly (HCI) .................................................................. 1032
Removal and replacement: Controller PCA (HCI) ............................................................................... 1036
Removal and replacement: Separation roller assembly (HCI)........................................................... 1040
Removal and replacement: Pickup roller assembly (HCI) .................................................................. 1042
7 Output device - 3-bin staple stacker multi-bin mailbox ........................................................................................ 1044
Removal and replacement: Rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker) ........................................................ 1045
Removal and replacement: Staple cover and staple door (3-bin stapler-stacker) ........................... 1047
Removal and replacement: Right upper cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)............................................. 1049
Removal and replacement: Right corner cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)............................................ 1051
Removal and replacement: Right lower cover (3-bin stapler-stacker) ............................................. 1054
Removal and replacement: Rear inner cover (3-bin stapler-stacker) ............................................... 1058
Removal and replacement: Stapler-stacker door assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)........................ 1061
Removal and replacement: Stacking wall assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker).................................... 1068
Removal and replacement: Stapler assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) ............................................. 1080
Removal and replacement: Jogger assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) .............................................. 1084
Removal and replacement: Output bin 1 (3-bin stapler-stacker) ..................................................... 1088
Removal and replacement: Upper feed assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) ....................................... 1090
Removal and replacement: Lower feed assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) ....................................... 1099
Removal and replacement: Solenoid assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) ........................................... 1114
Removal and replacement: MBM fan (3-bin stapler-stacker)............................................................ 1121
Removal and replacement: Stapler-stacker feed motor (3-bin stapler-stacker) ............................. 1124
Removal and replacement: Controller PCA (3-bin stapler-stacker) .................................................. 1127
8 Output device - floor-standing staple stacker ....................................................................................................... 1130
Removal and replacement: Front door (floor-standing stapler-stacker).......................................... 1130
Removal and replacement: Upper and lower output bins (floor-standing stapler-stacker) ............ 1132
Removal and replacement: Left upper rear cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)......................... 1135
Removal and replacement: Left lower rear cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker) ......................... 1137
Removal and replacement: Rear cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker).......................................... 1139
Removal and replacement: Rear upper cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker) ............................... 1143
Removal and replacement: MBM front cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker) ................................ 1148
Removal and replacement: MBM rear cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker).................................. 1150
xvii
Removal and replacement: MBM top cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)................................... 1154
Removal and replacement: MBM output bin (floor-standing stapler-stacker) ................................. 1160
Removal and replacement: Front inner upper cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)..................... 1165
Removal and replacement: Front inner lower cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker) ..................... 1168
Removal and replacement: Front inner cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker) ............................... 1171
Removal and replacement: Foot front cover (tall model only) (floor-standing stapler-stacker) ..... 1176
Removal and replacement: Foot front cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)................................. 1180
Removal and replacement: Foot rear cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker) .................................. 1183
Removal and replacement: Foot center cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker) .............................. 1188
Removal and replacement: Foot cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker).......................................... 1196
Removal and replacement: Stapler (floor-standing stapler-stacker) ............................................... 1204
Removal and replacement: Controller PCA (floor-standing stapler-stacker) ................................... 1208
Removal and replacement: Power supply assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker) .................... 1213
Removal and replacement: Height wall upper assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker).............. 1220
Removal and replacement: Height wall lower assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker) .............. 1226
Removal and replacement: Lifter base upper assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker) .............. 1234
Removal and replacement: Lifter base lower assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)............... 1242
Removal and replacement: Delivery assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)............................. 1248
Removal and replacement: Punch assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker) ................................ 1259
Removal and replacement: SWB assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker) ................................... 1271
Removal and replacement: Drum assembly/door handle rail assembly (floor-standing
stapler-stacker) .................................................................................................................................. 1286
Removal and replacement: Drum drive assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker) ........................ 1295
Removal and replacement: IMF assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)..................................... 1308
Removal and replacement: Alignment assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker) ......................... 1334
6 Parts and diagrams......................................................................................................................................................... 1365

Document feeder / scanner........................................................................................................................................ 1365
Integrated scanner assembly............................................................................................................................. 1365
Base printer ................................................................................................................................................................ 1367
Control panels..................................................................................................................................................... 1367
Control panels............................................................................................................................................. 1367
Covers, panels, and doors .................................................................................................................................. 1369
Parts and diagrams: Covers 6700 models ................................................................................................. 1369
Parts and diagrams: Covers X654 models ................................................................................................. 1371
Parts and diagrams: Covers 6800 models ................................................................................................. 1373
Parts and diagrams: Covers X677 models ................................................................................................. 1375
Internal parts and assemblies............................................................................................................................ 1377
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 7)6700/6800 models ...................................................... 1377
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 9)X654/X677 models ...................................................... 1391
xviii
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (6 of 9) X654/X677 models ..................................................... 1400
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (7 of 9) X654/X677 models ..................................................... 1402
Input devices............................................................................................................................................................... 1406
Input device - 550-sheet paper feeder .............................................................................................................. 1406
Covers, panels, and doors (550-sheet paper feeder) ........................................................................ 1406
Internal parts and assemblies (550-sheet paper feeder) ................................................................. 1407
Input device - 2,100-sheet high capacity input (HCI) paper feeder................................................................... 1409
Parts and diagrams: HCI covers.................................................................................................................. 1409
Parts and diagrams: HCI main body ........................................................................................................... 1410
Output devices ............................................................................................................................................................ 1411
Output device - Floor stand staple stacker (FSSS)............................................................................................. 1411
Parts and diagrams: Floor stand staple stacker (FSSS) covers 6800/X677 models......................... 1411
Parts and diagrams: Floor stand staple stacker (FSSS) main body 6800/X677 models (1 of 2)...... 1413
Parts and diagrams: Floor stand staple stacker (FSSS) main body 6800/X677 models (2 of 2)...... 1415
Output device - Intermediate paper transfer unit (IPTU)................................................................................... 1416
Parts and diagrams: Intermediate paper transfer unit 6800/X677 models ............................................. 1416
Output device - 3-bin staple stacker.................................................................................................................. 1416
Parts and diagrams: 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/X677 models............................................... 1417
Parts and diagrams: 3 bin staple stacker main body 6800/X677 models ........................................ 1418
Alphabetical parts list................................................................................................................................................. 1420
Document feeder / scanner................................................................................................................................ 1365
Integrated scanner assembly..................................................................................................................... 1365
Base printer ........................................................................................................................................................ 1367
Control panels............................................................................................................................................. 1367
Control panels .................................................................................................................................... 1367
Parts and diagrams: Covers 6700 models ......................................................................................... 1369
Parts and diagrams: Covers X654 models ......................................................................................... 1371
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 7)6700/6800 models .............................................. 1377
xix
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 9)X654/X677 models .............................................. 1391
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (6 of 9) X654/X677 models ............................................. 1400
Input devices....................................................................................................................................................... 1406
Input device - 550-sheet paper feeder ...................................................................................................... 1406
Covers, panels, and doors .................................................................................................................. 1406
Covers, panels, and doors (550-sheet paper feeder)................................................................ 1406
Internal parts and assemblies............................................................................................................ 1407
Internal parts and assemblies (550-sheet paper feeder) ......................................................... 1407
Input device - 2,100-sheet high capacity input (HCI) paper feeder .......................................................... 1409
Parts and diagrams: HCI covers.......................................................................................................... 1409
Parts and diagrams: HCI main body ................................................................................................... 1410
Output devices.................................................................................................................................................... 1411
Output device - Floor stand staple stacker (FSSS)..................................................................................... 1411
Parts and diagrams: Floor stand staple stacker (FSSS) covers 6800/X677 models................. 1411
Parts and diagrams: Floor stand staple stacker (FSSS) main body 6800/X677 models (1 of
2)................................................................................................................................................. 1413
2)................................................................................................................................................. 1415
Output device - Intermediate paper transfer unit (IPTU) .......................................................................... 1416
Parts and diagrams: Intermediate paper transfer unit 6800/X677 models..................................... 1416
Output device - 3-bin staple stacker.......................................................................................................... 1416
Parts and diagrams: 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/X677 models ...................................... 1417
Parts and diagrams: 3 bin staple stacker main body 6800/X677 models ................................ 1418
Numerical parts list .................................................................................................................................................... 1444
Document feeder / scanner................................................................................................................................ 1365
Integrated scanner assembly..................................................................................................................... 1365
Base printer ........................................................................................................................................................ 1367
Control panels............................................................................................................................................. 1367
Control panels .................................................................................................................................... 1367
xx
Input devices....................................................................................................................................................... 1406
Input device - 550-sheet paper feeder ...................................................................................................... 1406
Covers, panels, and doors (550-sheet paper feeder)................................................................ 1406
Internal parts and assemblies (550-sheet paper feeder) ......................................................... 1407
Input device - 2,100-sheet high capacity input (HCI) paper feeder .......................................................... 1409
Parts and diagrams: HCI covers.......................................................................................................... 1409
Parts and diagrams: HCI main body ................................................................................................... 1410
Output devices.................................................................................................................................................... 1411
Output device - Floor stand staple stacker (FSSS)..................................................................................... 1411
Parts and diagrams: Floor stand staple stacker (FSSS) covers 6800/X677 models................. 1411
2)................................................................................................................................................. 1413
2)................................................................................................................................................. 1415
Output device - Intermediate paper transfer unit (IPTU) .......................................................................... 1416
Parts and diagrams: Intermediate paper transfer unit 6800/X677 models..................................... 1416
Output device - 3-bin staple stacker.......................................................................................................... 1416
Parts and diagrams: 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/X677 models ...................................... 1417
Parts and diagrams: 3 bin staple stacker main body 6800/X677 models ................................ 1418
Appendix A Certificate of Volatility.................................................................................................................................... 1468

Certificate of Volatility................................................................................................................................................ 1468
Appendix B Glossary of terms............................................................................................................................................ 1472
Index ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1482
xxi
List of videos
View a video of how to use the HP Partner First Portal to access WISE....................................................................................v
View a video of how to access WISE for internal HP users....................................................................................................... vi
View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (model number search)................................................... vi
View a video of ow to use WISE to find technical support videos (Product detail page [PDP] search)....................................vi
View a video of cleaning the document feeder glass and flatbed glass.................................................................................40
View a video of how to replace the toner cartridges...............................................................................................................42
View a video of how to replace the toner cartridges...............................................................................................................43
View a video of how to replace the imaging drums................................................................................................................ 45
View a video of how to access WISE (HP channel partners)..................................................................................................128
View a video that demonstrates how to load paper in a way that reduces the number of paper jams...............................328
View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 1..........................................................................................................................328
View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 3, and the optional trays....................................................................................337
View a video of how to clear a jam in the high-capacity input Tray 4...................................................................................350
View a video of how to clear a jam in the right door and fuser area.....................................................................................357
View a video of how to clear a jam in the output bin............................................................................................................ 368
View a video that demonstrates how to load paper in a way that reduces the number of paper jams...............................371
View a video of how to clear a jam in the document feeder................................................................................................. 372
xxii
View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 3, and the optional trays....................................................................................385
View a video of how to clear a jam in the high-capacity input Tray 4...................................................................................397
View a video of how to clear a jam in the floor-standing finisher punch area......................................................................425
View a video of how to clear a jam in the floor-standing finisher.........................................................................................427
View a video of cleaning the document feeder glass and flatbed glass...............................................................................452
View a video of removing and replacing the toner cartridges.............................................................................................. 466
View a video of removing and replacing the toner cartridges.............................................................................................. 470
View a video of removing and replacing the image drums................................................................................................... 474
View a video of removing and replacing the TCU.................................................................................................................. 478
View a video of removing and replacing the staple cartridge.............................................................................................. 481
View a video to remove and replace the fuser...................................................................................................................... 488
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the image transfer belt................................................................491
View a video of removing and replacing the T2 roller...........................................................................................................493
View a video of removing and replacing the document feeder rollers.................................................................................496
View a video of how to install the keyboard overlay.............................................................................................................498
View a video of removing and replacing theTray 1 rollers....................................................................................................501
View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 rollers...................................................................................................506
View a video of how to remove and replace the keyboard................................................................................................... 509
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the hard-disk drive...................................................................... 514
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the DIMM...................................................................................... 518
xxiii
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the fax PCA...................................................................................522
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the workflow accelerator.............................................................525
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the USB expansion kit..................................................................529
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the SSD.........................................................................................533
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the NFC PCA..................................................................................551
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the eMMC..................................................................................... 554
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the control panel......................................................................... 648
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the paper pickup assembly..........................................................665
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the lifter drive assembly..............................................................719
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the fuser drive assembly............................................................. 749
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the main drive assembly............................................................. 758
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the HVPS...................................................................................... 871
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the drive PCA................................................................................878
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the rear PCA................................................................................. 891
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the fuser fan................................................................................ 951
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the lifter drive assembly..............................................................978
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the pickup drive assembly...........................................................982
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the auto close assembly..............................................................988
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the media size detection assembly.............................................993
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the pickup drive assembly.........................................................1032
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the upper feed assembly...........................................................1090
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the lower feed assembly........................................................... 1099
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the solenoid assembly...............................................................1114
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the upper and lower output bins...............................................1132
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the left lower rear cover............................................................ 1137
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the foot cover............................................................................ 1196
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the delivery assembly............................................................... 1248
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the punch assembly...................................................................1259
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the SWB assembly..................................................................... 1271
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the IMF assembly.......................................................................1308
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the alignment assembly............................................................1334
xxiv
1 Printer information, configurations, and
specifications
Learn about printer configuration and specifications.
Document feeder / scanner

Learn about the printer document feeder and scanner configuration and specifications.
NOTE: This section is for MFP printers only.
Information (document feeder and scanner)

Learn about the document feeder and scanner.
Document feeder and scanner front view

Learn about the document feeder and scanner components.
Figure 1-1 Document feeder and scanner front view

3
2
1 4
Item Description
1 Document feeder
2 Output bin
3 Jam access
4 Input tray
5 Flatbed scanner
Technical specifications
Learn about the document feeder and scanner specifications.
Printer information, configurations, and specifications 1

Review the technical specifications for the document feeder and scanner.
See http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj6800MFP or http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj6801MFP or

http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX677MFP for current information.
Table 1-1 Copy and scan specifications (document feeder and scanner) (1 of 3)
Copy and scan features 6800dn 6800zf 6800zfsw 6800zfw+ 6801zfsw 6801zfw+
Copies and scans up to Not available Not available Not available Not available Not available
80 pages per minute
(ppm)
Copies and scans up to Not available

110 ppm
150-page document
feeder with dual-head
scanning for single-pass
duplex copying and
scanning
Scan to E-mail, Scan

to USB, and Scan to
Network Folder option
Copy and scan features X677dn X677zs X677z+
Copies and scans up to 80 pages per Not available Not available

minute (ppm)
Copies and scans up to 110 ppm Not available
150-page document feeder with dual-head

scanning for single-pass duplex copying
and scanning
Scan to E-mail, Scan to USB, and Scan to

Copy and scan features X67755dn X67755zs X67755z+ X67765dn X67765zs X67765z+
Copies and scans up to Not available Not available Not available Not available
80 pages per minute
(ppm)
Copies and scans up to Not available Not available

110 ppm
150-page document
feeder with dual-head
scanning for single-pass
duplex copying and
scanning
Scan to E-mail, Scan

to USB, and Scan to
2 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications

Information (base printer)
Learn about the base printer.
Printer front view (6700 models)

Identify the parts on the front of the printer (6700 models).
Figure 1-2 Printer front view (6700 models)

1
8 2
3
7
4
6
5
Item Description
1 Control panel with color touchscreen display (tilts up for easier viewing)
2 On/off button
3 Easy-access USB port
Insert a USB flash drive for printing without a computer or to update the printer firmware.
NOTE: An administrator must enable this port before use.
4 Right door, access for clearing jams
5 Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) and right door (access for clearing jams)
6 Tray 2
7 Front door, for access to the toner cartridges
8 Output bin
Printer front view (X654 models)

Locate features on the front of the printer.
Information (base printer) 3

Figure 1-3 Printer front view
1 2
10 3
9 4
5
8
6
7
Item Description
2 On/off button
Insert a USB flash drive for printing or scanning without a computer or to update the printer firmware.
4 Right door, for access for clearing jams
5 Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)
6 Tray 2 jam access door
7 Tray 2
8 Toner cartridge access door
9 Front door, for access to the imaging drums and toner collection unit
10 Output bin
Printer back view (6700/X654 models)

Identify the parts on the back of the printer (SFP).

Figure 1-4 Printer rear view, 6700/X654 models
1
2
Item Description
1 Local area network (LAN) Ethernet (RJ-45) network port
2 SuperSpeed USB 3.0 interface port
3 SuperSpeed USB 3.0 host port (for job storage and private printing)
NOTE: This port should remain covered when not in use.
4 Power connection
Printer front view (6800 models)

Identify the parts on the front of the printer (6800 models).
Printer front view (6800 models) 5

Figure 1-5 Printer front view - dn, zf, zs, and zfsw models (6800 models)
1 2 3 4
5
6
15
7
14
8
13 9
12
10
11
Item Description
1 Automatic document feeder output tray
2 Automatic document feeder cover, for access for clearing jams
3 Automatic document feeder input tray
6 Convenience stapler
7 On/off button
10 Tray jam access doors
11 Optional Tray 4
12 Optional Tray 3
13 Tray 2
15 Output bin (multi-bin output included with the zfsw models)

Figure 1-6 Printer front view - z+ and zfw+ models
1 2 3 4 5
6
16
7
15 8
9
14
10
13
11
12
Item Description
7 On/off button
11 High-capacity input Tray 4
12 Tray 3
13 Tray 2
15 Front door (base printer)
16 Output bins on the floor-standing finisher
Printer front view (X677 models)

Locate features on the front of the printer.
Printer front view (X677 models) 7

Figure 1-7 Printer front view - dn and zs models
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
5 5
6
19
7
18 8 18 9
9
17 17 10
10
11 11
16 16
12 12
15 15
14 14
13 13
Item Description
NOTE: Not available on models that have the 3-bin stapler/stacker.
7 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) for connecting accessory and third-party devices
8 Staple access door (models with inner finisher)
9 On/off button
10 Right door, access for clearing jams
13 Optional Tray 4
14 Optional Tray 3
15 Tray 2

Item Description
18 Output bin
19 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) location for models with an inner finisher
Figure 1-8 Printer front view - z+ models

1 2 3 4 5
6
17
7
8
16
15 9
14 10
11
13
12
Item Description
7 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) for connecting accessory and third-party devices
8 On/off button
12 High-capacity input Tray 4
13 Tray 3
14 Tray 2
17 Output bins on floor-standing finisher
Printer front view (X677 models) 9

Printer back view (6800/X677 models)
Identify the parts on the back of the printer (MFP).
Figure 1-9 Printer back view, 6800/X677 models
Item Description
3 Fax models only: Telephone "line out" port (for attaching an extension phone, answering machine, or other
device)
5 Fax models only: Fax "line in" port (for attaching the fax phone line to the printer)
6 Power connection
Configuration (base printer)

Learn about the base printer configurations.

Configuration (base printer SFP)
Learn about the base printer SFP configurations.
Figure 1-10 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise 6700 printer
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise 6700
● 6700dn: 55/52 pages per minute (letter/A4)
● 6701dn: 65/61 pages per minute (letter/A4)
● FutureSmart 5 firmware
● Trusted platform module 2.0 (security)
● HP Web JetAdmin
● Automatic duplex printing
● 300-sheet standard capacity
● 850-sheet maximum capacity
● 109.2 mm (4.3 in) color touchscreen control panel
● 1.5 GB RAM memory
● 16 GB eMMC mass storage
Configuration (base printer SFP) 11

Figure 1-11 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise X654/X65455/X65465
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise X654/X65455/X65465
● Same features as the HP Color LaserJet Enterprise 6700
● Managed contractual cartridge with lowest possible cost per page
● X654dn and X65455dn: 55/52 pages per minute (letter/A4)
● X65465dn: 65/61 pages per minute (letter/A4)
● 2 GB RAM memory
● Locking tray guides
● Smart device services (SDS) firmware features
Configuration (base printer MFP)

Learn about the base printer MFP configurations.

Figure 1-12 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise 6800/6801 printer
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise 6800/6801
● 55/52 pages per minute (letter/A4)
● FutureSmart 5 firmware
● Trusted platform module 2.0 (security)
● HP Web JetAdmin
● Automatic duplex printing
● 150-sheet document feeder (duplex scanning)
● Single pass double sided scan/copy
● Fax (optional on 6800dn models; standard on all other models)
● 6800zfsw, 6801zfsw: 1,750-sheet maximum capacity
● 6800dn, 6800zf, 6800zfw+, 6801zfw+: 3,300-sheet maximum capacity
● 6800dn: 203 mm (8 in) color touchscreen control panel
● 6800zf, 6800zfsw, 6800zfw+, 6801zfsw, 6801zfw+: 256.5 mm (10.1 in) color touchscreen control panel
● 6 GB RAM memory
● 500 GB hard disk drive (HDD)
Configuration (base printer MFP) 13

Figure 1-13 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise X677/X67755/X67765 printer
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise X677/X67755/X67765
● Same features as the HP Color LaserJet Enterprise 6800
● Managed contractual cartridge with lowest possible cost per page
● X677dn, X677zs, X677z+, X67755dn, X67755zs, and X67755z+: 55/52 pages per minute (letter/A4)
● X67765dn, X67765zs, and X67765z+: 65/61 pages per minute (letter/A4)
● X677dn, X67755dn, and X67765dn: 203 mm (8 in) color touchscreen control panel
● X677zs, X677z+, X67755zs, X67755z+, X67765zs, and X67765z+: 256.5 mm (10.1 in) color touchscreen
control panel
● Fax is optional on all X677/X67755/X67765 models
● Locking tray guides
● Smart device services (SDS) firmware features
Specifications (base printer)

Learn about the base printer specifications.
Technical specifications (6700/6701 models)

Review the technical specifications for the printer.
See http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj6700 or http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj6800MFP

or http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj6801MFP or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX654 or
Product numbers for each model
● 6700dn - #6QN33A
● 6701dn - #58M42A

● 6700/6701 Configurable (can be custom-configured when ordered)
Table 1-4 Paper handling specifications
Paper handling features 6700dn 6701dn 6700/6701 Configurable
Tray 1 (100-sheet capacity)
Optional 550-sheet accessory tray Optional Optional Available option
Printer stand Optional Optional Available option
Printer stand with storage compartment Optional Optional Available option
2,100-sheet High Capacity Paper Tray/Stand Optional Optional Available option
Automatic duplex printing
Table 1-5 Connectivity specifications
Connectivity features 6700dn 6701dn 6700/6701 Configurable
10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection with IPv4

and IPv6
Dual-band Wireless
Wifi-Direct and BLE Optional Optional Available option
SuperSpeed USB 3.0 rear ports and Hi-Speed USB

2.0 front port for walk-up USB printing
Hardware integration pocket (HIP) for connecting

accessory and third-party devices
Table 1-6 Print specifications
Print features 6700dn 6701dn 6700/6701 Configurable
Prints 52 pages per minute (ppm) on A4 and 55 ppm Not included Available option on the
on letter-size paper, with a maximum of 61 ppm on 6700
A4 and 65 ppm on letter-size paper (configured at
time of purchase)
Prints 61 ppm on A4 and 65 ppm on letter-size Not included Included for the 6701
paper
Job storage and private printing
Table 1-7 Other specifications
Other features 6700dn 6701dn 6700/6701 Configurable
2 GB base memory, expandable to 6 GB
16 GB embedded Multi-Media Controller (eMMC) Available option
32 GB embedded Multi-Media Controller (eMMC) Not available Not available Available option
256 GB Solid State Drive Optional Optional Available option
Technical specifications (6700/6701 models) 15

Table 1-7 Other specifications (continued)
Other features 6700dn 6701dn 6700/6701 Configurable
512 GB FIPS Hard Disk Drive Optional Optional Available option
512 GB Hard Disk Drive Optional Optional Available option
Color touchscreen control panel
HP Trusted Platform Module for encrypting all data

that passes through the printer
Technical specifications (X654/X65455/X65465 models)


● X654dn - #6QQ00A
● X65455dn - #49L02A
● X65465dn - #49L04A
● X654 Configurable (can be custom-configured when ordered)
Paper handling features X654dn X65455dn X65465dn X654 Configurable
Optional 550-sheet accessory tray Optional Optional Optional Available option
Printer stand Optional Optional Optional Available option
Printer stand with storage compartment Optional Optional Optional Available option
2,100-sheet High Capacity Paper Tray/ Optional Optional Optional Available option
Stand
Connectivity features X654dn X65455dn X65465dn X654 Configurable
10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection

with IPv4 and IPv6
Dual-band wireless Optional Optional Optional Available option
Wifi-Direct and BLE Optional Optional Optional Available option

Table 1-9 Connectivity specifications (continued)
Connectivity features X654dn X65455dn X65465dn X654 Configurable
SuperSpeed USB 3.0 rear ports and Hi-

Speed USB 2.0 front port for walk-up USB
printing
Hardware integration pocket (HIP) for

connecting accessory and third-party
devices
Print features X654dn X65455dn X65465dn X654 Configurable
Prints 52 pages per minute (ppm) on A4 Not included Not included Available option
and 55 ppm on letter-size paper, with a
maximum of 61 ppm on A4 and 65 ppm
on letter-sized paper (configured at time of
purchase)
Prints 52 pages per minute (ppm) on A4 Not included Not included Not applicable
and 55 ppm on letter-size paper
Prints 61 ppm on A4 and 65 ppm on letter- Not included Not included Not applicable
sized paper
Other features X654dn X65455dn X65465dn X654 Configurable
2 GB base memory, expandable to 6 GB
16 GB embedded Multi-Media Controller Available option

(eMMC)
32 GB embedded Multi-Media Controller Not available Not available Not available Available option
(eMMC)
256 GB Solid State Drive Optional Optional Optional Available option
512 GB FIPS Hard Disk Drive Optional Optional Optional Available option
512 GB Hard Disk Drive Optional Optional Optional Available option
Color touchscreen control panel
HP Trusted Platform Module for encrypting

all data that passes through the printer
Custom color printer skins Not available Not available Not available Available option
Technical specifications (6800/6801 models)

● 6800dn - #6QN35A

● 6800zf - #6QN36A
● 6800zfsw - #6QN37A
● 6800zfw+ - #6QN38A
● 6801zfsw - #76H10A
● 6801zfw+ - #76H11A
● 6800/6801 Configurable (can be custom-configured when ordered)
Paper handling features 6800dn 6800zf 6800zfsw 6800zfw+ 6801zfsw 6801zfw+ 6800
Configurable
Optional 550-sheet Optional Optional Available

accessory tray (2) (2) option
Printer stand Optional Optional Not Not Available

available available option
Printer stand with storage Optional Optional Not Not Not Not Available
compartment available available available available option
2,100-sheet High Capacity Optional Optional Not Not Available

Paper Tray/Stand available available option
Convenience stapler Optional Optional Available

option
3-bin Stapler/stacker Not Not Not Not Available

available available available available option
Floor-standing finisher with Not Not Not Not Available

edge stapling and hole available available available available option
punch
Connectivity features 6800dn 6800zf 6800zfsw 6800zfw+ 6801zfsw 6801zfw+ 6800

Configurable
10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN

connection with IPv4 and
IPv6
Dual-band wireless Optional Optional Available

option
Wifi-Direct and BLE Optional Optional Available

option
SuperSpeed USB 3.0 rear

ports and Hi-Speed USB 2.0
front port for walk-up USB
printing

Table 1-13 Connectivity specifications (continued)
Connectivity features 6800dn 6800zf 6800zfsw 6800zfw+ 6801zfsw 6801zfw+ 6800

Configurable
Hardware integration
pocket (HIP) for connecting
accessory and third-party
devices
Print features 6800dn 6800zf 6800zfsw 6800zfw+ 6801zfsw 6801zfw+ 6800

Configurable
Prints up to 52 pages per

minute (ppm) on A4 and 55
ppm on letter-sized paper,
with a maximum of 61 ppm
on A4 and 65 ppm on letter-
sized paper (configured at
time of purchase)
Job storage and private

printing
Table 1-15 Copy and scan specifications
Copy and scan features 6800dn 6800zf 6800zfsw 6800zfw+ 6801zfsw 6801zfw+ 6800
Configurable
ADF copy/scan speed 160 Not included Not included Not included Not included Not included Available
images-per-minute (ipm) option
single-sided, and 80 ipm
double-sided
ADF copy/scan speed 220 Not included Available

ipm single-sided, and 110 option
ipm double-sided
150-page document feeder

with dual-head scanning for
single-pass duplex copying
and scanning
Scan to E-mail, Scan to

USB, and Scan to Network
Folder options
Other features 6800dn 6800zf 6800zfsw 6800zfw+ 6801zfsw 6801zfw+ 6800

Configurable
6 GB base memory
500 GB Hard Disk Drive Available

option
256 GB Solid-state drive Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Available
option

Other features 6800dn 6800zf 6800zfsw 6800zfw+ 6801zfsw 6801zfw+ 6800

Configurable
512 GB FIPS Hard Disk Drive Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Available
option
32 GB embedded Multi- Not Not Not Not Not Not Available

Media Controller (eMMC) available available available available available available option
Small color touchscreen Not included Not included Not included Not included Not included Available
control panel option
Large color touchscreen Not included Available

control panel option
Fax features Optional Available

option
HP Trusted Platform
Module for encrypting all
data that passes through
the printer
Technical specifications (X677/X67755/X67765 models)

● X677dn - #6QQ01A
● X677zs - #6QQ02A
● X677z+ - #6QQ03A
● X67755dn - #49K86A
● X67755zs - #49K87A
● X67755z+ - #49K88A
● X67765dn - #49K90A
● X67765zs - #49K91A
● X67765z+ - #49K92A
● X677 Configurable (can be custom-configured when ordered)
Paper handling features X677dn X677zs X677z+ X67755dn X67755zs X67755z+ X677
Configurable
X67765dn X67765zs X67765z+
Optional 550-sheet Optional (2) Optional Available

accessory tray (2) (2) option

Table 1-17 Paper handling specifications (continued)
Paper handling features X677dn X677zs X677z+ X67755dn X67755zs X67755z+ X677
Configurable
X67765dn X67765zs X67765z+
Printer stand Optional Not Optional Not Available

available available option
Printer stand with storage Optional Not Not Optional Not Not Available
compartment available available available available option
2,100-sheet High Capacity Optional Not Optional Not Available

Paper Tray/Stand available available option
Convenience stapler Optional Optional Available

option
3-bin Stapler/stacker Not Not Not Not Available

available available available available option
Floor-standing finisher with Not Not Not Not Available

edge stapling and hole available available available available option
punch
Connectivity features X677dn X677zs X677z+ X677 Configurable
X67755dn X67755zs X67755z+
X67765dn X67765zs X67765z+
10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection

with IPv4 and IPv6
Dual-band wireless Optional Optional Optional Available option
Wifi-Direct and BLE Optional Optional Optional Available option
SuperSpeed USB 3.0 rear ports and Hi-

Speed USB 2.0 front port for walk-up USB
printing
Hardware integration pocket (HIP) for

connecting accessory and third-party
devices
X677zs X67755zs X67765zs
X677z+ X67755z+ X67765z+
Prints up to 52 pages per minute (ppm) on Not included Not included Available option
A4 and 55 ppm on letter-sized paper, with
a maximum of 61 ppm on A4 and 65 ppm
on letter-sized paper (configured at time of
purchase)
Technical specifications (X677/X67755/X67765 models) 21

Table 1-19 Print specifications (continued)
X677zs X67755zs X67765zs
X677z+ X67755z+ X67765z+
A4 and 55 ppm on letter-sized paper
A4 and 65 ppm on letter-sized paper
Inline scan bar analyzes output for print Included on z+ Included on z+ Included on z+ Available option
quality issues models models models
Table 1-20 Copy and scan specifications
Copy and scan features X677dn X677zs X677z+ X677 Configurable
X67755dn X67755zs X67755z+
X67765dn X67765zs X67765z+
ADF copy/scan speed 160 images-per- Not included Not included Available option
minute (ipm) single-sided, and 80 ipm
double-sided
ADF copy/scan speed 220 ipm single-sided, Not included Available option
and 110 ipm double-sided
150-page document feeder with dual-head

scanning for single-pass duplex copying
and scanning
Scan to E-mail, Scan to USB, and Scan to

Network Folder options
Other features X677dn X677zs X677z+ X677 Configurable
X67755dn X67755zs X67755z+
X67765dn X67765zs X67765z+
6 GB base memory
500 GB Hard Disk Drive Available option
256 GB Solid-state drive Optional Optional Optional Available option
512 GB FIPS Hard Disk Drive Optional Optional Optional Available option
32 GB embedded Multi-Media Controller Not available Not available Not available Available option
(eMMC)
Small color touchscreen control panel Not included Not included Available option
Large color touchscreen control panel Not included Available option
Fax features Optional Optional Optional Available option

Other features X677dn X677zs X677z+ X677 Configurable
X67755dn X67755zs X67755z+
X67765dn X67765zs X67765z+
HP Trusted Platform Module for encrypting

all data that passes through the printer
Custom color printer skins Not available Not available Not available Available option
Printer dimensions
Make sure your printer environment is large enough to accommodate the printer.
Figure 1-14 Printer dimensions
1 1
2 2
3
3
Table 1-22 Dimensions for the printer
Measurement Printer fully closed Printer fully opened
1. Width 500 mm (19.7 in) 860 mm (33.8 in)
2. Height 417 mm (16.4 in) 417 mm (16.4 in)
3. Depth 460 mm (18.1 in) 770 mm (30.3 in)
Weight (with cartridges) 29.03 kg (64 lb) 29.03 kg (64 lb)
Printer dimensions
Printer dimensions 23
Figure 1-15 Printer dimensions
1 1
2 2
3
3
Table 1-23 Dimensions for the printer
1. Width 500 mm (19.7 in) 860 mm (33.8 in)
2. Height 417 mm (16.4 in) 417 mm (16.4 in)
3. Depth 460 mm (18.1 in) 770 mm (30.3 in)
Printer dimensions

Figure 1-16 Printer dimensions (dn and zf models)
2
2
Table 1-24 Dimensions for the printer (dn and zf models)
1. Width 500 mm (19.6 in) 860 mm (33.8 in)
2. Height 657 mm (25.8 in) 912 mm (36 in)
3. Depth 460 mm (18.1 in) 770 mm (30.3 in)
Figure 1-17 Printer dimensions (zfsw models)
3
3
Table 1-25 Dimensions for the printer (zfsw models)
1. Width 520 mm (20.5 in) 860 mm (33.8 in)
2. Height 1155 mm (45.5 in) 1410 mm (55.5 in)
3. Depth 528 mm (20.8 in) 838 mm (33 in)
Weight (with cartridges) 79.45 kg (175.16 lb) 79.45 kg (175.16 lb)

Figure 1-18 Printer dimensions (zfw+ models)
1
2
2
3
3
Table 1-26 Dimensions for the printer (zfw+ models)
1. Width 1228 mm (48.3 in) 1588 mm (62.5 in)
2. Height 1270 mm (50 in) 1393 mm (54.8 in)
3. Depth 520 mm (20.5 in) 905 mm (35.6 in)
Weight (with cartridges) 84.45 kg (186.2 lb) 84.45 kg (186.2 lb)
Printer dimensions
Figure 1-19 Printer dimensions (dn, s, and z models)
3
3
Table 1-27 Dimensions for the printer (dn, s, and z models)
1. Width 500 mm (19.6 in) 860 mm (33.8 in)
2. Height 777 mm (30.6 in) 1032 mm (40.6 in)
3. Depth 460 mm (18.1 in) 770 mm (30.3 in)
Weight (with cartridges) 54 kg (119 lb) 54 kg (119 lb)

Figure 1-20 Printer dimensions (zs models)
3
3
Table 1-28 Dimensions for the printer (zs models)
1. Width 520 mm (20.5 in) 860 mm (33.8 in)
2. Height 1275 mm (50.2 in) 1530 mm (60.2 in)
3. Depth 528 mm (20.8 in) 838 mm (33 in)
Weight (with cartridges) 80 kg (176.4 lb) 80 kg (176.4 lb)
Figure 1-21 Printer dimensions (z+ models)
1
1
2
2
3
3
Table 1-29 Dimensions for the printer (z+ models)
1. Width 1228 mm (48.3 in) 1588 mm (62.5 in)
2. Height 1258 mm (49.5 in) 1513 mm (59.5 in)
3. Depth 528 mm (20.8 in) 913 mm (36 in)
Weight (with cartridges) 85 kg (187.4 lb) 85 kg (187.4 lb)
Printer space requirements

Learn about the printer space requirements
HP recommends that 30 mm ( (1.81 in)) be added to the printer dimensions to make sure there is sufficient
space to open doors and covers, and to provide proper ventilation. See the printer dimensions sections in this
manual.
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions

In order to operate properly, the printer must be in an environment that meets certain power specifications.

CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the printer is sold. Do not convert
operating voltages. This will damage the printer and void the printer warranty.
Operating-environment range
In order to operate properly, the printer must be in an environment that meets certain specifications.

Table 1-30 Operating-environment specifications
Environment Recommended Storage
Temperature 15° to 27°C (59° to 80.6°F) 10° to 32.5°C (50° to 90.5°F)
Relative humidity 30% to 70% relative humidity (RH) 10% to 80% RH
Information (input devices)

Learn about the printer input devices.
550-sheet paper feeder front view

Identify the parts on the 550-sheet paper feeder.
Figure 1-22 550-sheet paper feeder front view

1
2
3
5 4
Number Description
1 Connector
2 Lock
3 Right door (for access to tray rollers and jams)
4 Tray cassette
5 Left cover
6 Lock lever
Table 1-31 550-sheet paper feeder technical specifications
Feature Specification
Media types Plain paper, recycled paper, heavy paper, bond paper, glossy paper, label, and index card
Media sizes Standard: A5-R, B5, A4, Letter, and Legal
Custom minimum: 101.6 mm (4 in) (W) x 148 mm (5.8 in) (L)
Custom maximum: 215.9 mm (8.5 in) (W) x 355.6 mm (14 in) (L)
Media weights Non-glossy paper: 60 g/m2 (16 lb) to 163 g/m2 (43 lb)
Glossy paper: 120 g/m2 (32 lb) to 200 g/m2 (53 lb)
Capacity 55 mm (2.2 in) stack (approximately 550 sheets of 75g/m2 (20 lb) paper)
Information (input devices) 31

Table 1-31 550-sheet paper feeder technical specifications (continued)
Dimensions Width: 500 mm (19.7 in)
Depth: 460 mm (18.1 in)
Height: 120 mm (4.7 in)
Weight Approximately 6.2 kg (13.7 lb)
Power requirements DC24V, DC3.3V (supplied from the printer engine)
High capacity input (HCI) paper feeder front view

Identify the parts on the HCI paper feeder.
Figure 1-23 HCI paper feeder front view

1
5 2
Number Description
1 Connector
2 Lock
3 Right door
4 HCI cassette
5 Lock lever
Table 1-32 HCI paper feeder technical specifications
Media types Plain paper, recycled paper, heavy paper, and bond paper
Media sizes A4, Letter, and Legal
Media weights 60 g/m2 (16 lb) to 163 g/m2 (43 lb)
Capacity 210 mm (8.3 in) stack (approximately 2,100 sheets of 75g/m2 (20 lb) paper)

Table 1-32 HCI paper feeder technical specifications (continued)
Depth: 520 mm (20.5 in)
Information (output devices)

Learn about the printer output devices.
3-bin stapler-stacker front view

Identify the parts on the 3-bin stapler-stacker output device.
Figure 1-24 3-bin stapler-stacker front view
1
3
Number Description
1 Stapler-stacker door
2 Staple door
3 Output bin 2
4 Output bin 1
5 Jogger guide
Table 1-33 3-bin stapler-stacker technical specifications
Media types Plain paper, recycled paper, heavy paper, bond paper, and glossy paper
Information (output devices) 33

Table 1-33 3-bin stapler-stacker technical specifications (continued)
Media sizes, output bin 1 Stack mode: 148 mm (5.8 in) (W) x 210 mm (8.3 in) (L) to 216 mm (8.5 in) (W) x 355 mm
(14 in) (L)
Staple mode/job offset mode: A4, Letter, and Legal
(14 in) (L)
Media weights, output bin 1 Stack mode/job offset mode, non-glossy paper: 60 g/m2 (16 lb) to 163 g/m2 (43 lb)
Stack mode/job offset mode, glossy paper: 120 g/m2 (32 lb) to 200 g/m2 (53 lb)
Staple mode, non-glossy paper: 60 g/m2 (16 lb) to 120 g/m2 (32 lb)
Staple mode, glossy paper: 120 g/m2 (32 lb)
Media weights, output bin 2 Stack mode, non-glossy paper: 60 g/m2 (16 lb) to 163 g/m2 (43 lb)
Stack mode, glossy paper: 120 g/m2 (32 lb) to 200 g/m2 (53 lb)
Capacity, output bin 1 Stack mode/job offset mode: 48 mm (1.9 in) stack (approximately 400 sheets of 75 g/m2
(20 lb) paper)
Staple mode: 48 mm (1.9 in) stack (approximately 6 sets of 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb)
paper)
Capacity, output bin 2 Stack mode: 19 mm (0.75 in) stack (approximately 100 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper)
Capacity, staple cartridge 5,000 staples/cartridge
Capacity, stapler Up to 50 sheets (60 g/m2 (16 lb) to 120 g/m2 (32 lb) paper)
Stapling position Upper left corner at one point
Depth: 475 mm (18.7 in)
Height: 280 mm (11 in)
Floor-standing stapler-stacker front view

Identify the parts on the floor-standing stapler-stacker output device.

Figure 1-25 Floor-standing stapler-stacker front view
5
1
3
Number Description
1 Connector
2 Front door
3 Output bin 4
4 Output bin 3
5 Output bin 2
Table 1-34 Floor-standing stapler=stacker technical specifications
Media types, output bin 1 Plain paper, recycled paper, heavy paper, bond paper, glossy paper, label, and index card
Media types, output bins 2 and 4 Plain paper, recycled paper, heavy paper, bond paper, and glossy paper
Media types, output bin 3 Plain paper, recycled paper, heavy paper, bond paper, glossy paper, and index card
Media sizes, output bin 1 Stack mode: 76 mm (3 in) (W) x 127 mm (5 in) (L) to 216 mm (8.5 in) (W) x 355 mm (14 in)
(L)
Floor-standing stapler-stacker front view 35

Table 1-34 Floor-standing stapler=stacker technical specifications (continued)
(14 in) (L)
Punch mode: A5-R, B5, A4, Executive, Letter, and Legal
Media sizes, output bin 3 Stack mode: 101 mm (4 in) (W) x 152 mm (6 in) (L) to 216 mm (8.5 in) (W) x 355 mm (14
in) (L)
Job offset mode: A5-R, B5, A4, Executive, Letter, and Legal
(14 in) (L)
Job offset mode: A5-R, B5, A4, Executive, Letter, and Legal
Staple mode: A5-R, B5, A4, Executive, Letter, and Legal
Media weights, output bin 1 Stack mode: 60 g/m2 (16 lb) to 216 g/m2 (80 lb)
Media weights, output bin 2 Stack mode, non-glossy paper: 60 g/m2 (16 lb) to 163 g/m2 (43 lb)
Stack mode, glossy paper: 120 g/m2 (32 lb) to 200 g/m2 (53 lb)
Punch mode: 60 g/m2 (16 lb) to 163 g/m2 (43 lb)
Media weights, output bin 3 Stack mode/job offset mode: 60 g/m2 (16 lb) to 216 g/m2 (80 lb)
Media weights, output bin 4 Stack mode/job offset mode: 60 g/m2 (16 lb) to 216 g/m2 (80 lb)
Staple mode, non-glossy paper: 60 g/m2 (16 lb) to 163 g/m2 (43 lb)
Staple mode, glossy paper: 120 g/m2 (32 lb)
Capacity, output bin 3 Stack mode/job offset mode: 131 mm (5.2 in) stack (approximately 1,100 sheets of 75
g/m2 (20 lb) paper)
Capacity, output bin 4 Stack mode/job offset mode: 210 mm (8.3 in) stack (approximately 1,900 sheets of
75g/m2 (20 lb) paper)
Staple mode: 210 mm (8.3 in) stack (approximately 36 sets of 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20
lb) paper)
Capacity, staple cartridge 5,000 staples/cartridge
Capacity, stapler Up to 50 sheets (60 g/m2 (16 lb) to 120 g/m2 (32 lb) paper)
Stapling position Square binding: binding in one place (upper left, lower left, upper right, lower right)
Edge binding: 2-place binding (left edge, right edge), 3-place binding (left edge, right
edge)

Table 1-34 Floor-standing stapler=stacker technical specifications (continued)
Dimensions, standard model Width: 655 mm (25.75 in)
Depth: 503 mm (19.8 in)
Height: 1,140 mm (44.9 in)
Dimensions, tall model Width: 655 mm (25.75 in)
Depth: 503 mm (19.8 in)
Height: 1,260 mm (49.6 in)
Weight Standard model: Approximately 38.3 kg (84.4 lb)
Tall model: Approximately 41.6 kg (91.7 lb)
110 - 127V 50/60Hz (supplied from the printer engine)
Intermediate paper transfer unit (IPTU) front view

Identify the parts on the IPTU output device.
Figure 1-26 IPTU front view

2
Number Description
1 Connector
2 Output bin
Table 1-35 IPTU technical specifications
Depth: 380 mm (15 in)
Weight Approximately 3 kg (6.6 lb)
Intermediate paper transfer unit (IPTU) front view 37

Table 1-35 IPTU technical specifications (continued)

2 Printer installation and maintenance
Learn about printer installation and maintenance.

Learn about the printer document feeder and scanner installation and maintenance.
Clean the pickup rollers and separation pad in the document feeder (MFP)
Learn about cleaning the document feeder rollers and pads.
Over time, specks of debris might collect on the document feeder rollers and pads which can affect
performance.
NOTE: The figures in this topic show a typical MFP printer. However, the procedure is correct for all MFP
printers.
1. Open the document-feeder cover. Figure 2-1 Open the document-feeder cover
Printer installation and maintenance 39

2. Remove any visible lint or dust from each of Figure 2-2 Clean the document feeder rollers
the feed rollers and the separation pad using
compressed air or a clean lint-free cloth moistened
with warm water. Carefully rotate the roller as you
clean it.
3. Close the document-feeder cover.
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges

Learn about solving copy-quality debris problems.
Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and document feeder white plastic backing,
which might cause print defects. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner if the printed pages have
streaks, unwanted lines, black dots, poor print quality, or unclear text.
View a video of cleaning the document feeder glass and flatbed glass.
1. Press the power button to turn the printer off, and then disconnect the power cable from the electrical
outlet.
2. Open the scanner lid.
40 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

3. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) and the document feeder strips (callout 2, callout 3) with a soft cloth
or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner.
CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride on
any part of the printer; these can damage the printer. Do not place liquids directly on the glass or platen.
They might seep and damage the printer.
NOTE: If you are having trouble with streaks on copies when you are using the document feeder, be
sure to clean the small strips of glass on the left side of the scanner (callout 2, callout 3).
4. Dry the glass and white plastic parts with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.
5. Close the scanner lid.
Figure 2-3 Close the scanner lid
6. Connect the power cable to an outlet, and then press the power button to turn the printer on.
Base printer
Learn about the base printer installation and maintenance.
Base printer 41
Remove and replace the toner cartridges (6700/6800 models)
Follow these steps to replace the toner cartridge.
View a video of how to replace the toner cartridges
1. Open the front door.
2. Grasp the end of the toner cartridge and pull it

straight out of the printer.
3. Remove the new toner cartridge from its package.

Save all packaging for recycling the used toner
cartridge.
4. Hold both ends of the toner cartridge and rock it

back and forth end to end to evenly distribute the
toner that is inside.

5. Align the toner cartridge with its slot and insert it
into the printer.
6. Close the front door.
7. Pack the used toner cartridge into the box that

the new toner cartridge came in. See the enclosed
recycling guide for information about recycling.
In the U.S. and Canada, a pre-paid shipping label
is included in the box. In other countries/regions,
go to www.hp.com/recycle to print a pre-paid
shipping label.
Adhere the pre-paid shipping label to the box, and
return the used cartridge to HP for recycling.
Remove and replace the toner cartridges (X654/X677 models)

Follow these steps to replace the toner cartridge.
View a video of how to replace the toner cartridges
1. Release the toner cartridge by following the

instructions on the control panel.
2. Open the toner cartridge door on the front of the
printer.
Remove and replace the toner cartridges (X654/X677 models) 43


cartridge.
5. Hold both ends of the toner cartridge and rock it to

evenly distribute the toner that is inside.

into the printer.

7. Close the toner cartridge door.

shipping label.
Remove and replace the imaging drums (X654/X677 models)

Follow these steps to replace the imaging drums.
View a video of how to replace the imaging drums
NOTE: If necessary, remove two screws holding the

imaging drum access cover in place, and then lower the
cover to access the imaging drums. See the figure below.
Remove and replace the imaging drums (X654/X677 models) 45

Figure 2-4 Remove two screws, open the cover
2. Grasp the end of the imaging drum and pull it

3. Remove the new imaging drum from its package.

Save all packaging for recycling the used imaging
drum.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the imaging

drum, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the imaging drum if it must be
removed from the printer for an extended period
of time. Do not touch the blue imaging drum.
4. Hold both ends of the imaging drum and rock it


5. Align the imaging drum with its slot and insert it
into the printer.
NOTE: If necessary, close the imaging drum access

cover, and then install the two screws to secure the
cover. See the figure below.
Figure 2-5 Close the cover, install two screws
7. Pack the used imaging drum into the box that

the new imaging drum came in. See the enclosed
shipping label.
return the used imaging drum to HP for recycling.
Remove and replace the imaging drums (X654/X677 models) 47

Clean the Tray 1 pickup and separation rollers
Learn about cleaning the Tray 1 pickup and separation rollers.
1. Open Tray 1.
Figure 2-6 Open Tray 1
2. Locate and release the blue pickup roller assembly release tab (callout 1).
Figure 2-7 Locate the pickup roller assembly tab
3. Push the pickup roller assembly to the right and then away from the printer.
Figure 2-8 Remove the pickup roller assembly

4. Grasp the left- and right-side of the separation roller assembly, and then lift the assembly up.
Figure 2-9 Lift the separation roller assembly
5. Pull the separation roller assembly straight out to remove it.
Figure 2-10 Remove the separation roller assembly
6. Clean the Tray 1 pickup and separation rollers. Use a damp, lint-free cloth to gently clean the rollers.
CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy portion of the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause paper-
handling and print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves or thoroughly washing
your hands before handling the assembly.
Clean the Tray 1 pickup and separation rollers 49

7. Insert the separation roller assembly into the printer.
Figure 2-11 Insert the separation roller assembly
8. Push down on the Tray 1 separation roller until it snaps into place.
Figure 2-12 Secure the separation roller assembly
9. Insert the keyed right end of the pickup roller assembly into the provided slot, and then rotate the left
end into place to install it.
Figure 2-13 Install the pickup roller assembly

Clean the Tray 2 pickup and separation rollers
Learn about cleaning the Tray 2 rollers.
1. Depending on the printer model, perform one of the following steps.
● 6700/6800 models: Open the right door.
● X654/X677 models: Open the lower right door.
2. Slide the blue lever (callout 1) to the right, and then remove the separation roller assembly (callout 2) by
pulling it out from the printer.
3. Locate the pickup roller assembly, and then pull it away from the printer to remove it.
NOTE: As the roller assembly can be hard to grip, you might need to reach under and behind the rollers
to securely grip it.
CAUTION: Skin oils on the roller can cause paper-handling and print-quality problems. HP recommends
using disposable gloves or thoroughly washing your hands before handling the assembly.
4. Clean the Tray 2 pickup and separation rollers. Use a damp, lint-free cloth to gently clean the rollers.
Clean the Tray 2 pickup and separation rollers 51

5. Position the pickup roller assembly in the printer in the correct orientation, and then press the assembly
into place.
6. Insert the separation roller assembly into the printer to install it.
Figure 2-17 Install the separation roller assembly

3 Theory of operation
Learn about the printer theory of operation.

Learn about the printer document feeder and scanner components.
Document feeder simplex operation

Learn about document feeder operation.
The document feeder will not function when the document feeder cover is open. The paper path is incomplete
if the document feeder cover is lifted from the glass.
When the printer duplex scans from the document feeder, the paper moves through one time, because the
document feeder has a contact image sensor (CIS) scanner for side two which is scanned simultaneously with
side one.
NOTE: Duplex scanning is model specific. Some printer models might not support duplex scanning and
printing.
The standard operation of the document feeder consists of the standby (paper loading) mode, pick, feed, and
lift steps:
● Standby (paper-loading) mode
In standby mode, the lift plate is in the down position. When a document is loaded into the input tray, the
paper-present sensor detects its presence.
When a copy/scan is initiated, the document feeder motor engages the gear train and raises the lift plate
until the document makes contact with the pick roller. The document feeder then begins the pick, feed,
and lower sequence.
● Pick
The pick roller rotates and moves one or more sheets forward into the document feeder where the sheets
engage with the separation roller. The separation roller contacts the document feeder separation pad,
which separates multiple sheets into a single sheet.
● Feed
Theory of operation 53
The single sheet continues through the document feeder paper path (aided by the pre-scan rollers) until
the leading edge of the page activates the top-of-form sensor. Activation of this sensor initiates the scan
process, and the scanner acquires the image as the document moves over the document feeder glass.
The post-scan rollers then eject the sheet into the output area. The pick and feed steps are repeated as
long as paper is detected by the paper-present sensor.
● Home
When the top-of-form sensor detects the trailing edge of the last page, the last sheet is ejected and the
motor turns on a sequence that rests the separation floor back down in standby mode, which allows it to
detect when more media is loaded.
Scanning and image capture system

Learn about the scanning and image capture system.
The flatbed image scanner captures an electronic image of the document on the glass. The scanner does this
by illuminating the document with LEDs (red, green, and blue) and capturing the image in the image sensor to
create an electronic format of the document. The flatbed scanner consists of three main elements.
● CIS scanner
The CIS (contact image sensor) scanner captures an image using the printer's optical path. Red, green,
and blue LEDs sequentially illuminate a small strip of the document (often called a raster line), and
the optical system captures each color in a single row of CCD sensors that cover the entire page
width. Because only one color is captured for each line per exposure, the three colors are recombined
electronically to create the full color image. For monochromatic scans or copies, all three LEDs are
illuminated to create a white light for the scan so the raster line can be captured in one exposure.
● Mechanical drive system
The drive system moves the CIS scanner along the document length to create the image. In this printer,
the drive system consists of a small DC motor with an optical encoder, a drive belt, and a guide rod. The
speed of the drive system is proportional to the scan resolution (300 ppi is much faster than 1200 ppi)
and also proportional to the type of scan (color scans are slower than monochromatic scans).
● Image processing system (formatter)
The formatter processes the scanner data into either a copy or a scan to the computer. For copies, the
image data is sent directly to the printer without being transmitted to the computer. Depending on user
selections for the copy settings, the formatter enhances the scanner data significantly before sending
it to the printer. Image data is captured at 300 ppi for copies and is user selectable for scans to the
computer. Each pixel is represented by 8 bits for each of the three colors (256 levels for each color), for a
total of 24 bits per pixel (24-bit color).
Base printer
Learn about the base printer components.
Basic operation
Learn about the basic operation of the printer.
The printer routes all high-level processes through the formatter, which stores font information, processes
the print image, and communicates with the host computer.
54 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

The basic printer operation comprises the following systems:
● Engine-control system
● Laser/scanner system
● Image-formation system
● Pickup, feed and delivery system
● Accessory (optional paper feeders)
● Integrated scanner assembly (document feeder and sub-scanner assembly) (not shown)
Figure 3-1 Relationship between the main printer systems
Sequence of operation
Learn about the printer sequence of operation.
The DC controller PCA controls the operating sequence, as described in the following table.
Table 3-1 Sequence of operation
Period Duration Description
Waiting From the time the power is turned on, the door is ● Heats the fuser roller in the fuser
closed, or when the printer exits sleep mode until the
printer is ready for printing. ● Pressurizes the fuser film
● Detects the toner cartridges
● Separates all of the developing rollers from the

photosensitive drums in the toner cartridges
● Rotates and stops each motor
● Cleans the intermediate transfer belt (ITB) and

secondary transfer roller
● Detects cable breakage on the thermistor
● Rotates and stops each fan
● Detects any residual paper in the engine
Sequence of operation 55
Table 3-1 Sequence of operation (continued)
Period Duration Description
Standby From the end of the waiting sequence, the last ● Is in the Ready state
rotation until the formatter receives a print command,
or until the printer is turned off. ● Enters Sleep mode if the formatter sends the
sleep command
● The printer calibrates if it is time for an

automatic calibration
Initial rotation From the time the formatter receives a print command ● Rotates each motor
until the paper enters the paper path.
● Rotates each fan
● Activates the high-voltage power supply
● Prepares the laser/scanner unit
● Warms the fuser to the correct temperature
Printing From the time the first sheet of paper enters the paper ● Forms the image on the photosensitive drums
path until the last sheet has passed through the fuser.
● Transfers the toner to the paper
● Fuses the toner image onto the paper
Last rotation From the time the last sheet of paper exits the fuser ● Moves the last printed sheet into the output bin
until the motors stop rotating.
● Stops each motor
● Stops the high-voltage power supply
● Stops the laser/scanner unit
● Turns the fuser heater off
● Cleans the ITB and secondary transfer roller
● If another print command is received, the printer

enters the initial rotation period when the last
rotation is complete.
Formatter-control system
Learn about how the formatter operates.
CAUTION: Under NO circumstances should a formatter from a different printer be installed during the repair
or troubleshooting processes. The formatter stores important data specific to the model of printer it is
installed in and is not deigned to be swapped or repurposed in any way. Return a used formatter to HP.
Issues that can occur from swapping a formatter include:
● Serial number, product number, product name, page count, and supported cartridges information
change and might make a product unusable
● 33.02.01 Used board/Disk installed errors
If a used formatter is installed and causes this issue, the partner must cover the costs of the repair in the
form of a product replacement. There is no method in the field to recover a printer where a used formatter is
installed.
IMPORTANT: When a formatter PCA or DC controller is replaced a pairing operation must be completed to
make the printer functional.

The formatter performs the following functions:
● Controls the sleep delay function
● Receives and processes print data from the various printer inputs
● Monitors control panel functions and relaying printer status information through the control panel and
the network or bi-directional interface
● Develops and coordinates data placement and timing with the DC controller PCA
● Stores customer configuration settings and paper types.
● Stores font information
● Communicates with the host computer through the network or the bidirectional interface
The formatter receives a print job from the network or bidirectional interface and separates it into image
information and instructions that control the printing process. The DC controller PCA synchronizes the image
formation system with the paper input and output systems, and then signals the formatter to send the print
image data.
Power management
Learn about printer power management.
Power management conserves power after the printer has been idle for an adjustable length of time.
When the printer is in sleep mode, the control-panel back-light is turned off, but the printer retains all
printer settings, downloaded fonts, and macros. Power management can be modified or turned off from the
control-panel menus.
The printer exits sleep mode and enters the warm-up cycle when any of the following occurs.
● A print job, valid data, or a PML or PJL command is received at the serial port.
● A print job or fax (fax models) is received.
● The control panel is touched (button press or touchscreen touch depending on model).
● A document is loaded in the document feeder (MFP only).
● Opening the scanner lid (model dependent).
● The power button is pressed for 3 seconds or less.
● Connecting an operational live network Ethernet cable or fax line (fax models).
● Inserting a USB drive in either the front USB port or the USB port on the back of the device.
● Connecting a USB cable to an operating computer.
● Opening the cartridge, front, or rear door (model dependent).
NOTE: Opening a paper tray does not wake up the printer.
TIP: Error messages override the sleep delay message. The printer enters sleep mode at the selected time,
but the error message continues to appear.
Power management 57
Set the sleep timer and configure the printer to use 1 watt or less of power
The sleep settings affect how much power the printer uses, the wake/sleep time, how quickly the printer
enters sleep mode, and how quickly the printer wakes up from sleep mode.
To configure the printer to use 1 watt or less of power while in sleep mode, enter the time for the Sleep after
Inactivity setting.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Settings.
2. Open the following menus:
● General
● Energy Settings
● Sleep Settings
3. Select Sleep after Inactivity to specify the number of minutes the printer is inactive before it enters sleep
mode. Enter the appropriate time period.
4. Select Done to save the settings.
Set the sleep schedule

Use the Sleep Schedule feature to configure the printer to automatically wake or go into Sleep mode at
specific times on specific days of the week.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select
the Settings icon.
a. General
b. Energy Settings
c. Sleep Schedule
3. Select the New Event button, and then select the type of event to schedule: Wake Event or Sleep Event.
4. For a wake or sleep event, configure the time and the days of the week for the event. Select Save to save
the setting.
Printer job language (PJL)

Learn about printer job language (PJL).
PJL is an integral part of printer configuration, in addition to the standard PCL and PostScript (PS). With
standard cabling, the printer can use PJL to perform a variety of functions.
● Dynamic I/O switching: The printer can be configured with a host on each I/O by using dynamic I/O
switching. Even when the printer is offline, it can receive data from more than one I/O simultaneously,
until the I/O buffer is full.
● Context-sensitive switching: The printer can automatically recognize the personality (PS or PCL) of each
job and configure itself to serve that personality.
● Isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the next: For example, if a print job is sent to
the printer in landscape mode, the subsequent print jobs print in landscape only if they are formatted for
landscape printing.

Control panel
Learn about the control panel.
The formatter sends and receives printer status and command data to and from the control panel.
Walk-up USB
Learn about the walk-up USB function.
NOTE: Touchscreen models only.
This printer features printing from a USB flash drive. This printer supports printing the following types of files
from the USB flash drive.
● .pdf
● .jpg
● .prn and .PRN
● .pcl and .PCL
● ps and .PS
● doc and .docx
● .ppt and .pptx
When a USB flash drive is inserted into the front of the printer, the control panel will display the USB Flash
Drive menu. The files present on the USB flash drive can be accessed from the control panel.
NOTE: The USB flash drive must be formatted using the FAT32 format. Drives formatted with NTFS will not
work.
Any files in a supported format on the USB flash drive can be printed directly from the printer control panel.
Pages also can be scanned and saved to the USB flash drive from the control panel.
Low end data model (LEDM) overview

Learn about the low-end data model (LEDM).
The low-end data model (LEDM) provides one consistent data representation method and defines the dynamic
and capabilities tickets shared between clients and devices, as well as the access protocol, event, security, and
discovery methods.
CPU
Learn about the printer microprocessor.
The formatter incorporates a 1200 MHz processor.
Input/output (I/O)
Learn about printer I/O functionality.
NOTE: Some of the following printer I/O functions are model specific. For example, not all printer models
have a fax function.
Control panel 59
Walk-up USB
The printer includes a Hi-Speed USB 2.0 front port for walkup USB printing.
Universal serial bus (USB) hosts
The printer includes SuperSpeed USB 3.0 rear hosts for USB flash drive and job storage.
10/100/1000 networking
The printer includes a 10/100/1000 network (Ethernet) connection.
Fax
The printer includes a fax phone line connection.
NOTE: Fax models only. For some fax model printers, the telephone extension port is plugged and not
operational.
Wireless
Wireless products contain a wireless card to enable 802.11b/g/n wireless communication with dual band
support for 2.4Ghz and 5 Ghz.
NOTE: Wireless models only.
Memory
Learn about printer memory functionality.
NOTE: Some of the following printer memory functions are model specific. For example, not all printer
models have Flash memory.
Firmware
The formatter stores the printer firmware. A firmware upgrade process is used to overwrite and upgrade the
firmware.
NOTE: For more information about a specific printer model, see the Printer information, configurations,
and specifications section in the service manual.
Nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM)
The printer uses nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) to store I/O and information about the print environment
configuration. The contents of NVRAM are retained when the printer is turned off or disconnected.
Flash memory
NAND: Stores fax memory.
Random access memory
The printer uses the following RAM:
● SFP: 1.25 GB
● MFP: 1.5 GB
HP Memory Enhancement technology (MEt)

The HP Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) effectively doubles the standard memory through a variety of
font- and data-compression methods.
NOTE: MEt is available only in PCL mode; it is not functional when printing in PS mode.
Engine-control unit
Learn about the engine control unit.
The engine-control unit includes the following:
● DC controller
● High-voltage power supply
● Low-voltage power supply
● Fuser control
Figure 3-2 Engine-control unit
DC controller
Learn about the DC controller.
The DC controller controls the operation of the printer and its components. The DC controller starts the printer
operation when the printer power is turned on and the power supply sends DC voltage to the DC controller.
After the printer enters the standby period, the DC controller sends out various signals to operate motors,
solenoids, and other printer components based on the print command and image data that the host computer
sends.
Engine-control unit 61
Figure 3-3 DC controller diagram
Fan
Motor
Clutch Drive PCA
Solenoid
Photointerrupter
Motor
Fan Clutch
Solenoid
LED
Switch
Photointerrupter
Photointerrupter
Cartridge DC controller
(Y/M/C/K) High-voltage Sensor
power supply
LED
T2 roller
Input accessory
ITB ass’y
Laser scanner ass’y
Switch
Fuser Oupput accessory
Control panel
Fan
Low-voltage
AC input power supply
Formatter
Sensor
Table 3-2 Printer electrical components
Component type Abbreviation Component name
Motor SCN_MTR_12st Scanner motor
Motor SCN_MTR_34st Scanner motor
Motor LIFT_MTR Lifter motor
Motor FEED_MTR Pickup motor
Motor FEED_MTR (X654/X677 models Feed motor

only)

Table 3-2 Printer electrical components (continued)
Motor FSR_MTR Fuser motor
Motor ITB_BK_MTR ITB motor
Motor 3DRM_MTR Drum motor
Motor 4DEV_MTR Developer motor
Motor DEV_MTR Developer alienation motor
Motor DUP_MTR Duplex motor
Motor TS_MOTOR (X654/X677 Toner-supply motor

modelsonly)
Fan FSR_FAN Fuser fan
Fan CRG_FAN Cartridge fan
Fan KB_FAN Exhaust fan
Fan PS_FAN Power supply fan
Solenoid T1_SL Tray 1 (MP) alienation solenoid
Solenoid DUP_SL Duplex flapper solenoid
Solenoid MP_SL Tray 1 (MP) pickup solenoid
Clutch FEED_CL Tray 2 pickup clutch
Clutch REFEED_CL Duplex re-pickup clutch
Clutch U_CL1 (X654/X677 models Toner-supply upper feed clutch 1

only)
Clutch T_CL1 (X654/X677 models Toner-supply clutch 1

only)

only)

only)

only)

only)

only)

only)
Switch 24V_ILK_SW 24V interlock switch
Switch FR_DOOR_SW Front door switch
Switch FDOOR_SW (X654/X677 Toner-supply door switch

models only)
Switch R_DOOR_SW Right door switch
DC controller 63
Switch R_DOOR_SW (X654/X677 Right door switch 2

models only)
Switch POWER_SW Power supply switch
Switch CST_SIZE 1 Tray 2 media size switch 1
Photo interrupter LIFT_SNS Tray 2 lifter motor rotation sensor
Photo interrupter DRM_HP123_SNS Drum home position sensor YMC
Photo interrupter DRM_HP4_SNS Drum home position sensor K
Photo interrupter DEV_HP_SNS Developer alienation sensor
Photo interrupter DUP_FL_SNS Duplex flapper position sensor
Photo interrupter OUT_FULL_SNS FD1 media full sensor, fuser output sensor
Photo interrupter CST_PAP_SNS Tray 2 media out sensor
Photo interrupter CST_FACE_SNS Tray 2 media surface sensor
Photo interrupter LOOP_SNS Fuser loop sensor
Photo interrupter REFEED_SNS Duplex feed sensor
Photo interrupter ENC_SNS Registration roller rotation sensor
Photo interrupter REG_SNS Registration sensor
Photo interrupter RREREG_SNS Pre-registration sensor
Photo interrupter MP_PAP_SNS Tray 1 media out sensor
Photo interrupter TCU_FULL_SNS ITB toner collection unit near full sensor
Photo interrupter T1_HP_SNS ITB alienation sensor
Photo interrupter TCU_VSCW_SNS Toner collection unit screw rotation sensor
Photo interrupter FSR_PRS_SNS Fuser pressure release sensor
Photo interrupter PAPOUT-M_SNS Fuser output sensor 2
Photo interrupter TRANS_SNS (X654/X677 Tray 2 feed sensor

models only)
Photo interrupter CAC_SNS (1st) (X654/X677 Cartridge release unit home position sensor Y
models only)
Photo interrupter CAC_SNS (2nd) (X654/X677 Cartridge release unit home position sensor M
models only)
Photo interrupter CAC_SNS (5rd) (X654/X677 Cartridge release unit home position sensor C
models only)
Photo interrupter CAC_SNS (4th) (X654/X677 Cartridge release unit home position sensor K
models only)
Sensor - (media sensor PCA) Media sensor

Sensor - (RD sensor PCA) Registration density sensor 1
Sensor - (RD sensor PCA) Registration density sensor 2
Sensor PAPOUT-L_SNS Fuser output sensor 1
Sensor ENV SNS Environment sensor
Sensor BUFF_PTR_PCA (1st) (X654/ Toner supply sensor Y

X677 models only)
Sensor BUFF_PTR_PCA (2nd) (X654/ Toner supply sensor M

X677 models only)
Sensor BUFF_PTR_PCA (3rd) (X654/ Toner supply sensor C

X677 models only)
Sensor BUFF_PTR_PCA (4th) (X654/ Toner supply sensor K

X677 models only)
LED 3rd (X654/X677 models only) Pre-exposure LED 3
LED 4th (X654/X677 models only) Pre-exposure LED 4
LED LED6 Power supply switch LED
Motors
Learn about the printer motors.
The printer uses several motors for the paper-feed and image-formation processes.
NOTE: The DC controller determines the following motor failures.
● Developer motor ([color] developer motor startup failure)
● Developer motor ([color] developer motor rotation failure)
● Drum motor ([color] drum motor startup failure)
● Drum motor ([color] drum motor rotation failure)
● ITB motor (ITB motor start-up failure)
● ITB motor (ITB motor rotation failure)
● Fuser motor (fuser motor start-up failure)
● Fuser motor (fuser motor rotation failure)
● Developer alienation motor (developer alienation motor failure)
● Scanner motor (scanner motor startup failure)
● Scanner motor (scanner motor rotation failure)
● Toner-supply motor ([color] toner replenish motor failure)
Motors 65
Table 3-3 Motors
Component name Components driven
4DEV_MTR Developer motor ● Yellow developer
● Magenta developer
● Cyan developer
● Black developer
● Waste toner feed screw
3DRM_MTR Drum motor ● Yellow photosensitive drum
● Magenta photosensitive drum
● Cyan photosensitive drum
ITB_BK_MTR ITB motor ● Intermediate transfer belt (ITB)
● Black photosensitive drum
● Toner feed screw
FSR_MTR Fuser motor ● Pressure roller and output roller
● Pressurizes/releases the pressure roller
● Engages/disengages the T1 roller
● Engages/disengages the T2 roller
FEED_MTR Pickup motor ● Tray 1 pickup roller (6700/6800 models only)
● Tray 1 feed roller (6700/6800 models only)
● Tray 2 pickup roller
● Tray 2 feed roller
● Feed roller (X654/X677 models only)
● Registration roller (6700/6800 models only)
● Intermediate feed roller (6700/6800 models only)
● Duplex re-pickup roller (6700/6800 models only)
FEED_MTR Feed motor (X654/X677 models only) ● Tray 1 pickup roller
● Tray 1 feed roller
● Registration roller
● Intermediate feed roller
● Duplex re-pickup roller
DEV_MTR Developer alienation motor Engages/disengages the developer rollers
SCN_MTR_12st Scanner motor Scanner mirror
SCN_MTR_34st
LIFT_MTR Lifter motor ● Lifts up the Tray 2 lifting plate
● Engages/disengages the Tray 2 pickup roller

Table 3-3 Motors (continued)
Component name Components driven
DUP_MTR Duplex motor ● Duplex switchback roller
● Duplex feed roller
TS_MOTOR Toner-supply motor Toner feed screw
(X654/X677 models only)
Fans
Learn about the printer fans.
The printer has three fans for preventing the temperature from rising in the printer and for cooling the printed
pages.
NOTE: The DC controller determines the following fan failures.
● Cartridge fan (fan motor 1 failure)
● Power supply fan (fan motor 2 failure)
● Fuser fan (fan motor 3 failure)
Table 3-4 Fans
Component Description Cooling area Type Speed

name
FSR_FAN Fuser fan Around the fuser Intake Variable (full/half)
CRG_FAN Cartridge fan Around the toner cartridges Intake Variable (full/95%/75%)
PS_FAN Power supply fan Around the low-voltage power Intake Variable (full/half)
supply unit
KB_FAN Exhaust fan Around the delivery assembly Variable (full/half)
Low-voltage power supply

Learn about the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
The low-voltage power supply converts the AC power into the DC voltage that the printer components use.
Fans 67
Figure 3-4 Low-voltage power supply
AC input
Fuse
FU401 (100V)
Fuser DC controller
Fuse
FU401 (200V)
Fuse
FU101
Zero crossing /ZEROX

detection circuit
+3.3VM +3.3VB
+3.3V +5VC
generation FET FET
circuit
+3.3VB2
Rectifying FSRPS_CLK
circuit FET
+24VA
+24V/+5V FET +3.3VC

generation
circuit
FET
+24VB
24V/5V CHG
Protection
circuit
24V interlock switch

SW1
+5VA
+24/5VA
Formatter +3.3VA
Low-voltage power supply voltages description

Learn about LVPS voltages.
The low-voltage power supply converts the AC power into three DC voltages, which it then subdivides, as
described in the following table.
Table 3-5 LVPS voltages
DC power supply Reference item Inactive OFF Active OFF Print/Standby
+24V +24VA OFF OFF ON
+24V +24VB OFF OFF ON
+5V +5VA OFF ON ON
+5V +5VC OFF OFF ON

Table 3-5 LVPS voltages (continued)
DC power supply Reference item Inactive OFF Active OFF Print/Standby
+3.3V +3.3VA ON ON ON
+3.3V +3.3VB OFF ON ON
+3.3V +3.3VB2 OFF Intermittent ON
+3.3V +3.3VC OFF OFF ON
+3.3V +3.3VM OFF OFF ON
Over-current/over-voltage protection
Learn about LVPS protections.
The low-voltage power supply automatically stops supplying the DC voltage to the printer components
whenever it detects excessive current or abnormal voltage. The low-voltage power supply has a protective
circuit against over-current and over-voltage to prevent failures in the power supply circuit.
CAUTION: If DC voltage is not being supplied from the low-voltage power supply, the protective function
might be running. In this case, turn the power switch off and unplug the power cord.
Do not turn the power switch on until the root cause is found and corrected.
If the protective function is active, the DC controller notifies the formatter of a low-voltage power supply
failure. In addition, the low-voltage power supply has two fuses to protect against over-current. If over-
current flows into the AC line, the fuse stops the AC power.
Low-voltage power supply safety

Learn about LVPS safety.
For the customer and service technician safety, the printer has a function to stop +24VB power when the 24V
interlock switch is turned off. This stops the DC power supply to the following loads.
● Fuser motor
● Pickup motor
● Developer alienation motor
● Duplex switchback motor
The remote switch control circuit turns on or off the printer power so that the AC power flows even if the
power switch is turned off. Unplug the printer power cord before disassembling the printer.
Low-voltage power supply functions

Learn about LVPS functions.
The printer has the following low-voltage power supply functions.
Over-current/over-voltage protection 69
Table 3-6 Low-voltage power supply functions
Function Description
Active OFF Inactive OFF is a state that the power supply is OFF.
Inactive OFF Active OFF is a state of sleep. The low-voltage power supply is output only to formatter and DC
controller.
Low-voltage power supply When +24V is supplied from the low-voltage power supply, the DC controller always monitors output
failure detection status of 24VA. The DC controller determines it as low-voltage power supply malfunction if 24VA
would not become the specified value at the specified timing. When the DC controller monitors AC
voltage input from inlet, it also determines it as low-voltage power supply malfunction if AC voltage
input from inlet would not reach the specified voltage.
High-voltage power supply

Learn about the high-voltage power supply.
The DC controller controls the high-voltage power supply to generate high-voltage biases. The high-voltage
power supply generates the high-voltage biases that are applied to the following components:
● Primary charging roller (in the toner cartridges)
● RS roller (in the toner cartridges)
● Developer blade (in the toner cartridges)
● Developer roller (in the toner cartridges)
● Primary transfer roller
● Secondary transfer roller
● Static charge eliminator

Figure 3-5 High-voltage power supply
Blade bias circuit
Static charge eliminator
T1 roller
T2 roller
Y M C K
Developing bias Primary charging

T1 bias circuit T2 bias circuit RS bias circuit
circuit bias circuit
DC controller
Fuser control
Learn about the fuser control process.
The fuser heater control circuit and the fuser safety circuit control the fuser temperature based on the
commands from the DC controller. The printer uses an on-demand fusing method. There are two types of
fusers, a conventional ODF fuser and a zone-heated A2ODF fuser in which a heater is divided into seven zones.
Fuser control 71
Figure 3-6 ODF fuser control
TH3 Fuser film
H1,H2
TH1 Rear side of printer
FU1
Pressure roller
TH2
FUSER TEMPERATURE signal
FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal
Front side of printer
Fuser heater Fuser heater

control circuit safety circuit
Low-voltage power supply DC controller
Table 3-7 ODF fuser components
Abbreviation Component name Function
H1 Fuser main heater Heats the fuser film (Letter width compatible)
H2 Fuser sub heater Heats the fuser film (A4 width compatible)
TH1 Main thermistor Detects the center temperature of the fuser film (contact type)
TH2 Sub thermistor 1 Detects the temperature at one end of the fuser heater (contact type)
TH3 Sub thermistor 2 Detects the temperature at one end of the fuser heater (contact type)
FU1 Thermal fuse Prevents an abnormal temperature rise of fuser heater (non-contact type)

Figure 3-7 A2ODF fuser control
Fuser film
Rear side of printer

TP1
Fuser heater (see detailed view) Pressure roller
FUSER TEMPERATURE signal
FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal
Front side of printer
Fuser heater Fuser heater

control circuit safety circuit
Low-voltage power supply DC controller
Detailed view of fuser heater
Zone 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TH22 TH32 TH4R TH4F TH52 TH62
TH11 TH21 TH31 TH41 TH51 TH71
Table 3-8
H1 Fuser heater 1 Heats the fuser film (zone 1)
Fuser control 73
Table 3-8 (continued)
TH11 Main thermistor Detects the temperature of the fuser zone 1 (built-in type)
TH22 Sub thermistor Detects the temperature of the fuser zone 2 (built-in type)
TH4R Sub thermistor Detects the temperature of the fuser zone 4 (built-in type)
TH4F Sub thermistor Detects the temperature of the fuser zone 4 (built-in type)
TH31 Sub thermistor Detects the excursion of the fuser heater (built-in type)
TP1 Thermoswitch Prevents an abnormal temperature rise of fuser heater (non-contact type)

Figure 3-8 ODF fuser control block diagram
AC input
DC controller
detection
circuit
Relay drive FSR_PRS_RLD Fuser heater

RL401 circuit safety circuit
RL402 Relay drive

circuit
Fuser heater FSRD

control circuit
FSR_RX
Low-voltage suppry supply
Fuser
Fuser heater control circuit
FSAFE4
SUB_TH2 FSAFE3
TH3
MAITN_TH FSAFE2
TH1
SUB_TH1 FSAFE1
TH2
+24VBRL
+24VB
FU1
H1, H2
Fuser film ass’y
Pressure roller
Fuser control 75
Figure 3-9 A2ODF fuser control block diagram
AC input
DC controller
detection
circuit
Relay drive FSR_PRS_RLD Fuser heater

RL401 circuit safety circuit
RL402 Relay drive

circuit
Fuser heater FSRD

control circuit
FSR_RX
Low-voltage suppry supply
Fuser
Fuser heater control circuit
+24VBRL
+24VB
TP1
FSAFE4
TH FSAFE3
FSAFE2
H1-7
TH1-7 FSAFE1
Fuser film ass’y
Pressure roller
Fuser heater protection

Learn about fuser heater protection.
The fuser heater protective function detects an excessive temperature rise of the fuser and interrupts power
supply to the fuser heater. The printer has the following protective functions to prevent the fuser heater from
excessive rising temperature.
● DC controller: The DC controller constantly monitors the temperature of the thermistor. The DC controller
stops the FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal output and turns off the relays (RL401/RL402) to interrupt
power supply to the fuser heater when it detects an excessive temperature.

● Fuser heater safety circuit: The fuser heater safety circuit constantly monitors the temperature of the
thermistor. The fuser heater safety circuit turns off the relays (RL401/RL402) or the triacs (Q409/Q410/
Q411) and the fuser heater control circuit to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater when it detects an
excessive temperature. Triac (Q409) corresponds only to the A2ODF fuser.
● Thermal fuse (ODF fuser): Contact of the thermal fuse opens and it interrupts power supply to the fuser
heater when the temperature of the fuser heater is abnormally high.
● Thermoswitch (A2ODF fuser): The contact of the thermoswitch breaks to interrupt power supply to the
fuser heater when the temperature of the fuser heater is abnormally high.
Fuser control functions

Learn about fuser control functions.
The printer has the following fuser control functions.
Table 3-9 Fuser control functions
Function Supported feature
Fuser temperature control Yes
Fuser failure detection Yes
Frequency detection circuit failure detection Yes
Fuser pressure release mechanism failure detection Yes
Fuser type discrepancy detection Yes
Fuser type identification detection No
Fuser presence detection Yes
Fuser life detection Yes
Relay failure detection No
Pressure roller cleaning Yes
Engine laser/scanner system

Learn about the engine laser/scanner system.
The DC controller controls the laser scanner system by following the instruction from the formatter. The DC
controller formats the latent electrostatic image on the surface of photosensitive drum by controlling the
components of the laser scanner system as dictated by the VIDEO signals.
The main components of the image-formation system are as follows:
● Laser assembly
● Scanner motor assembly
● Beam detect (BD) sensor
● Scanner mirror
NOTE: The printer has one laser scanner assembly each for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black.
Fuser control functions 77

Figure 3-10 Laser scanner system
Photosensitive drum
Laser ass’y
Y BD sensor Photosensitive drum
C
BD sensor
Laser ass’y
K
Scanner motor ass’y
Scanner mirror Scanner motor ass’y
Scanner mirror
DC controller
Laser scanner failure detection

Learn about laser scanner failure detection functions.
The DC controller detects the following laser scanner failures.
Table 3-10 Laser scanner failure detection
BD failure detection No
Scanner motor start-up failure detection Yes
Scanner motor rotational failure detection Yes
Laser scanner failure detection No
Laser scanner safety

Learn about laser scanner safety.
The printer has door interlock switches. In the case that one of the following doors opens, the interlock
switches stop output to the laser for the user or service technician’s safety.
● Front door

● Right door
Image-formation process
Learn about the image-formation process.
The DC controller controls the image-formation system according to commands from the formatter. The DC
controller controls the internal components of the image-formation system to form the toner image on the
photosensitive drum surface. The toner image is then transferred to the print media and fused. The system
consists of the following components:
● Toner cartridges
● Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)
● Primary transfer (T1) roller
● Secondary transfer (T2) roller
● Fuser
● Laser scanner assembly
Figure 3-11 Image-formation system
Fuser
ITB
T1 roller
T2 roller
Y M C K
Cartridge
DC controller
Image-formation system motors
The following figure shows the motors for the image-formation system.
Image-formation process 79
Figure 3-12 Image-formation system motors
Y M C K
3DRM 4DEV DEV ITB FSR
DC controller
Table 3-11 Image-formation system motors
Item Abbreviation Component
4DEV 4DEV_MTR Developer motor
3DRM 3DRM_MTR Drum motor
ITB ITB_MTR ITB motor
FSR FSR_MTR Fuser motor
DEV DEV_MTR Developer alienation motor
Image-formation system sensors
The following figure shows the sensors for the image-formation system.

Figure 3-13 Image-formation system sensors
TCU_FULL
DRM_HP123
T1_HP DRM_HP4
RD1
RD2
Y M C K MS
DEV_HP
ENV
DC controller
Table 3-12 Image-formation system sensors
Item Abbreviation Name
DRM_HP123 DRM_HP123_SNS Drum home position sensor YMC
DRM_HP4 DRM_HP4_SNS Drum home position sensor K
DEV_HP DEV_HP_SNS Developer alienation sensor
TCU_FULL TCU_FULL_SNS ITB toner collection near full sensor
T1_HP T1_HP_SNS ITB alienation sensor
MS - (Media sensor PCA) Media sensor
RD1 - (RD sensor PCA) Registration density sensor 1
RD2 - (RD sensor PCA) Registration density sensor 2
ENV ENV_SNS Environment sensor
Step 1: Pre-exposure (X654/X677 models only)

Learn about the image formation pre-exposure step.
NOTE: This step applies to the X654/X677 models only.
Light from the pre-exposure LED strikes the surface of the photosensitive drum to remove any residual
electrical charges from the drum surface.
Step 1: Pre-exposure (X654/X677 models only) 81

Figure 3-14 Pre-exposure
LED
Photosensitive drum
Step 2: Primary charging

Learn about the image formation primary charging step.
To prepare for latent image formation, the surface of the photosensitive drum is charged with a uniform
negative charge. The primary charging roller receives the primary charging bias, and then the roller charges
the drum by direct contact.
Figure 3-15 Primary charging
Primary charging roller
Primary charging bias
Photosensitive drum
Step 3: Laser-beam exposure

Learn about the image formation laser-beam exposure step.
The laser beam strikes the photosensitive drum to neutralize the negative charge on the portions of the
drum surface where the image will form. An electrostatic latent image forms where the negative charge was
neutralized. The neutralized areas on the drum are ready to accept toner.

Figure 3-16 Laser-beam exposure
Step 4: Development
Learn about the image formation development step.
A developing bias is applied to the developing roller. The toner acquires a negative charge as a result of the
friction from the developing roller rotating against the developing blade. Because the negatively charged
surface of the photosensitive drums were neutralized where they have been struck by the laser beam, the
toner adheres to those areas on the drums. The latent image becomes visible on the surface of the drum.
Figure 3-17 Development
Developer roller
Developer blade
Developing bias
Photosensitive drum
Step 5: Primary transfer

Learn about the image formation primary transfer step.
The toner on the photosensitive drum is transferred to the ITB. T1 bias is applied to the T1 roller to charge the
ITB positive. The ITB attracts the negatively charged toner from the surface of each photosensitive drum. The
complete toner image forms on the ITB.
Step 4: Development 83
Figure 3-18 Primary transfer
Photosensitive
drum
ITB
T1 roller
T1 bias
Step 6: Secondary transfer

Learn about the image formation secondary transfer step.
The paper acquires a positive charge from the secondary-transfer roller, and attracts the negatively charged
toner from the surface of the ITB. The complete toner image transfers onto the paper.
Figure 3-19 Secondary transfer
ITB
Paper
T2 roller
T2 bias
Step 7: Separation
Learn about the image formation separation step.
The stiffness of the paper causes it to separate from the ITB as the ITB bends. The static-charge eliminator
removes excess charge from the paper for stable paper feeding and print quality.

Figure 3-20 Separation
ITB
Paper
Static charge eliminator
T2 roller
Static charge eliminator bias
Step 8: Fusing
Learn about the image formation fusing step.
The printer uses an on-demand fusing method to adhere the toner image onto the page. As the page passes
through the heated and pressurized rollers in the fuser the toner melts onto the page. The toner image is now
permanently fused to the page. A fusing bias applied to the pressure roller improves image quality.
Figure 3-21 Fusing

Fuser heater
Fuser film
Paper
Pressure roller
Step 9: ITB cleaning

Learn about the image formation ITB cleaning step.
ITB cleaning process is to remove the residual toner on the ITB surface.
The residual toner is scraped off by the cleaning blade and then collected into the toner collection box ass’y by
the toner feed screw.
Step 8: Fusing 85
Figure 3-22 ITB cleaning
Toner cartridges
Learn about the toner cartridges.
The following sections discuss the printer toner cartridges. The printer has four toner cartridges, one for each
color: cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.
Design
Learn about toner cartridge design.
Each toner cartridge is filled with toner and consists of the following components:
● Photosensitive drum
● Developer
● Primary-charging roller
● Memory chip
The printer has four cartridges, one for each color: yellow, magenta, cyan and black. Each of them has the
same structure
The X654/X677 models have two cartridge types: four (YMCK) toner cartridges and four imaging drums
(YMCK).

Figure 3-23 Standard toner cartridge block diagram
DC controller
DEV
DRM_HP4
DRM_HP123
M 4DEV/3DMR/ITB
Photosensitive
drum
Primary charging
Developer roller
roller
E-label
Cartridge
DEV_HP
Design 87
Figure 3-24 Toner cartridge and imaging drum block diagram
Feed/toner-supply controller
P-cartridge
M TS_MOTOR
Toner feed direction
T-cartridge
BUFF_PTR_PCA(1st/2st/3st/4st)
Toner supply mechanism
Toner cartridge functions

Learn about toner cartridge functions.
The printer has the following cartridge functions.
Table 3-13 Cartridge functions
Cartridge presence detection (not applicable to T-cartridges) Yes
Toner level detection Yes
Cartridge life detection Yes
Cartridge misinstallation detection Yes
Developer alienation control Yes
Developer alienation motor failure detection Yes
Drum discharge mechanism No
Intermediate transfer belt assembly

Learn about the intermediate transfer belt (ITB) assembly.

The ITB unit accepts the toner images from the photosensitive drums and transfers the completed image to
the paper. The ITB unit has the following main components:
● Intermediate transfer belt (ITB)
● ITB-drive roller
● Primary-transfer roller
● ITB cleaner
Figure 3-25 ITB unit

DC controller
Waste toner duct ass’y
SL FSR Fuser motor

T1 roller alienation
solenoid
TCU_FULL
ITB motor ITB
ITB drive roller

Toner collection box ass’y ITB
4DEV
Developer motor
T1_HP
ITB cleaner
T1 roller
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) functions

Learn about intermediate transfer belt functions.
The printer has the following ITB assembly functions.
Table 3-14 Intermediate transfer belt functions
T1 roller alienation control Yes
T1 roller alienation mechanism failure detection Yes
ITB assembly life detection Yes
ITB assembly presence detection No
Blade cleaning mechanism Yes
Electrostatic cleaning mechanism No
ITB toner collection box full detection No
ITB toner collection box presence detection No
ITB perimeter detection Yes
ITB seal detection sensor failure detection No
New ITB detection Yes
ITB cleaning mechanism No
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) functions 89

Table 3-14 Intermediate transfer belt functions (continued)
Toner collection box full detection Yes
Toner collection box presence detection No
Secondary transfer roller assembly

Learn about the secondary transfer roller assembly.
The secondary transfer roller assembly transfers the toner image on the ITB to the paper.
Secondary transfer roller functions

Learn about secondary transfer roller functions.
The printer has the following secondary transfer roller functions.
Table 3-15 Secondary transfer roller functions
Secondary transfer roller cleaning mechanism Yes
Secondary transfer roller presence detection No
Secondary transfer roller life detection Yes
Secondary transfer roller alienation control Yes
Calibration
Learn about the printer calibration process.
The printer calibrates itself to maintain proper print-quality. The calibration corrects color-misregistration
and color-density variation due to environmental changes or internal variation in the printer.
Calibration functions
Learn about color calibration functions.
The printer has the following calibration functions.
Table 3-16 Calibration functions
Color-plane registration correction control Yes
Environment correction control Yes
Image density control (DMAX) Yes
Image halftone control (DHALF) Yes
Registration density sensor failure detection Yes
Color sensor control No
Gray axis control (GAS) No

Table 3-16 Calibration functions (continued)
Environment sensor failure detection Yes
Engine pickup, feed, and delivery system

Learn about the printer pickup, feed, and delivery system.
The DC controller controls the pickup, feed, and delivery system according to commands from the formatter.
The pickup, feed, and delivery system uses a series of rollers to move the paper through the printer.
The pickup, feed, and delivery system consists of the following three functional blocks.
● Pickup-and-feed-block: Controls the movement of the paper from each pickup source to the fuser inlet
● Fuser-and-delivery-block: Controls the movement of the paper from the fuser to the delivery destination
● Duplex block: Controls the movement of the paper from the duplex switchback unit to the duplex
re-pickup unit
Engine pickup, feed, and delivery system 91

Figure 3-26 Engine pickup, feed, and delivery system (6700/6800 models)
Fuser-and-delivery block
Simplex paper path
Pickup-and-feed block
Simplex paper path

Duplex paper path Duplex block

Figure 3-27 Engine pickup, feed, and delivery system (X654/X677 models)
Simplex paper path Fuser-and-delivery block
Pickup-and-feed block
Sensors and switches

Learn about the pickup, feed, and delivery sensors and switches.
The following figure shows the sensors and switches for the pickup, feed, and delivery system.
Sensors and switches 93

Figure 3-28 Photo sensors and switches
DUP_FL_SNS
OUT_FULL_SNS
PAPOUT-M_SNS
PAPOUT-L_SNS
LOOP_SNS
REFEED_SNS
MS
REG_SNS
RREREG_SNS
MP_PAP_SNS
TRANS_SNS
CST_FACE_SNS
CST_PAP_SNS
CST_SIZE1
CST_SIZE2
CST
CST_SIZE3 CST_SIZE4
Table 3-17 Photo sensors and switches
Abbreviation Component
CST_SIZE1 Tray 2 media size switch 1
DUP_FL_SNS Duplex flapper position sensor
OUT_FULL_SNS FD1 media full sensor
CST_PAP_SNS Tray 2 media out sensor
CST_FACE_SNS Tray 2 media surface sensor
LOOP_SNS Fuser loop sensor
REFEED_SNS Duplex feed sensor
REG_SNS Registration sensor
RREREG_SNS Pre-registration sensor
MP_PAP_SNS Tray 1 media out sensor
PAPOUT-M_SNS Fuser output sensor 2
TRANS_SNS Tray 2 feed sensor (X654/X677 models only)
MS (Media sensor PCA) Media sensor

Table 3-17 Photo sensors and switches (continued)
PAPOUT-L_SNS Fuser output sensor 1
Motors, clutches, and solenoids

Learn about the pickup, feed, and delivery motors, clutches, and solenoids.
The following figure shows the motors, clutches, and solenoids for the pickup, feed, and delivery system.
Figure 3-29 Motors, clutches, and solenoids (6700/6800 models)

FSR DUP ITB
D_SL
R_CL
MPSL
F_CL
LIFT FEED
Abbreviation 1 Abbreviation 2 Component
ITB ITB_BK_MTR ITB motor
FEED FEED_MTR Pickup motor
LEFT LIFT_MTR Lifter motor
DUP DUP_MTR Duplex motor
MPSL MP-SL Tray 1 pickup solenoid
D_SL DUP_SL Duplex flapper solenoid
F_CL FEED_CL Tray 2 pickup clutch
Motors, clutches, and solenoids 95

R_CL REFEED_CL Duplex re-pickup clutch
Figure 3-30 Motors, clutches, and solenoids (X654/X677 models)

FSR DUP ITB
D_SL
R_CL
MPSL
FEED2
F_CL
LIFT FEED1
ITB ITB_BK_MTR ITB motor
FEED1 FEED_MTR Pickup motor
FEED2 FEED_MTR Feed motor
LEFT LIFT_MTR Lifter motor
DUP DUP_MTR Duplex motor
MPSL MP-SL Tray 1 pickup solenoid
D_SL DUP_SL Duplex flapper solenoid
F_CL FEED_CL Tray 2 pickup clutch

R_CL REFEED_CL Duplex re-pickup clutch
Feed speed control

Learn about pickup, feed, and delivery feed speed control.
The DC controller adjusts the feed speed to improve the print quality depending on the paper type. The paper
is fed at a specified speed according to the print mode designated by the formatter.
Table 3-18 Print mode and feed speed
Print mode Feed speed, monochrome Feed speed, full color
Auto 2/3/4/5 2/3/4/5
Normal media 1 2/3/4 2/3/4
Normal media 2 2/3/4 2/3/4
Heavy media 1 3/4 3/4
Light media 1 2/3 2/3
Glossy media 1 5 5
Glossy media 2 5 5
Glossy media 3 5 5
Glossy film 5 5
Photo media 1 Not applicable Not applicable
Envelope 3/4 3/4
OHT 5 5
Extra light media 3 3
Label 3/4 3/4
Designated media 1 3/4 3/4
Designated media 2 4/5 4/5
Designated media 3 3 3
Pickup and feed delivery features

Learn about pickup, feed, and delivery print mode and feed speed features.
The printer has the following pickup, feed and delivery functions.
Feed speed control 97

Table 3-19 Print mode and feed speed
Cassette (Tray 2) media size detection Yes
Cassette (Tray 2) presence detection Yes
Cassette (Tray 2) media surface detection Yes
Cassette (Tray 2) media presence detection Yes
Cassette (Tray 2) media level detection Yes
Cassette (Tray 2) lift-up control Yes
Cassette (Tray 2) lift-down control Yes
Cassette (Tray 2) multiple-feed prevention mechanism No
Cassette (Tray 2) pickup roller presence detection Yes
Cassette (Tray 2) pickup roller alienation detection Yes
Tray 1 (MP) tray media presence detection Yes
Tray 1 (MP) tray media width detection No
Tray 1 (MP) tray last-media detection No
Skew-feed prevention mechanism Yes
Feed speed control Yes
Loop control Yes
Media detection Yes
OHT detection Yes
Image leading edge positioning Yes
Media length detection No
Media width detection Yes
Pressure roller pressure release control Yes
Output bin media-full detection Yes
Automatic delivery Yes
Duplex switchback control Yes
Duplex feed control Yes
Media detection
Learn about pickup, feed, and delivery media detection.
The printer is equipped with media sensor on paper path, and can detect media type fed. The media sensor
consists of an optical sensor which detects surface roughness and ultrasonic sensor which detects paper
weight, and the distance between the optical sensor and the print media is kept constant by roller.
The DC controller detects media type using the media sensor and switches to an optimized print mode for
the media, if Auto mode is designated from the formatter and media type for the specified input source is not
designated from the formatter.

The followings are print modes that can be switched for media detection.
● Normal
● Heavy media 1
● Heavy media 2
● Heavy media 3
● Light media
● Glossy media 1
● Glossy media 2
● Glossy media 3
● Rough media
● OHT
● Glossy film
Jam detection/prevention
Learn about pickup, feed, and delivery jam detection.
The printer uses the following sensors to detect the presence of paper and to check whether paper is being
fed correctly or has jammed.
● Pre-registration sensor (PREREG_SNS)
● Registration sensor (REG_SNS)
● Fuser output sensor 1 (PAPOUT-L_SNS)
● Fuser output sensor 2 (PAPOUT-M_SNS)
● Fuser loop sensor (LOOP_SNS)
● FD1 media full sensor (OUT_FULL_SNS)
● Duplex feed sensor (REFEED_SNS)
● Tray 2 feed sensor (TRANS_SNS) (X654/X677 models models only)
● PF feed sensor (PS23) (550-sheet paper feeder only)
● HCI feed sensor (SR4) (HCI only)
Jam detection/prevention 99
Figure 3-31 Jam detection sensors (X654/X677 models models)
Simplex paper path
Duplex paper path
OUT_FULL_SNS
PAPOUT-M_SNS
PAPOUT-L_SNS
REFEED_SNS
REG_SNS
PREREG_SNS
TRANS_SNS
Figure 3-32 Jam detection sensors (6700/6800 models models and 550-sheet paper feeder)
Simplex paper path
Duplex paper path
OUT_FULL_SNS
PAPOUT-M_SNS
PAPOUT-L_SNS
REFEED_SNS
REG_SNS
PREREG_SNS
SR23

Figure 3-33 Jam detection sensors (6700/6800 models models and HCI)
Simplex paper path
Duplex paper path
OUT_FULL_SNS
PAPOUT-M_SNS
PAPOUT-L_SNS
REFEED_SNS
REG_SNS
PREREG_SNS
SR4
The printer determines that a jam has occurred if one of these sensors detects paper at an inappropriate time.
The DC controller stops the print operation and notifies the formatter.
The printer detects the following jams:
● No pick jam 1
● No pick jam 2
● No pick jam 3
● Pickup stay jam 1
● Fuser delivery delay jam 1
● Fuser delivery delay jam 2
● Fuser delivery stay jam 1
● Fuser delivery stay jam 2
● Residual paper jam 1
Jam detection/prevention 101

● Door open jam 1
● Fuser wrap jam 1
● Fuser wrap jam 2
● Duplex feed delay jam
● Duplex re-pickup delay jam
● Delivery delay jam 1
● Inappropriate to the delivery path jam 2
● Transfer area wrapping jam
Input devices
Learn about the input devices.
550-sheet paper feeder

Learn about the 550-sheet paper feeder (Tray 3).
The 550-sheet paper feeder is installed at bottom of the printer. It picks up the print media and feeds it to the
printer. The paper feeder controller controls the operational sequence of the paper feeder.
550-sheet paper feeder paper path

Learn about the 550-sheet paper feeder paper path.
The figure below shows the 550-sheet paper feeder paper path.

Figure 3-34 550-sheet paper feeder paper path
Paper feeder controller

Learn about the paper feeder controller.
The figure below shows the paper feeder controller block diagram.
Figure 3-35 Paper feeder controller

550-sheet paper feeder
Motor
+3.3VB2
Clutch
+24VA
DC controller Paper feeder controller
Photointerruptor
Switch
550-sheet paper feeder electrical components

Learn about the 550-sheet paper feeder electrical components.
The figure below shows the paper feeder electrical components. The table in this section describes the paper
feeder electrical components.
Paper feeder controller 103

Figure 3-36 Paper feeder electrical components
M12
CL6
SR24 SR23
SR22 SW16
SW4
SW6
SW5 SW7
SR21
M15
Table 3-20 Electrical component list, paper feeder
Motor M12 Paper feeder feed motor
Motor M15 Paper feeder lifter motor
Clutch CL6 Paper feeder pickup clutch
Switch SW4 Paper feeder media size switch 1
Switch SW16 Paper feeder door switch
Photo interrupter SR21 Paper feeder lifter motor rotation sensor
Photo interrupter SR22 Paper feeder media out sensor
Photo interrupter SR23 Paper feeder feed sensor
Photo interrupter SR24 Paper feeder media surface sensor
550-sheet paper feeder motor control

The 550-sheet paper feeder has two motors for the paper-feed and cassette lift-up.
The table below describes which components the paper feeder motors drive.
Table 3-21 Paper feeder motors
Abbreviation Component Drives Failure detection
M12 Paper feeder feed motor Paper feeder cassette pickup roller No
Paper feeder cassette feed roller
Paper feeder feed roller
M15 Paper feeder lifter motor Paper feeder cassette lifter drive assembly No

550-sheet paper feeder other functions
Learn about the other paper feeder pickup and feed functions.
The paper feeder has the following pickup and feed functions.
● Cassette lift-up control
● Cassette presence detection
● Cassette media size detection
● Cassette media stack surface detection
● Cassette media out detection
● Cassette media level detection
● Multiple-feed prevention
● Automatic delivery
550-sheet feeder jam detection

Learn about the 550-sheet feeder jam detection function.
The paper feeder uses the following sensor to detect the presence of paper and to check whether paper is
being fed correctly or has jammed.
● Paper feeder feed sensor (SR23)
The printer determines that a jam has occurred if the sensor detects paper at an inappropriate time.
High capacity input (HCI) paper feeder

Learn about the HCI.
The HCI is optionally installed at bottom of the printer. It picks up the print media and feeds it to the printer.
The HCI controller controls the operational sequence of the HCI.
HCI paper path

Learn about the HCI paper path.
The figure below shows the HCI paper path.
550-sheet paper feeder other functions 105

Figure 3-37 HCI paper path
HCI controller
Learn about the HCI controller.
The figure below shows the HCI controller block diagram.

Figure 3-38 HCI controller
HCI
Motor
+3.3VB2
Clutch
+24VA
DC controller HCI controller
Photointerruptor
Switch
HCI electrical components

Learn about the HCI electrical components.
The figure below shows the HCI electrical components. The table in this section describes the HCI electrical
components.
Figure 3-39 HCI electrical components

M13
CL2
SR5 SR4
SR3 SW13
SR6
SW9
SW10
SW8
M14
Table 3-22 Electrical component list, HCI
Motor M13 HCI feed motor
Motor M14 HCI lifter motor
HCI electrical components 107

Table 3-22 Electrical component list, HCI (continued)
Clutch CL2 HCI pickup clutch
Switch SW8 HCI cassette lifting plate position switch
Switch SW9 HCI cassette media size switch 1
Switch SW10 HCI cassette media size switch 2
Switch SW13 HCI door switch
Photo interrupter SR3 HCI cassette media out sensor
Photo interrupter SR4 HCI feed sensor
Photo interrupter SR5 HCI cassette media surface sensor
Photo interrupter SR6 HCI cassette pickup rotation sensor
HCI motor control

The HCI has two motors for the paper-feed and cassette lift-up.
The table below describes which components the HCI motors drive.
M13 HCI feed motor HCI cassette pickup roller No
HCI cassette feed roller
HCI feed roller
M14 HCI lifter motor HCI cassette lifter drive assembly No
HCI other functions

Learn about the other HCI pickup and feed functions.
The HCI has the following pickup and feed functions.
● Cassette lift-up control
● Cassette presence detection
● Cassette media size detection
● Cassette media stack surface detection
● Cassette media out detection
● Cassette multiple-feed prevention

HCI jam detection
Learn about the HCI jam detection function.
The HCI uses the following sensor to detect the presence of paper and to check whether paper is being fed
correctly or has jammed.
● HCI feed sensor (SR4)
Output devices
Learn about the output devices.
3-bin stapler-stacker
Learn about the 3-bin stapler-stacker.
The 3-bin stapler-stacker is installed on the upper side of the printer. It delivers the print media to the output
bin after the staple process. The unit's controller controls the operational sequence of the paper feeder.
3-bin stapler-stacker paper path

Learn about the 3-bin stapler-stacker paper path.
The figure below shows the 3-bin stapler-stacker paper path.
HCI jam detection 109

Figure 3-40 3-bin stapler-stacker paper path
3-bin stapler-stacker controller

Learn about the 3-bin stapler-stacker controller.
The figure below shows the 3-bin stapler-stacker controller block diagram.

Figure 3-41 3-bin stapler-stacker controller
3 Bin Stapler Stacker
Motor
+3.3VB2
+24VA
Fan
DC controller SS controller Solenoid
Photointerruptor
Switch
Formatter
3-bin stapler-stacker electrical components

Learn about the 3-bin stapler-stacker electrical components.
The figures below show the 3-bin stapler-stacker electrical components. The table in this section describes
the 3-bin stapler-stacker electrical components.
Figure 3-42 3-bin stapler-stacker motors and solenoids

M27 M24
M21
SL22
M25
M22
SL23
SL21
3-bin stapler-stacker electrical components 111

Figure 3-43 3-bin stapler-stacker sensors and switches
PS207
PS206 PS204
PS201
PS205
PS211
PS202
PS212 PS213
PS208 PS214 PS203
PS209 PS215
SW3
SW4
PS210 SW21
Table 3-24 Electrical component list, 3-bin stapler-stacker
Motor M21 Stapler-stacker output motor
Motor M22 Stapler-stacker feed motor
Motor M24 Jogger motor
Motor M25 Y alignment motor
Motor M26 Stapler motor
Motor M27 Lifter motor
Fan FAN21 Stapler-stacker fan
Solenoid SL21 Inlet flapper solenoid
Solenoid SL22 Stamp solenoid
Solenoid SL23 Output bin 2 flapper solenoid
Photo interrupter PS201 Bin 1 media presence sensor
Photo interrupter PS202 Stapler-stacker exit sensor
Photo interrupter PS203 Staple inlet sensor
Photo interrupter PS204 Y alignment home position sensor
Photo interrupter PS205 Bin 1 media full sensor 1
Photo interrupter PS206 Alienation home position sensor
Photo interrupter PS207 Jogger home position sensor
Photo interrupter PS208 Bin 2 media presence sensor
Photo interrupter PS209 Bin 2 media full sensor
Photo interrupter PS210 Stapler-stacker inlet sensor
Photo interrupter PS211 Bin 1 upper limit sensor
Photo interrupter PS212 Bin 1 lower limit sensor
Photo interrupter PS213 Staple low sensor
Photo interrupter PS214 Staple ready sensor

Table 3-24 Electrical component list, 3-bin stapler-stacker (continued)
Photo interrupter PS215 Staple home position sensor
Switch SW3 Stapler-stacker door switch
Switch SW4 Staple door switch
Switch SW21 Interlock switch
3-bin stapler-stacker motor control

The 3-bin stapler-stacker has six motors for paper feed, paper alignment, output bin lift up/down, and staple
functions.
The table below describes which components the 3-bin stapler-stacker motors drive.
M21 Stapler-stacker output motor Output bin 1 delivery roller No
Output bin 1 exit feed roller
M22 Stapler-stacker feed motor Output bin 2 delivery roller No
Output bin 2 inlet feed roller
M24 Jogger motor Jogger guide Yes
M25 Y alignment motor Alignment roller Yes
Engages/disengages the output bin 1 delivery roller
M26 Staple motor Staple Yes
M27 Lifter motor Output bin 1 lifter No
3-bin stapler-stacker fan control

The 3-bin stapler-stacker has one fan.
The table below describes the stapler-stacker fan functions.
Table 3-26 3-bin stapler-stacker fan
Abbreviatio Component Cooling area Type Speed Failure

n detection
FAN21 Stapler-stacker fan Stapler-stacker interior Intake Full/low Yes
3-bin stapler-stacker other functions

Learn about the other 3-bin stapler-stacker delivery functions.
The 3-bin stapler-stacker has the following delivery functions.
● Mailbox mode
3-bin stapler-stacker motor control 113

● Staple control
3-bin stapler-stacker jam detection

Learn about the 3-bin stapler-stacker jam detection function.
The 3-bin stapler-stacker uses the following sensors to detect the presence of paper and to check whether
paper is being fed correctly or has jammed.
● Stapler-stacker inlet sensor (PS210)
● Staple inlet sensor (PS203)
● Stapler-stacker exit sensor (PS202)
The printer determines that a jam has occurred if the sensors detect paper at an inappropriate time. The
stapler-stacker detects the following jams.
● Residual paper jam
● Feed delay jam
● Feed stay jam
Floor-standing stapler-stacker
Learn about the floor-standing stapler-stacker.
The floor-standing stapler-stacker is installed on the left side of the printer, and it delivers print media to each
output bin. The floor-standing stapler-stacker can perform punch processing and staple processing on print
media. The floor-standing stapler-stacker controller controls the operation sequence of the floor-standing
stapler-stacker.
Floor-standing stapler-stacker paper path

Learn about the floor-standing stapler-stacker paper path.
The figure below shows the floor-standing stapler-stacker paper path.

Figure 3-44 Floor-standing stapler-stacker paper path
Output bin 2
Output bin 3
Output bin 4
Floor-standing stapler-stacker controller

Learn about the floor-standing stapler-stacker controller.
The figure below shows the floor-standing stapler-stacker controller block diagram.
Floor-standing stapler-stacker controller 115

Figure 3-45 Floor-standing stapler-stacker controller
Printer
Formatter
IPTU FSSS
Switch
DC controller IPTU FSSS
controller controller
Photointerruptor
Fan
Motor
Solenoid
Sensor
LED
Low-voltage Sub power

power supply supply
Floor-standing stapler-stacker electrical components

Learn about the floor-standing stapler-stacker electrical components.
The figures below show the floor-standing stapler-stacker electrical components. The table in this section
describes the floor-standing stapler-stacker electrical components.

Figure 3-46 Floor-standing stapler-stacker motors and solenoids
M18 M15 M14 M16
M26
M19
M11
M17 M12
M27 SL12
M13
SL11
M25
M23
M28
SL14
M22
M24
M20
M21
Floor-standing stapler-stacker electrical components 117

Figure 3-47 Floor-standing stapler-stacker sensors and switches
SR4
SR7 PS26
PS45 SW11 SR18
PS11
PS37
SR13
SR14 PS18
PS12 SW14 SW15
SR12
PS19
PS38
PS42
SR16 SR18
SR17
SR10
SR15
Table 3-27 Electrical component list, floor-standing stapler-stacker
Motor M11 Punch motor
Motor M12 Punch shift motor
Motor M13 Intermediate feed motor
Motor M14 Bin 3 shift motor
Motor M15 Bin 3 alienation motor
Motor M16 MBM feed motor
Motor M17 Internal output motor
Motor M18 Switchback motor
Motor M19 Buffer front motor
Motor M20 Staple motor
Motor M21 Stapler shift motor

Table 3-27 Electrical component list, floor-standing stapler-stacker (continued)
Motor M22 Jogger motor
Motor M23 Trailing edge assist motor
Motor M24 Y alignment motor
Motor M25 Bin 4 lift up motor
Motor M26 Bin 3 lift up motor
Motor M28 Bin 4 output motor
Motor M27 Stacking guide motor motor
Fan FAN11 Sub power fan
Solenoid SL Stage inlet drum drive solenoid
Solenoid SL MBM flapper solenoid
Solenoid SL Y alignment alienation solenoid
Switch SW11 Punch door switch (push type)
Switch SW14 Front door switch (lever type)
Switch SW15 Front door switch (push type)
Photo interrupter SR2 Punch home position sensor
Photo interrupter SR3 Punch shift home position sensor
Photo interrupter SR4 Bin 2 media full sensor
Photo interrupter SR5 Bin 3 shift roller alienation home position sensor
Photo interrupter SR6 Bin 3 shift roller home position sensor
Photo interrupter SR7 Bin 3 exit sensor
Photo interrupter SR8 Jogger home position sensor
Photo interrupter SR9 Staple shift home position sensor
Photo interrupter SR10 Staple tray media presence sensor
Photo interrupter SR11 Trailing edge assist home position sensor
Photo interrupter SR12 Bin 3 lower limit sensor
Photo interrupter SR13 Bin 3 upper limit sensor
Photo interrupter SR14 Bin 3 media presence sensor
Photo interrupter SR15 Bin 4 lower limit sensor
Photo interrupter SR16 Bin 4 upper limit sensor
Photo interrupter SR17 Bin 4 media presence sensor
Photo interrupter SR18 Stapler-stacker exit sensor
Photo interrupter SR19 Stacking guide home position sensor
Photo interrupter SR22 Bin 4 output roller alienation home position sensor
Photo interrupter PS12 Switchback inlet sensor (PCA mounted type)
Floor-standing stapler-stacker electrical components 119

Table 3-27 Electrical component list, floor-standing stapler-stacker (continued)
Photo interrupter PS18 Punch side registration sensor
Photo interrupter PS18 Bin 3 inlet sensor (PCA mounted type)
Photo interrupter PS19 Staple inlet sensor (PCA mounted type)
Photo interrupter PS26 MBM inlet sensor (PCA mounted type)
Photo interrupter PS27 Punch inlet roller rotation sensor
Photo interrupter PS30 Staple home position sensor
Photo interrupter PS31 Staple low sensor
Photo interrupter PS32 Staple ready sensor
Sensor PS11 Punch inlet sensor
Sensor PS14 Chad full sensor
Sensor PS37 Bin 3 media full sensor 1
Sensor PS42 Bin 4 media full sensor 1
LED PS13 Chad full sensor
LED PS17 Punch side registration sensor
LED PS36 Bin 3 media full sensor 1
LED PS43 Bin 4 media full sensor 1
Floor-standing stapler-stacker motor control

The floor-standing stapler-stacker has 18 motors for the paper feed, paper alignment, output bin lift up/
down, and staple functions.
The table below describes which components the floor-standing stapler-stacker motors drive.
Table 3-28 Floor-standing stapler-stacker motors
M11 Punch motor Punch assembly No
M12 Punch shift motor Move the punch assembly No
M13 Intermediate feed motor Intermediate feed roller and drum ass’y No
M14 Bin 3 shift motor Move in the direction of the width of output bin 3 No
delivery roller
M15 Bin 3 alienation motor Disengage the output bin 3 delivery roller No
M16 MBM feed motor Punch inlet roller, punch exit roller No
Output bin 2 delivery roller
M17 Internal output roller Inner output roller No

Table 3-28 Floor-standing stapler-stacker motors (continued)
M18 Switchback motor Output bin 3 switchback roller No
Output bin 3 delivery roller
M19 Buffer front motor Buffer front roller No
M20 Staple motor Built-in motor of staple ass’y Yes
M21 Stapler shift motor Moving the stapler in the feed direction No
M22 Jogger motor Move in the direction of the width of jogger Yes
M23 Trailing edge assist motor Trailing edge assist ass’y No
M24 Y alignment motor Alignment roller Yes
M25 Bin 4 lift up motor Lift up/down the output bin 4 No
M26 Bin 3 lift up motor Lift up/down the output bin 3 No
M27 Bin 4 output motor Output bin 4 delivery roller No
Disengage the output bin 4 delivery roller
M28 Stacking guide motor Stacking guide No
Floor-standing stapler-stacker fan control

The floor-standing stapler-stacker has one fan.
The floor-standing stapler-stacker has a fan that prevents the temperature from rising in the sub power
supply area. The table below describes the floor-standing stapler-stacker fan functions.
Table 3-29 Floor-standing stapler-stacker fans
Abbreviatio Component Cooling area Type Speed Failure

n detection
FAN11 Sub power supply fan Sub power supply Intake Full Yes
Floor-standing stapler-stacker other functions

Learn about the other floor-standing stapler-stacker delivery functions.
The floor-standing stapler-stacker has the following delivery functions.
● Stack mode
● Punch mode
● Job offset mode
● Staple mode
Floor-standing stapler-stacker fan control 121

550-sheet feeder jam detection
Learn about the 550-sheet feeder jam detection function.
The paper feeder uses the following sensor to detect the presence of paper and to check whether paper is
being fed correctly or has jammed.
● Paper feeder feed sensor (SR23)

4 Solve problems
Learn about solving printer problems.
How to search for printer documentation

The CPMD, error codes, and other support documentation for each printer is found on the internal HP portals.
These portals are on WISE for Channel (please see Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (HP Partner Portal)
on page 126 below for instructions on how to navigate to the site) and WISE . WISE for Channel is available to
HP channel partners and WISE is available to call agents, service technicians, and other HP internal users. The
level of detail available will depend on your access credentials. To learn how to find support content in WISE,
watch the video here.
How to search WISE for printer documentation

These instructions are for HP internal use by call agents, service technicians, and other internal users.
To learn how to find support content in WISE, watch the video here: Finding Error Code and Control Panel
Message Document in WISE.
To view a list of control panel message documents per printer, search for the following topic in WISE: HP
LaserJet, OfficeJet, PageWide, ScanJet Enterprise - Control panel message document (CPMD) list.
How to search for specific error codes
Use WISE to quickly find error code troubleshooting procedures using the following steps.
1. Type the printer model number (for example, M609) in the dialog box search field.
Figure 4-1 WISE search box
2. A drop-down list appears. Click on the full printer series name (for example, HP LaserJet Enterprise M609
series) in the list.
Solve problems 123

Figure 4-2 WISE drop-down list
3. Type the error code (for example, 13.E1.D3) in the keyword field. The error code troubleshooting content
displays in the All Search Results area.
TIP: Another method to find error code information is to use WISE to navigate to the printer detail
page (PDP), and then search Troubleshooting > Error Code Search.
Figure 4-3 WISE search results
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (CSDP)

Learn how to access WISE by accessing the HP Channel Services Delivery Platform (CSDP) if you are an HP
Channel Partner.
IMPORTANT: A Partner Admin must requested access, via the CSDP portal, to create a new user before you
can sign into the CDSP portal.
Use WISE to find printer information. For example:
124 Chapter 4 Solve problems

● User Guides
● Service Manuals
● Control Panel Message Documents (CPMDs)
● Product Detail Pages (PDPs)
● Certificate of Volatility (CoV)
1. Sign-in to the CSDP portal (click csdp.hp.com to access the sign in page).
Figure 4-4 CSDP sign in page
2. On the CSDP home page, click Knowledge & Training.
Figure 4-5 CSDP portal home page

HP
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (CSDP) 125

3. Select HP Technical Documentation to open the WISE portal page.
Figure 4-6 CSDP portal HP Knowledge page

HP
Figure 4-7 WISE portal page
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (HP Partner Portal)

Learn how to access WISE by accessing the HP Partner Portal if you are an HP Channel Partner.
NOTE: If this is your first visit to the HP Partner Portal, you will be asked to create an account. Follow the
setup directions using your HP Partner credentials.
1. Open the HP Partner First Portal located at https://partner.hp.com.

2. Select the Services & Support tab, and then select Technical Support.
3. Select Technical Documentation.
4. You will be taken to the WISE portal.
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (HP Partner Portal) 127

Play the video:
View a video of how to access WISE (HP channel partners)
Determine the problem source

When the printer malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the printer control panel alerts the
user to the situation.
This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist and a troubleshooting flow chart to filter out many
possible causes of the problem.
● Use the pre-troubleshooting check list to gather information about the problem from the customer.
● Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The flowchart
guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the malfunction.
Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues:
● Are supply items within their rated life?
● Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors?
NOTE: The customer is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in good condition.
Pre-troubleshooting checklist
The following table includes basic questions to ask the customer to quickly help define the problem(s).
Table 4-1 Pre-troubleshooting checklist
General topic Questions
Environment ● Is the printer installed on a solid, level surface (+/- 1°)?
● Is the power-supply voltage within ± 10 volts of the specified power source?
● Is the power-supply plug inserted in the printer and the wall outlet (not a surge
protector)?
● Is the operating environment within the specified parameters?
● Is the printer exposed to ammonia gas, such as that produced by diazo copiers or
office cleaning materials?
NOTE: Diazo copiers produce ammonia gas as part of the copying processes.
Ammonia gas (from cleaning supplies or a diazo copier) can have an adverse effect
on some printer components (for example, the toner cartridge or cartridges OPC).
● Is the printer exposed to direct sunlight?
● Is the printer exposed to an air conditioning or heating vent that can cause
temperature fluctuations?
Media ● Does the customer use only supported media?
● Is the media in good condition (no curls, folds, or distortion)?
● Is the media stored correctly and within environmental limits?

Table 4-1 Pre-troubleshooting checklist (continued)
General topic Questions
Input trays ● Is the amount of media in the tray within specifications?
● Is the media correctly placed in the tray?
● Are the paper guides aligned with the stack (no gaps in the stack or excessive
pressure causing the stack to bow)?
● Is the tray (or trays) correctly installed in the printer?
Toner cartridge ● Is the toner cartridge (or cartridges) installed correctly?
NOTE: If country/region specific toner cartridges are available for the printer, make sure
the correct cartridge is installed.
Transfer unit and fuser ● Are the transfer unit and fuser installed correctly?
NOTE: For printers with an intermediate transfer belt (ITB), is the ITB installed
correctly and fully seated. If a replacement ITB was installed, was all of the packing
materials removed?
Covers ● Is the toner cartridge door closed?
Condensation ● Does condensation occur following a temperature change (particularly in winter

following cold storage)? If so, wipe affected parts dry or leave the printer on for 10
to 20 minutes.
● Was a toner cartridge (or cartridges) opened soon after being moved from a cold
to a warm room? If so, allow the toner cartridge (or cartridges) to sit at room
temperature for 1 to 2 hours.
Miscellaneous ● Check for and remove any non-HP components (toner cartridges, memory modules,
and EIO cards) from the printer.
● Remove the printer from the network and ensure that the failure is associated with
the printer before beginning troubleshooting.
● For any color print-quality issues (color printers only), calibrate the printer, and
then print a diagnostics page to verify print quality.
Troubleshooting flowchart
This flowchart highlights the general processes to follow to quickly isolate and solve printer hardware
problems.
Each row depicts a major troubleshooting step. Follow a “yes” answer to a question to proceed to the
next major step. A “no” answer indicates that more testing is needed. Go to the appropriate section in this
chapter and follow the instructions there. After completing the instructions, go to the next major step in this
troubleshooting flowchart.
Table 4-2 Troubleshooting flowchart
Step Question Action
1 Is the printer on and does a

readable message display?
Power on
Troubleshooting flowchart 129

Table 4-2 Troubleshooting flowchart (continued)
Yes No Basic printer functions should start up when the printer is

connected into an electrical outlet and the power switch is
pushed to the on position.
During normal operation cooling fans and/or motors

should be operating. Place a hand over fan intake or
exhaust vents to determine if the fan or fans are spinning.
Lean close to the printer to hear motors rotating.
If fans and/or motors are operating, the dc side of the

power supply is functioning.
Always make sure that the printer is plugged into a

known-functioning wall receptacle. Remove power strips
and plug the printer directly into a wall receptacle.
After the control panel display is functional, see step 2.
2 Does the message Ready

display on the control
Control panel?
panel
messages
Yes No After the errors have been corrected, go to step 3.
Use the control panel message document (CPMD) section

in this manual to correct any displayed error messages.
3 Open the Troubleshooting

menu and print an event
Event log log to see the history of
errors with this printer.
Does the event log print?
Yes No If the event log does not print, check for error messages.
If paper jams inside the printer, see the jams section of the
printer service manual.
If error messages display on the control panel when trying

to print an event log, see the control panel message
document (CPMD) section of this manual.
After successfully printing and evaluating the event log,

see step 4.
4 Open the Reports menu

and print the configuration
Information pages to verify that all the
pages accessories are installed.
Are all the accessories

installed?
Yes No If accessories that are installed are not listed on the

configuration page, remove the accessory and reinstall it.
Make sure that the most recent firmware is installed. See

the firmware upgrade section of this manual for more
information.
After evaluating the configuration pages, see step 5.

Table 4-2 Troubleshooting flowchart (continued)
5 Does the print quality

meet the customer's
Print quality requirements?
Yes No Compare the images with the sample defects in the

Image-quality troubleshooting section of this manual.
Solve print-quality and copy-quality issues as needed.
After the print quality is acceptable, see step 6.
6 Can the customer print

successfully from the host
Interface computer?
Yes. This is the end of the No Verify that all I/O cables are connected correctly and that a
troubleshooting process. valid IP address is listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration
page.
If error messages display on the control panel or appear

in the event log, see the control-panel message document
(CPMD) section of this manual.
When the customer can print from the host computer, this
is the end of the troubleshooting process.
Firmware upgrades
Learn about printer firmware upgrades.
To download the most recent firmware upgrade for the printer, go to:
● In the US, go to http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj6700 or http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj6800MFP

http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX677MFP.
a. Select Get drivers, Software, and Firmware, and then select the appropriate product by name.
NOTE: More than one printer model might be listed. Make sure to select the correct model so that
the upgraded firmware supports all of the printer functions.
b. Select the driver language and operating system.
c. Locate the firmware download, and then select Download.
● Outside the U.S., go to www.hp.com/support.
– Select your country/region.
– Select Drivers & Downloads.
– Enter the product name in the Find my product dialogue box, and then select Go.
TIP: Click on the How do I find my product name/number? link to see a short video on identifying
the printer's name and number.
Firmware upgrades 131

– Select the appropriate product by name.
– Select the driver language and operating system.
– Locate the firmware download, and then select Download.
Determine the installed revision of firmware

Learn about how to determine the version of installed printer firmware.
Print a configuration page to determine the installed revision of firmware.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.
2. Open the Configuration/Status pages menu.
3. Touch Configuration Page to select it.
4. Touch the print icon to print the pages.
5. Find the firmware revision on the configuration page.
Figure 4-8 Configuration page firmware version
Firmware Revision
Rev
HP LaserJet M
Sep\13\2019 6:56:00 AM
HP Embedded Web Server

Learn how to perform a firmware upgrade using the HP Embedded Web Server.

NOTE: The printer should be at the Ready state.
The firmware update might take 10 minutes or longer based on the input/output (I/O) transfer rates and the
time it takes for the printer to reinitialize.
1. Open an Internet browser window.
2. Enter the printer IP address in the URL line.
3. Select the Firmware Upgrade link from the General tab or from the Troubleshooting tab.
4. Browse to the location that the firmware upgrade file was downloaded to, and then select the firmware
file. The file has a .bdl file extension. Select the Install button to perform the upgrade.
NOTE: Do not close the browser window OR interrupt communication until the HP Embedded Web
Server (EWS) displays the confirmation page.
5. After the printer reinitializes, print a configuration page and verify that the latest firmware version has
been installed.
USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu)

Learn how to perform a USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) update from the control panel.
1. Copy the .bdl file to a portable USB flash drive.
2. Touch the middle of the control panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.
Figure 4-9 Open the Pre-boot menu
1 2
3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +3 Administrator, and then touch the OK button.
4. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +1 Download, and then touch the OK button.
5. Insert the USB flash drive with the .bdl file on it into the USB port on the printer.
NOTE: If the error message No USB Thumbdrive Files Found displays on the control panel display, try
using a different portable storage device.
6. Use the arrow buttons to highlight USB Thumbdrive, and then touch the OK button.
7. Use the arrow buttons to highlight the .bdl file, and then touch the OK button.
NOTE: The upgrade process can take 10 minutes or longer to complete.
TIP: If there is more than one .bdl file on the storage device, make sure to select the correct file for this
printer.
USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) 133

8. When the message Complete displays on the control panel display, touch the down arrow button
several times until the message Continue displays.
9. Touch the OK button to begin the upgrade. When the upgrade is complete, the printer will initialize to the
Ready state.
10. When the upgrade process is complete, print a configuration page and verify that the upgrade firmware
version was installed.
USB flash drive firmware (control panel menu)

Learn how to perform a USB flash drive firmware (control panel menu) update from the control panel.
1. Copy the .bdl file to a portable USB flash drive.
2. Turn the printer on, and then wait until it reaches the Ready state.
3. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.
4. Open the Maintenance menu.
5. Touch the USB Firmware Upgrade button.
6. Insert the USB flash drive with the .bdl file on it into the USB port on the printer.
7. Touch the .bdl file, and then touch the Upgrade button.
TIP: If there is more than one .bdl file on the storage device, make sure to select the correct file for this
printer.
8. Select one of the following options:
● Upgrade
NOTE: The upgrade process can take 10 minutes or longer to complete.
● Re-install
● Downgrade
9. When the upgrade is complete, the printer will initialize to the Ready state.
Comprehensive list of troubleshooting tools

Learn about the printer troubleshooting tools.
Engine test
Learn about troubleshooting the printer using the engine test diagnostic.
When the engine test is performed, a test page with lines prints if the engine is functioning correctly.
NOTE: Depending on printer models, either a simplex engine test page, a duplex engine test page, or both
simplex and duplex engine test pages might be available.

Use a small pointed object to depress and hold the engine test button (location varies depending on the
printer model). An engine test page prints. The test page can use only Tray 2 as the paper source, so make
sure that paper is loaded in Tray 2.
Possible engine test pages (printer dependent)
● A series of lines parallel to the short end of the page.
● A series of lines parallel to the long end of the page.
Figure 4-10 Engine test button
Control panel checks

Learn about control panel troubleshooting.
The printer includes a diagnostic test mode for the touchscreen control panels.
Touchscreen diagnostic mode

Learn about touchscreen diagnostic mode.
Use the diagnostics in this section to test the control-panel hardware and embedded firmware. These
tests are useful for checking control-panel functionality independent of the printer control-panel system
diagnostics.
1. Locate the diagnostic-tests access button on the back of the control panel, and then press the button.
Figure 4-11 Diagnostic-tests access button — 8-inch control panel
Control panel checks 135

Figure 4-12 Diagnostic-tests access button — 10-inch control panel
2. Observe the control panel screen as it cycles through the following colors:
● Red
● Green
● Blue
● Black
● White
Open the control panel system diagnostic tests

Learn about accessing the control panel system diagnostics tests from a touchscreen control panel.
Use the following procedure to open the control panel system diagnostics tests.
1. Turn the printer power off, and then on again.
1 2

3. On the Pre-boot menu screen, use the following buttons to navigate the tests.
Figure 4-14 Pre-boot menu
Table 4-3 Pre-boot menu button descriptions
Button Description
Use this button to see more information about a selected item.
Use this button to scroll up through menu items.
Use this button to select a highlighted menu item.
Use this button to scroll down through menu items.
Use this button to go back to the previous menu.
Not used.
Open the control panel system diagnostic tests 137

4. Use the down arrow button to scroll to +3 Administration, and then press the OK button to select it.
Figure 4-15 Access the administration menu
5. Use the down arrow button to scroll to +E CP Diagnostics, and then press the OK button to select it.
NOTE: An administrator password might be required to continue.
Figure 4-16 Access the diagnostics menu
Screen test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic screen test.
1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.

2. With 1 Screen Test highlighted, press the OK button to select it.
Figure 4-17 Open the screen test
The blue horizontal gradient screen appears.
Figure 4-18 Blue horizontal gradient screen
3. Touch the touchscreen to scroll though the remaining touchscreen test screens.
NOTE: Touch the Home button to exit the test.
Table 4-4 Touchscreen test screens
Screen Description
Green horizontal gradient
Screen test 139

Table 4-4 Touchscreen test screens (continued)
Screen Description
Red horizontal gradient
Blue vertical gradient
Green vertical gradient
Red vertical gradient
Blue with horizontal interlaced
Green with horizontal interlaced
Red with horizontal interlaced

Screen Description
Blue with vertical interlaced
Green with vertical interlaced
Red with vertical interlaced
Black with white center
White with black center
Checkerboard
Screen test 141

Screen Description
Multicolor stripes
Blue green grid meshing
Touch test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic touch test.
2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 2 Touch Test, and then press the OK button to select it.
Figure 4-19 Open the touch test

3. Use your finger to touch the white grid on the display.
Figure 4-20 Touch the white grid
A mark appears on the grid where it was touched.
Figure 4-21 Verify the mark
SoftKey test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic SoftKey test.
SoftKey test 143

2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 3 SoftKey Test, and then press the OK button to select it.
Figure 4-22 Open the softkey test
3. When prompted, touch the Home button.
Figure 4-23 Touch the Home button
If the test is successful, the following screen appears on the display.
NOTE: Touch the screen to exit the test.

Figure 4-24 Successful test
Backlight test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic backlight test.
2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 4 Backlight Test, and then press the OK button to select it.
After selecting the 4 Backlight Test, the screen automatically dims, and then returns to full brightness.
NOTE: Touch any key to exit the test.
Figure 4-25 Open the backlight test
Sound test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic sound test.
Backlight test 145

2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 5 Sound Test, and then press the OK button to select it.
After selecting the 5 Sound Test, the printer emits a series of audible tones.
Figure 4-26 Open the sound test
Keyboard test (flow models only)

Learn about the control panel system diagnostic keyboard test.
IMPORTANT: The control-panel system diagnostic tests include a 6 Keyboard Test item. This test is not
valid for printers that do not have a pull out keyboard installed, even though this option is present in the
control-panel system diagnostic tests menu.
If the 6 Keyboard Test is opened on a non-flow printer, the printer power must be turned off to exit the test.
HP does not recommend turning the printer power off during the control-panel system diagnostic tests.
1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests..

2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 6 Keyboard Test, and then press the OK button to select it.
Figure 4-27 Open the keyboard test
3. When prompted, touch the H key on the keyboard or the Home button to exit the test.
Version
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic version information.
2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 7 Version, and then press the OK button to select it.
Select 7 Version to view the following types of information:
NOTE: The following types of information are for the control panel only, not the printer.
● Panel ID
● Hardware (version)
● Firmware (version)
● KB Hw (version)
● KB Firm (version)
● LCD Vendor
● Touch Controller Version
Version 147
Figure 4-28 Open the version information
Control panel diagnostic flowcharts

Use the flowcharts in this section to troubleshoot the following control panel problems.
● Touchscreen is blank, white, or dim (no image).
● Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond.
● Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone.
● No control panel sound.
● Home button is unresponsive.
● Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional).
Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image)

To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

Figure 4-29 Touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no image)
Black display White display Dim display
(no backlight (no image) (no image)
or image)
Is the Home button

Y
illuminated
(bright white)?
Is the product in bright
Open the sunlight?
diagnostic function. If yes, move the
N
product to a
different location.
Touch the display or Home button

to exit sleep mode. Make sure that
the product is plugged in and
the power is turned on. Does an image
appear on the Y
control panel?
Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
N backlight test.
Turn the product power off.

Does the display
Y Inspect and reseat the
turn on?
control panel cables.
Remove and reseat the
formatter cables.
Make sure that the
Problem solved.
formatter LEDs function. Is the backlight
N Y Y
adjustable?
Are the formatter

LEDs functioning? Problem fixed? Y
Do not replace the control panel.

N Turn the product power off.
Check connection and cables on the formatter
and at the control panel.
Turn the product power off. N

Remove and reseat the formatter
cables.
Do not replace the control panel.
N
Replace the
control panel.
Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone

Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone 149

Figure 4-30 Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone
Touchscreen
has an
unresponsive
zone
Is the area of the

touchscreen you are touching
greyed out (intentionally
deactivated)?
Open the
Perform the
touch test.
Does the previously

inactive area respond
to a touch?
Y
Turn the product
power off,
and then
on again.
Replace the Does the previously

N inactive area respond
control panel.
to a touch?
Do not replace the

control panel.
No control panel sound


Figure 4-31 No control panel sound
Control panel
has no
sound
Open the following menus:

Administration
Display Settings
Key Press Sound
Select the following:
On
Save
Can sounds
be heard?
N
Y
Open the
Perform the sound test.
Can sounds
be heard?
Y
N
Do not replace the
control panel.
Turn the product power off.
Remove the control panel.
Check the cables to the speaker.
Replace the control panel. N Reseat the cables to the speaker.
Turn the product power on.
Can sounds be heard?
Home button is unresponsive

Home button is unresponsive 151

Figure 4-32 Home button is unresponsive
Home button
Unresponsive
Note: If illuminated: continue.
If not illuminated: verify that
the power is turned on,
the printer is not in sleep mode,
turn the power off, and
then on again.
Open the
Perform the Home
button test.
Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?
Turn the product power off,

and then on again.
Open the
Perform the
Home button test.
Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?
Y
Replace the Do not replace the

control panel. control panel.
Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)

Review the following information when the HIP is not functioning, but the control panel is functional.

Figure 4-33 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)
Hardware integration
pocket (HIP)
not functional
(control panel
functional)
Check that all installed hardware integration

pocket devices are within HP specifications.
The control panel provides only 0.5 Amps to
the port. If an installed device attempts to draw
more power than is provided, the port is
automatically disabled. Troubleshoot third-party
devices with the device manufacturer.
Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP)

Learn about the control-panel Print menu (SFP) and the Copy/Print menu (MFP).
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu, and then select the Print menu (SFP) or the
Copy/Print menu (MFP).
To print: At the printer control panel, touch (MFP) or use the arrow buttons (SFP) to select the printer
icon . For the SFP, press the OK button to print the pages.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Copy Settings Image preview Make optional Use this menu to

configure how Copy
MFP Require preview behaves.
Disable preview
Copy Settings Copies 1-9999 Configure the

default options
MFP Default = 1 for copy jobs. If
the user does
not specify the
job options when
creating the job, the
default options are
used.
Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 153

Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
Copy Settings Sides Original Sides 1-sided Use to indicate

whether the original
MFP 2-sided document is printed
on one or both
Flip pages up sides. For example,
select Original Sides
1-sided and Output
Sides 2-sided when
the original is
printed on one
side, but you want
to make two-sided
copies.
Select Flip pages up

to print the pages
with long edge of
the in the landscape
orientation.
Copy Settings Sides Output Sides 1-sided Use to indicate

whether the copies
MFP 2-sided should be printed
on one or both
Flip pages up sides. For example,
select Original Sides
1-sided and Output
Sides 2-sided when
the original is
printed on one
side, but you want
to make two-sided
copies.
Select Flip pages up

to print the pages
with long edge of
the in the landscape
orientation.
Copy Settings Watermark Watermark Type None* Use to set a text

watermark.
MFP Text
Copy Settings Watermark Watermark Text Draft Select a predefined

text watermark.
MFP Confidential
Secret
Top Secret
Urgent
Copy Settings Watermark Text Font Letter Gothic* Select the font of
the text watermark.
MFP Antique Olive
New Century
Schoolbook Roman
Garamond Antiqua

Copy Settings Watermark Text Size 30 point Select the font point
size of the text
MFP 40 point* watermark.
60 point
Copy Settings Watermark Darkness 1 - (Lighter) Select the darkness

of the text
MFP 2 watermark.
3*
5 - (Darker)
Copy Settings Stamps Stamp Content User-defined value Use to set a stamp
in any or all the
MFP None* following locations
in the document:
IP address
● Top Left
User name
● Top Center
Product information
● Top Right
Page number
● Bottom Left
Date and time
● Bottom Center
● Bottom Right
Copy Settings Stamps Text Font Letter Gothic* Select the font of
the stamp.
MFP Antique Olive
New Century
Schoolbook Roman
Garamond Antiqua
Copy Settings Stamps Text Size 8 point Select the font point
size of the stamp.
MFP 12 point*
20 point
Copy Settings Stamps White Disabled* Select the check box

background to enable a white
MFP Enabled background for the
stamp.

Copy Settings Scan Mode Standard document* Use to indicate the

type of original
MFP Prompt for additional document to be
pages scanned.
Book Select Prompt for

additional pages to
2-sided ID copy or scan an
original document
that has more
pages than the
document feeder
can accommodate
at one time, or
to scan originals
of different sizes
that cannot be
scanned together,
and then combine
these separate scan
jobs into a single
job.
Copy Settings Reduce/Enlarge Automatic* Scale the size of

the document up or
MFP Include margins down.
Manual To reduce the

image, select a
Default=100 scaling percentage
that is less than
100. To enlarge
the image, select a
scaling percentage
that is greater than
100.
When Include
margins is enabled,
the printer reduces
the image slightly
to fit the entire
scanned image
within the printable
area on the page.

Copy Settings Original Size Automatically detect* Specify the size

of the original
MFP Letter (8.5x11) document.
Mixed Letter/Legal
Legal (8.5x14)
Executive (7.25x10.5)
Statement (5.5x8.5)
Oficio (8.5x13)
4x6
5x7
5x8
A4 (210x297 mm)
A5 (148x210 mm)
A6 (105x148 mm)
RA4 (215x305 mm)
B5 (182x257 mm)
B6 (128x182 mm)
10x15cm
16K (195x270 mm)
16K (184x260 mm)
16K (197x273 mm)
DPostcard JIS
(148x200 mm)
Oficio (216x340 mm)

Copy Settings Paper Selection Paper Size Match original size* Select the size of
paper to use when
MFP Letter (8.5x11) printing or making
copies.
Legal (8.5x14)
Executive (7.25x10.5)
Statement (5.5x8.5)
Oficio (8.5x13)
3x5
4x6
5x7
5x8
A4 (210x297 mm)
A5 (148x210 mm)
A6 (105x148 mm)
RA4 (215x305 mm)
B5 (182x257 mm)
B6 (128x182 mm)
10x15cm
16K (195x270 mm)
16K (184x260 mm)
16K (197x273 mm)
Postcard JIS (100x148

mm)
DPostcard JIS
(148x200 mm)
Envelope #9
Envelope #10
Envelope Monarch
Envelope #10
Envelope B5
Envelope C5
Envelope C6
Envelope DL
Custom
Oficio (216x340 mm)

Copy Settings Paper Selection Paper Type Any Type Select the type of
paper to use when
MFP Plain* printing or making
copies.
Light 60-74g
Intermediate 85-95g
Mid-Weight 96-110g
Heavy 111-130g
Extra Heavy 131-175g
Cardstock 176-220g
Mono Transparency
Labels
Letterhead
Envelope
Preprinted
Prepunched
Colored
Bond
Recycled
Rough
HP EcoFFICIENT
Light Bond
Copy Settings Paper Selection Paper Tray Automatically detect* Select which tray to
use when printing or
MFP Manually Feed making copies.
Tray 1
Tray 2
Copy Settings Booklet Booklet Format Enabled Select to have

Booklet Format off
MFP Disabled* or on.
Copy Settings Booklet Booklet Format Borders on each Enabled Select to have
page borders printed on
MFP Disabled* the page.
Copy Settings Content Orientation Portrait* Specify the way

the content of the
MFP Landscape original document is
placed on the page.
Copy Settings Pages per Sheet One* Select how many

pages to print on
MFP Two one sheet.
Four

Copy Settings Page Order Right, then down Select to print the
pages in rows or
MFP Down, then right columns.
Copy Settings Add page borders Enabled Select the Add page
borders checkbox to
MFP Disabled* add borders to the
pages.
Copy Settings Image Adjustment Darkness 1 - (Lighter) Adjust to increase

or decrease the
MFP 2 amount of white
and black in the
3 colors.
5*
9 - (Darker)
Copy Settings Image Adjustment Contrast 1 - (Less) Adjust to increase

or decrease the
MFP 2 difference between
the lightest and
3 darkest color on the
page.
4
5*
9 - (More)
Copy Settings Image Adjustment Background 1 - (Normal) Adjust if you

Cleanup are having trouble
MFP 2 copying a faint
image.
3*
5*
9 - (Cleaner)

Copy Settings Image Adjustment Sharpness 1 - (Less) Adjust to sharpen or

soften the image.
MFP 2
3*
5 - (More)
Copy Settings Optimize Text/ Text Select to optimize

Picture for the output of
MFP Mixed* a particular type of
content.
Printed picture
Photograph
Copy Settings Edge-to-Edge Normal When the Edge-

(recommended) to-Edge feature
MFP is enabled, the
Edge-to-Edge output product minimizes
margins and prints
as close to the edge
of the paper as
possible.
Copy Settings Erase Edges Use inches Enabled* Use the Erase Edges
feature to remove
MFP Disabled blemishes, such as
dark borders or
staple marks, by
cleaning the edges
of the scanned
image.
Disabling Use
inches changes the
measurements to
millimeters.
Copy Settings Erase Edges Front Side Specify a different Sets the width of
width for each edge the edge to clean.
MFP
Apply same width to all
edges*
All edges value
Default = 0.00
Copy Settings Erase Edges Back Side Specify a different Sets the width of
width for each edge the edge to clean.
MFP
Apply same width to all
edges
Mirror front side*

Copy Settings Collate Collate on* When Collate on is

selected, each set
MFP Collate off of copied pages are
assembled in the
same order as the
original document.
Copy Settings Multi-feed Disabled Use this feature

Detection to detect
MFP Enabled* when multiple
pages are fed
simultaneously into
the ADF (automatic
document feeder) or
sheet-feed scanner.
Copy Settings
MFP
Enable Print from Enabled Enables the printer

USB Drive to open a file from a
Disabled* USB drive.
Manage Stored Jobs Job Sort Order Job Name* This option allows
you list the jobs
Date* either alphabetically
or chronologically.
Manage Stored Jobs Retain Temporary Do not retain Sets which

Jobs temporary jobs will
Personal jobs only be retained in the
event of a printer
All temporary jobs reboot.
Manage Stored Jobs Temporary Job 1-300 Configure global

Storage Limit settings for jobs
Default = 32 that are stored in
the printer memory.
The Temporary
Job Storage Limit
feature specifies
the number of
temporary jobs that
can be stored on
the printer. The
maximum allowed
value is 300.
Manage Stored Jobs Temporary Job Off Configure global

Storage Retention settings for
30 minutes temporary jobs that
are stored in the
1 hour printer memory.
4 hours The Temporary

Stored Job
1 day Retention feature
specifies the
1 week amount of time
temporary jobs can
4 weeks be stored on the
printer.
3 days

Manage Stored Jobs Standard Stored Off Configure global

Job Retention settings for jobs
30 minutes that are stored in
the printer memory.
1 hour
The Standard Stored
4 hours Job Retention
feature specifies the
1 day amount of time jobs
can be stored on the
1 week printer.
4 weeks
3 days
Default Print Number of Copies Range: 1-32000 Sets the default

Options number of copies
Default = 1 for a copy job.
This default applies
when the Copy
function or the
Quick Copy function
is initiated from
the printer Home
screen.
Default Print Paper Selection Paper size Select from a list of Configures the
Options sizes that the printer default paper size,
Paper type supports. type and tray used
for print jobs.
Paper tray
Default Print Default Custom X Dimension Range: 3.00-8.50 Configures the

Options Paper Size inches default paper size
that is used when
Default = 8.5 inches the user selects
Custom as the paper
size for a print job.
Default Print Default Custom Y Dimension Range: 5.00-14.00 Configures the

Options Paper Size inches default paper size
that is used when
Default = 14 inches the user selects
Custom as the paper
size for a print job.
Default Print Default Custom Use Inches Enabled*

Options Paper Size
Disabled
Default Print Output Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate

Options whether the original
2-sided document is printed
on one or both
sides.
Default Print Edge-to-Edge Normal Use to avoid

Options (recommended)* shadows that can
appear along the
Edge-to-Edge output edges of copies
when the original
document is printed
close to the edges.

Default Print Resolution FastRes 1200* Use to select the

Options level of desired print
ProRes 1200 quality.
Default Print Resolution Economode Enabled Text is printed

Options using less toner.
Disabled* This setting is
useful when you
are printing drafts.
You can turn
on this option
independently of
other print quality
settings.
PCL and Postscript Courier Font Regular* Select which version

Settings of the Courier
Dark font you want to
use. The factory
default setting is
Regular, which uses
an average stroke
width. The Dark
setting can be used
if a heavier Courier
font is needed.
PCL and Postscript Wide A4 Enabled Changes the

Settings printable area of
Disabled* A4-size paper. If
you enable this
option, eighty 10-
pitch characters can
be printed on a
single line of A4
paper.
PCL and Postscript Print PS Errors Enabled Use this feature

Settings to select whether
Disabled* a PostScript (PS)
error page is printed
when the printer
encounters a PS
error.
PCL and Postscript Print PDF Errors Enabled Selects whether a

Settings PDF error page is
Disabled* printed when the
printer encounters a
PDF error.

PCL and Postscript Personality Automatic* Configures the

Settings default print
PCL language or
personality for the
PS printer. Normally
you should not
PDF change the printer
language. If you
change the setting
to a specific
printer language,
the printer does
not automatically
switch from one
language to another
unless specific
software commands
are sent to it.
PCL and Postscript PCL Font Settings Font Source Internal Selects the font
Settings source for the
Disk resident* user-soft default
font. The list of
available options
varies depending on
the installed printer
options.
PCL and Postscript PCL Font Settings Font Number Range: 0-110 Specifies the font
Settings number for the
Default = 0 user-soft default
font using the
source that is
specified in the Font
Source menu. The
printer assigns a
number to each
font and lists it on
the PCL font list.
The font number
displays in the Font
# column of the
printout.
PCL and Postscript PCL Font Settings Font Pitch Range: 0.44-99.99 If the Font Source
Settings option and the Font
Default = 10 Number setting
indicate a contour
font, then use this
feature to select a
default pitch (for a
fixed-spaced font).

PCL and Postscript PCL PCL Settings Form Length Range: 5-128 lines Controls the
Settings PCL print-command
Default = 60 options. PCL is
a set of printer
commands that
HP developed to
provide access to
printer features.
Use the Form

Length feature to
select the user soft
-default vertical
form length.
PCL and Postscript PCL PCL Settings Orientation Portrait* Select the
Settings orientation that is
Landscape most often used
for copy or scan
originals. Select the
Portrait option if the
short edge is at the
top or select the
Landscape option if
the long edge is at
the top.
PCL and Postscript PCL PCL Settings Symbol Set Select from a list of Select any one of
Settings symbol sets. several available
symbol sets from
the control panel.
A symbol set is a
unique grouping of
all the characters
in a font. The
factory default
value for this option
is PC-8. Either
PC-8 or PC-850
are recommended
for line-draw
characters.
PCL and Postscript PCL PCL Settings Append CR to LF Enabled When enabled, this
Settings option appends
Disabled* a carriage return
to each line
feed encountered
in backwards-
compatible PCL
jobs.
PCL and Postscript PCL PCL Settings Suppress Blank Enabled This option is for
Settings Pages users who are
Disabled* generating their
own PCL, which
could include extra
form feeds that
would cause blank
pages to be printed.
When the On option
is selected, form
feeds are ignored if
the page is blank.

PCL and Postscript PCL PCL Settings Media Source Standard* Use to select
Settings Mapping and maintain input
Classic trays by number
when you are not
using the printer
driver, or when the
software program
has no option for
tray selection. The
following options
are available:
Standard: Tray
numbering is based
on newer HP
LaserJet models.
Classic: Tray
numbering is based
on HP LaserJet 4
and older models.
Print Quality General Toner Density A sliding bar appears Lighten or darken
with the indicator set the print on the
in the middle between page by changing
Less and More. the toner density
setting.
Print Quality General REt Disabled Use this setting

to enable or
Enabled* disable Resolution
Enhancement
technology (REt),
which produces
smoother angles,
curves, and edges.
Print Quality Image Registration Tray Tray 1 Specify tray to be

adjusted
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Tray 5
Depends upon the

number of trays
installed

Print Quality Image Registration Front-side -5.00 mm to 5.00 mm Shift the margin
Horizontal Shift alignment to center
the image on the
Front-side page from top to
Vertical Shift bottom and from
left to right. You can
Back-side also align the image
Horizontal Shift on the front with
the image printed
Back-side Vertical on the back.
Shift
The direction that
is perpendicular to
the way the paper
passes through the
printer is referred to
as X. This is also
known as the scan
direction. X1 is the
scan direction for
a single-sided page
or for the second
side of a two-sided
page. X2 is the scan
direction for the
first side of a two-
sided page.
The direction that

the paper feeds
through the printer
is referred to as
Y. Y1 is the feed
direction for a
single-sided page
or for the second
side of a two-sided
page. Y2 is the feed
direction for the
first side of a two-
sided page.
Use the Adjust

Tray <X> menu
to adjust the
registration settings
for each tray.
Before adjusting
these values, print
a registration test
page. It provides
alignment guides
in the X and
Y directions so
you can determine
which adjustments
are necessary. You
can adjust values
for X1 Shift, X2
Shift, Y1 Shift, and
Y2 Shift.

Print Quality Image Registration Print Test Page Use the Print Test
Page option to
print a page to
test the image
registration. It
provides alignment
guides in the X
and Y directions so
you can determine
which adjustments
are necessary.
Print Quality Auto Sense Tray 1 Sense every page

Behavior
Sense first page
Sense transparency
only
Print Quality Auto Sense All Other Trays Sense first page
Behavior
Sense transparency
only
Print Quality Adjust Paper types Select from a list Print mode Select from a list of Changing the Print
of paper types paper types mode setting is
that the printer usually the first
supports. The Reset Paper Types thing to try to
available options resolve print-quality
are the same for problems. Problems
each paper type. can include toner
not sticking well
to the page, a
faint image of
the page repeated
on the same or
following page,
incorrect gloss level,
and so on.
Print Quality Adjust Paper types Select from a list Resistance mode Normal* Use this setting
of paper types to correct print
that the printer Up 1 quality problems
supports. The in low-humidity
available options Up 2 environments and
are the same for highly resistive
each paper type. paper.
Use the Up options

to solve print
quality problems
that are related to
faded images or
scattered toner on
certain paper types.
The Up options
raise the secondary
transfer bias.

Print Quality Adjust Paper types Select from a list Paper curl mode Normal* Use this setting to
of paper types reduce paper curl in
that the printer Reduced print jobs.
supports. The
available options
are the same for
each paper type.
Print Quality Optimize Line Detail Normal* Use this setting if

you have scattered
Off lines in printed
pages.
Alternate
Print Quality Optimize Moisture Control Normal*
Alternate
Print Quality Optimize Envelope control Normal
Reduced Temp
Print Quality Optimize Tray 1 Normal
Alternate
Print Quality Optimize Background Normal
Alternate
Print Quality Optimize Uniformity Normal

Control
Alternate 1
Alternate 2
Alternate 3
Print Quality Optimize Cac03 Off
On
Print Quality Optimize Best Normal Off
On
Print Quality Optimize Tracking Control Off
On
Print Quality Optimize Registration Normal
Alternate
Print Quality Optimize Transfer Control Normal
Alternate 1
Print Quality Optimize Moisture Control Normal
Alternate
Print Quality Optimize Reset Optimize Reset

Print Quality Edge Control Off
Light
Normal*
Maximum
Manage Trays Use Requested Tray Exclusively* Controls how the

printer handles jobs
When available that have specified
a specific input tray.
Two options are
available:
Exclusively: The
printer never selects
a different tray
when the user has
indicated that a
specific tray should
be used, even if that
tray is empty.
When available: The

printer pulls from
another tray if the
specified tray is
empty, even though
the specific tray was
indicated for the
job.
Manage Trays Manually Feed Always prompt* Indicate whether

Prompt a prompt should
Prompt on mismatch appear when the
type or size for
a job does not
match the specified
tray and the
printer pulls from
the multipurpose
tray instead.
Two options are
available:
Always: A prompt
always displays
before using the
multipurpose tray.
Prompt on
mismatch: A prompt
displays only if the
size or type do not
match or the tray is
empty.

Manage Trays Size/Type Prompt Display* Controls whether

the tray
Do not display configuration
message displays
whenever a tray is
closed. Two options
are available:
Display: Shows the

tray configuration
message when a
tray is closed. The
user is able to
configure the tray
settings directly
from this message.
Do not display:
Prevents the
tray configuration
message from
automatically
appearing.
Manage Trays Use Another Tray Allow* Use to turn on or

off the control panel
Do not allow prompt to select
another tray when
the specified tray is
empty. Two options
are available:
Allow: When this

option is selected
the user is
prompted to either
add paper to the
selected tray or to
choose a different
tray. This is the
factory default.
Do not allow:
When this option is
selected, the user
is not given the
option of selecting
a different tray. The
printer prompts the
user to add paper
to the tray that was
initially selected.

Manage Trays Alternative Off* Use to load

Letterhead Mode letterhead or
On preprinted paper
into the tray the
same way for all
print jobs, whether
you are printing to
one side of the
sheet or to both
sides of the sheet.
When this option is
selected, load the
paper as you would
for printing on
both sides. See the
user documentation
that came with
the printer for
instructions about
loading letterhead
for printing on both
sides. When this
option is selected,
the printer speed
slows to the speed
required for printing
on both sides.
Manage Trays Duplex Blank Pages Automatic* Controls how the

printer handles
Always two-sided jobs
(duplexing). Two
options are
available:
Automatic: Choose
this option to
skip printing blank
sides during a two-
sided print job. The
printer can print
jobs faster when
blank sides are
skipped.
Always: Choose this

option to print all
sides of a two-sided
job, even if one side
is blank. This might
be preferable for
certain jobs that use
paper types such
as letterhead or
prepunched paper.

Manage Trays Override A4/Letter Yes* Prints on letter-size

paper when an A4
No job is sent but no
A4-size paper is
loaded in the printer
(or to print on A4
paper when a letter-
size job is sent
but no letter-size
paper is loaded).
This option will also
override A3 with
ledger-size paper
and ledger with A3-
size paper.
Defeating interlocks
Learn about defeating printer interlocks.
Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For assembly or noise isolation, run the
diagnostic test when the front, right or toner supply (model specific) door is open.
Defeating the door interlocks allows observation of the paper pick operation.
Defeat the front door interlock
2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.
TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into a strip, and insert the
strip into the slot for the door interlock logic switch.
It might be easier to use a small flat-blade screwdriver to defeat the door interlock.
Figure 4-34 Defeat the front door interlock
Defeat the right door interlock
1. Open the right door.

Figure 4-35 Defeat the right door interlock
Defeat the toner supply door interlock (X654/X677 models)
1. Open the toner supply door.
Figure 4-36 Defeat the toner supply door interlock (X654/X677 models)
LED diagnostics (formatter)

Learn about troubleshooting the printer using formatter LEDs.
LED diagnostics (formatter) 175

The formatter has two network port LEDs. When the printer is connected to a properly working network
through a network cable, the amber LED indicates network activity, and the green LED indicates the link
status.
A blinking amber LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is off, a link has failed. For link failures, check
all of the network cable connections.
In addition, try to manually configure the network card link speed setting by using the printer control panel. To
change the link speed, complete the following steps.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Settings button.
● Networking
● Ethernet
● Link Speed
3. Touch the desired link speed setting, and then touch the Done button.
Scanner tests (MFP)

Learn about troubleshooting the MFP scanner tests.
Use the scanner tests
The Scanner Tests screen shows the sensor name, sensor state (active or inactive), and the number of times
the sensor has been toggled (activated).
1. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and select the Support Tools item.
● Troubleshooting
● Diagnostic Tests
● Scanner Tests
● – Sensors
3. Touch the sensor name on the Scanner Tests screen to display a sensor location graphic on the control
panel display.
4. Activate the desired sensor, and then check the control-panel display to verify the sensor state (active or
inactive).
● The State virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green when the sensor
is active.
● The Toggle virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green after
the sensor is activated and increments by one each time the sensor is interrupted (activated or
deactivated).
For example, opening the flatbed cover increments the Flatbed cover Toggle item count two times—
once when the door is opened, and once when the door is closed.
5. Select the Reset sensors item to reset the Toggle count item.

-or-
Touch the Cancel button to exit the Scanner Tests screen, and then touch the Cancel button again to
return the Diagnostic Tests menu.
Scanner test sensors
● ADF paper present
● ADF Y (length)
● ADF jam cover
● ADF paper path deskew
● ADF paper path pick success
● Paper path sensor 1 (unreachable)
● Flatbed Y (length)
● Flatbed cover
Disable cartridge check

Learn about the disable cartridge check troubleshooting diagnostic.
CAUTION: Do not perform a disable cartridge check on color printers that use a two-part cartridge design.
Doing so might result in toner cross contamination in the supply lines.
Use this diagnostic test to print internal pages or send an external job to the printer when a toner cartridge is
removed or exchanged. Supply errors are ignored while the printer is in this mode.
When the printer is in this mode, access the troubleshooting menus and print internal pages (the print quality
pages will be the most useful). This test can be used to isolate problems, such as noise, and to isolate
print-quality problems that are related to a toner cartridge.
NOTE: Do not remove or exchange the toner cartridge until after beginning the disable cartridge check
diagnostic.
● Troubleshooting
● Disable Cartridge Check
Print/stop test
Learn about the print/stop test troubleshooting diagnostic.
Use this diagnostic test to isolate the cause of problems such as image-formation defects and jams within the
engine.
During this test, stop the paper anywhere along the printer paper path. The test can be programmed to stop
printing internal pages or an external print job when the paper reaches a certain position. The test can also be
Disable cartridge check 177

programmed to stop from 0 to 60,000 ms. If the timer is set to a value that is greater than the job-print time,
the printer can recover in one of two ways.
Printer recovery (print/stop test)
● After the print job is completed press the OK button to return to the Troubleshooting menu before the
timer times out.
● After the timer times out, touch the Stop button. Activate the door switch to restart the engine and return
it to a normal state.
Common print/stop test timing millisecond (ms) stops
● 600 ms: The page has passed the registration area and the leading edge is just short of entering the
fuser. The image can be seen on the paper but has not fused. If the defect is visible then the cause might
be the drum, transfer roller, or a roller prior to, or in, the registration area.
● 1200 ms: The leading edge is about 18mm (0.71 in) into the top output bin. The image has gone through
the fuser. If the defect was not visible prior to the fuser, and is visible after the fuser, then the fuser it
is the likely cause of the print quality defect. Inspect the fuser for damage, debris, or labels stuck to the
fuser. Replace the fuser. Discuss media specifications and proper care of the fuser with the customer.
● Troubleshooting
● Print/Stop Test
3. Enter a range, and then touch the OK button.
Individual component diagnostics

Learn about printer individual component diagnostics.
Paper path test

Learn about the paper path test troubleshooting diagnostic.
This diagnostic test generates one or more test pages. Use these pages to isolate the cause of jams.
To isolate a problem, specify which input tray to use, and specify the number of copies to print. Print multiple
copies to help isolate intermittent problems. The following options become available after beginning the
diagnostic feature:
● Print Test Page: Run the paper-path test from the default settings: Tray 2, no duplex, and one copy. To
specify other settings, scroll down the menu, and select the setting, and then scroll back up and select
Print Test Page to start the test.
● Source Tray: Select Tray 1, Tray 2, or the optional tray.
● Number of Copies: Set the numbers of copies to be printed; the choices are 1, 10, 50, 100, or 500.

● Troubleshooting
● Paper Path Test
3. Select the paper path test options for the test.
Paper path sensors test

Learn about the paper path sensors test troubleshooting diagnostic.
This test displays the status of each paper path sensor and allows viewing of sensor status while printing
internal pages.
● Troubleshooting
● Paper Path Sensors
3. Touch the Start button to run the test.
Individual component test

Learn about the individual component test troubleshooting diagnostic.
This test activates individual parts independently to isolate problems.
Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly. If the Repeat option is enabled from the drop-
down menu, the test cycles the component on and off. This process continues for two minutes, and then the
test terminates.
NOTE: The cartridge door interlocks must be defeated to run the component tests. A control panel display
prompt appears to indicate removing the toner cartridge, during certain tests.
● Troubleshooting
● Component Test
3. Select the component test options for the test.
Manual sensor test

Learn about the manual sensor test troubleshooting diagnostic.
The Manual Sensor Test screen shows the sensor number, sensor name (model specific), sensor state (active
or inactive), and the number of times the sensor has been toggled (activated).
Paper path sensors test 179

● Troubleshooting
● Manual Sensor Test
3. Activate the desired sensor, and then check the control panel display to verify the sensor state (active or
inactive).
● The State virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green when the
sensor is active.
deactivated).
For example, opening a door increments the appropriate sensor item count two times—once when
the door is opened, and once when the door is closed.
Tray/bin manual sensor test

Learn about the tray/bin manual sensor test troubleshooting diagnostic.
The Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test screen shows the sensor number, sensor name (model specific), sensor state
(active or inactive), and the number of times the sensor has been toggled (activated).
● Troubleshooting
● Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test
3. Activate the desired sensor, and then check the control panel display to verify the sensor state (active or
inactive).
● The State virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green when the
sensor is active.
deactivated).
For example, opening a door increments the appropriate sensor item count two times—once when
the door is opened, and once when the door is closed.
Diagrams: Block diagrams

View block diagrams for the printer.
Diagrams: External plug and port locations

View printer external plugs and ports diagrams.

Figure 4-37 External plug and port locations
Item Description
3 Fax MFP models only: Telephone "line out" port (for attaching an extension phone, answering
machine, or other device)
5 Fax MFP models only: Fax "line in" port (for attaching the fax phone line to the printer)
6 Power connection
Sensors and switches

View printer and paper feeder sensor and switch diagrams.
Sensors and switches, printer base

Figure 4-38 Sensors and switches, printer base
DUP_FL_SNS
OUT_FULL_SNS
PAPOUT-M_SNS
PAPOUT-L_SNS
LOOP_SNS
REFEED_SNS
MS
REG_SNS
RREREG_SNS
MP_PAP_SNS
TRANS_SNS
CST_FACE_SNS
CST_PAP_SNS
CST_SIZE1
CST_SIZE2
CST
CST_SIZE3 CST_SIZE4
Table 4-6 Sensors and switches, printer base
DUP_FL_SNS Duplex flapper position sensor
OUT_FULL_SNS FD1 media full sensor
CST_PAP_SNS Tray 2 media out sensor
CST_FACE_SNS Tray 2 media surface sensor
LOOP_SNS Fuser loop sensor
REFEED_SNS Duplex feed sensor
REG_SNS Registration sensor
RREREG_SNS Pre-registration sensor
MP_PAP_SNS Tray 1 media out sensor
PAPOUT-M_SNS Fuser output sensor 2
TRANS_SNS Tray 2 feed sensor (X654/X677 models only)
MS (Media sensor PCA) Media sensor

Table 4-6 Sensors and switches, printer base (continued)
PAPOUT-L_SNS Fuser output sensor 1
Sensors and switches, 550-sheet paper feeder
Figure 4-39 Sensors and switches, 550-sheet paper feeder

M12
CL6
SR24 SR23
SR22 SW16
SW4
SW6
SW5 SW7
SR21
M15
Table 4-7 Sensors and switches, 550-sheet paper feeder
Abbreviation Component name
SW4 Paper feeder media size switch 1
SW16 Paper feeder door switch
SR21 Paper feeder lifter motor rotation sensor
SR22 Paper feeder media out sensor
SR23 Paper feeder feed sensor
SR24 Paper feeder media surface sensor
Sensors and switches, HCI

Figure 4-40 Sensors and switches, HCI
M13
CL2
SR5 SR4
SR3 SW13
SR6
SW9
SW10
SW8
M14
Table 4-8 Sensors and switches, HCI
SW8 HCI cassette lifting plate position switch
SW9 HCI cassette media size switch 1
SW10 HCI cassette media size switch 2
SW13 HCI door switch
SR3 HCI cassette media out sensor
SR4 HCI feed sensor
SR5 HCI cassette media surface sensor
SR6 HCI cassette pickup rotation sensor
Sensors and switches, 3-bin stapler-stacker

Figure 4-41 Sensors and switches, 3-bin stapler-stacker
PS207
PS206 PS204
PS201
PS205
PS211
PS202
PS212 PS213
PS208 PS214 PS203
PS209 PS215
SW3
SW4
PS210 SW21
Table 4-9 Sensors and switches, 3-bin stapler-stacker
PS201 Bin 1 media presence sensor
PS202 Stapler-stacker exit sensor
PS203 Staple inlet sensor
PS204 Y alignment home position sensor
PS205 Bin 1 media full sensor 1
PS206 Alienation home position sensor
PS207 Jogger home position sensor
PS208 Bin 2 media presence sensor
PS209 Bin 2 media full sensor
PS210 Stapler-stacker inlet sensor
PS211 Bin 1 upper limit sensor
PS212 Bin 1 lower limit sensor
PS213 Staple low sensor
PS214 Staple ready sensor
PS215 Staple home position sensor
SW3 Stapler-stacker door switch
SW4 Staple door switch
SW21 Interlock switch
Sensors and switches, floor-standing stapler-stacker

Figure 4-42 Sensors and switches, floor-standing stapler-stacker
SR4
SR7 PS26
PS45 SW11 SR18
PS11
PS37
SR13
SR14 PS18
PS12 SW14 SW15
SR12
PS19
PS38
PS42
SR16 SR18
SR17
SR10
SR15
Table 4-10 Sensors and switches, floor-standing stapler-stacker
SW11 Punch door switch (push type)
SW14 Front door switch (lever type)
SW15 Front door switch (push type)
SR2 Punch home position sensor
SR3 Punch shift home position sensor
SR4 Bin 2 media full sensor
SR5 Bin 3 shift roller alienation home position sensor
SR6 Bin 3 shift roller home position sensor
SR7 Bin 3 exit sensor
SR8 Jogger home position sensor
SR9 Staple shift home position sensor

Table 4-10 Sensors and switches, floor-standing stapler-stacker (continued)
SR10 Staple tray media presence sensor
SR11 Trailing edge assist home position sensor
SR12 Bin 3 lower limit sensor
SR13 Bin 3 upper limit sensor
SR14 Bin 3 media presence sensor
SR15 Bin 4 lower limit sensor
SR16 Bin 4 upper limit sensor
SR17 Bin 4 media presence sensor
SR18 Stapler-stacker exit sensor
SR19 Stacking guide home position sensor
SR22 Bin 4 output roller alienation home position sensor
PS12 Switchback inlet sensor (PCA mounted type)
PS18 Punch side registration sensor
PS18 Bin 3 inlet sensor (PCA mounted type)
PS19 Staple inlet sensor (PCA mounted type)
PS26 MBM inlet sensor (PCA mounted type)
PS27 Punch inlet roller rotation sensor
PS30 Staple home position sensor
PS31 Staple low sensor
PS32 Staple ready sensor
PS11 Punch inlet sensor
PS14 Chad full sensor
PS13 Chad full sensor
PS17 Punch side registration sensor
Diagrams: Major component locations

View printer major component locations diagrams.
Major components, printer base
Diagrams: Major component locations 187

Figure 4-43 Major components, printer base (1 of 5)
8
1
6
7
Item Description Item Description
1 Fuser drive assembly 5 Intermediate transfer belt (ITB)

assembly
2 Secondary transfer (T2) assembly 6 Pickup drive assembly
3 Pickup assembly 7 Registration assembly
4 Formatter case assembly 8 Waste toner duct assembly

2
6
3
1 Delivery assembly 4 Fuser
2 Interlock assembly 5 Laser scanner assembly
3 Lifter drive assembly 6 Registration density sensor assembly

4
2
1 Main drive assembly 3 Tray 2 media size detect assembly
2 Auto close assembly 4 Pre-exposure PCA holder assembly

6 2
1 Waste toner feed assembly (X654/ 4 Toner supply assembly (X654/X677

X677 models) models)
2 Feed drive assembly (X654/X677 5 Toner supply buffer assembly/

models) intermediate pipe (X654/X677 models)
3 Toner supply motor assembly (X654/ 6 Toner supply drive assembly (X654/
X677 models) X677 models)

Item Description
1 Feed assembly (X654/X677 models)
Motors, printer base
Figure 4-48 Motors, printer base
6
2
5
4
1 Fuser motor 4 Developer motor
2 Duplex motor 5 Drum motor
3 ITB motor 6 Developer alienation motor
Fans, printer base

Figure 4-49 Fans, printer base
4
1
1 Fuser fan 3 Exhaust fan
2 Power supply fan 4 Cartridge fan
Rollers and toner collection unit, printer base

Figure 4-50 Rollers and toner collection unit, printer base
5
2
1 Secondary transfer roller assembly 4 Tray 1 pickup roller assembly
2 Tray 2 separation roller assembly 5 Tray 2 pickup roller assembly
3 Tray 1 separation roller assembly 6 Toner collection unit
Printed circuit assemblies, printer base

Figure 4-51 Printed circuit assemblies, printer base (1 of 2)
7
2
6
3
1 Low-voltage power supply 5 Rear PCA
2 DC controller 6 Environment sensor PCA
3 Drive PCA 7 Drum home position sensor PCA
4 Right PCA 8 High-voltage power supply

Figure 4-52 Printed circuit assemblies, printer base (2 of 2)
Item Description
1 Feed/toner supply controller PCA
Major components, 550-sheet paper feeder
Figure 4-53 Covers and doors, 550-sheet paper feeder
5 1
3 2
1 Rear cover 4 Front left cover
2 Right door 5 Left cover
3 Front right cover

Figure 4-54 Major parts, 550-sheet paper feeder
4 1
1 Lifter drive assembly 4 Paper feeder cassette media size

detect assembly
2 Pickup drive assembly 5 Auto close assembly
3 Pickup assembly
Figure 4-55 Printed circuit assemblies, 550-sheet paper feeder
Item Description
1 Controller PCA

Figure 4-56 Cassette assemblies, 550-sheet paper feeder
2
1
1 Cassette separation roller assembly 2 Cassette pickup roller assembly
Major components, HCI
Figure 4-57 Doors and covers, HCI
5 1
4 3
1 Rear cover 4 Front left cover
2 Right door 5 Left cover
3 Rear lower cover

Figure 4-58 Main parts, HCI (1 of 2)
4 1
1 Pickup drive assembly 4 Auto close assembly
2 Lifter drive assembly 5 Pickup alienation assembly
3 Pickup assembly

Figure 4-59 Main parts, HCI (2 of 2)
Item Description
1 Cassette assembly
Figure 4-60 Printed circuit assemblies, HCI
Item Description
1 Controller PCA

Figure 4-61 Cassette assemblies, HCI
2
1
1 Cassette separation roller assembly 2 Cassette pickup roller assembly
Major components, 3-bin stapler-stacker
Figure 4-62 Doors and covers, 3-bin stapler-stacker
2
8 3
4
7
51
16
1 Rear cover 6 Staple rear cover
2 Right corner cover 7 Staple door
3 Right upper cover 8 Staple cover
4 Stapler-stacker door 9 Rear inner cover
5 Right lower cover

Figure 4-63 Main parts, 3-bin stapler-stacker (1 of 2)
6
1
1 Upper feed assembly 4 Jogger assembly
2 Stapler-stacker feed motor 5 Solenoid assembly
3 Stapler assembly 6 Output bin 1 assembly

Figure 4-64 Main parts, 3-bin stapler-stacker (2 of 2)
1 MBM fan 2 Lower feed assembly
Figure 4-65 Printed circuit assemblies, 3-bin stapler-stacker
Item Description
1 Controller PCA
Major components, floor-standing stapler-stacker

Figure 4-66 Covers and doors, floor-standing stapler-stacker (1 of 2)
1 MBM rear cover 4 Foot front cover (tall models)
2 MBM top cover 5 Front door
3 Foot front cover 6 MBM front cover

Figure 4-67 Covers and doors, floor-standing stapler-stacker (2 of 2)
1 MBM tray 7 Foot rear cover (tall models)
2 Upper tray unit 8 Rear cover
3 Lower tray unit 9 Left lower rear cover
4 Foot center cover 10 Left upper rear cover
5 Foot cover 11 Rear upper cover
6 Foot rear cover

Figure 4-68 Major components, floor-standing stapler-stacker (1 of 3)
1
5
1 Power supply assembly 4 Height wall lower assembly
2 Controller PCA 5 Height wall upper assembly
3 Stapler

1 SWB assembly 3 Alignment assembly
2 IMF assembly 4 Delivery assembly

1 Punch assembly 4 Door handle rail assembly
2 Drum drive assembly 5 Lifter base lower assembly
3 Drum assembly 6 Lifter base upper assembly
Printed circuit assembly (PCA) connector locations

View printed circuit assembly (PCA) diagrams.
DC controller PCA connections

Figure 4-71 DC controller PCA connections
J121 J130 J132 J131
J125 J122 J139

J150 J124
J137
J126
J136
J140
J141 J142
J112
J101
J105
J115 J145
J114 J104
J102
J146 J151
J106 J103
J101 Formatter J130 Drive PCA
J102 Laser scanner assembly J131 High-voltage power supply
J103 Drive PCA J132 High-voltage power supply
J104 Drive PCA J136 Rear PCA (6700/6800 models)
J105 Formatter J137 Rear PCA (X654/X677 models)
J106 Low-voltage power supply 139 Rear PCA
J112 Front door switch J140 Not used
Right door switch
J114 Right PCA J141 Not used
J115 Right PCA J142 Not used
J121 Duplex flapper solenoid Not use J145 Not used
FD1 media full sensor Not use
Duplex flapper position sensor
J122 Duplex motor J146 Not used
J124 Output accessory (MFP models) J150 Not used
J125 Fuser J151 E-label (X654/X677 models)
J126 Fuser
Formatter PCA connections
Printed circuit assembly (PCA) connector locations 209

Figure 4-72 Formatter PCA connections
J11 J25
J26
J23
U1
J24
J3
J4 J15
J21
J20
J1
J6
J7 U18 U17 U3 U4
J5
J22
J1 DIMM J23 WiFi
J3 eMMC J24 Island of Data (IOD)
J4 USB (walk-up) J25 Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
J5 USB host J26 Control panel
J6 Engine VIF U1 ASIC
J7 HDD riser U3 Memory
J11 BASH U4 Memory
J15 LAN U17 Memory
J20 USB (HIP) U18 Memory
J21 USB device
550-sheet paper feeder PCA connectors

Figure 4-73 550-sheet paper feeder PCA connectors
J531 J541 J542 J522
J521
J511
J552
J512
J554 J551 J532
J544
J511 Printer or paper feeder J541 Media size switch 1
Media size switch 2
Media size switch 3
Media size switch 4
J512 Not used J542 Not used
J521 Not used J544 Door switch
J522 Not used J551 Lifter motor
Lifter motor rotation sensor
J531 Feed motor J552 Not used
Pickup clutch
J532 Media out sensor J554 Not used
Feed sensor
Media surface sensor
HCI controller PCA connectors

Figure 4-74 HCI controller PCA connectors
J531 J541 J542 J522
J521
J511
J552
J512
J554 J551 J532
J544
J511 Printer or paper feeder J541 Not used
J512 Not used J542 Media size switch 1
Media size switch 2
Lifting plate position switch
J521 Not used J544 Door switch
J522 Not used J551 Not used
J531 Feed motor J552 Lifter motor rotation sensor
Pickup clutch
J532 Media out sensor J554 Lifter motor
Feed sensor
Media surface sensor
3-bin stapler-stacker controller PCA connectors

Figure 4-75 3-bin stapler-stacker controller PCA connectors
J503
J401 J301
J402
J202 J501
J104
J302 J102
J103
J204
J105
J203
J201
J101
J505 J502 J205
J101 Printer J205 Staple door switch
J102 Not used J301 Stapler-stacker output motor
Y alignment home position sensor
Bin 1 media full sensor 1
J103 Not used J302 Y alignment motor
Alienation home position sensor
Stapler-stacker door switch
J104 Not used J401 Jogger motor
Jogger home position sensor
J105 Not used J402 Stapler-stacker feed motor
J201 Interlock switch J501 Bin 2 media presence sensor
Bin 2 media full sensor
Stapler-stacker inlet sensor
Bin 2 flapper solenoid
J202 Lifter motor J502 Inlet flapper solenoid
Bin 1 upper limit sensor
Bin 1 lower limit sensor SS inlet sensor

J203 Staple motor J503 Bin 1 media presence sensor
Stapler-stacker exit sensor
Staple inlet sensor
Stamp solenoid
J204 Staple low sensor J505 Fan
Staple ready sensor
Staple home position sensor
Floor-standing stapler-stacker controller PCA connectors
Figure 4-76 Floor-standing stapler-stacker controller PCA connectors
J761
J711 J734 J750
J720 J795 J741 J760 J781
J732
J715 J782
J714 J716
J735
J717 J751
J710
J790
J752
J719
J792
J780
J721
J718 J765
J733
J742
J766
J785 J786 J787 J768
J710 IPTU J751 Internal output roller
Switchback motor
J711 Sub power supply PCA J752 Buffer front motor
J714 Not used J760 Bin 3 shift motor
Bin 3 alienation motor

J715 Not used J761 Bin 3 shift roller alienation home

position sensor
Bin 3 shift roller home position sensor
J716 Not used J765 Bin 3 lift up motor
J717 Not used J766 Bin 3 lower limit sensor
Bin 3 media presence sensor
J718 Not used J768 Bin 4 lift up motor
Bin 4 lower limit sensor
Bin 4 media presence sensor
J719 Not used J780 Intermediate feed motor
J720 Front door switch J781 Stage inlet drum drive solenoid
J721 Front door sensor J782 Staple inlet sensor
Punch door switch
Punch inlet sensor
Punch shift motor
J732 Punch home position sensor J785 Trailing edge assist motor
Punch shift home position sensor Connector PCA
Punch side registration sensor (LED)
J733 Punch motor J786 Staple tray media presence sensor
Stapler shift motor
Jogger motor
J734 Punch side registration sensor J787 Jogger home position sensor
Staple shift home position sensor
Staple home position sensor
Staple low sensor
Staple ready sensor
Staple motor

J735 Chad full sensor (LED) J790 Bin 4 output roller alienation home
position sensor
Chad full sensor
Punch inlet roller rotation sensor
Stapler-stacker exit sensor
Bin 4 output motor
J741 MBM inlet sensor J792 Stacking guide home position sensor
Bin 2 media full sensor Bin 4 media full sensor 1 (LED)
Stacking guide motor
J742 MBM feed motor J795 Sub power fan
J750 MBM flapper solenoid
Switchback inlet sensor
Bin 3 inlet sensor
Bin 3 media full sensor 1 (LED)
Bin 3 exit sensor
IPTU controller PCA connectors
Figure 4-77 IPTU controller PCA connectors
J622
J621
J652
J641 J611 J612
J642 J613 J651
J611 Printer J641 IPTU feed motor
J612 Floor stand staple stacker J642 IPTU upper fan
IPTU flapper solenoid
J613 Floor stand staple stacker J651 IPTU inlet sensor
IPTU Media full sensor 1
IPTU lower fan
J621 Not used J652 IPTU door switch
J622 Not used
Diagrams: General timing chart

View the printer timing chart diagram.

I. GENERAL TIMING CHART
Timing chart two consecutive prints on LTR paper (Full-color 1/1 speed mode on Hopper)
Print command
Operation STBY INTR PRINT LSTR STBY
1 TOP signal
2 Developer alienation motor
3 Scanner motor
4 Pickup motor
Pickup motor (Curie mSKU/

5
Figure 4-78 Timing chart
Hopper mSKU/Bell mSKU only)
6 Tray 2 pickup clutch
Diagrams: General circuit diagrams

7 Registration sensor
View the printer circuit diagrams.

8 Fuser output sensor
9 Drum motor
10 ITB motor
11 Developer motor
12 Fuser motor
13 Primary charging bias (YMC)
14 Primary charging bias (K)
15 Developing bias (Y)
16 Developing bias (M)
17 Developing bias (C)
18 Developing bias (K)
19 T1 bias (YMC)
20 T1 bias (K)
21 T2 bias
A-1-1

217
Figure 4-79 General circuit diagram, base printer (1 of 5)
J336 J338
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
<5700/X557/5800/6700/6800>
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
PGND
PGND
PGND
+3.3VB2
+24VA
PGND
+24VA
PGND
J338D
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J338LH

12
11
10
J338L
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J336AD
12
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J954 J953
J336ADH
M M
SCN_MTR_12st SCN_MTR_34st
Rear PCA
4 3 2 1
J137 J136
J112
1 2 3 4
J140
DC controller PCA 15 17
<5700/X557/5800/6700/6800>
GND
GND
<6700/X654/6800/X677>
<5700/X5575800/X57954>
E-label E-label E-label E-label
10
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
24V_ILK_SW 24V_ILK_SW
LIFT_MTR LIFT_SNS
<Depends on the model.

Y_1st M_2st C_3st k_4st
See Note 1 last base diagram.>

+3.3VCFU2
GND
+3.3VB2
J951 J950 J949 J952 M
2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
SOLD117
SOLD118
J955
FT10 FT9 FT7 FT8 2 1
2 1 1 2 3
J914
5
2 1
J917 2 1
2 1
FR_DOOR_SW
R_DOOR_SW
15
14
13
12
11
10
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SGND
+24VA
+24VA
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
15 17
J202
1 2
J217
4 3 2 1
J331 J332 J333 J334 Rear PCA J346
J322 J321
<Depends on the model. See Note 1 last base diagram.>

J326 J337
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
<X57945/X654X677>
<5700/X557/6700/6800>
PGND
PGND
+24VA
+24VA
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
FEED_MTR FEED_CL FSR_MTR ITB_BK_MTR 3DRM_MTR 4DEV_MTR
FSR_FAN
T1_SL
M CL M M M M M
SL
2 1
J944B J943 J944 J942 J941 J939 J940 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
+24VB_0
+24VB_0
+3.3VC
+3.3VC
+24VB
+24VB
PGND
PGND
PGND
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
J937 J936 J935 J934
4 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 1
J209B J209 J216 J215 J214 J210 J206 J203
CST_SIZE1 CST_SIZE2 CST_SIZE3 CST_SIZE4
Drive PCA
4
J207 J207 J208
J212 J211 J205 J213
30 27 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4
SGND
SGND
PGND
SGND
SGND
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
J931D
+3.3VC
GND
3 2 1
J931DH
1 2 3
J931L
3 2 1 4 3 2 1
3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 J932 J933
J931 J930
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CRG_FAN M
30 27 DC controller PCA
DRM_HP4_SNS DEV_HP_SNS DRM_HP123_SNS
J122 J127 DEV_MTR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 J103 J104
+3.3VC
GND
+24VB
<6700/X654/6800/X677>
<5700/X557/5800/X57945>
RD sensor PCA Media sensor PCA
<Depends on the model. See Note 3 last base diagram.>

REFEED_CL
J372 MP_PAP_SNS
<Depends on the model. See Note 4 for details.>
<5700/X557/5800/6700/6800>
2
N.C
CST_PAP_SNS REFEED_SNS REG_SNS CL RREREG_SNS

12
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 MP_SL
1
J915 J916 J235 J923 J377 J920 J919 SL J925 J924

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12
11
10
3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
M M
+5VC
GND
CST_FACE_SNS LOOP_SNS Media sensor

DUP_MTR DUP_MTR PCA
SOLD109
SOLD108
J236 J910 2 1
GND_E
12
11
10
J318L
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 2 1 3 2 1
J318DH
J318D
3 2 1 1 2
ENC_SNS
Encoder PCA 12 J375
J373
J374
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
+3.3VCFU
+3.3VCFU
+24VAFU
+24VAFU
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
+5VC
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J316 J315 J314 J311 J313 J312 J317
Right PCA J301 J302
19 13
<6700/X654/6800/X677>
KB_FAN
2
<X57945/X654/X677>
DUP_FL_SNS DUP_SL POWER_SW_PCA

T1_HP_SNS TCU_FULL_SNS 4st 3st
SL 3 2 1
LED4
LED3
2 1
LED5
J927
1 2 3 J912 J918 J1 J1
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 2 1
TCU_VSCW_SNS 1 2
OUT_FULL_SNS 2 1 J706L
J929L J706DH
J929DH J379P J706D
J928 J929D J911
1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2
PGND(BL)
+5VAFU
+5VAFU
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
3 2 1 3 2 1
3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4
J351 J352 J354 J353 J355
J262 J261
25 29 Hihg-voltage power supply PCA

J121L
<Depends on the model.
See Note 5 last base diagram.>
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
13
12
11
10
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J121DH
J121D
+5VC
+3.3VCFU
GND
+24VAFU
+5VAFU
GND
+3.3VCFU2
+24VBFU2
+24VBFU2
+24VBFU2
GND
1
+24VAFU3
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GND
GND
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
25 29 19 13
J121
J132 J131 DC controller PCA J114 J115
C
D
A

219 Diagrams: General circuit diagrams
6
1 60 1 35 50 +24VBFU3 50
59 2 34 49 N.C 49 1 28
2
3 33 48 GND 48 2 27
3 58 3 26
4 32 47 47
4 57 5 31 46 46 4 25
56 6 30 45 GND 45 5 24
5
7 29 44 44 6 23
6 55 7 22
8 28 43 GND 43
7 54 9 27 42 42 8 +3.3VL 21
53 10 26 41 GND 41 9 20
J405
J101
J461
J108
8
60
60
35
35
11 25 40 40 10 +3.3VL 19
9 52 11 18
12 24 39 39
10 51 13 23 38 38 12 17
50 14 22 37 37 13 16
11
15 21 36 36 14 15
J182
12 49
28
15 14
J183
16 20 35 35
28
13 48 17 19 34 34 16 13
47 18 18 33 33 17 12
14
19 17 32 32 18 GND 11
15 46 19 10
20 16 31 31
45 20 9
<5700/X557/5800/X57945>
16 21 15 30 30
44 22 14 29 29 21 8
17
22 7
Formatter
13
DC controller PCA
43 23 28 28
18 12 GND 23 6
24 27 27
J107
J181
5
GND
50
50
19 42 25 11 26 26 24 5
41 26 10 25 25 25 4
20 GND
27 9 24 24 26 3
21 40 27 N.C 2
28 8 23 23
22 39 7 28 +24VBFU3 1
29 22 22
38 30 6 21 21
DC controller PCA
23
31 5 20 20
24 37
32 4 19 19
25 36 33 3 18 GND 18
Laser PCA
26 35 34 2 17 17
35 1 16 16
27 34
15 15
28 33 14 14
29 32 13 13
31 12 12
30
11 11
31 30 10 10
32 29 9 GND 9
28 8 8
33
7 7
34 27 6 6
26 5 5
Laser PCA
35
25 4 4
36
3 3
37 24 2 2
38 23 1 1
39 22
40 21
<5700/X557/5800/X57945>
41 20
42 19
43 18
44 17
45 16
46 15
4
47 14
48 13
Formatter
49 12
50 11
51 10
9
<6700/X654/6800/X677>
52
53 8
54 7
55 6
56 5
57 4 64 +24VBFU3 64
58 3 63 N.C 63
59 2 62 GND 62
60 1 61 61
60 60 1 36
59 GND 59 2 35
58 58 3 34
4 33
57 GND 57 5 32
J192
J193
36
36
56 56 6 31
55 7 30
GND 55
8 29
54 54 9 28
53 GND 53 10 27
52 52 11 26
12 25
1 35 51 51
<6700/X654/6800/X677>
13 24
2 34 50 50 14 23
3 33 15 22
49 49
4 32 16 21
5 31 48 48 17 20
6 30 47 47 18 19
3
7 29 19 18
46 46
J102
J191
8 28 20 17
64
64
9 27 45 45 21 16
10 26 44 44 22 15
J471
35
11 25 23 14
43 43
12 24 24 13
13 23 42 42 25 +3.3VL 12
35
14 22 41 41 26 11
15 21 J472 27 +3.3VL 10
40 40
16 20 28 9
17 19 39 39 29 8
18 GND
Laser PCA
18 38 38 30 7
<5700~/X557/6700/X654>
19 17 31 6
37 37
20 16 32 GND 5
21 15 36 36 33 4
22 14 35 35 34 GND 3
23 13 35 N.C 2
34 34
24 12 36 +24VBFU3 1
25 11 33 33
26 10 32 32
27 9
31 31
Laser PCA
28 8
29 7 30 30
30 6 29 29
DC controller PCA
31 5
28 28
32 4
33 3 27 27
34 2 26 26
35 1
25 25
24 24
23 23
22 22
21 21
1
1
20 20
2
19 19
18 18
17 17
1
1
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
9 9
8 8
J7
1
5
7 7
2
4
J1822
6 6
3
3
5 5
4
2
4 4
5
1
3 3
2 2
1 1
Memory PCA
1
A
B
C
D
Fuser (A²ODF type) <6700/X654/6800/X677>
6
PIN3
PIN22
PIN6
PIN5
PIN4
Heater/thermistor
J903 J904B J904
2 1 2 1 2 1
8 8
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GNDM 1
GNDM 8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1
4 3 2 1 8 8 1 2 1
J276 J287 J283 J281B J281 J284 J286
J272 J271
Fuser PCA
5
J285
J288
J280
J282
J278 J277 J274 J279
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3
GNDA
+3.3VC
GNDA
+24VB
GNDM
+3.3VM
GNDMR
+3.3VMR
N.C
+24VB
PAPOUT_L_SNS
4
PAPOUT-M_SNS
1
J907 J908
1 2 3 1 2 3
3 2 1
PIN18
PIN19
J909
1 2
FSR_PRS_SNS TP
TH_SW
J906L TP1
6 5 4 3 2 1
J906DH
1 2 3 4 5 6
J906D
MT1
GND
GND
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
J905L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
4
1 2 3 4 5 6
J905LB J905LA
J905DB J905DA
J905D
<6700/X654/6800/X677~>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 2 3 4 5 6
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
Drive PCA
MT2
J204
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3
+3.3VC
+24VB
+24VB
+24VA
+24VA
+24VB
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6
J130 J125 J126
DC controller PCA
J106
J124 J150 J105
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 27
+24VA
+24VA
GND
GND
3.3VB2
GND
<5800/X57945/6800/X677>
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+3.3VAFU
+5VAFU
+5VC
+3.3VC
GND
NC
5 4 3 2 1
J150D
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J150LH
J124D J150L
1 2 3 4 5
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
+3.3VMR
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GNDMR
+24_5V
+24_5V
+24_5V
+24_5V
+24_5V
+24_5V
+3.3VM
GNDM
+3.3V
+3.3V
+5VA
GND
GND
GND
N.C
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 1 2
27
J1 J245 J290 J293 J292
Formatter
J247
2

TB402
TB403
TB203
TB202
3 2 1 1 2 3
J926 J301B J250 J244 J241 J248 J246 J243
J149D
5 4 3 2 1
J149DH 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 3 2 1
J149L
GNDB
PGND
PGND
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
N.C
GNDA
GNDB
+3.3VC
N.C
ACN
ACH
CAC_SNS 3 2 1
<X557>
<6800/X677>
SOLD119
SOLD120
1 2 3
2 1 4 3 2 1
J379
M
PS_FAN
ACN
ACH
ENV SNS
SOLD101
SOLD102
CAC_MTR
2 1
J243F2
3
2
1
IL101
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J201
Drive PCA
1
C
D
A

6 5 4 3 2 1
<X57945/X654/X677>
D
TRANS_SNS CST_PAP_SNS CST_FACE_SNS

DC controller PCA
J151
J986 J987 J988 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
FEED_CL
R_DOOR_SW
J991D J992D J993D J994D
CL M LIFT_SNS J991DH J992DH J993DH J994DH Rear PCA
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 M
J991L J992L J993L J994L J336C
1 2 2 1
J1411L 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
SOLD31
SOLD30
J411DH M
J976 J411D J999 J998 J982
1 2 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J989
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
N.C
J991 J992 J993 J994
Y_1st M_2st C_3st k_4st
E-label E-label E-label E-label

C
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
+24VAFU3
+24VA
PGND
+3.3VTS
N.C
SGND
+24VA
PGND
+3.3VTS
GND
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
PGND
PGND
PGND
3.3VB2
2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J412 J411 J416 J417 J435 J401 J440
Feed/toner-supply controller PCA
J421 J423 J431 J410 J499
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
N.C
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
+3.3VB2
+3.3VTS
+3.3VTS
+3.3VTS
+3.3VTS
+3.3VTS
+3.3VTS
+3.3VTS
+3.3VTS
+24VAFU
+24VAFU
+24VAFU
+24VAFU
+24VAFU2
+24VAFU2
+24VAFU2
+24VAFU2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
12
11
10
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
J980 J979 J978 J977 12
J499D
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
J499DH
CST_SIZE1 CST_SIZE2 CST_SIZE3 CST_SIZE4
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J692D J957D J693D J956D J694D J955D J695D J954D
J692LH J957LH J693LH J956LH J694LH J955LH J695LH J954LH

J692L J957L J693L J956L J694L J955L J695L J954L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
3 2 1 J958 J959 3 2 1 J960 J961 3 2 1 J962 J963 3 2 1 J964 J965
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
J382A J2A J687 1 2 1 2 J382B J2B J792 1 2 1 2 J382C J2C J795 1 2 1 2 J382D J2D J787 1 2 1 2
Toner supply Toner supply CL CL Toner supply Toner supply CL CL Toner supply Toner supply CL CL Toner supply Toner supply CL CL
sensor LED sensor PCA sensor LED sensor PCA sensor LED sensor PCA sensor LED sensor PCA
PCA CAC_SNS PCA CAC_SNS PCA CAC_SNS PCA CAC_SNS
U_CL1 T_CL1 U_CL2 T_CL2 T_CL3 U_CL3 T_CL4 U_CL4 A

221
222
6 5 4 3 2 1
D
<Note 1> <Note 2> <Note 3> <Note 4> <Note 5>
<5700/5800> <5700/5800> <5700/X577/5800/X57945> <5700/6700> <5700/X577/5800>
J138 J136A J133

J135
DC controller PCA J327A Rear PCA Right PCA Right PCA 23 DC controller PCA
13 17 1 2 18
J307 J305
Chapter 4 Solve problems

1 2 3 4 5
3 2 1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
SGND
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
SGND
SGND
+24VAFU
2 1
+3.3VB2
J938 1 2 3
+24VBFU2
+24VBFU2
+24VBFU2
GND
GND
+3.3VCFU2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7 +3.3VCFU2
6 GND
5
4
3
2
1
J910B
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
13
12
11
10
1 2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2 1
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
CST
J317D LOOP_SNS
J317DH
13 17 3 2 1 J318LA
Rear PCA J925A 1 2 23 18
J323 J321A High-voltage power supply PCA
J263 J92
MP_PAP_SNS
C
2 1
<X577/6700/6800> <X557/6700/6800> SL
MP_SL
J137A J136B
DC controller PCA Rear PCA J337A

15 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
<6700/~X654/6800/X677> <X577/5800/X57945/x654/~6800/X677> <X57945/6700/X654/6800/X677>
+3.3VCFU2
GND
+3.3VB2
J131A J132A
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 Right PCA
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Right PCA DC controller PCA
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
J937A J936A J935A J934A 29
15
14
13
12
11
10
J317 J315A
25
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
15 17 CST_SIZE1 CST_SIZE2 CST_SIZE3 CST_SIZE4

Rear PCA
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
J322A J321B
+24VAFU
+24VBFU2
+24VBFU2
+24VBFU2
GND
+5VAFU
GND
+3.3VCFU2
2 1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
<X57945/X654/X677> <X57945/X654/X677> 1 2 3 1 2 3
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
J318DB
J318DHB J923B J910A
J139 J136C J318LB B
1 2 29 25
DC controller PCA J327B Rear PCA
9 17 3 2 1 REFEED_SNS LOOP_SNS
1 2 High-voltage power supply
J925B J261A J262A
2 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SGND
SL
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
MP_PAP_SNS MP_SL
3 2 1
2 1 J924B
+3.3VCFU2
GND
+3.3VB2
J35
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
1 2
RREREG_SNS
FDOOR_SW
9 17
Rear PCA
J324 J321C
A
6 5 4 3 2 1
J511FDH D
J511D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
SGND
+3.3VOPF
SGND
+3.3VOPF
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
PGND
PGND
PGND
+3.3VB2
Paper feeder controller PCA

5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J521 J522 J511F
C
J532F J544F J531F J551 J541 J512

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
N.C
OUT1
OUT2
SGND
SGND
SGND
PGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
SGND
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
+24VAF
+24VAF
+3.3VB2
+3.3VOPF
+3.3VOPF
+3.3VOPF
+3.3VOPF
+3.3VOPF
OPLIFT_SNS
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Figure 4-84 General circuit diagram, 550-sheet paper feeder
J532FD
J532FDH B
N.C
3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 J9 J55 J57 J56 J58
SOLD5
SOLD6
J532FL
J21 J63 J64
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 J512D
2 1
M SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7
SW16 M CL
SR21 J512DH
CL6 M15
M12
SGND
+3.3VOPF
SGND
+3.3VOPF
SGND
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
J24 J41 J4
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
SR24 SR22 SR23

223
224
6 5 4 3 2 1
J511HDH
J511HD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
D
Chapter 4 Solve problems

SGND
+3.3VOPF
SGND
+3.3VOPF
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
PGND
PGND
PGND
+3.3VB2
5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J521 J522 J511H
HCI controller PCA
C
Figure 4-85 General circuit diagram, HCI
J532H J544H J531H J554 J552 J542

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
PGND
SGND
+24VAF
+24VAF
+3.3VOPF
+3.3VOPF
+3.3VOPF
+3.3VOPF
+3.3VOPF
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J532HD
J532HDH
N.C
2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
J532HL
J82 J70 J71 J88 J89 J76 J74 J77
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 B
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1
2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 2 1 1 2
SW13 M CL
M SW9 SW8 SW10
CL2 SR6
M13 M14
+3.3VOPF
SGND
+3.3VOPF
SGND
+3.3VOPF
SGND
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
J85 J83 J84
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
SR5 SR3 SR4
A
6
M21
SW3 PS206 M25 PS205 PS204 PS203 PS202 PS201 SL22
M SL
1 2 M 1 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 J7202L
J7006 J35 J34 J17 J1 J2 J44 2 1
J32
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 J7202DHB
1 2 3 4
J7202DB
SOLD6
SOLD5
J7021LB J7401L J7003LB

2 1 J7021LHB 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J7003LHB
J7401DH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 J7003DB
J7021DB J7401D
5
+24VAF
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J302B J301B J503B
SL23 M24
M22 M27 SL
PS212 PS211 PS210 PS209 PS208 1 2
PS207 M
M M
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 J7303L
2 1
J15 J20 J21 J24 J22 J23 J18 J16
J7303DH 1 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
J7303D
SOLD4
SOLD3
4
J7107LB J7316L J7318L

2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 J7107DHB 1 2 3 J7316DH 1 2 3 J7318DH
J7107DB J7316D J7318D
+24VAF
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J402B J202B J501B J401B
5 4 3 2 1 J105 4 3 2 1 J102
GND
GND
+3.3V
+3.3V
3
Staple stacker controller PCA

J205 J502B J201C J203C J204C J101B J505B
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 2 1
+5V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+24VA
+24VS
+24VA
+24VB
+3.3VB2
+24VAF
3 2 1
FT1
FT7
J7301D
J7301DH 2 1
2 1 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
J27 J19 J26
FAN21
2
1 2 J7301L 1 2 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
2 1
SW4 SW21
4 3 2 1
1 2
SL M
SL21 PS213
M26
PS214 +24VA
+24VA
+3.3VB2
GND
GND
GND
GND
J124LH J9916
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J124L 6 5 4 3 2 1
PS215
Staple unit
Printer
1
A
B
C
D
Figure 4-86 General circuit diagram, 3-bin stapler-stacker
Chapter 4 Solve problems 226
PS27 M12 PS11 M11
1
3
PS19
1
3
M13 M16 PS14 PS13 PS17

6
SR3 SR2 SW11 SW15 SW14

1
3
LED1 PS18 LED5

M M
M M 1 2 J413 1 2 1 2
1 2 2 1
2
4
2
4
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1
2
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SL11 J74 J72 J70 J852 J49 J48 12 J50 J52 J51 J874 J32 J576 J416 J31
FT20
FT21
1 2 3 4 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 6 5 4 3 2 1
SL
1 2
N.C
N.C
N.C
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
J33DH
J33D 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
J33L
GND
GND
GND
GND
+3.3VF
GND
11
12
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+24VSA3
GND
+24VSB
GND
+3.3VF
+24VSB_2
GND
+3.3VF
GND
GND
GND
+24VSA
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+24VSB
+24VSA
2 1 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1
12
J781 J782 J780 J742 J735 J732 J721 J733 J720
J734
PS36 PS18 PS12 M15
1
3
1
3
SR7 LED2
PS37 SR5
M19 M18 M17 1 2 M M14
5
SL12 SR4
PS26
2
4
2
4
M M M 1 2 3 1 2
1
3
1 2 3 4 3 2 1 M
SL
J64 J169 J93 J85
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 J170 J80 J77 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 3 2 1
2
4
J89 J88 J87 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J76 J83 J68
SR6 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3
J866L
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
N.C
N.C
J750L J80L J77L

2 1 1 2 3 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J866DH 1
J866D
J79
1 2 J750DH 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 J80DH 1 2 3 4 J77DH
J750D J80D J77D
J85L
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 J85DH
J85D
+24VSA
GND
+3.3VF
GND
+24VSA
GND
+3.3VF
+24VSA
GND
+3.3VF
GND
GND
GND
+24VSA3
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
J752 J751 J750 J761 J760 J741
J792 J790 J768 J766 J765
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5VF
4
J792D J790D
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J173D J138D J140D
6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 J792L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 J790L J167D
J792LH J790LH 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J173LH 1 2 3 4 5 6 J138L 1 2 3 4 5 6 J140L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J173L J167L J138LH J140LH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J167LH
3 2 1
J163D
1 2 3 J163LH
4 3 2 1 2 1 J163L 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J160 J422 J159 J158 J421 J164 J174 J173 J175 J176 J167 J138 J139 J140 J141 J816
1
3
1
3
1 2 3 4 LED3 1 2 3 4
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
3 2 1 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 2 1
M M 1 2 M M
2
4
2
4
J163 SR18 PS42 SR22 SR17 SR16 SR15 SR14 SR13 SR12
M28 PS43 M27 PS38 M25 PS45 M26
3 2 1
SR19
3
Floor stand staple stacker controller PCA

M23
1 1
2 2 M SR10
3 3
M24 1 2 3 4
Staple unit
SR11 4 4
1 2 3
SL14 M 5 +24VSB3 5 J857 J97 M20
6 6 1 2 3 4 PS32 PS31 PS30 SR9 SR8
SL 1 2 3
1 2 3 M22 M21
1 2 3 4 M
1 2 7 7
J119 J110 8 8 M M
GND 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 1 2 3
9 9
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 J102 J111
J856L J97L J103 J150
4 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3
J108 J107 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 J116DH 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 J97D
J116D J97DH
J822
PCA
9
TEA FIX
J821
+24VSB3
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1
J832 J833 J834
PCA
J831
9
TEA MOV
GND
+24VSB3
GND
GND
GND
GND
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2
J785 J786 J787

J711 J710 J795
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3
5
5
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
J717
J714
+24VA
4
4
+3.3VF
+24VSA
+24VSA
+24VSA
+3.3VB2
GND GND
3
3
2
2
+3.3VF +3.3VF
1
1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
GND
5
4
J702
J719
J715
4
3
J1LB
J1LA
J1DB
J1DA
GND
3
2
GND
2
1
+3.3VF
1
A8
A8
4
J718
GND
3
B6
B6
2
1 2 3
+3.3VF N.C
1
1
1
1
<IPTU>
2
2
J701
2
N.C FG
3
3
FAN11
3
4
4
4
1
J871D
J716
GND
3
2
J871DH
J1L
J1D
1
2
3
Sub power supply PCA
MT2
+3.3VF
1
4
A
B
C
D
Figure 4-87 General circuit diagram, floor-standing stapler-stacker
6
FAN1
FAN2
3 2 1
SR1
3 2 1
M1
PS1 SL1
1
3
1 2 3 SW1 M
SL
J290 1 2 1 2
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2
4
GND
J288 J291 J300

1 2 J613L J642 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 2 1 3 2 1
+24V
GND
J643L 1 2 J613DH 1 2 3 J642DH

3 2 1
J613D J642D
1 2 3 J643DH
J643D
5
+24VA
+24VAF
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+3.3VIPT
GND
GND
GND
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J651 J652 J642 J641
5
4
J621
4
J622
3
3
GND
2
GND
2
1
1
+3.3VIPT
+3.3VIPT
J613 J612
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2
GND
+24VA
+3.3VB2
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
4
J1LB
J1LA
J1DB
J1DA
A8
A8
6
5
4
B6
B6
3 GND
1 N.C
1
2
2
2
<FSSS>
IPTU controller PCA
1
FG
3
3
4
4
1
J611
+3.3VB2
2
J1L
J1D
3
GND
4
GND
5
+24VA
6
+24VA
7
8
3
MT4
+24VA
+24VA
+3.3VB2
GND
GND
GND
J124LH
J243M J9916 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J124L
2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
2
Printer
1
A
B
C
D
Figure 4-88 General circuit diagram, IPTU
Internal test and information pages
Learn about printer test and information pages.
Configuration and Jetdirect page
Print and find printer information on configuration and HP embedded Jetdirect information pages.
NOTE: Depending on the model, up to three pages print when printing a configuration page. In addition to
the main configuration page, the HP embedded Jetdirect configuration and the wireless pages print.
Print the configuration page from a touchscreen control panel
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.
● Configuration/Status pages
3. Touch Configuration Page to select it.
4. Touch the print icon to print the pages.

Figure 4-89 Configuration page
HP LaserJet M
1 4
5
6
2
Sep/13/2019 6:56:00 AM
1 Device information 5 Event log
2 Installed personalities and 6 Security

options
3 HP Web services 7 Paper trays and options
4 Memory
Certain information, such as the firmware date codes, the IP address, and the email gateways, is especially
helpful while servicing the printer. This information is on the various configuration pages.
Table 4-11 Important information on the configuration pages
Type of information Specific information Configuration page
Firmware Bundle Version Firmware information Main configuration page (Device

information)
Internal test and information pages 229

Table 4-11 Important information on the configuration pages (continued)
Type of information Specific information Configuration page
Firmware Revision Firmware information Main configuration page (Device

information)
Firmware Datecode Firmware information Main configuration page (Device

information)
Accessories and internal storage Optional installed formatter devices and Main configuration page (Installed
accessories information Personalities and Options)
All optional devices that are installed on
the printer should be listed on the main
configuration page.
Separate pages print for the optional

paper handling devices and the fax
accessory. These pages list more-detailed
information for those devices.
Memory Total RAM information Main configuration page (Memory)
Tray and bin information Size and type by tray (including installed Main configuration page (Paper Trays and
optional paper feeders) information Options)
Engine cycles, service ID, and cartridge Engine information Main configuration page (Device
information Information)
Event-log information Error information Main configuration page (Event Log)
The second configuration page is the HP embedded Jetdirect page, which contains the following information:

Figure 4-90 HP embedded Jetdirect page
HP LaserJet M
1 4
5
2
6
3
Sep/13/2019 6:56:00 AM
Item Description
1 General Information indicates the printer status,

model number, hardware firmware version, port select,
port configuration, auto negotiation, manufacturing
identification, and manufactured date.
2 Security Settings information
3 Network Statistics indicates the total packets received,

unicast packets received, bad packets received, framing
errors received, total packets transmitted, unsendable
packets, transmit collisions, and transmit late collisions.
4 TCP/IP information, including the IP address
5 IPv4 information
6 IPv6 information
Internal test and information pages 231

Reports menu
Learn about the control-panel Reports menu.
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Reports menu.
To print: At the printer control panel, touch the printer icon .
NOTE: The View option is control-panel type dependent (might not be available).
Table 4-12 Reports menu
First level Second level Values Description
Configuration/Status Pages Settings Menu Map Cancel Shows a map of the entire
control panel system and
View the selected values for each
setting.
Print
Configuration/Status Pages Current Settings Page Cancel Shows a summary of the

current settings for the printer.
View This might be helpful if you
plan to make changes and
Print need a record of the present
configuration.
Configuration/Status Pages Configuration Page Cancel Shows the printer settings and
installed accessories.
View
Print
Configuration/Status Pages How to Connect Page Cancel Shows the network information
typically needed to connect the
View printer to a network.
Print
Configuration/Status Pages Supplies Status Page Cancel Shows the approximate

remaining life for the supplies;
View reports statistics on total
number of pages and jobs
Print processed, serial number,
page counts, and maintenance
information.
HP provides approximations
of the remaining life for
the supplies as a customer
convenience. The actual
remaining supply levels
might be different than the
approximations provided.
Configuration/Status Pages Usage Page Cancel Shows a count of all paper sizes
that have passed through the
View printer; lists whether they were
simplex or duplex, and reports
Print the page count.

Table 4-12 Reports menu (continued)
First level Second level Values Description
Configuration/Status Pages File Directory Page Cancel Shows the file name and folder
name for files that are stored in
View the printer memory.
Print
Configuration/Status Pages Web Services Status Page Cancel Shows the detected Web
Services for the printer.
View
Print
Fax Reports Fax Activity Log Cancel Contains a list of the faxes
that have been sent from or
Fax models only View received by this printer.
Print
Fax Reports Billing Codes Report Cancel Provides a list of billing codes
that have been used for
Fax models only View outgoing faxes. This report
shows how many sent faxes
Print were billed to each code.
Fax Reports Blocked Fax List Cancel A list of phone numbers that
are blocked from sending faxes
Fax models only View to this printer.
Print
Fax Reports Speed Dial List Cancel Shows the speed dials that
have been set up for this
Fax models only View printer.
Print
Fax Reports Fax Call Report Cancel A detailed report of the last
fax operation, either sent or
Fax models only View received.
Print
Other Pages PCL Font List Cancel Prints the available PCL fonts.
Print
Other Pages PS Font List Cancel Prints the available PS fonts.
Print
Settings menu
Learn about the control-panel Settings menu.
NOTE: You can perform basic printer setup by using the Settings menu. Use the HP Embedded Web Server
for more advanced printer setup. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, enter the printer IP address or host
name in the address bar of a Web browser.
TIP: If prompted, enter the EWS personal identification number (PIN) from a sticker on the printer (typically
located inside the front door or on a toner cartridge tray).
Settings menu 233

General menu
Learn about the control-panel General (Settings) menu.
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu, and then select the General menu.
Table 4-13 General menu
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Date/Time Settings Date/Time Format Date Format DD/MMM/YYYY Use the Date/Time
Settings menu to
MMM/DD/YYYY specify the date
and time and to
YYYY/MMM/DD configure date/time
settings.
Date/Time Settings Date/Time Format Time Format 12 hour (AM/PM) Select the format
that the printer
24 hours uses to show the
date and time, for
example 12-hour
format or 24-hour
format.
Date/Time Settings Date/Time Time Zone Select the time zone

from a list.
Date/Time Settings Date/Time Date Select the date from a

pop-up calendar.
Date/Time Settings Date/Time Time Select the time from a

pop-up keypad.
Date/Time Settings Date/Time Adjust for Daylight Checkbox If you are in an

Savings area that uses
daylight savings
time, select the
Adjust for Daylight
Savings box.
Energy Settings Sleep Schedule A list of scheduled + (Add) Use to configure

events displays. the printer to
MFP Edit automatically wake
up or go to sleep
Delete at specific times on
specific days. Using
this feature saves
energy.
NOTE: You must

configure the date
and time settings
before you can use
this feature.

Table 4-13 General menu (continued)
Energy Settings Sleep Schedule A list of scheduled Event Type Wake Select whether to
events displays. add or edit a Wake
MFP Sleep event or a Sleep
event, and then
select the time and
the days for the
wake or sleep event.
Energy Settings Sleep Schedule A list of scheduled Event Time

events displays.
MFP
Energy Settings Sleep Schedule A list of scheduled Event Days Select days of the
events displays. week from a list.
MFP
Energy Settings Sleep Timer Sleep Mode/Auto Range: 1 to 120 Set the number
Settings Off After minutes of minutes after
MFP which the printer
Default = 60 minutes enters Sleep or Auto
Off mode. Use the
arrow buttons on
the control panel to
increase or decrease
the number of
minutes.
Energy Settings Wake/Auto On to All Events*

These Events
MFP Network port
Power button only
Energy Settings Sleep Timer Sleep/Auto Off Enabled* Enable or disable

Settings Timer the printer sleep or
SFP Disabled auto off function.
Energy Settings Sleep Timer Sleep Mode/Auto Range: 1 to 120 Set the number
Settings Off After minutes of minutes after
SFP which the printer
Default = 60 minutes enters Sleep or Auto
Off mode. Use the
arrow buttons on
the control panel to
increase or decrease
the number of
minutes.
Display Settings Display Brightness A sliding bar Use to specify the

displays with the intensity of the
indicator set in LCD control panel
the middle. Use display.
the arrow keys to
select the desired
brightness and
then select Done.
Display Settings System Sound On* Use to enable or

disable sounds on
Off the printer.
General menu 235

Display Settings Language Settings Language Select from a list of Use to select a
languages that the different language
printer supports. for control panel
messages and
specify the default
keyboard layout.
When you select
a new language,
the keyboard
layout automatically
changes to match
the factory default
for the selected
language.
Display Settings Keyboard Layout Each language has Select the default
a default keyboard keyboard layout
layout. To change it, that matches the
select from a list of language you want
layouts. to use.
Display Settings Information Screen Show connection Use this menu

information* item to display
or hide connection
Hide connection information on the
information Home screen.
Display Settings Inactivity Timeout Range: 10-300 Specifies the

seconds amount of time that
elapses between
Default = 60 seconds any activity on the
control panel and
when the printer
resets to the default
settings. When the
timeout expires,
the control panel
display returns to
the Home menu,
and any user signed
in to the printer is
signed out.
Display Settings Clearable Warnings Display during job* Use this feature
to set the period
Display until cleared that a clearable
warning displays on
the control panel.
If the On setting is
selected, clearable
warnings appear
until the Clearable
Warnings button is
pressed. If the Job
setting is selected,
clearable warnings
stay on the display
during the job
that generated
the warning and
disappear from the
display when the
next job starts.

Display Settings Continuable Events Auto-continue (10 Use this option to

seconds)* configure the printer
behavior when the
Touch OK to continue printer encounters
certain errors. If
the Auto-continue
(10 seconds) option
is selected, the
job will continue
after 10 seconds.
If the Touch OK to
continue option is
selected, the job will
stop and require the
user to touch the
OK button before
continuing.
Enable Device USB Enabled Enables the printer

to open a file from a
Disabled* USB drive.
Quiet Mode Off* Quiet Mode slows

the printer down to
On reduce the noise the
printer makes when
Automatic transition printing.
Range: 10-300 pages Automatic transition

allows you to set
Default = 10 pages a predetermined job
size of 10 to 999
pages, and print
jobs will print in
Quiet Mode for all
print jobs up to the
predetermined page
size.
General menu 237

Jam Recovery Automatic* This printer

provides a jam
Off recovery feature
that reprints
On jammed pages.
Select one of the
following options:
Automatic: The
printer attempts
to reprint jammed
pages when
sufficient memory is
available. This is the
default setting.
Off: The printer

does not attempt
to reprint jammed
pages. Because
no memory is
used to store
the most recent
pages, performance
is optimal.
NOTE: When using

this option, if the
printer runs out of
paper and the job is
being printed on
both sides, some
pages can be lost.
On: The printer

always reprints
jammed pages.
Additional memory
is allocated to
store the last
few pages printed.
This might cause
overall performance
to suffer.
Auto Recovery Enabled If Auto Recovery

is enabled and an
Disabled* unrecoverable error
occurs in the device
firmware, the device
automatically turns
off and turns back
on to recover from
the error.

Enable Auto Send Disabled* Browse to the

HP Embedded Web
Enabled Server AutoSend
configuration page
for advanced set up
and the HP online
Privacy Statement
Information.
Use the Enable

Auto Send menu
to enable or
disable the
AutoSend feature.
The AutoSend
feature enables
your product
to periodically
send product
configuration
information
including serial
number, event
logs, page usage
counts and supplies
status information
to HP web
addresses (URLs),
or email addresses.
Information sent
to HP is used to
improve products
and services, and to
monitor the product
if you have a
relationship with HP
that provides you
services such as
proactive cartridge
replacement,
pay-per-page
contracts, support
agreements, or
usage tracking.
Hold Off Print Job Enabled* Enable this feature

if you want to
Disabled prevent print jobs
from starting while
a user is initiating
a copy job from
the control panel.
Held print jobs start
printing after the
copy job is finished,
provided that no
other copy job is in
the print queue.
General menu 239

Reset Factory Address Book (MFP) Use to restore

Settings all printer settings
Copy (MFP) to their factory
defaults.
Digital Send (MFP)
E-mail (MFP)
Fax (MFP)
General (MFP)
Print (MFP)
Security (MFP)
Cancel (SFP)
Reset (SFP)
Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP)

Learn about the control-panel Scan/Digital Send Settings (MFP) menu.
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu, and then select the Scan/Digital Send
Settings menu.
Table 4-14 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP)
Scan to Email E-mail Setup E-mail Setup Wizard Use to configure

Settings settings that
NOTE: Email apply to sending
Scan to Network Settings only documents through
Folder Settings email or saving
documents to a
Scan to USB Drive folder on the
Settings network or on a USB
multi-drive.
NOTE: The same
options are The E-mail Setup
available for each of Wizard feature
these features, configures the
except where noted. printer to send
scanned images as
email attachments.
To open the printer
HP Embedded Web
Server and set
up the email
notification server,
enter the printer IP
address into a Web
browser.

Table 4-14 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) (continued)
Default Job Options Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default
job options for each
Require preview function. If you
do not specify the
Disable preview job options when
creating the job, the
default options are
used. For complete
setup, go to the
HP Embedded Web
Server by typing the
IP address of the
printer into a Web
browser.
Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether this
feature is available
on the printer.
Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.
Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.
Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.
Default File Name [Untitled]* The printer is

shipped with a
factory default file
name of [Untitled]
for any scanned
files that are sent
or saved. Use this
feature to specify
a different default
file name. If you
are saving a file
to a network folder
or USB storage
device and a file
with the default
file name already
exists, a number is
appended to the file
name, for example,
[Untitled]001.
Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) 241

Document File Type Select from a list of PDF provides the

file types. best overall image
and text quality.
JPEG is a good
choice for most
graphics. Most
computers have a
browser that can
view .JPEG files.
This file type
produces one file
per page.
TIFF is a standard
file format that
many graphics
programs support.
This file type
produces one file
per page.
MTIFF: stands for

multi-page TIFF.
This file type saves
multiple scanned
pages in a single
file.
XPS (XML
Paper Specification)
creates an XAML file
that preserves the
original formatting
of the document
and supports
color graphics and
embedded fonts.
PDF/A (Archivable):
provides archivable
text and image
quality.
NOTE: OCR file

types are not
supported on this
printer unless
attached to DSS.

Optimize Text/ Mixed* Use to optimize

Picture the output for
Text a particular type
of content. You
Printed picture can optimize the
output for text,
Photograph printed pictures, or
a mixture.
Mixed: Use to
optimize the setting
for text and for
pictures.
Text: Use to
optimize the text
portion of the copy
when text and/or
pictures are on the
original.
Printed picture: Use

for line drawings
and preprinted
images, such as
magazine clippings
or pages from
books.
Photograph: Best
suited for making
copies of printed
pictures.
Quality and File Size High (large file) Use to select

the quality for
Medium* the output. Higher-
quality images
Low (small file) require a larger
file size than lower-
quality images.
Larger files take
more time to send,
and some recipients
might have trouble
receiving larger
files.

Original Sides 1-sided Use to describe

the layout for each
2-sided side of the original
document. First
select whether the
original document
is printed on
one side or both
sides. Then touch
the Orientation
setting to indicate
whether the
original has portrait
or landscape
orientation. If it
is printed on both
sides, also select
the 2-sided format
that matches the
original document.
Orientation Automatically For some features

detect to work correctly,
you must specify
Portrait* the way the
content of the
Landscape original document
is placed on
the page. Portrait
orientation means
the short edge of
the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means
the long edge of
the page is along
the top. In the
Orientation area,
select whether the
original document
has a portrait
or landscape
orientation.

Resolution 600 dpi Sets the resolution

for sent documents.
400 dpi Higher resolution
images have more
300 dpi dots per inch (dpi),
so they show
200 dpi more detail. Lower
resolution images
150 dpi* have fewer dots
per inch and show
75 dpi less detail, but
the file size is
smaller. Some file
types, for example
a file that will be
processed with OCR,
require a specific
resolution. When
these file types
are selected, the
Resolution setting
might automatically
change to a valid
value.
Content Orientation Orientation Auto Detect For some features

to work correctly,
Portrait* you must specify
the way the
Landscape content of the
original document
is placed on
the page. Portrait
orientation means
the short edge of
the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means
the long edge of
the page is along
the top. In the
Orientation area,
select whether the
original document
has a portrait
or landscape
orientation.

Color/Black Automatically Use to enable

detect color or or disable color
black* scanning.
Automatically Automatically
detect color or gray detect color or
black: When pages
Color without color
are detected, the
Black printer creates an
image of the page in
Black/Gray 1-bit black if other
settings allow. If
the other settings
don't allow (File
Type, for example),
the image is in
grayscale.
Automatically
detect color or
gray: When pages
without color
are detected, the
printer creates an
image of the page
in grayscale. Select
this option for the
best image quality
for non-color pages.
Color: Scans
documents in color.
Black/Gray: Scans
documents in
grayscale.
Black: Scans
documents in black
and white with
a compressed file
size.
Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the

supported sizes. page size of the
original document.
Notification Do not notify* Configure to receive

notification about
Notify when job the status of a sent
completes document.
Notify only if job Do not notify: Turns

fails off this feature.
Notify when job

completes: Select to
receive notification
for this job only.

Print Notify only if job

fails: Select to
E-mail receive notification
only if the job is not
sent successfully.
Print: Select to print

the notification at
this printer.
Include Thumbnail NOTE: When

sending an analog
fax, select Include
Thumbnail to
receive a thumbnail
image of the first
page of the fax in
your notification.
Notification E-mail E-mail: Select

address to receive the
notification in an
email. Touch the
text box following
Email Address, and
then type the email
address for the
notification.
Image Adjustment Darkness Use to improve the

overall quality of
the copy.
Adjust the Darkness

setting to increase
or decrease the
amount of white
and black in the
colors.
Contrast Adjust the Contrast

setting to increase
or decrease the
difference between
the lightest and
darkest color on the
page.
Background Adjust the

Cleanup Background
Cleanup setting if
you are having
trouble copying a
faint image.

Sharpness Adjust the

Sharpness setting
to clarify or soften
the image. For
example, increasing
the sharpness
could make text
appear crisper, but
decreasing it could
make photographs
appear smoother.
Automatic Tone
Default Select this to make

the selected Image
Adjustment setting
the default value.
Cropping Options Do not crop* Use this menu item

to automatically
Crop to content crop the scan for
digital sending. Use
Crop to paper the Crop to content
option to scan the
smallest possible
area that has
detectable content.
Erase Edges Use Inches Use this menu

item to remove
Back side erase blemishes, such
as dark borders
Front side erase or staple marks,
by cleaning the
specified edges of
the scanned image.
In each of the
text boxes enter
the measurements,
in millimeters or
inches, for how
much of the top
edge, bottom edge,
left edge, and right
edge to clean.
Multi-feed On* This setting stops

Detection the scanning
Off process if it
detects multiple-
page feeds through
the document
feeder.
Blank Page Disabled* Use to prevent

Suppression blank pages in the
Enabled original document
from being included
in the output
document.

Digital Send Service Allow Usage of Enabled* Configure how the

Setup Digital Sending printer interacts
Software (DSS) Disabled with the HP Digital
Server Sending Software
(DSS) server. HP
DSS handles digital
sending tasks,
such as faxing,
emailing, and
sending scanned
documents to a
network folder or
USB storage device.
Use the Allow

Usage of Digital
Sending Software
(DSS) Server option
to configure the
printer to use HP
DSS.
Allow Transfer to Enabled* Use the Allow

New Digital Sending Transfer to New
Software (DSS) Disabled Digital Sending
Server Software (DSS)
Server option to
specify whether
DSS management
of a printer is
transferable to a
different DSS.
Fax menu (MFP)

Learn about the control-panel Fax menu (MFP).
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu, and then select the Fax menu.
Fax menu (MFP) 249

Table 4-15 Fax menu (MFP)
Internal Fax Modem Configure settings

Setup for sending faxes
from the printer.
Use the Internal

Fax Modem Setup
feature to set up
options for faxing.
NOTE: To set up
LAN fax or Internet
fax, use the HP
Embedded Web
Server. To open the
HP Embedded Web
Server, type the
printer network
address into a Web
browser. To
configure the fax
features, select the
Fax tab.
Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Fax Dialing Settings Fax Dial Volume Off These settings
control how the
Low* fax modem dials
the outgoing fax
High number when faxes
are sent.
Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Fax Dialing Settings Dialing Mode Tone*
Pulse
Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Fax Dialing Settings Redial Interval 1 – 5 Minutes
Default = 5 minutes
Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Fax Dialing Settings Fax Send Speed Fast*
Medium
Slow
Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Fax Dialing Settings Dialing Prefix
Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Fax Dialing Settings Detect Dial Tone
Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Fax Dialing Settings Redial on Error Range: 0 – 9
Default = 2
Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Fax Dialing Settings Redial on No Range: 0 – 2
Answer
Default = 0
Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Fax Dialing Settings Redial on Busy Range: 0 – 9
Default = 3
Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup General Fax Send Fax Number Enabled If this feature
Settings Confirmation is enabled, you
Disabled* must enter the fax
number twice.

Table 4-15 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)
Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup General Fax Send PC Fax Send Enabled* Enables users who
Settings have the correct
Disabled driver installed to
send faxes through
the printer from
their computers.
Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup General Fax Send JBIG Compression Enabled* The JBIG
Settings compression
Disabled reduces fax-
transmission time,
which can
result in lower
phone charges.
However, using
JBIG compression
sometimes causes
compatibility
problems with older
fax machines. If this
occurs, turn off the
JBIG compression.
Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup General Fax Send Error Correction Enabled* When error-
Settings Mode correction mode is
Disabled enabled and an
error occurs during
fax transmission,
the printer sends or
receives the error
portion again.
Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup General Fax Send Fax Header Prepend* Use to prepend
Settings or overlay the fax
Overlay header page.
Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Billing Codes Enable Billing Codes Off When billing codes
are enabled, a
On* prompt displays
that asks the
user to enter the
billing code for an
outgoing fax. This
prompt does not
appear if the Allow
users to edit billing
codes check box is
not checked.
You can also use the

billing codes report
in the Reports menu
to view the list of
the billing codes
that have been used
for faxes that have
been sent from
the printer. The
list is grouped by
billing code and also
shows fax details.
This feature can be
used for billing or
usage tracking.
Fax menu (MFP) 251

Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Billing Codes Default Billing Code Specify a default
billing code for
faxing. If you
specify a default
billing code, this
code displays in
the Billing Code
field when the user
sends an outgoing
fax. If this field is
blank, no default
billing code is
provided for the
user.
Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Billing Codes Minimum Length Range: 1 – 16 Specify the required
length of the billing
Default = 1 code. Billing codes
can be between 1
and 16 characters
long.
Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Billing Codes Allow users to edit Off
billing codes
On*
Fax Send Settings Default Job Options Image Preview Make optional* Use the Image
Preview feature to
Require preview scan a document
and display a
Disable preview preview before
completing the job.
Select whether this
feature is available
on the printer.
Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.
Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.
Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

Fax Send Settings Default Job Options Resolution Standard (100 x Select the
200dpi)* resolution for
outgoing faxes. If
Fine (200 x 200dpi) you increase the
resolution, faxes
Superfine (300 x might be clearer but
300dpi) they could transmit
more slowly. Some
file types, for
example a file that
will be processed
with OCR, require a
specific resolution.
When these file
types are selected,
the Resolution
setting might
be automatically
changed to a valid
value.
Fax Send Settings Default Job Options Original Sides 1-sided* Use to describe
the layout for each
document. First
Pages flip up select whether the
original document
is printed on
one side or both
sides. Then touch
the Orientation
setting to indicate
whether the
or landscape
orientation. If it
is printed on both
sides, also select
the 2-sided format
that matches the
original document.
If the Pages flip up

option is selected,
the back side of
the page is printed
upside-down. This
option is for print
jobs that are bound
along the top edge.
Fax menu (MFP) 253

Fax Send Settings Default Job Options Original Sides Orientation Portrait* For some features
to work correctly,
Landscape you must specify
the way the content
of the original
document is placed
on the page.
Portrait: This
setting means the
short edge of the
page is along the
top.
Landscape: This
setting means the
long edge of the
page is along the
top.
Fax Send Settings Default Job Options Notification Do not notify* Use to receive
notification about
completes document.

Notify when job

for this job only.
Notify only if job

fails: Select to
sent successfully.
Fax Send Settings Default Job Options Notification Print Print: Select to print
the notification at
E-mail this printer.
E-mail: Select
to receive the
notification in an
email. Touch the
text box following
Email Address, and
then enter the email
address for the
notification.
Fax Send Settings Default Job Options Notification Include Thumbnail When sending an
analog fax, select
Include Thumbnail
to receive a
thumbnail image of
the first page of
the fax in your
notification.

Fax Send Settings Default Job Options Notification Notification E-mail Provide the
address email address
that will receive
notifications.
Fax Send Settings Default Job Options Content Orientation Orientation Portrait* For some features
to work correctly,
Landscape you must specify
the way the content
of the original
document is placed
on the page.
Portrait: This
setting means the
short edge of the
page is along the
top.
Landscape: This
setting means the
long edge of the
page is along the
top.
Fax Send Settings Default Job Options Original Size Select from a list Use to describe the
of sizes that the page size of the
printer supports. original document.
Fax Send Settings Default Job Options Image Adjustment Darkness Use to improve the
overall quality of
the copy.
Adjust the Darkness

setting to increase
or decrease the
amount of white
and black in the
colors.
Fax Send Settings Default Job Options Image Adjustment Contrast Adjust the Contrast
setting to increase
or decrease the
difference between
the lightest and
darkest color on the
page.
Fax Send Settings Default Job Options Image Adjustment Background Adjust the
Cleanup Background
Cleanup setting if
you are having
trouble copying a
faint image.
Fax menu (MFP) 255

Fax Send Settings Default Job Options Image Adjustment Sharpness Adjust the
Sharpness setting
to clarify or soften
the image. For
example, increasing
the sharpness
could make text
appear crisper, but
decreasing it could
make photographs
appear smoother.
Fax Send Settings Default Job Options Image Adjustment Automatic Tone The printer
automatically
adjusts the
Darkness, Contrast,
and Background
Cleanup settings
to the most
appropriate for the
scanned document.
Fax Send Settings Default Job Options Optimize Text/ Manually adjust* Optimize For Optimizes the
Picture output for a
Text particular type of
content. You can
Printed picture optimize the output
for text, printed
Photograph pictures, or a
mixture.
Manually adjust:
Use to manually
optimize the setting
for text or for
pictures.
Text: Use to
optimize the text
portion of the copy
where text and/or
pictures are on the
original.
Printed picture: Use

for line drawings
and preprinted
images, such as
magazine clippings
or pages from
books.
Photograph: Best
suited for making
copies of printed
pictures.
Fax Send Settings Default Job Options Multi-feed Disabled This setting stops
Detection the scanning
Enabled* process if it
detects multiple-
page feeds through
the document
feeder.

Fax Send Settings Default Job Options Blank Page Disabled* Prevents blank
Suppression pages in the
Enabled original document
from being included
in the output
document.
Fax Receive Fax Receive Setup Ringer Volume Off Use to configure
Settings settings for
Low* receiving faxes.
High
Fax Receive Fax Receive Setup Rings To Answer Range: 1–6

Settings
Default = 1
Fax Receive Fax Receive Setup Fax Send Speed Fast*

Settings
Medium
Slow
Fax Receive Fax Receive Setup Ring Interval Range: 220–600 ms

Settings
Default = 600 ms
Fax Receive Fax Receive Setup Ring Frequency Range: 1–200

Settings
Default = 68hz
Fax Receive Fax Printing Always store faxes If you have concerns
Settings Schedule about the security
Always print faxes* of private faxes,
use this feature to
Use schedule store faxes rather
than having them
automatically print.
Select Incoming Fax
Options, and then
you can choose to
always store faxes,
always print them,
or you can set up
a schedule for each
day of the week.
Fax Receive Fax Printing Schedule Add Print incoming If you are using
Settings Schedule faxes a fax printing
Touch this to Edit schedule, use this
set up a fax Store incoming menu to configure
printing schedule if Delete faxes when to print faxes.
you selected the
Use Fax Printing Time
Schedule option.
Event Days
Fax menu (MFP) 257

Fax Receive Blocked Fax Fax Number to The blocked fax list
Settings Numbers Block can contain up to
30 numbers. When
the printer receives
a call from one
of the blocked fax
numbers, it deletes
the incoming fax.
It also logs the
blocked fax in the
activity log along
with job-accounting
information.
Add blocked
numbers: Enter a
fax number into
the Fax Number to
Block field, and then
touch the arrow
button to add a
new number to the
blocked fax list.
To remove blocked
numbers: Select a
number and touch
the Delete button to
delete it from the
blocked fax list.
To clear all blocked

numbers: Touch the
Delete All button
to clear all of the
numbers from the
blocked fax list.
You can also use

the Blocked Fax
List report in the
Information menu
to view the list of
the fax numbers
that have been
blocked on this
printer.

Fax Receive Default Job Options Notification Do not notify* Configure to receive
Settings notification about
completes document.

Notify when job

for this job only.
Notify only if job

fails: Select to
sent successfully.
Fax Receive Default Job Options Print E-mail: Select

Settings to receive the
E-mail* notification in an
email. Touch the
text box following
Email Address, and
then enter the email
address for the
notification.
Fax Receive Default Job Options Include Thumbnail NOTE: When

Settings sending an analog
fax, select Include
Thumbnail to
receive a thumbnail
image of the first
page of the fax in
your notification.
Fax Receive Default Job Options Notification E-mail

Settings address
Fax Receive Default Job Options Stamp Received Enabled Use this option to
Settings Faxes add the date, time,
Disabled* sender’s phone
number, and page
number to each
page of the faxes
that this printer
receives.
Fax Receive Default Job Options Fit to Page Enabled* Use to shrink faxes
Settings that are larger
Disabled than Letter-size or
A4-size so that
they can fit onto
a Letter-size or
A4-size page. If
this feature set
to Disabled, faxes
larger than Letter or
A4 will flow across
multiple pages.
Fax menu (MFP) 259

Fax Receive Default Job Options Paper Selection Automatic*

Settings
Select from a list of
the trays.
Fax Receive Default Job Options Output sides 1-sided* Use to describe
Settings the layout for each
document. First
Pages flip up select whether the
original document
is printed on
one side or both
sides. Then touch
the Orientation
setting to indicate
whether the
or landscape
orientation. If it
is printed on both
sides, also select
the 2-sided format
that matches the
original document.
Fax Forwarding Enable Fax Disabled* Use to forward

Forwarding received faxes
Enabled to another fax
machine.
Fax Forwarding Type of Fax Job to All faxes

Forward
Sent faxes
Received faxes
Fax Forwarding Fax Forwarding Enter the fax

Number forwarding number.
Clear Fax Activity Cancel Clears all events

Log from the Fax
Clear Activity Log list.
Manage Supplies menu

Learn about the control-panel Manage Supplies menu.
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu, and then select the Manage Supplies menu.

Table 4-16 Manage Supplies menu
Low Warning Cyan Cartridge 1-100% Set the estimated

Thresholds percentage at which
Magenta Cartridge Default = 4% the printer notifies
you when a toner
Yellow Cartridge cartridge is very low.
Black Cartridge
Low Warning Document Feeder 1-100% Set the estimated

Thresholds Kit percentage at which
Default = 10% the printer notifies
MFP you when the
document feeder kit
is very low.
Low Warning Maintenance Kit 1-100% Set the estimated

Thresholds percentage at which
SFP Default = 10% the printer notifies
you when the
maintenance kit is
very low.
Low Warning On* Displays a message

Threshold Message on the control panel
Off when a cartridge is
very low.
Low Behavior Continue* Use one of these

options to specify
Stop the action for the
device to take when
a supply reaches a
low condition.
Stop: Stops the

current print job.
Continue: Completes
the current print job.
Very Low Behavior Cyan Cartridge Stop Use one or more

of these options to
Magenta Cartridge Continue* specify the action
for the device to
Yellow Cartridge Prompt to continue take when a supply
reaches a very low
Black Cartridge condition.
Stop: Stops the

current print job.
Continue: Completes
Prompt to continue:
Allows the user to
decide whether or
not to finish printing.
Manage Supplies menu 261

Table 4-16 Manage Supplies menu (continued)
Very Low Behavior Document Feeder Stop Use one or more

Kit of these options to
Continue specify the action
MFP for the device to
Prompt to take when a supply
continue* reaches a very low
condition.
Stop: Stops the

current print job.
Continue: Completes
Prompt to continue:
Allows the user to
decide whether or
Very Low Behavior Maintenance Kit Stop Use one or more

of these options to
SFP Continue specify the action
for the device to
Prompt to take when a supply
continue* reaches a very low
condition.
Stop: Stops the

current print job.
Continue: Completes
Prompt to continue:
Allows the user to
decide whether or
Store Usage Data On supplies* Store Usage Data

provides a way
Not on supplies to suppress the
toner cartridges
from storing most
of the information
gathered exclusively
for the purpose
of understanding
the usage of the
printer. Select the
On supplies setting
to store the data on
the toner cartridge
memory chip. Select
the Not on supplies
setting to suppress
the information
from being stored on
the memory chip.

Table 4-16 Manage Supplies menu (continued)
Cartridge Protection Off* Select to

permanently protect
Protect cartridges cartridges so that
they can be used
only in this product
or fleet of products.
Cartridge Policy Off* Set Authorized HP to

allow only genuine
Authorized HP HP cartridges to be
used in this printer.
Reset Supplies Document Feeder Reset Select this option if

Kit you have installed
Cancel a new document
MFP feeder kit or
maintenance kit.
Maintenance Kit
SFP
Networking menu
Learn about the control-panel Networking menu.
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu, and then select the Networking menu.
Table 4-17 Networking menu
Ethernet Information Print Security Yes Yes: Prints a page

Report that contains the
No* current security
settings on the
HP Jetdirect print
server.
No: A security
settings page is not
printed.
Ethernet TCP/IP Host Name Use the arrow An alphanumeric

buttons to edit the string, up to 32
host name. characters, used to
identify the printer.
NPIXXXXXX* This name is listed
on the HP Jetdirect
configuration page.
The default host
name is NPIxxxxxx,
where xxxxxx is the
last six digits of the
LAN hardware (MAC)
address.
Networking menu 263

Table 4-17 Networking menu (continued)
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings Config Method Bootp Specifies the

method that TCP/
DHCP* IPv4 parameters
will be configured
Auto IP on the HP Jetdirect
print server.
Manual
Bootp (Bootstrap
Protocol): Use
for automatic
configuration from
a BootP server.
DHCP (Dynamic
Host Configuration
Protocol): Use
for automatic
configuration from
a DHCPv4 server.
If selected and a
DHCP lease exists,
the DHCP Release
menu and the DHCP
Renew menu are
available to set
DHCP lease options.
Auto IP: Use for

automatic link-local
IPv4 addressing.
An address in the
form 169.254.x.x
is assigned
automatically.
If you set this

option to the
Manual setting,
use the Manual
Settings menu to
configure TCP/IPv4
parameters.

Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings Default IP Auto IP* Specify the IP

address to default
Legacy to when the print
server is unable
to obtain an IP
address from the
network during
a forced TCP/IP
reconfiguration
(for example,
when manually
configured to use
BootP or DHCP).
NOTE: This
feature assigns a
static IP address
that might interfere
with a managed
network.
Auto IP: A link-

local IP address
169.254.x.x is set.
Legacy: The address

192.0.0.192 is set,
consistent with
older HP Jetdirect
printers.
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings DHCP Release Yes
No*
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings DHCP Renew Yes
No*
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings Primary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP
address (n.n.n.n) of
Default = a Primary Domain
xxx.xxx.xx.xx Name System (DNS)
Server.
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings Secondary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP
Default = 0.0.0.0 a Secondary DNS
Server.
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV6 Settings Enable Off Use this item to

enable or disable
On* IPv6 operation on
the print server.
Off: IPv6 is disabled.
On: IPv6 is enabled.
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV6 Settings Address Manual Settings Use this item
to enable and
Enable manually configure
a TCP/IPv6 address.
Address
Networking menu 265

Ethernet TCP/IP IPV6 Settings DHCPV6 Policy Router Specified Router Specified:
The stateful
Router Unavailable* auto-configuration
method to be used
Always by the print server
is determined by a
router. The router
specifies whether
the print server
obtains its address,
its configuration
information, or both
from a DHCPv6
server.
Router Unavailable:
If a router is
not available,
the print server
should attempt to
obtain its stateful
configuration from
a DHCPv6 server.
Always: Whether a
router is available,
the print server
always attempts to
obtain its stateful
configuration from
a DHCPv6 server.
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV6 Settings Primary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP
Default = a Primary Domain
xxx.xxx.xx.xx Name System (DNS)
Server.
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV6 Settings Secondary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP
Default = 0.0.0.0 a Secondary DNS
Server.

Ethernet TCP/IP Proxy Server Select from a Specifies the proxy

provided list. server to be
used by embedded
applications in the
printer. A proxy
server is typically
used by network
clients for Internet
access. It caches
Web pages, and
provides a degree of
Internet security for
those clients.
To specify a
proxy server, enter
its IPv4 address
or fully-qualified
domain name. The
name can be up to
255 octets.
For some networks,

you might need
to contact your
Internet Service
Provider (ISP) for
the proxy server
address.
Ethernet TCP/IP Proxy Port Range: 1-65535 Enter the port

number used by
Default = 00080 the proxy server
for client support.
The port number
identifies the port
reserved for proxy
activity on your
network, and can be
a value from 0 to
65535.
Ethernet TCP/IP Idle Timeout Range: 1-3600 The time period,

in seconds, after
Default = 0270 which an idle
TCP print data
connection is closed
(default is 270
seconds, 0 disables
the timeout).
Networking menu 267

I/O Timeout Range: 5 – 300 sec Use to set the

I/O timeout period
Default = 10 in seconds. I/O
timeout refers to
the elapsed time
before a print job
fails. If the stream
of data that the
printer receives for
a print job gets
interrupted, this
setting indicates
how long the printer
will wait before it
reports that the job
has failed.
Support Tools menu

Learn about the control-panel Support Tools menu.
NOTE: The Support Tools sub-menu contains the options for maintaining the printer and troubleshooting
printer problems.
Maintenance menu
Learn about the control-panel Maintenance menu.
Backup/Restore menu
Learn about the control-panel Backup/Restore menu.
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu, select the Maintenance menu, and
then select the Backup/Restore menu.
Table 4-18 Backup/Restore menu
First level Second level Third level Values
Back up Data Enable Scheduled Backups Backup Time Enter a time
Back up Data Enable Scheduled Backups Days Between Backups Enter the number of days
Back up Data Back up Now
Back up Data Export Last Backup
Restore Data Insert a USB drive that contains

the backup file.

Calibration/Cleaning menu
Learn about the control-panel Calibration/Cleaning menu .
then select the Calibration/Cleaning menu.
Table 4-19 Calibration/Cleaning menu
First level Values Description
Cleaning Page Automatic Cleaning Interval Use this menu to configure

the settings for the product to
Off* automatically print a cleaning
page.
1000 pages
Select Off to disable automatic
2000 pages cleaning.
5000 pages Select a cleaning interval to

set the number of pages to
10000 pages be printed before an automatic
cleaning page is printed.
20000 pages
Touch Print to manually print a
cleaning page.
NOTE: Cleaning pages print

on the default paper size
configured for the printer.
Quick Calibration Start The printer automatically

calibrates itself at various
times. However, the user
can calibrate the printer
immediately if the printer
experiences problems with
print quality. Use this feature
to perform a partial calibration.
Use this calibration if color
density or tone seem incorrect.
Before calibrating, make sure

that the Ready indicator
displays on the control panel
display. If a job is in progress,
the calibration occurs when
that job is complete.
Calibration/Cleaning menu 269

Table 4-19 Calibration/Cleaning menu (continued)
First level Values Description
Full Calibration Start The printer automatically

calibrates itself at various
times. However, the user
can calibrate the printer
immediately if the printer
experiences problems with
print quality. Use this feature
to perform a full calibration,
which can take up to three
minutes. Use this calibration if
the color layers seem to be
shifted on the page.
Before calibrating, make sure

that the Ready indicator
displays on the control panel
display. If a job is in progress,
the calibration occurs when
that job is complete.
Power on Calibration No delay This feature controls the timing

of calibration when the printer
Delay 15 minutes wakes up or is turned on.
Calibrate Scanner Done Touch Start to calibrate the

device scanner. Messages on
MFP Start the control panel display
will lead you through the
calibration process.
Reset Calibration Reset Use this feature to return

the product to the factory-
Cancel set default values for color
calibration.
Select Reset to reset the color

calibration. The printer will
restart with the factory-set
defaults.
Select Cancel to close the menu

without resetting the color
calibration.
USB Firmware Upgrade menu

Learn about the control-panel USB Firmware Upgrade menu.
then select the USB Firmware Upgrade menu.
Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port, and follow the on-screen
instructions.
Service menu
Learn about the control-panel Service menu.
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu, and then select the Service menu.

The Service menu is locked and requires a personal identification number (PIN) for access. This menu is
intended for use by authorized service personnel. See the Service menu section of this manual.
Troubleshooting menu
Learn about the control-panel Troubleshooting menu.
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu, and then select the Troubleshooting
menu.
Table 4-20 Troubleshooting menu
Reports Configuration/ Settings Menu Map Select the desired

Status Pages report and then
Current Settings select the print
Page
icon to print
Configuration Page the page.
Supplies Status
Page
Usage Page
Paper Path Page
File Directory Page
Web Services Status

Page
PCL Font List
PS Font List
Event Log
Warning Log Page
T.30 Protocol Trace
PQ Troubleshooting
Pages
Paper Path Test
Reports Fax Reports Fax Activity Log Select the desired

report and then
Billing Codes Report select the print
Blocked Fax List icon to print

the page.
Fax Call Report
Reports Other Pages PCL Font List Select the desired

report and then
PS Font List select the print
icon to print
the page.
Troubleshooting menu 271

Table 4-20 Troubleshooting menu (continued)
Fax Tools Fax T.30 Trace Never automatically Use to print or

Report print* configure the fax
Fax models only T.30 trace report.
Print after every fax T.30 is the standard
that specifies
Print only after fax handshaking,
send jobs protocols, and error
correction between
Print only after fax machines.
received faxes
Print only after fax

send errors
Print only after fax

receive errors
Print after any fax

error
Fax Tools Fax V.34 Enable* Use to disable

V.34 modulations if
Fax models only Disable several fax failures
have occurred or
if phone line
conditions require
it.
Fax Tools JBIG Compression On
Fax models only Off*
Fax Tools Fax Speaker Mode Normal* Used by a technician

to evaluate and
Fax models only Diagnostic diagnose fax issues
by listening to
the sounds of fax
modulations
Fax Tools Fax Service Log Print The standard fax

log includes basic
Fax models only information such
as the time and
whether the fax
was successful.
The detailed fax
log shows the
intermediate results
of the redial process
not shown in the
standard fax log.
Print Quality Pages PQ Troubleshooting Print Use to print pages

Pages that help you
resolve problems
with print quality.

Event Log Prints the 50 most

recent events in the
Event Log. For each
event, the printed
log shows the
error number, page
count, error code,
and description or
personality.
Paper Path Page Print Shows how many

pages were printed
from each tray.
Diagnostic Tests Disable Cartridge Continue Use this diagnostic

Check test to print internal
pages or send an
external job to
the printer when
the toner cartridge
is removed or
exchanged. Supply
errors are ignored
while the printer is
in this mode.
Diagnostic Tests Paper Path Test Source Tray Select from a list of Generates a test
the available trays. page for testing
paper handling
features. You can
define the path that
is used for the test
in order to test
specific paper paths
Diagnostic Tests Paper Path Test Number of Copies Range: 1–500 Sets the default
number of copies
Default = 1 for a copy job.
This default applies
when the Copy or
Quick Copy function
is initiated from
the printer Home
screen. The factory
default setting is 1.
Diagnostic Tests Paper Path Test Test Duplex Path Enable Prints on both sides
of the paper.
Disable*
Diagnostic Tests Print/Stop Test Specify the

length of time
in milliseconds
(0-60,000).
Diagnostic Tests Paper Path Sensor Select from a list of Initiates a test of
Test the printer sensors. the paper path
sensors.
Troubleshooting menu 273

Diagnostic Tests Manual Sensor Test Select from a Test the printer
list of available sensors and
NOTE: This item components switches for correct
appears in the operation. Each
control-panel Reset sensor is displayed
menus. However, on the control-
the function is not panel screen, along
available for this with its status.
printer Manually trip each
sensor and watch
for it to change on
the screen. Press
the Stop button to
abort the test.
Diagnostic Tests Tray/Bin Manual Select from a Test the printer

Sensor Test list of available sensors and
components switches for correct
NOTE: This item operation. Each
appears in the Reset sensor is displayed
control-panel on the control-
menus. However, panel screen, along
the function is not with its status.
available for this Manually trip each
printer sensor and watch
for it to change on
the screen. Press
the Stop button to
abort the test.
Diagnostic Tests Component Test Select from a Use to exercise

list of available individual parts
NOTE: This item components. independently to
appears in the isolate noise,
control-panel leaking, or other
menus. However, issues. To start the
the function is not test, select one
available for this of the components.
printer The test will run
the number of times
specified by the
Repeat option. You
might be prompted
to remove parts
from the printer
during the test.
Press the Stop
button to abort the
test.
Diagnostic Tests Continuous Scan 2-sided
MFP
Diagnostic Tests Scanner Tests Sensors
MFP
Generate Debug Start

Data

Retrieve Diagnostic Create device data Create files that

Data file contain information
about the printer
Create zipped that can help
debug information identify the cause
file of problems.
Include crash dump

files
Clean up debug
information
Send to E-mail
Export to USB
Retrieve Fax Create device data Create files that

Diagnostic Data file contain information
about the printer
Create zipped that can help
debug information identify the cause
file of problems.
Include crash dump

files
Clean up debug
information
Send to E-mail
Export to USB
Service menu
Learn about the printer Service menu.
Service menu access is restricted by using a personal identification number (PIN). Only authorized service
people should access the Service menu. When selecting Service from the list of menus, the printer prompts
the user to enter an eight-digit PIN.
NOTE: The printer automatically exits the Service menu after about one minute if no items are selected or
changed.
Open the Service menu from a SFP control panel
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to navigate to Support Tools,
and then press the OK button.
2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Service, and then press the OK button.
3. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected for the Access Type item.
NOTE: Use the arrow buttons to select and change the Access Type item if necessary.
4. Enter the following service access PIN for the printer:
● 10670022 (SFP)
Service menu 275

● 10680022 (MFP)
Open the Service menu from an MFP control panel
● Service
3. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected for the Access Type item.
4. Enter the following service access PIN for the printer:
● 10670022 (SFP)
● 10680022 (MFP)
Service menu table
The following menu items appear in the Service menu.
Table 4-21 Service menu
First level Second level Value Description
Event Log Print Print or view the event log.
Clear Event Log Clear Use this item to clear the

printer event log.
Cycle Counts Total Engine Cycles Set the page count that was
stored in NVRAM prior to
installing a new formatter.
Cycle Counts Refurbish Cycle Count Use this item to record the
page count when the printer
was refurbished.
Cycle Counts Document Feeder Total number of pages since

the document feeder kit was
MFP replaced.
Cycle Counts Document Feeder Kit Use this item to

Interval set the interval that
causes the printer to
MFP prompt the customer to
replace document feeder
maintenance kit.
Cycle Counts Clean Rollers Count Total number of pages since

the document feeder rollers
MFP were cleaned.
Cycle Counts Clean Rollers Interval Use this item to set the
interval that causes the
MFP printer to prompt the
customer to clean the
document feeder rollers and
separation pad.
Cycle Counts ADF Count Set the total pages fed

through the document
MFP feeder.

Table 4-21 Service menu (continued)
Cycle Counts Flatbed Count Set the total pages scanned

from the flatbed.
MFP
Cycle Counts ADF Simplex Count Set the total single-sided

pages fed through the
MFP document feeder.
Cycle Counts ADF Duplex Count Set the total two-sided

pages fed through the
MFP document feeder.
Cycle Counts Copy Scan Count Set the total copy pages that
have been scanned.
MFP
Cycle Counts Send Scan Count Set the number of scanned

pages sent to email.
MFP
Cycle Counts Fax Scan Count Set the number of scanned

pages that have been faxed.
Fax models only
Cycle Counts Copy Pages Count Set the number of scanned

pages that have been
MFP printed.
Scanner Settings ADF Settings Leading edge front Set the calibration values.
MFP Leading edge back WARNING! Do not change

these values unless
Trailing edge front instructed to do so.
Trailing edge back
Left side front
Left side back
Scanner Settings Glass Settings Leading edge glass
MFP Left Side Glass
Serial Number Set the serial number.
Service ID Use this item to show the

date that the printer was
first used on the control
panel. This eliminates the
need for users to keep
paper receipts for proof of
warranty.
Cold Reset Paper When you perform a cold

reset, the paper size that is
stored in NVRAM is reset to
the default factory setting.
If you replace a formatter
board in a country/region
that uses A4 as the standard
paper size, use this menu to
reset the default paper size
to A4. LETTER and A4 are
the only available values.
Service menu 277

Low Alerts Enable Turn on (or off) low alerts

(for supplies).
Disable
Reset Low Alerts ● Reset to level 1
● Reset to level 2
● Reset to level 3
● Set to non-HP
managed mode
PTT Test Mode Test the internal modem for

the analog fax accessory.
Fax models only
PTT Test Mode Hook Operations Off Hook
Fax models only On Hook
PTT Test Mode Generate Random Data Select a value from

the list.
Fax models only
PTT Test Mode Generate DTMF Tone Burst Select a value from
the list.
Fax models only
PTT Test Mode Generate DTMF Continuous Select a value from

Tone the list.
Fax models only
PTT Test Mode Generate Pulse Burst Select a value from

the list.
Fax models only
PTT Test Mode Generate Tone Dial Number Enter dial number.
Fax models only
PTT Test Mode Generate Pulse Dial Number Enter dial number.
Fax models only
PTT Test Mode Generate Single Modem Tone Range: 1100–2100

Hz
Fax models only
Default = 2100 Hz
PTT Test Mode Line Measurements
Fax models only
PTT Test Mode Fax Transmit Signal Loss
Fax models only
Test Support Continuous Scan 2-sided
MFP Save to Disk
Test Support Continuous Copy 2-sided
MFP Save to Disk

Test Support Raw Scan 2-sided
MFP Mechanical
Calibration
Test Support Continuous Print from USB
Test Support Automatic Calibrations Disabled
MFP Enabled*
Test Support Runtime Configuration Standard
MFP StandardEIC
Workflow
WorkflowEIC
Reconfigure
Printer resets
Learn about the printer resets.
Restore factory-set defaults from a non-touchscreen control panel
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to navigate to Settings, and
then press the OK button.
2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to General, and then press the OK button.
3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Restore Factory Settings, and then press the OK button.
4. A verification message advises that completing the reset function might result in loss of data. Select the
Reset button to complete the process.
Restore factory-set defaults from a touchscreen control panel
● General Settings
● Reset Factory Settings
3. A verification message advises that completing the reset function might result in loss of data. Touch the
Reset button to complete the process.
Restore the Service ID
When replacing the formatter, the Service ID date is lost. Use this menu item to reset the date to the original
date that the printer was first used. The date format is YYDDD. Use the following formula to calculate the
Service ID.
Calculate the service ID
Printer resets 279

For the calculation below, the placed-in-service date is 17OCT2002.
1. To calculate YY, subtract 1990 from the calendar year. If the printer was first used in 2002, calculate YY as
follows: 2002 - 1990 = 19. YY = 12.
2. Subtract 1 from 10 (October is the tenth month of the year): 10 - 1 = 9.
● Multiply 9 by 30: 9 x 30 = 270 and add 17 to 270: 270 + 17 = 287. Thus, DDD = 287.
3. In this example the Service ID is 12287.
Convert the Service ID to an actual date
Use the printer Service ID number to determine whether the printer is still under warranty. Use the following
formula to convert the Service ID into the actual date the printer was placed-in-service. For the example
below, use the Service ID previously calculated (12287).
1. Add 1990 to YY to get the actual year that the printer was installed.
2. Divide DDD by 30. If there is a remainder, add 1 to the result. This is the month.
3. The remainder from the calculation in step 2 is the date.
a. 12 + 1990 = 2002, so the year is 2002.
b. 287 divided by 30 = 9 with a remainder of 17. Because there is a remainder, add 1 to 9 to get 10,
which represents October.
c. The remainder in step 2 is 17, so that is the date. The complete date is 17-October-2002.
NOTE: A six-day grace period is built into the date system.
Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a non-touchscreen control panel
CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).
1. Press the Cancel button when you see the 1/8 under the logo
2. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +3:Administrator item, and then press the OK button.
3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +8:Startup Options item, and then press the OK button.
4. Use the arrow buttons to highlight 2 Cold Reset item, and then press the OK button.
5. Press the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and then
press the OK button.
NOTE: The printer initializes.
Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel
1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo

Figure 4-91 Open the Pre-boot menu (MFP)
1 2
3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +8:Startup Options item, and then press the OK button.
4. Use the arrow buttons to highlight 2 Cold Reset item, and then press the OK button.
5. Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and then
Format Disk and Partial Clean functions

Learn about the printer Format Disk and Partial Clean functions.
Active and repository firmware locations
The firmware bundle consists of multiple parts. The main components are the Windows CE Operating System
and the printer/peripheral firmware files.
There are two locations/partitions on the hard drive where the firmware components are stored:
● The Active, where the operating system and firmware currently are executing.
● The Repository, the recovery location.
If the Active location is damaged, or a Partial Clean was performed, the printer automatically copies over the
OS and firmware files from the Repository location and the printer recovers.
If both the Active and Repository locations are damaged, or a Format Disk was performed, then both locations
are gone and the error message 99.09.67 displays on the control-panel display. The user must upload the
firmware to the printer in order for it to function again.
CAUTION: The Format Disk option performs a disk initialization for the entire disk. The operating system,
firmware files, and third party files (among other files) are completely lost. HP does not recommend this
action.
Partial Clean
The Partial Clean option erases all partitions and data on the disk drive, except for the firmware repository
where a backup copy of the firmware file is stored. This allows the disk drive to be reformatted without having
to download a firmware upgrade file to return the printer to a bootable state.
Characteristics of a Partial Clean
● Customer-defined settings, third-party solutions, firmware files, and the operating system are deleted.
Format Disk and Partial Clean functions 281

● Rebooting the printer restores the firmware files from the Repository location, but does not restore any
customer-defined settings.
● For previous HP printers, a Hard Disk Initialization is similar to executing the Partial Clean function for this
printer.
CAUTION: HP recommends backing-up printer configuration data before executing a Partial Clean to retain
customer-defined settings (if needed). See the Backup/Restore item in the Device Maintenance menu.
Reasons for performing Partial Clean
● The printer continually boots up in an error state.
NOTE: Try clearing the error prior to executing a Partial Clean.
● The printer will not respond to commands from the control panel.
● Executing the Partial Clean function is helpful for troubleshooting hard disk problems.
● To reset the printer by deleting all solutions and customer-defined settings.
● The printer default settings are not properly working.
Execute a Partial Clean from a non-touchscreen control panel
This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer configurations and
settings are lost).
3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight Partial Clean item, and then press the OK button.
4. Press the OK button again.
5. Press the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the Continue item, and then
Execute a Partial Clean from a touchscreen control panel
settings are lost).
1 2

3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight Partial Clean item, and then press the OK button.
5. Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the Continue item, and then
Format Disk
The Format Disk option erases the entire disk drive.
CAUTION: After executing a Format Disk option, the printer is not bootable.
Characteristics of a Format Disk
● Customer-defined settings, third-party solutions, firmware files, and the operating system are deleted.
NOTE: Rebooting the printer does not restore the firmware files
● Rebooting the printer restores the firmware files from the Repository location, but does not restore any
customer-defined settings.
● After executing the Format Disk function, the message 99.09.67 displays on the control panel.
● After executing the Format Disk function, the printer firmware must be reloaded.
CAUTION: HP recommends not using the Format Disk option unless an error occurs and the solution in the
printer service manual recommends this solution. After executing the Format Disk function, the printer is
unusable.
HP recommends backing-up printer configuration data before executing a Format Disk to retain customer-
defined settings (if needed). See the Backup/Restore item in the Device Maintenance menu.
Reasons for performing Format Disk
● The printer continually boots up in an error state.
NOTE: Try clearing the error prior to executing a Format Disk.
● The printer will not respond to commands from the control panel.
● Executing the Format Disk function is helpful for troubleshooting hard disk problems.
● To reset the printer by deleting all solutions and customer-defined settings.
Execute a Format Disk from a non-touchscreen control panel
settings are lost).
3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight Format Disk item, and then press the OK button.
Format Disk and Partial Clean functions 283

NOTE: When the Format Disk operation is complete, reload the printer firmware.
Execute a Format Disk from a touchscreen control panel
settings are lost).
1 2
3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight Format Disk item, and then press the OK button.
NOTE: When the Format Disk operation is complete, reload the printer firmware.
Power on troubleshooting
Learn about power on troubleshooting.
Power-on checks
Learn about power-on checks.
The basic printer functions should start up when the printer is connected into an electrical outlet and the
power switch is pushed to the on position. If the printer does not start, use the information in this section to
isolate and solve the problem.
If the control panel display remains blank, random patterns display, or asterisks remain on the control panel
display, perform power-on checks to find the cause of the problem.
Power on troubleshooting overview

Learn about general power on troubleshooting.
During normal operation, a cooling fan begins to spin briefly after the printer power is turned on. Place a hand
over the fan intake vents located on the right-side cover. When the fan is correctly operating, air passing into
the printer is felt. Lean close to the printer to hear the fan operating. If the fan is operating, the dc side of the
power supply is functioning.
After the fan is operating, the main motor turns on (unless the top cover is open, a jam condition is sensed, or
the paper-path sensors are damaged). Visually and audibly determine that the main motor is turned on.

If the fan and main motor are operating correctly, the next troubleshooting step is to isolate print engine,
formatter, and control panel problems. Perform an engine test. If the formatter is damaged, it might interfere
with the engine test. If the engine-test page does not print, try removing the formatter, and then performing
the engine test again. If the engine test is then successful, the problem is almost certainly with the formatter,
the control panel, or the cable that connects them.
Troubleshooting power-on or blank control panel problems

If the printer is not powering on correctly, use the following steps to begin troubleshooting the problem.
1. Verify that power is available to the printer. If the printer is plugged into a surge protector or
uninterruptible power supply (UPS), remove it. Plug the printer directly into a known operating wall
receptacle (make sure that the wall receptacle provides the correct voltage and current for the printer).
NOTE: Unplug any other devices on the same circuit that the printer is using.
2. Try another known operating wall receptacle and a different power cord.
3. To eliminate a thermal switch issue, unplug the power cord and leave it unplugged for over 20 minutes.
Re-attach the power cord, and then turn the power on again.
4. During normal operation, a cooling fan or fans begin to spin briefly after the printer power is turned on.
Place a hand over the cover vent or vents to feel air passing out of the printer. Lean close to the printer
to hear the fan or fans operating. Look for illuminated lights on the control panel and formatter LEDs.
NOTE: Operational fans, motors, and control-panel lights indicate the following:
● AC power is present at the printer.
● The power supply is providing either or both 24 Vdc and 5 Vdc voltages.
● The DC controller microprocessor is functioning.
5. If the printer powers on, but the control panel is blank, make sure that the control-panel display wire
harness or harnesses and flat flexible cable or cables (FFCs) are connected.
NOTE: The following conditions indicate that the printer has frozen while in Sleep mode or Sleep delay.
Opening a door or pressing a control-panel button should cause the printer to wake up from Sleep mode
or Sleep delay.
● The control panel home button LED is illuminated
● The power-switch LED flashes once every three to five seconds
If the control panel is not responding, or if it appears black or blank, try the following:
a. Turn the printer power off, and then on again.
b. Verify that the system is correctly functioning by printing a test page. Does the test page print
correctly?
Is the printer HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) accessible?
c. Verify that the control panel is correctly functioning. If it is not, turn the printer off and reseat the
control-panel assembly cable connections at the control-panel assembly and the formatter.
d. Try upgrading the firmware. If the firmware upgrade fails to resolve the problem, and the printer
still freezes while in Sleep mode or Sleep delay, elevate the case.
Troubleshooting power-on or blank control panel problems 285

e. If the error persists and the EWS functions correctly, replace the control-panel assembly.
6. If normal start-up noises are not heard, turn the printer off, and then remove any installed accessories
(for example, envelope feeders, paper feeders, or output accessories).
7. Turn the printer on, and then listen for start-up noises. If normal start-up noises are heard, the problem
might be with an accessory.
8. Perform an engine test. The engine test procedure varies by printer, so refer to the printer Service
Manual to get instructions.
9. If the engine test page prints, the print engine is operating normally. Replace the formatter.
CAUTION: Under NO circumstances should a formatter from a different printer be installed during the
repair or troubleshooting processes. The formatter stores important data specific to the model of printer
it is installed in and is not designed to be swapped or repurposed in any way. Return a used formatter to
HP.
change and might make a product unusable
● 33.02.01 Used board/Disk installed errors
If a used formatter is installed and causes this issue, the partner must cover the costs of the repair in
the form of a product replacement. There is no method in the field to recover a printer where a used
formatter is installed.
For more information, see the following topic (c06360930):
● HP internal link: 33.02.01 error or printer name and/or product number changes after replacing the
formatter
● HP external partner link: 33.02.01 error or printer name and/or product number changes after
replacing the formatter
To access the HP partner link, you must first log in to the HP Partner First Portal and then connect to
WISE.
NOTE: If the engine test page does not print, turn the printer off, reconnect the formatter power
connector, remove the embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC), and then try the engine test again. If the page
prints, the problem might be the eMMC.
10. If after replacing the formatter or eMMC normal start-up noises are still not heard, replace the DC
controller.
11. If the print engine appears to be correctly operating (the engine test page successfully printed) and the
control panel is still blank, replace the power supply.
Engine diagnostics
Learn about internal engine diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality, paper path, noise,
assembly, and timing issues.
Engine test
Learn about troubleshooting the printer using the engine test diagnostic.

When the engine test is performed, a test page with lines prints if the engine is functioning correctly.
NOTE: Depending on printer models, either a simplex engine test page, a duplex engine test page, or both
simplex and duplex engine test pages might be available.
Use a small pointed object to depress and hold the engine test button (location varies depending on the
printer model). An engine test page prints. The test page can use only Tray 2 as the paper source, so make
sure that paper is loaded in Tray 2.
Possible engine test pages (printer dependent)
● A series of lines parallel to the short end of the page.
● A series of lines parallel to the long end of the page.
Figure 4-94 Engine test button
Defeating interlocks
Learn about defeating printer interlocks.
Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For assembly or noise isolation, run the
diagnostic test when the front, right or toner supply (model specific) door is open.
Defeating the door interlocks allows observation of the paper pick operation.
Defeat the front door interlock
Defeating interlocks 287

Figure 4-95 Defeat the front door interlock
Defeat the right door interlock
Figure 4-96 Defeat the right door interlock
Defeat the toner supply door interlock (X654/X677 models)

Figure 4-97 Defeat the toner supply door interlock (X654/X677 models)
Disable cartridge check

Learn about the disable cartridge check troubleshooting diagnostic.
CAUTION: Do not perform a disable cartridge check on color printers that use a two-part cartridge design.
Doing so might result in toner cross contamination in the supply lines.
Use this diagnostic test to print internal pages or send an external job to the printer when a toner cartridge is
removed or exchanged. Supply errors are ignored while the printer is in this mode.
When the printer is in this mode, access the troubleshooting menus and print internal pages (the print quality
pages will be the most useful). This test can be used to isolate problems, such as noise, and to isolate
print-quality problems that are related to a toner cartridge.
NOTE: Do not remove or exchange the toner cartridge until after beginning the disable cartridge check
diagnostic.
● Troubleshooting
● Disable Cartridge Check
LED diagnostics (formatter)

Learn about troubleshooting the printer using formatter LEDs.
The formatter has two network port LEDs. When the printer is connected to a properly working network
through a network cable, the amber LED indicates network activity, and the green LED indicates the link
status.
A blinking amber LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is off, a link has failed. For link failures, check
all of the network cable connections.
In addition, try to manually configure the network card link speed setting by using the printer control panel. To
change the link speed, complete the following steps.
Disable cartridge check 289

● Networking
● Ethernet
● Link Speed
3. Touch the desired link speed setting, and then touch the Done button.
Use the solve problems checklist

Learn about using the solve problems checklist.
If the printer is not correctly functioning, complete the steps (in the order given) in the following checklist.
If the printer fails a checklist step, follow the corresponding troubleshooting suggestions for that step. If a
checklist step resolves the problem, skip the remaining checklist items.
1. If the control panel is blank or black, check the following before proceeding:
● Check to make sure that the printer is not in Sleep mode (press a button on the control panel).
● Check the power cable.
● Check that the power is turned on.
● Make sure that the line voltage is correct for the printer power configuration. (See the label that is
on the back of the printer for voltage requirements.) If a power strip is in use, and its voltage is not
within specifications, connect the printer directly into the electrical outlet. If it is already connected
into the outlet, try a different outlet.
NOTE: The following conditions indicate that the printer has frozen while in Sleep mode. Opening a
door or pressing a control-panel button causes the printer to wake up from Sleep mode.
● The control panel home button LED is illuminated
● The power-switch LED flashes once every three to five seconds
If the control panel is not responding, or if it appears black or blank, try the following:
a. Turn the printer power off, and then on again.
b. Verify that the system is correctly functioning.
TIP: The LED on the formatter will blink if the control panel is not detected or the cables are not
properly seated.
● Try printing from a host computer. Does the printer print a test page?
● Is the printer HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) accessible?
c. Verify that the control panel is correctly functioning.
i. Turn the power off.
ii. Reseat the cable connections on the bottom of the control-panel assembly and the control-
panel connectors at the formatter.

iii. Turn the printer power on, and then check for functionality of the control-panel by pressing a
button on the control panel.
d. Try upgrading the firmware. If the firmware upgrade fails to resolve the problem, and the printer
still freezes while in Sleep mode, elevate the case.
e. If the error persists and the EWS functions correctly, replace the control-panel assembly.
2. The control panel should indicate a Ready, Paused, or Sleep mode on status. If an error message
displays, resolve the error.
● Try using the Power-on checks section in this manual to solve the problem.
3. For network connection errors, verify that the network port is active and that the cables are securely
seated.
a. Check the network cable connections between the printer and the computer or network port. Make
sure that the connections are secure.
NOTE: The network LEDs should be illuminated and flashing.
b. Make sure that the cables are not faulty by trying different cables, if possible.
c. Check the network connection. Verify that the port is active.
4. Print a configuration page. If the printer is connected to a network, an HP Jetdirect page also prints.
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button. Open
the following menus:
i. Configuration/Status Pages
ii. Configuration Page
b. Touch Configuration Page to select it.
TIP: Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.
c. Touch the Print button to print the pages.
● If the pages do not print, check that at least one tray contains paper.
TIP: Make sure that the selected paper size and type meet HP specifications. Also open the Trays
menu on the printer control panel and verify that the tray is configured correctly for the paper type
and size.
● If the page jams in the printer, follow the instructions on the control panel to clear the jam.
Use the solve problems checklist 291

● If the page does not print correctly, the problem is with the printer hardware.
● If the page prints correctly, the printer hardware is working. The problem is with the host computer,
with the print driver, or with the program.
5. Print a supplies status page and then check that the maintenance items below are not at their end-of-
life.
NOTE: HP long-life consumables and maintenance kit life specifications are estimations. Actual
individual life/yield during normal use varies depending on usage, environment, media, and other
factors. Estimated life is not an implied guarantee or warrantable.
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button. Open
the following menus:
i. Configuration/Status Pages
ii. Supplies Status Page
b. Touch Supplies Status Page to select it.
TIP: Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.
c. Touch the Print button to print the pages.
If a maintenance item needs to be replaced, order the replacement part.
6. Verify that the correct print driver for this printer is installed. Check the program to make sure
that the print driver for this printer is used. The print driver is on the CD that came with
the printer, or can be downloaded from this Web site: http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj6700
or http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj6800MFP or http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj6801MFP or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX654 or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX677MFP.
7. Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past. If this solution works, the
problem is with the program. If this solution does not work (the document does not print), complete
these steps:
a. Try printing the job from another computer that has the printer software installed.
b. If the printer is connected to the network, connect the printer directly to a host computer with a
USB cable. Redirect the printer to the correct port, or reinstall the software (make sure to select the
new connection type).
Control panel troubleshooting

If the control panel is not responding normally or has display issues, use the following procedures to
troubleshoot the issues.
Control panel system diagnostics

Learn about printer firmware control panel troubleshooting.
Use the diagnostics in this section to test the control panel hardware and display using the printer firmware
system diagnostics.

Open the control panel system diagnostic tests
Learn about accessing the control panel system diagnostics tests from a touchscreen control panel.
Use the following procedure to open the control panel system diagnostics tests.
1. Turn the printer power off, and then on again.
1 2
Table 4-22 Pre-boot menu button descriptions
Button Description
Open the control panel system diagnostic tests 293

Table 4-22 Pre-boot menu button descriptions (continued)
Button Description
Not used.
4. Use the down arrow button to scroll to +3 Administration, and then press the OK button to select it.
Figure 4-100 Access the administration menu
5. Use the down arrow button to scroll to +E CP Diagnostics, and then press the OK button to select it.
NOTE: An administrator password might be required to continue.

Figure 4-101 Access the diagnostics menu
Screen test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic screen test.
2. With 1 Screen Test highlighted, press the OK button to select it.
Figure 4-102 Open the screen test
The blue horizontal gradient screen appears.
Screen test 295

Figure 4-103 Blue horizontal gradient screen
3. Touch the touchscreen to scroll though the remaining touchscreen test screens.
Table 4-23 Touchscreen test screens
Screen Description
Green horizontal gradient
Red horizontal gradient
Blue vertical gradient
Green vertical gradient
Red vertical gradient

Screen Description
Blue with horizontal interlaced
Green with horizontal interlaced
Red with horizontal interlaced
Blue with vertical interlaced
Green with vertical interlaced
Red with vertical interlaced
Screen test 297

Screen Description
Black with white center
White with black center
Checkerboard
Multicolor stripes
Blue green grid meshing
Touch test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic touch test.

2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 2 Touch Test, and then press the OK button to select it.
Figure 4-104 Open the touch test
3. Use your finger to touch the white grid on the display.
Figure 4-105 Touch the white grid
A mark appears on the grid where it was touched.
Touch test 299

Figure 4-106 Verify the mark
SoftKey test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic SoftKey test.
2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 3 SoftKey Test, and then press the OK button to select it.
Figure 4-107 Open the softkey test

3. When prompted, touch the Home button.
Figure 4-108 Touch the Home button
If the test is successful, the following screen appears on the display.
NOTE: Touch the screen to exit the test.
Figure 4-109 Successful test
Backlight test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic backlight test.
Backlight test 301

2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 4 Backlight Test, and then press the OK button to select it.
After selecting the 4 Backlight Test, the screen automatically dims, and then returns to full brightness.
Figure 4-110 Open the backlight test
Sound test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic sound test.
2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 5 Sound Test, and then press the OK button to select it.
After selecting the 5 Sound Test, the printer emits a series of audible tones.

Figure 4-111 Open the sound test
Version
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic version information.
2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 7 Version, and then press the OK button to select it.
Select 7 Version to view the following types of information:
NOTE: The following types of information are for the control panel only, not the printer.
● Panel ID
● Hardware (version)
● Firmware (version)
● KB Hw (version)
● KB Firm (version)
● LCD Vendor
● Touch Controller Version
Version 303
Figure 4-112 Open the version information




Channel Partner.

● User Guides
● Service Manuals

HP


HP



Play the video:
Control panel messages document (CPMD)

Learn about the printer control panel messages document (CPMD).
NOTE: A complete CPMD is not included in this service manual. Click on the links below to access a CPMD on
the HP Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE) site.
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise 6700, 6701, MFP 6800, 6801 - Control Panel Message Document (CPMD)
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise X654, X65455, X65465, MFP X677, MFP X67755, MFP X67765 - Control Panel
Message Document (CPMD)
Print the supplies status page

The supplies status page indicates the cartridge status.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports menu icon.
2. Touch the Configuration/Status Pages menu.
3. Touch Supplies Status Page, and then touch the Print icon to print the page.
Pre-boot menu options

The Pre-boot menus are available prior to the printer initializing.
CAUTION: The Format Disk option performs a disk initialization for the entire disk. The operating system,
firmware files, and third party files (among other files) will be completely lost. HP does not recommend this
action unless it is specified as a solution in the CPMD.
TIP: The Pre-boot menu is also remotely accessible by using a telnet network protocol (Remote Admin) to
establish an administration connection to the printer.
Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel

Use the following procedure to open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel.
1. Turn the printer on.
2. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.
1 2
Control panel messages document (CPMD) 309

Button Description
Not used.
4. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to navigate the Pre-boot menu.
5. Touch the OK button to select a menu item.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel
Use the following procedure to perform a cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control
panel.
1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.
1 2
2. Use the down arrow button to highlight the +3:Administrator item, and then touch the OK button.
3. Use the down arrow button to highlight the +8:Startup Options item, and then touch the OK button.
4. Use the down arrow button to highlight the 2 Cold Reset item, and then touch the OK button to select
it.
5. Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and then
touch the OK button.
NOTE: The printer will initialize.
Remote Admin
Learn about the printer Remote Admin function.
The Remote Admin feature allows remote access the printer Pre-boot menu (BIOS environment). The printer
functions as a telnet server which uses the telnet networking protocol to transmit text data. Any computer
(with telnet installed and enabled) can function as the telnet client to remotely display and interact with the
Pre-boot menu.
IMPORTANT: While the Remote Admin function allows remote access the Pre-boot menu, for security
reasons the Remote Admin connection must be initiated by a person that is physically present at the printer.
Required software and network connection

Before using the Remote Admin feature, make sure that the telnet network protocol is installed and enabled
on the remote telnet client computer.
NOTE: This section describes enabling and configuring the telnet feature for computers using a Windows®
operating system.
HP recommends that the telnet client computer be a Windows-based system; however, there are other
operating systems that support the telnet network protocol. For information about enabling and configuring
the telnet network protocol for other operating systems, see the owner's manual for that operating system.
Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 311
Enable the Windows telnet client
All computers using the Windows operating system have the telnet client installed, however, the telnet client
function might not be enabled by default.
NOTE: The figures and menus in this section are for the Windows 10® operating system. Screens and menu
selections might vary slightly for other operating systems.
1. Use the Start menu to open the Windows Settings dialog box, and then search for Turn Windows features
on or off. Click the Turn Windows features on or off item.
Figure 4-123 Open Windows Settings
2. In the Windows Features box, scroll down to Telnet Client. If the check box is not checked, click the box to
select it, and then click the OK button.
TIP: If the check box is already checked then the telnet client function is already enabled. Click the
Cancel button.

Figure 4-124 Enable the telnet client feature
Network connection
The remote telnet client computer must have direct network access to the printer for the Remote Admin
function to operate. This means that the telnet client computer must be on the same network as the printer.
The Remote Admin function cannot be accessed through a network firewall or other remote access network
security programs.
If a private network is not accessible, ask the network administrator to set up a virtual private network (VPN)
connection to the network.
Connect a remote connection

Use the following procedures to connect a remote connection.
Start the telnet server function at the printer

For security reasons the Remote Admin feature must be initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer. The following steps must be performed by a person that is physically present at the printer.
NOTE: This person might need to sign in with an administrator or service password depending on how the
printer is configured.
1. Turn the printer on.
2. The HP logo displays on the printer control panel. When a 1/8 with an underscore displays, touch the
middle of the screen to open the Pre-boot menu.
Network connection 313

3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +3:Administrator item, and
then touch the OK button to select it.
Figure 4-125 Select the +3:Administrator item
4. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +A:Remote Admin item, and
then touch the OK button to select it.
Figure 4-126 Select the +A:Remote Admin item
5. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the 1:Start Telnet item, and then
touch the OK button to select it.
Figure 4-127 Select the 1:Start Telnet item
6. Do one of the following
● If a connecting message displays briefly, go to vii..
Figure 4-128 Telnet connecting message
● If an error message displays, use the steps below to identify the problem.

Figure 4-129 Telnet error message
a. The printer network cable is not correctly connected.
b. The BIOS LAN settings are incorrect.
– The printer should be configured to use a static IP address, but is configured to use DHCP
instead.
– The printer is configured to use a static IP address, but the IP address is incorrect.
c. The printer is correctly configured to use DHCP, but the DHCP server is not turned on or is
malfunctioning.
7. When the printer telnet server function is initialized, the following screen appears. Use the information
on this screen to connect the remote telnet client computer to the printer.
NOTE: The printer is now ready to receive remote telnet client commands.
● IP: The static or dynamically allocated IP address for the printer.
● Port: The standard telnet port (23).
● Pin: A randomly generated 4-digit personal identification number (PIN).
Figure 4-130 Telnet server function initialized
Start the telnet client function at the remote computer

The following steps establish a Remote Admin connection from a remote computer to the printer.
1. From the Start menu open the Command Prompt desktop application.
TIP: Type cmd in the application search dialogue box to find the application.
Start the telnet client function at the remote computer 315

2. From any displayed directory, type telnet at the prompt, and then press the Enter key.
Figure 4-131 Start a telnet session
3. Type o <IP ADDRESS> at the telnet prompt, and then press the Enter key.
NOTE: For <IP ADDRESS>, substitute the IP address that was displayed in step 7 of the "Start the
telnet server function at the printer" topic.
TIP: If the telnet connection fails to establish a connection, the printer is probably behind a firewall or
on a different network that the remote telnet client computer.
Figure 4-132 Establish a telnet connection
4. Type the PIN that was displayed in step 7 of then "Start the telnet server function at the printer" topic at
the prompt, and then press the Enter key.
IMPORTANT: Make sure to type the PIN correctly. After five incorrect PIN entries, the printer terminates
the Remote Admin connection. The Remote Admin feature must be re-initiated at the printer. See the
"Start the telnet server function at the printer" topic.

Figure 4-133 Enter the PIN
5. The following screen displays when the correct PIN is entered. and the Remote Admin connection is
successful. For information about the Pre-boot menu and options, see "Pre-boot menu options" in the
printer Service Manual.
NOTE: Because a Remote Admin connection is an unsecured telnet network protocol connection, the
following Pre-boot menu items are disabled for the remote telnet client computer.
● The +3:Administrator menu 4:Change Password item.
● The +3:Administrator menu 5:Clear Password item.
● The +3:Administrator menu 6:Disk Manage item.
Figure 4-134 Remote Admin window
Disconnect a remote connection

The Remote Admin connection can be terminated from the printer control panel or the remote telnet client
computer.
NOTE: The following procedure describes terminating a Remote Admin connection from the remote telnet
client computer.
Disconnect a remote connection 317

1. From the Pre-boot main menu, use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the
+3:Administrator item, and then press the Enter key.
Figure 4-135 Access the administrator menu
2. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the +A:Remote Admin item, and then press the
Enter key.
Figure 4-136 Access the remote admin menu
3. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the 2:Stop Telnet item, and then press the
Enter key. The Remote Admin connection between the printer and the remote telnet client computer
terminates.
IMPORTANT: The printer remains in the Pre-boot menu. Have the person that is physically present at
the printer do the following:
● Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and
then touch the OK button. The printer will continue to initialize.

Figure 4-137 Terminate the telnet connection
Print the event log

Learn how to print the event log.
Print the 50 most recent events in the Event Log. For each event, the printed log shows the error number,
page count, error code, and description or personality.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Troubleshooting menu icon.
2. Touch Event Log.
3. Touch the Print icon to print the page.


Print the event log 319



Channel Partner.
● User Guides
● Service Manuals


HP


HP



Play the video:
Error-code and control-panel-message troubleshooting overview

This section provides information on error codes and searching for information.
Error codes (types and structure)

Error codes and control-panel messages display on the printer control panel to indicate the current printer
status or situations that might require action. Error codes are numerical, or alphanumerical, and have a set
structure with six characters (example: 13.WX.YZ).
● The first two characters are numeric and represent the system component that is causing the error. For
example, in error code 10.22.15, 10 = Supplies for HP LaserJets.
● The remaining four characters (W, X, Y, and Z values) further define the error.
HP LaserJet and HP PageWide Enterprise error codes are documented in the control panel message document
(CPMD) for each printer.
The CPMD is a comprehensive list of error codes, diagnostic and troubleshooting steps to clear or resolve the
error, and other helpful information such as service mode pins and part numbers.
The CPMD is continually updated and republished with the latest information for the following error codes.
Table 4-24 ERROR CODES: The first two characters
Error code System Component System Error Description
10.WX.YZ Supplies (LaserJet) Supply error or supply memory error.
11.WX.YZ Real-time clock Internal error with the clock on the formatter.
13.WX.YZ Jam (LaserJet) Paper jam or open door jam error.
15.WX.YZ Jam (PageWide) Paper jam or open door jam error.
17.WX.YZ Supplies (PageWide) Supply error or supply memory error.
20.WX.YZ Printer memory Insufficient memory or buffering error.
21.WX.YZ Page Page complexity causing a decompression error

when trying to process job.
30.WX.YZ Scanner Flatbed scanner error occurring inside the unit.
31.WX.YZ Document feeder Document feeder, scanner, or jam error.
32.WX.YZ Backup, restore, or reset Backup, restore, or reset notification or error.
33.WX.YZ Security Backup, Disk, EFI BIOS, Firmware integrity

(SureStart), or Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
notification or error.
40.WX.YZ Input/Output (I/O) Partition manager, secure erase, or USB accessory

error.
41.WX.YZ Fuser, Laser scanner, or Paper path Miscellaneous error including general and misprint
or mismatch errors typically involving (but not
limited to) the fuser, the laser scanner, or the paper
path.
Error-code and control-panel-message troubleshooting overview 325

Table 4-24 ERROR CODES: The first two characters (continued)
42.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving the Event Log, Shell,

System Manager, or other component.
44.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving a digital sending

component.
45.WX.YZ OXPd/Web Kit (PageWide) Informational notifications involving the OXPd Web
Kit (communications log).
46.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) Engine communication error.
47.WX.YZ Firmware Job parser or printer calibration error.
48.WX.YZ Firmware PJA job accounting, job management, or job pipeline

error.
49.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware communication error.
50.WX.YZ Fuser (LaserJet) Fuser error.
51.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner beam error.
52.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner startup error.
54.WX.YZ Sensor Sensor error (not jam related).
55.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller communication error.
56.WX.YZ Paper handling (LaserJet) Paper input/output or accessory error.
57.WX.YZ Fan Fan error.
58.WX.YZ Sensor Engine sensor failure.
59.WX.YZ Motor (LaserJet) Motor error.
60.WX.YZ Tray motor error (LaserJet) Tray lifting or pick up error.
61.WX.YZ Engine (PageWide) Print engine error with the 8–bit data package.
62.WX.YZ System (LaserJet) LaserJet internal system error.
Print bar (PageWide) PageWide print system error.
63.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) General engine error (electrical, communication,

etc.).
65.WX.YZ Connector Output accessory connection error.
66.WX.YZ Output accessory Output accessory error.
67.WX.YZ Input accessory Input accessory connection error
69.WX.YZ Duplexer Duplexer error.
70.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller firmware error.
76.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) Power supply fluctuations causes formatter and DC

controller communication issue and results them not
to be in synchronization.
80.WX.YZ Managed device Embedded Jetdirect error.
81.WX.YZ Near Field Communication (NFC) Wireless, Bluetooth or internal EIO error.
82.WX.YZ Memory (hard disk, EMMC, etc.) Disk hardware error.

Table 4-24 ERROR CODES: The first two characters (continued)
90.WX.YZ Internal diagnostics Internal test of systems (i.e. disk, CPB, display) or
interconnection error.
98.WX.YZ Hard disk Hard disk partition error.
99.WX.YZ Firmware installer Remote Firmware Upgrade (RFU), firmware install

(engine or accessory), or disk error.
Solve paper handling problems

Review the following information to solve paper handling problems.
Clear paper jams (SFP models)

Use the procedures in this section to clear jammed paper from the printer paper path.
Paper jam locations

Jams can occur in these locations.
7
1
2
6
3
5
Item Description
1 Right door and fuser area
4 Optional Tray 4
5 Optional Tray 3
6 Tray 2
7 Output bin
Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams

Learn about printer jam clearing auto-navigation.
Solve paper handling problems 327

The auto-navigation feature assists in clearing jams by providing step-by-step instructions on the control
panel.
When you complete a step, the printer displays instructions for the next step until you have completed all
steps in the procedure.
Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?

To reduce the number of paper jams, try these solutions.
View a video that demonstrates how to load paper in a way that reduces the number of paper jams
1. Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this printer.
2. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different package.
3. Use paper that has not previously been printed or copied on.
4. Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten the
stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.
5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides so
they are touching the paper stack without bending it.
6. Make sure that the tray is fully inserted in the printer.
7. If you are printing on heavy, embossed, or perforated paper, use the manual feed feature and feed sheets
one at a time.
8. Open the Trays menu on the printer control panel. Verify that the tray is configured correctly for the paper
type and size.
9. Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specifications.
13.B2.D1 jam error in Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)

Use the following procedure to clear paper jams in Tray 1 (multipurpose tray). When a jam occurs, the control
panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.B2.D1 Jam in tray 1
View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 1

1. If you can see the jammed sheet in Tray 1, remove the jammed sheet by gently pulling it straight out.
2. Open the right door and remove paper from the area shown.
3. Close the right to allow the printer to clear the message.
4. Make sure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP specifications for the printer.
13.B2.D1 jam error in Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) 329

5. Make sure the Tray 1 guides are set to the correct paper size and that the paper tray is not overfilled
(paper is below the 3 triangles on the right guide).
6. Load the paper back into the tray and restart the print job.
7. If the same jam appears remove and clean the tray 1 pick, feed and separation rollers.
a. Locate and release the pickup roller assembly release tab.

b. Push the pickup roller assembly to the right and then away from the printer.
c. Grasp the left- and right-side of the separation roller assembly, and then lift the assembly up.
d. Pull the separation roller assembly straight out to remove it.
e. Clean the roller with a dampened lint free cloth.

f. Install the rollers back into tray one and test the tray by printing from tray 1.
8. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer
support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.B2.D2 jam error in Tray 2

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 2. When a jam
occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.B2.D2 Paper jam in tray 2

2. Gently remove any jammed paper.
3. Close the right door to clear the control panel message.
4. Open Tray 2.
13.B2.D2 jam error in Tray 2 333

5. Remove the paper from the tray and discard any bent, curled, or damaged sheets.
6. Make sure that the tray width and length guides are set to the correct paper size for the paper being
installed into the tray and that the tray is not over filled above the fill mark (line below 3 triangles on rear
guide).

7. Ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP specifications for the printer.
8. If the error persists, clean the Tray 2 pick, feed, separation rollers.
a. Open the right door to access the rollers.

b. Locate and remove the Tray 2 separation roller.
Call-out 1- slide blue locking lever
Call-out 2- Remove the roller assembly.
c. Remove the Tray 2 pick and feed rollers.
To remove the roller assembly, gently pull on the side of the assembly and slide out as shown.
NOTE: Make sure your hands are clean before touching the rollers. Oils or debris from hands can
cause paper pickup issues.

d. Clean the rollers with a dampened lint free cloth.
e. Reinstall the roller assemblies and close the right door.
f. Run a print job from Tray 2.
13.A3 jam error in Tray 3

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the 550-sheet trays.
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.A3.A3 Jam in tray 3
● 13.A3.D3 Jam in tray 3
View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 3, and the optional trays
13.A3 jam error in Tray 3 337

1. Open the Tray 3 right side access door.
2. Remove any jammed paper found in access area.


5. Open Tray 3.

guide).

a. Open the Tray 3 right door to access the rollers.


Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the 550 sheet Tray 4.

● 13.A4.A4 Paper jam in tray 4
● 13.A4.D4 Paper jam in tray 4

3. Open the Tray 4 right access door.

5. Open the Tray 3 access door and gently remove any jammed paper.
7. Open Tray 4.

guide).

a. Open the Tray 4 door to access the rollers.

To remove the roller assembly, gently pull on to the side of the rollers as shown.

13.A4 jam error in Tray 4 (2,100 sheet feeder HCI)

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the HCI Tray 4. When a
jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
View a video of how to clear a jam in the high-capacity input Tray 4

1. Open the printer right door.
13.A4 jam error in Tray 4 (2,100 sheet feeder HCI) 351


7. Open Tray 4.

9. Make sure that the tray width guide is set to the correct paper size for the paper being installed into the
tray and that the tray is not over filled above the fill mark (line below 3 triangles on rear guide).

11. If the error persists, clean the Tray 4 pick, feed, and separation rollers.

Call-out 1- slide locking lever
NOTE: Do not touch the rubber part of the rollers with hands. Oils or debris from hands can cause
paper pickup issues.

13.B2 jam error in right door

Use the following procedure to clear paper jams in the right door and fuser area. When a jam occurs, the
control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.B2.Az Stay jam in right door
● 13.B2.Dz Delay jam in right door
● 13.B2.5z Inappropriate to the Delivery Path jam
● 13.B2.FF Residual paper jam in right door
z = paper tray. This can be trays 1-5 or "D" for duplex jobs
Or
z = Fuser mode. This can be 0-9 or A-F.
View a video of how to clear a jam in the right door and fuser area
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling
it.
13.B2 jam error in right door 357


3. Gently remove any jammed paper from the duplexer paper path.

IMPORTANT: Make sure the paper being used is not to short for the printers duplexer requirements.
4. Close the right door.
6. Ensure the paper tray guides are set to the correct size for the paper loaded.
13.B4 jam errors in the right door

● 13.B4.Cz Jam in right door
z = paper tray. This can be trays 1-5 or "D" for duplex print jobs.
it.

13.B4 jam errors in the right door 361

13.B9 jam errors in the fuser

● 13.B9.yz Jam in right door
y = jam type (A or D)
z = Paper tray. This can be 0-5 or "D" for duplex print jobs.
Or
● 13.B9.Cz Jam in right door (Fuser wrap jam)
NOTE: The fuser is hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before clearing jams.

2. Gently remove any jammed paper from the fuser input.
13.B9 jam errors in the fuser 363

3. Remove the fuser and remove any jammed paper found.
a. Squeeze the release levers on the handles (circle call-outs) and then remove the fuser.

b. Remove any paper from the exit of the fuser.
c. Open the fuser access and check for a z-fold paper jam.

d. Remove jammed paper from fuser.
e. Reinstall the fuser and close the right door.
4. If the error persists, ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP specifications for
the printer.
13.D3 jam errors in the duplexer

Use the following procedure to clear paper jams in the duplexer area. When a jam occurs, the control panel
displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.D3.Dz Duplex delivery delay jam
● 13.D3.FF Residual paper jam in right door

13.D3 jam errors in the duplexer 367

the printer.
13.E1 jam error in the output bin

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations in the output bin. When a jam
● 13.E1.Dz Jam in output bin
● 13.E1.FF Residual paper jam in output bin
z = paper type that is being printer on. This can be 0-9 or A-F.
View a video of how to clear a jam in the output bin

1. If paper is visible in the output bin, grasp the leading edge and remove it.
Clear paper jams (MFP models)

Use the procedures in this section to clear jammed paper from the printer paper path.
Paper jam locations

Jams can occur in these locations.
Clear paper jams (MFP models) 369

Figure 4-149 Jam locations - dn, zf, and zfsw models
1
8
2
3
7
6 4
5
Item Description
1 Document feeder
5 Optional Tray 4
6 Optional Tray 3
7 Tray 2
8 Output bin or finisher output trays
Figure 4-150 Jam locations - zfw+ model

1
8
2
7 3
6 4
5
Item Description
1 Document feeder

Item Description
5 Tray 4 (high-capacity input tray)
6 Tray 3
7 Tray 2
8 Output bins (floor-standing finisher)
Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams

Learn about printer jam clearing auto-navigation.
The auto-navigation feature assists in clearing jams by providing step-by-step instructions on the control
panel.
When you complete a step, the printer displays instructions for the next step until you have completed all
steps in the procedure.
Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?

To reduce the number of paper jams, try these solutions.
View a video that demonstrates how to load paper in a way that reduces the number of paper jams
3. Use paper that has not previously been printed or copied on.
5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides so
they are touching the paper stack without bending it.
6. Make sure that the tray is fully inserted in the printer.
7. If you are printing on heavy, embossed, or perforated paper, use the manual feed feature and feed sheets
one at a time.
8. Open the Trays menu on the printer control panel. Verify that the tray is configured correctly for the paper
type and size.
31.13.yz jam error in the document feeder

The following information describes how to clear paper jams in the document feeder. When a jam occurs, the
Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams 371

In addition to the instructions provided below
NOTE: The printer model referenced in this video might be different from your printer model, but the steps
to clear the jam are the same.
● 31.13.01 Jam in document feeder
View a video of how to clear a jam in the document feeder
1. Remove paper from the exit assembly of the document feeder.

2. Open the document-feeder cover.
3. Remove any jammed paper from the document feeder input area.
31.13.yz jam error in the document feeder 373

4. Lift the document feeder and check the lower side of the feed path.
5. Make sure the guides in the document-feeder input tray are adjusted to the correct size for the
document before loading paper.
NOTE: To avoid document feeder jams, to copy narrow documents, use the flatbed scanner. Remove all
staples and paper clips from original documents. Do not feed damaged or wrinkled paper.
NOTE: Original documents that are printed on heavy, glossy paper can jam more frequently than
originals that are printed on plain paper.
IMPORTANT: Warning: Do not run labels through the automatic document feeder (ADF).
6. If the paper continues to jam, remove and clean the document feeder rollers.

a. Open the document-feeder jam access door.
Figure 4-151 Open the document-feeder jam access door
b. Release the blue locking arm to drop the assembly down. Slide the pickup and feed roller assembly
to the left, and then pull it away from the document feeder to remove it.
Figure 4-152 Release the blue locking arm
c. Lift the roller cover up and then slide the roller toward the front of the printer to remove it.
Figure 4-153 Release the separation roller cover
31.13.yz jam error in the document feeder 375

e. Reinstall the rollers in the document feeder and perform a copy job to test.
13.B2.D1 jam error in Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)

Use the following procedure to clear paper jams in Tray 1 (multipurpose tray). When a jam occurs, the control
panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.B2.D1 Jam in tray 1
1. If you can see the jammed sheet in Tray 1, remove the jammed sheet by gently pulling it straight out.

2. Open the right door and remove paper from the area shown.
3. Close the right to allow the printer to clear the message.
5. Make sure the Tray 1 guides are set to the correct paper size and that the paper tray is not overfilled
(paper is below the 3 triangles on the right guide).
6. Load the paper back into the tray and restart the print job.
7. If the same jam appears remove and clean the tray 1 pick, feed and separation rollers.

a. Locate and release the pickup roller assembly release tab.
b. Push the pickup roller assembly to the right and then away from the printer.
c. Grasp the left- and right-side of the separation roller assembly, and then lift the assembly up.

d. Pull the separation roller assembly straight out to remove it.
e. Clean the roller with a dampened lint free cloth.
f. Install the rollers back into tray one and test the tray by printing from tray 1.
13.B2.D2 jam error in Tray 2

● 13.B2.D2 Paper jam in tray 2


4. Open Tray 2.

guide).

a. Open the right door to access the rollers.


Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the 550-sheet trays.

● 13.A3.A3 Jam in tray 3
● 13.A3.D3 Jam in tray 3
View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 3, and the optional trays
1. Open the Tray 3 right side access door.
2. Remove any jammed paper found in access area.


5. Open Tray 3.

guide).

a. Open the Tray 3 right door to access the rollers.


Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the 550 sheet Tray 4.



7. Open Tray 4.

guide).



13.A4 jam error in Tray 4 (2,100 sheet feeder HCI)

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the HCI Tray 4. When a
jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
View a video of how to clear a jam in the high-capacity input Tray 4

1. Open the printer right door.


7. Open Tray 4.

9. Make sure that the tray width guide is set to the correct paper size for the paper being installed into the
tray and that the tray is not over filled above the fill mark (line below 3 triangles on rear guide).

11. If the error persists, clean the Tray 4 pick, feed, and separation rollers.

Call-out 1- slide locking lever
NOTE: Do not touch the rubber part of the rollers with hands. Oils or debris from hands can cause
paper pickup issues.

13.B2 jam error in right door

● 13.B2.Az Stay jam in right door
● 13.B2.Dz Delay jam in right door
● 13.B2.5z Inappropriate to the Delivery Path jam
z = paper tray. This can be trays 1-5 or "D" for duplex jobs
Or
it.



IMPORTANT: Make sure the paper being used is not to short for the printers duplexer requirements.
13.B4 jam errors in the right door

● 13.B4.Cz Jam in right door
z = paper tray. This can be trays 1-5 or "D" for duplex print jobs.
it.
13.B4 jam errors in the right door 407


13.B9 jam errors in the fuser

● 13.B9.yz Jam in right door
y = jam type (A or D)
z = Paper tray. This can be 0-5 or "D" for duplex print jobs.
Or
● 13.B9.Cz Jam in right door (Fuser wrap jam)

2. Gently remove any jammed paper from the fuser input.


b. Remove any paper from the exit of the fuser.
c. Open the fuser access and check for a z-fold paper jam.

d. Remove jammed paper from fuser.
e. Reinstall the fuser and close the right door.
the printer.
13.D3 jam errors in the duplexer

Use the following procedure to clear paper jams in the duplexer area. When a jam occurs, the control panel
displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.D3.Dz Duplex delivery delay jam
● 13.D3.FF Residual paper jam in right door
13.D3 jam errors in the duplexer 413


the printer.
13.E1 jam error in the output bin

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations in the output bin. When a jam
● 13.E1.Dz Jam in output bin
● 13.E1.FF Residual paper jam in output bin
z = paper type that is being printer on. This can be 0-9 or A-F.
13.E1 jam error in the output bin 415

1. If paper is visible in the output bin, grasp the leading edge and remove it.
13.E2 jam error in top cover

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations in the top cover area. When a jam
● 13.E2.yz Jam in Top cover
y = "A" (stay jam) or "D" (delay jam)
z = 1-4 (output bin page is going to)
These jams can only be present if the floor standing finisher is installed

1. Open the printer top access cover.
2. Remove all paper from inside the top cover.
13.E2 jam error in top cover 417

3. Make sure that the floor standing finisher is correctly secured to the printer.
13.60 jam errors in the fuser exit area when printing to a stapler/stacker or floor-standing finisher
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations in the fuser exit area when
printing to a finisher. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the
jam.
● 13.60.51, 13.60.52 Paper too short jam
● 13.60.61, 13.60.62, 13.60.63, 13.60.64 Inter-Page Gap Jam
NOTE: The images provide do not show any accessories or copy module attached to the printer.

13.60 jam errors in the fuser exit area when printing to a stapler/stacker or floor-standing finisher 419
b. Remove any paper jammed in the fuser exit area.
c. Reinstall the fuser and close the right door.
3. Close right door to allow the printer to clear jam message.
13.80, 13.83, or 13.84 jam errors in the 3 Bin Stapler/Stacker

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations in the 3-bin stapler/stacker. When
a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.80.yz Jam in 3 Bin stapler/stacker
y = "A" (stay jam), "B" (delay jam) "F" (residual jam)
z = Output destination tray 0-4

1. Remove any paper from the output bins.
2. Clear all paper from upper right door.
a. Open the upper right door.
13.80, 13.83, or 13.84 jam errors in the 3 Bin Stapler/Stacker 421

b. Remove paper from input area inside the door.
c. Remove paper from upper output area inside the door.

d. Remove paper from upper standard exit area.
e. Close the upper right door.
13.80, 13.83, or 13.84 jam errors in the 3 Bin Stapler/Stacker 423

b. Remove any paper jammed in the fuser exit area.
c. Reinstall the fuser and close the right door.
13.40 or 13.47 Punch jam error in the Floor-standing finisher

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations in the floor-standing finisher
punch area. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

● 13.40.yz Punch inlet jam
y = "A" (stay jam), "D" (delay jam) or "F" (residual jam)
z = Output destination tray 0, 2-4
● 13.47.4z Punch jam
View a video of how to clear a jam in the floor-standing finisher punch area
1. Open the top left door.
2. Rotate the green dial on the top to the right or left
NOTE: Use the directions on the inside to assist in clearing the jam.
13.40 or 13.47 Punch jam error in the Floor-standing finisher 425

3. Remove paper from the top left door.
4. Close the top left door.

13.6, 13.7, or 13.8 jam error in the Floor-standing finisher
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations in the floor-standing finisher.
● 13.6x.yz Jam in Floor standing stapler/stacker
x = 0, 1, 3, 4, 5
y = "A" (stay jam), "D" (delay jam), "F" (residual jam)
View a video of how to clear a jam in the floor-standing finisher
1. Remove any paper jams from the output bins by gently grasp the leading edge and remove it.
13.6, 13.7, or 13.8 jam error in the Floor-standing finisher 427

2. Open the top left door.
3. Remove paper from the top left door.
NOTE: Use the directions on the inside to assist in clearing the jam.
13.6, 13.7, or 13.8 jam error in the Floor-standing finisher 429

4. Open the front access do to clear any jammed paper.
a. Open the front door and check jam access areas.
Call-out 1: Open door

Call-out 2: Check access areas

b. Use the directions inside the front access door to help remove the paper.
Printer feeds incorrect page size

Review the following information when the printer feeds an incorrect page size.
Table 4-25 Printer feeds incorrect page size
Cause Solution
The correct size paper is not loaded in the tray. Load the correct size paper in the tray.
The correct size paper is not selected in the software program or Confirm that the settings in the software program and printer
printer driver. driver are correct, because the software program settings
override the printer driver and control panel settings, and the
printer driver settings override the control panel settings.
The correct size paper for the tray is not selected in the printer From the control panel, select the correct size paper for the tray.
control panel.
The paper size is not configured correctly for the tray. Print a configuration page to determine the paper size for which
the tray is configured.
The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the paper guides are touching the paper.
Printer pulls from incorrect tray

Review the following information when the printer pulls from an incorrect tray.
Table 4-26 Printer pulls from incorrect tray
Cause Solution
A driver for a different printer is in use. Use a driver for this printer.
Printer feeds incorrect page size 431

Table 4-26 Printer pulls from incorrect tray (continued)
Cause Solution
The specified tray is empty. Load paper in the specified tray.
The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray. Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine
the paper size for which the tray is configured.
The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the guides are touching the paper.
Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly (duplex models)

Review the following information when the printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly.
Table 4-27 Printer will not duplex (print 2-sided jobs) or duplexes incorrectly
Cause Solution
The duplex job is trying to use unsupported paper. Verify that the paper is supported for duplex printing.
The printer driver is not set up for duplex printing. Set up the printer driver to enable duplex printing.
The first page is printing on the back of preprinted forms or Load preprinted forms and letterhead in Tray 1 with the
letterhead. letterhead or printed side down, with the top of the page leading
into the printer. For Tray 2-X, load the paper printed side up with
the top of the page toward the right of the printer.
The printer model does not support automatic 2-sided printing. The printer model does not support automatic 2-sided printing.
Paper does not feed from Tray 2-X

Review the following information when the paper does not feed from Tray 2-X.
Table 4-28 Paper does not feed from Tray 2-X
Cause Solution
The correct size paper is not loaded. Load the correct size paper.
The input tray is empty. Load paper in the input tray.
The correct paper type for the input tray is not selected in the From the printer control panel, select the correct paper type for
printer control panel. the input tray. Trays configured for a paper type with a specific
weight range will not match a print job that specifies an exact
weight, even if the specified weight is within the weight range.
Paper from a previous jam has not been completely removed. Open the printer and remove any paper in the paper path. Closely
inspect the fuser area for jams.
None of the optional trays appear as input tray options. The optional trays only display as available if they are installed.
Verify that any optional trays are correctly installed. Verify that
the printer driver has been configured to recognize the optional
trays.
An optional tray is incorrectly installed. Print a configuration page to confirm that the optional tray is
installed. If not, verify that the tray is correctly attached to the
printer.
The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the guides are touching the paper.

Output is curled or wrinkled
Review the following information when the output is curled or wrinkled.
Table 4-29 Output is curled or wrinkled
Cause Solution
Paper does not meet the specifications for this printer. Use only paper that meets the HP paper specifications for this
printer. Non-recycled, 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper is optimal for office
use.
The correct paper type for the input tray is not selected in the From the printer control panel, select the correct paper type for
printer control panel. the input tray. Trays configured for a paper type with a specific
weight range will not match a print job that specifies an exact
weight, even if the specified weight is within the weight range.
Paper is damaged or in poor condition. Remove paper from the input tray and load paper that is in good
condition.
The printer is operating in an excessively humid environment. Verify that the printing environment is within humidity
specifications.
The print job consist of large, solid-filled areas. Large, solid-filled areas can cause excessive curl. Try using a
different pattern.
Paper used was not stored correctly and might have absorbed Remove paper and replace it with paper from a fresh, unopened
moisture. package. Store paper in a plastic bag to protect it from humidity.
Paper has poorly cut edges. Remove paper, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or turn it over, and
then reload it into the input tray. Do not fan paper. If the problem
persists, replace the paper.
The specific paper type was not configured for the tray or selected Configure the software for the paper (see the software
in the software. documentation). Configure the tray for the paper.
The paper has previously been used for a print job. Do not re-use paper.
The printer does not pick up paper

If the printer does not pick up paper from the tray, try these solutions.
NOTE: Tray 1 and Tray 2 are optimal for paper pickup when using special paper or media other than 20lb
plain paper. For Tray 1 and Tray 2 the printer increases the number of attempts to pick up a page, which
increases the reliability of successfully picking the page from the tray and decreases the possibility of a
mispick jam.
HP recommends using Tray 1 or Tray 2 if the printer is experiencing excessive or reoccurring jams from trays
other than Tray 1 and Tray 2, or for print jobs that require media other than 20lb plain paper.
1. Open the printer and remove any jammed sheets of paper.
2. Load the tray with the correct size of paper for the job.
3. Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the printer control panel.
4. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides to
the appropriate indentation in the tray.
5. Check the printer control panel to see if the printer is waiting for an acknowledgment to the feed the
paper manually prompt. Load paper, and continue.
Output is curled or wrinkled 433

6. The rollers above the tray might be contaminated. Clean the rollers with a lint-free cloth dampened with
warm water.
The printer picks up multiple sheets of paper

If the printer picks up multiple sheets of paper from the tray, try these solutions.
1. Remove the stack of paper from the tray and flex it, rotate it 180 degrees, and flip it over. Do not fan the
paper. Return the stack of paper to the tray.
5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides to
the appropriate indentation in the tray.
7. The tray pick and/or feed rollers might be contaminated. Clean the rollers with a lint-free cloth
dampened with warm water.
The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper (MFP)
Learn about MFP document feeder paper handling problems.
Review the following information when the document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of
paper.
● Check to see if there are areas on the page that might have had staples removed. This can cause jams
and/or mispicks.
● The original might have something on it, such as staples or self-adhesive notes that must be removed.
● Check that all rollers are in place and correctly installed.
● Make sure that the top document-feeder cover is closed.
● The pages might not be placed correctly. Straighten the pages and adjust the paper guides to center the
stack.
● The paper guides must be touching the sides of the paper stack to work correctly. Make sure that the
paper stack is straight, and the guides are against the paper stack.
● The document feeder input tray or output bin might contain more than the maximum number of pages.
Make sure the paper stack fits below the guides in the input tray and remove pages from the output bin.
● Verify that there are no pieces of paper, staples, paper clips, or other debris in the paper path.
● Clean the document-feeder rollers and the separation pad. Use compressed air or a clean, lint-free cloth
moistened with warm water. If misfeeds still occur, replace the rollers.
● Use the control panel menus to check the status of the document-feeder kit and replace it if necessary.

Paper does not feed automatically
Review the following information when the paper does not feed automatically.
Table 4-30 Paper does not feed automatically
Cause Solution
Manual feed is selected in the software program. Load Tray 1 with paper, or, if the paper is loaded, press the OK
button.
The correct size paper is not loaded. Load the correct size paper.
The input tray is empty. Load paper into the input tray.
Paper from a previous jam has not been completely removed. Open the printer and remove any paper in the paper path.
The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the rear and width paper guides are touching the
paper.
Image-quality troubleshooting
Learn about image-quality troubleshooting.
Use the information in this topic to troubleshoot and resolve image-quality (what you see on the final printed
page) problems including copy-quality, print-quality, and color problems (color printers only).
Various printer hardware problems can cause image-quality defects. This topic is a guide to the steps used
to isolate the specific areas of the printer that are causing image-quality defects on the printed page, and to
provide solutions to resolve those image-quality defects.
Image-quality problems are defined as:
● Print-quality (PQ) problems: PQ problems are associated with the print engine (printer base) of an MFP
printer (single function non MFP image-quality problems are always PQ defects). PQ defects appear on
pages that are printed by the print engine and not fed through an integrated scanner assembly (ISA).
● Copy-quality (CQ) problems: CQ problems are associated with the integrated-scanner assembly (ISA)
portion of an MFP printer. CQ defects appear on pages that are copied using the document feeder or
flatbed glass.
If the print defect is already known to be a PQ or CQ problem, skip to the appropriate troubleshooting
topic listed below. Otherwise, follow the steps in the next section below to get started troubleshooting
image-quality problems.
● Print-quality (PQ) problems: See Print-quality troubleshooting on page 436.
● Copy-quality (CQ) problems: See Copy-quality troubleshooting on page 451.
Get started troubleshooting image-quality problems
Print a demonstration page to identify the defect as a PQ (print engine ) or CQ (ISA) problem.
NOTE: If the image defect appears on the printed demonstration page, the issue is a print-quality (PQ)
problem (associated with the print engine and not the document feeder or flatbed glass) and not a CQ
problem.
Paper does not feed automatically 435

Make sure that the demonstration page is printed on plain paper.
Enterprise printers
1. Select Reports > Other pages.
2. Select Demonstration Page.
Pro printers
1. At the printer, scroll to or select Setup.
2. Go to Reports, and then select Demonstration Page.
Does the demonstration page show any image-quality defects?
● Yes: If defects appear on the printed demonstration page the issue is PQ related. See Print-quality
troubleshooting on page 436.
● No: If defects does not appear on the printed demonstration page the issue is CQ related. See Copy-
quality troubleshooting on page 451.
Print-quality troubleshooting
Learn about the print-quality troubleshooting.
NOTE: Print-quality (PQ) problems are associated with the print engine (printer base) of an MFP printer
(single function non MFP image-quality problems are always PQ defects). PQ defects appear on pages that
are printed by the print engine and not feed through an integrated scanner assembly (ISA).
Repetitive image defect ruler

Review the following information about a repetitive image defect ruler.
When troubleshooting the source of some print image defects, one solution is to identify if it is a repetitive
defect (does the print quality defect appear multiple times on the printed page?). If this is the case, use a
ruler to measure occurrences of repetitive image defects to help solve image-quality problems. For more
information, see Using a ruler to measure between repetitive defects.
Use a ruler to measure occurrences of repetitive image defects to help solve image-quality problems. Place
the ruler next to the first occurrence of the defect on the page. Find the distance between identical defects
and use the table below to identify the component that is causing the defect.
CAUTION: Do not use solvents or oils to clean rollers. Instead, rub the roller with a lint-free cloth. If dirt is
difficult to remove, rub the roller with a lint-free cloth that has been dampened with water.
NOTE: The primary charging roller, photosensitive drum, and developer roller cannot be cleaned because
they are internal assemblies in the toner cartridge or imaging drum. If one of these assemblies is causing the
defect, replace the toner cartridge. The primary fuser sleeve unit or pressure roller cannot be cleaned
because they are internal assemblies in the fuser. If one of these assemblies is causing the defect, replace
the fuse.
TIP: To make a printer specific repetitive defect ruler, use a metric ruler to transfer the measurements in
the table below to a transparency or the edge of a piece of paper—clearly label each ruler mark with the
associated defective assembly.

Table 4-31 Repetitive defects
Assembly Distance between defects Notes
Registration roller 44 mm (1.7 in) Appears as dirt or dirt on the back of the page.
Secondary transfer roller 50 mm (1.97 in) Appears as dropouts or dirt on the back of the page.
Primary charging roller 26 mm (1 in) Appears as dropouts.
Photosensitive drum 75 mm (2.95 in) Appears as dirt or dropouts.
Developer roller 38 mm (1.5 in) Appears as dropouts.
Fuser film 76 mm (3 in) Appears as dirt, dropouts, or loose toner.
Pressure roller 79 mm (3.1 in) Appears as dirt, loose toner, or dirt on the back of the page.
Use a ruler to measure between repetitive defects

The figures in this section show color repetitive defect pages. However, the process for measuring repetitive
defects is valid for mono pages.
1. Identify a repetitive defect on the page.
TIP: Print a cleaning page to see if that resolves the defect.
NOTE: Some printers allow loading Letter and A4 media in short-edge-first or long-edge-first
orientation in the paper trays. When measuring repetitive defects, make sure to place the ruler at the
leading edge of the page. This is the edge of the page that feeds into the printer first.
The example pages below show the following types of repetitive defects.
● Lines (callout 1)
● Smudges (callout 2)
● Dots or spots (callout 3)
Use a ruler to measure between repetitive defects 437

Figure 4-158 Examples of repetitive defects
1 2
NOTE: These are examples only, other types of repetitive defects might appear on a page.

2. Position a metric ruler on the page with the “zero” ruler mark at one occurrence of the defect (callout 1).
Figure 4-159 Place the ruler on the page
3. Locate the next occurrence of the defect (callout 1).
Figure 4-160 Locate the next repetitive defect
Use a ruler to measure between repetitive defects 439

4. Measure the distance (in millimeters) between the two occurrences (callout 1), and then use the
Repetitive defects table to determine the defective assembly.
TIP: Always measure from and to the same point on the defects. For example, if the ruler is “zeroed” at
the top edge of a defect, measure to the top edge of the next occurrence of that defect.
Figure 4-161 Determine the defective assembly
Print from a different software program

Try printing from a different software program.
If the page prints correctly, the problem is with the software program from which you were printing.
Check the paper-type setting for the print job

Check the paper type setting when printing from a software program and the printed pages have smears,
fuzzy or dark print, curled paper, scattered dots of toner, loose toner, or small areas of missing toner.
Check the paper type setting on the control panel

Check the paper type setting on the printer control panel, and change the setting as needed.
1. Open and close the paper tray.
2. Follow the control panel prompts to confirm or modify the paper type and size settings for the tray.
3. Make sure the paper loaded meets specifications.
4. Adjust the humidity and resistance setting on the control panel to match the environment.
a. Open the following menus:
i. Settings
ii. Copy/Print

iii. Print quality
iv. Adjust paper type
b. Select the paper type that matches the type loaded in the tray.
c. Use the arrows to increase or decrease the humidity and resistance setting.
5. Make sure the driver settings match the control panel settings.
NOTE: The print driver settings will override any control panel settings.
Check the paper type setting (Windows)

Check the paper type setting for Windows, and change the setting as needed.
NOTE: The print driver settings will override any control panel settings.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4. From the Paper Type drop-down list, click the More... option.
5. Expand the list of Type is: options.
6. Expand the category of paper types that best describes your paper.
7. Select the option for the type of paper you are using, and click the OK button.
8. Click the OK button to close the Document Properties dialog box. In the Print dialog box, click the OK
button to print the job.
Check the paper type setting (macOS)

Check the paper type setting for macOS, and change the setting as needed.
1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.
2. In the Printer menu, select the printer.
3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages.
4. Open the menus drop-down list, and then click the Paper/Quality menu.
5. Select a type from the Media Type drop-down list.
6. Click the Print button.
Check toner-cartridge status

Follow these steps to check the estimated life remaining in the toner cartridges and if applicable, the status of
other replaceable maintenance parts.
Step one: Print the Supplies Status Page

The supplies status page indicates the cartridge status.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Reports menu.
Check the paper type setting (Windows) 441

2. Select the Configuration/Status Pages menu.
3. Select Supplies Status Page, and then select Print to print the page.
Step two: Check supplies status

Check the supplies status report as follows.
1. Look at the supplies status report to check the percent of life remaining for the toner cartridges and, if
applicable, the status of other replaceable maintenance parts.
Print quality problems can occur when using a toner cartridge that is at its estimated end of life. The
supplies status page indicates when a supply level is very low. After an HP supply has reached the very
low threshold, HP’s premium protection warranty on that supply has ended.
The toner cartridge does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable.
Consider having a replacement available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable.
If you determine that you need to replace a toner cartridge or other replaceable maintenance parts, the
supplies status page lists the genuine HP part numbers.
2. Check to see if you are using a genuine HP cartridge.
A genuine HP toner cartridge has the word “HP” on it, or has the HP logo on it. For more information on
identifying HP cartridges go to www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies.
Print a cleaning page

Learn how to print a cleaning page.
● Maintenance
● Calibration/Cleaning
3. Touch Cleaning Page, and then touch the Print button to print the cleaning page.
NOTE: A Cleaning... message displays on the control-panel display. Do not turn the printer off until the
cleaning process has finished. When it is finished, discard the printed page.
TIP: Use this screen to set up automatic cleaning page intervals if desired.
Check paper and the printing environment

Use the following information to check the paper selection and the printing environment.
Step one: Use paper that meets HP specifications

Some print-quality problems arise from using paper that does not meet HP specifications.
● Always use a paper type and weight that this printer supports.
● Use paper that is of good quality and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles, voids,
staples, and curled or bent edges.
● Use paper that has not been previously printed on.
● Use paper that does not contain metallic material, such as glitter.

● Use paper that is designed for use in laser printers. Do not use paper that is designed only for use in Inkjet
printers.
● Use paper that is not too rough. Using smoother paper generally results in better print quality.
Step two: Check the environment

The environment can directly affect print quality and is a common cause of print-quality or paper-feeding
issues. Try the following solutions:
● Move the printer away from drafty locations, such as open windows or doors, or air-conditioning vents.
● Make sure the printer is not exposed to temperatures or humidity outside of printer specifications.
● Do not place the printer in a confined space, such as a cabinet.
● Place the printer on a sturdy, level surface.
● Remove anything that is blocking the vents on the printer. The printer requires good air flow on all sides,
including the top.
● Protect the printer from airborne debris, dust, steam, grease, or other elements that can leave residue
inside the printer.
Step three: Set the individual tray alignment

Follow these steps when text or images are not centered or aligned correctly on the printed page when
printing from specific trays.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Settings menu.
2. Select the following menus:
a. Copy/Print or Print
b. Print Quality
c. Image Registration
3. Select Tray, and then select the tray to adjust.
4. Select Print Test Page, and then follow the instructions on the printed pages.
5. Select Print Test Page again to verify the results, and then make further adjustments if necessary.
6. Select Done to save the new settings.
Try a different print driver

Try a different print driver when printing from a software program and the printed pages have unexpected
lines in graphics, missing text, missing graphics, incorrect formatting, or substituted fonts.
Download a different print driver from the HP support Web site: http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj6700
Troubleshoot image defects

Review examples of image defects and steps to resolve these defects.
Step two: Check the environment 443

Table 4-32 Image defects table quick reference
Defect Defect Defect
Table 4-40 Light print on page 449 Table 4-38 Gray background or dark print Table 4-35 Blank page - No print on page
on page 448 447
Table 4-34 Black page on page 446 Table 4-33 Banding defects on page 446 Table 4-42 Streak defects on page 450
Table 4-37 Fixing/fuser defects on page Table 4-39 Image placement defects on Table 4-36 Color plane registrations
447 page 449 defects (color models only) on page 447

Table 4-32 Image defects table quick reference (continued)
Defect Defect Defect
Table 4-41 Output defects on page 450
Image defects, no matter the cause, can often be resolved using the same steps. Use the following steps as a
starting point for solving image defect issues.
1. Reprint the document. Print quality defects can be intermittent in nature or can go away completely with
continued printing.
2. Check the condition of the cartridge or cartridges. If a cartridge is in a Very Low state (it has passed the
rated life), replace the cartridge.
3. Make sure that the driver and tray print mode settings match the media that is loaded in the tray. Try
using a different ream of media or a different tray. Try using a different print mode.
4. Make sure the printer is within the supported operating temperature/humidity range.
5. Make sure that the paper type, size, and weight are supported by the printer. See the printer support
page at support.hp.com for a list of the supported paper sizes and types for the printer.
NOTE: The term "fusing" refers to the part of the printing process where toner is affixed to paper.
The following examples depict letter-size paper that has passed through the printer with the short edge first.
Troubleshoot image defects 445

Table 4-33 Banding defects
Sample Description Possible solutions
Dark or light lines which repeat down the length of 1. Reprint the document.
the page, and are wide-pitch and/or impulse bands.
They might be sharp or soft in nature. The defect 2. Try printing from another tray.
displays only in areas of fill, not in text or sections
with no printed content. 3. Replace the cartridge.
4. Use a different paper type.
5. Enterprise models only: From the Home screen

on the printer control panel, go to the Adjust
Paper Types menu, and then choose a print
mode that is designed for a slightly heavier
media than what you are using. This slows
the print speed and might improve the print
quality.
6. If the issue persists, go to support.hp.com.
Table 4-34 Black page
The entire printed page is black. 1. Visually inspect the cartridge to check for
damage.
2. Make sure that the cartridge is installed

correctly.
3. Replace the cartridge.

Table 4-35 Blank page - No print
The page is completely blank and contains no 1. Make sure that the cartridges are genuine HP
printed content. cartridges.

correctly.
3. Print with a different cartridge.
4. Check the paper type in the paper tray

and adjust the printer settings to match. If
necessary, select a lighter paper type.
Table 4-36 Color plane registrations defects (color models only)
One or more color plane(s) is not aligned with 1. Reprint the document.
the other color planes. This registration error will
typically occur with yellow. 2. From the printer control panel, calibrate the
printer.
3. If a cartridge has reached a Very Low state, or

the printed output is severely faded, replace
the cartridge.
4. From the printer control panel use the Restore

Calibration feature to reset the printer's
calibration settings to the factory defaults.
Table 4-37 Fixing/fuser defects
Slight shadows or offsets of the image are repeated 1. Reprint the document.
down the page. The repeated image might fade with
each recurrence. 2. Check the paper type in the paper tray
and adjust the printer settings to match. If
necessary, select a lighter paper type.

Table 4-37 Fixing/fuser defects (continued)
Toner rubs off along either edge of the page. 1. Reprint the document.
This defect is more common at the edges of high-
coverage jobs, and on light media types, but can 2. Check the paper type in the paper tray
occur anywhere on the page. and adjust the printer settings to match. If
necessary, select a heavier paper type.
3. Enterprise models only: From the printer

control panel, go to the Edge-to-Edge menu
and then select Normal. Reprint the document.
4. Enterprise models only: From the printer

control panel, select Auto Include Margins and
then reprint the document.
Table 4-38 Gray background or dark print
The image or text is darker than expected and/or 1. Make sure that the paper in the trays has not
the background is gray. already been run through the printer.
2. Use a different paper type.
3. Reprint the document.
4. Mono models only: From the Home screen on

the printer control panel, go to the Adjust
Toner Density menu, and then adjust the toner
density to a lower level.
5. Make sure that the printer is within

the supported operating temperature and
humidity range.

Table 4-39 Image placement defects
The image is not centered, or is skewed on the page. 1. Reprint the document.
The defect occurs when the paper is not positioned
properly as it is pulled from the tray and moves 2. Remove the paper and then reload the tray.
through the paper path. Make sure that all the paper edges are even on
all sides.
3. Make sure that the top of the paper stack is

below the tray-full indicator. Do not overfill
the tray.
4. Make sure that the paper guides are adjusted

to the correct size for the paper. Do not
adjust the paper guides tightly against the
paper stack. Adjust them to the indentations
or markings in the tray.
Table 4-40 Light print
The printed content is light or faded on the entire 1. Reprint the document.
page.
2. Remove the cartridge, and then shake it
to redistribute the toner. Reinsert the toner
cartridges into the printer and close the
cover. For a graphical representation of this
procedure, see Replace the toner cartridges.
3. Mono models only: Make sure that the

EconoMode setting is disabled, both at the
printer control panel and in the print driver.

correctly.
5. Print a Supplies Status Page and check the life

and usage of the cartridge.

Table 4-41 Output defects
Printed pages have curled edges. The curled edge 1. Reprint the document.
can be along the short or long side of the paper.
Two types of curl are possible: 2. Positive curl: From the printer control panel,
select a heavier paper type. The heavier paper
● Positive curl: The paper curls toward the type creates a higher temperature for printing.
printed side. The defect occurs in dry
environments or when printing high-coverage Negative curl: From the printer control panel,
pages. select a lighter paper type. The lighter paper
type creates a lower temperature for printing.
● Negative curl: The paper curls away from Try storing the paper in a dry environment
the printed side. The defect occurs in high- prior to use, or use freshly opened paper.
humidity environments or when printing low-
coverage pages. 3. Print in duplex mode.
The paper does not stack well in the output tray. 1. Reprint the document.
The stack might be uneven, skewed, or the pages
might be pushed out of the tray and onto the 2. Extend the output bin extension.
floor. Any of the following conditions can cause this
defect: 3. If the defect is caused by extreme paper curl,
refer to the troubleshooting steps for "Output
● Extreme paper curl curl."
● The paper in the tray is wrinkled or deformed 4. Use a different paper type.
● The paper is a non-standard paper type, such 5. Use freshly opened paper.
as envelopes
6. Remove the paper from the output tray before
● The output tray is too full the tray gets too full.
Table 4-42 Streak defects
Light vertical streaks that usually span the length 1. Reprint the document.
of the page. The defect displays only in areas of fill,
not in text or sections with no printed content. 2. Remove the cartridge, and then shake it
to redistribute the toner. Reinsert the toner
cartridges into the printer and close the
NOTE: Both light and dark vertical streaks can

occur when the printing environment is outside the
specified range for temperature or humidity. Refer
to your printer's environmental specifications for
allowable temperature and humidity levels.

Table 4-42 Streak defects (continued)
Dark vertical lines which occur down the length of 1. Reprint the document.
the page. The defect might occur anywhere on the
page, in areas of fill or in sections with no printed 2. Remove the cartridge, and then shake it
content. On color models, these lines or streaks will to redistribute the toner. Reinsert the toner
also be visible on the ITB cleaning page. cartridges into the printer and close the
3. Print a cleaning page.
4. Check the toner level in the cartridge.
Copy-quality troubleshooting
Learn about copy-quality troubleshooting.
NOTE: Copy-quality (CQ) problems are associated with the integrated-scanner assembly (ISA) portion of an
MFP printer. CQ defects appear on pages that are copied using the document feeder or flatbed glass.
Identify the location and type of the CQ problem
Resolving CQ problems involves isolating the defect to the document feeder or flatbed glass. Comparing
printed output between the document feeder and the flatbed glass might determine the ISA location that is
causing the CQ defect.
NOTE: If a CQ defect appears on printed output from both the document feeder and the flatbed glass,
carefully inspect the original source for a print-quality (PQ) problem.
Document feeder isolation test
1. Mark a printed page in a way that clearly identifies it as the source document used in this isolation
procedure.
2. Place the source page in the document feeder, and then make a copy.
3. Mark the copied output page to clearly identify it as output from the document feeder.
4. Compare the original and copied pages. Defects appearing on the copied page are caused by a problem in
the document feeder.
Flatbed isolation test
1. Mark a printed page in a way that clearly identifies it as the source document used in this isolation
procedure.
2. Place the source page on the flatbed glass, and then make a copy.
3. Mark the copied output page to clearly identify it as output from the flatbed.
4. Compare the original and copied pages. Defects appearing on the copied page are caused by a problem in
the flatbed.
Copy-quality troubleshooting 451

Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges
Learn about solving copy-quality debris problems.
Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and document feeder white plastic backing,
which might cause print defects. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner if the printed pages have
streaks, unwanted lines, black dots, poor print quality, or unclear text.
View a video of cleaning the document feeder glass and flatbed glass.
1. Press the power button to turn the printer off, and then disconnect the power cable from the electrical
outlet.
2. Open the scanner lid.
3. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) and the document feeder strips (callout 2, callout 3) with a soft cloth
or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner.
CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride on
any part of the printer; these can damage the printer. Do not place liquids directly on the glass or platen.
They might seep and damage the printer.

NOTE: If you are having trouble with streaks on copies when you are using the document feeder, be
sure to clean the small strips of glass on the left side of the scanner (callout 2, callout 3).
4. Dry the glass and white plastic parts with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.
5. Close the scanner lid.
Figure 4-162 Close the scanner lid
6. Connect the power cable to an outlet, and then press the power button to turn the printer on.
Vertical lines, bands, or streaks

Learn about vertical lines, bands, or streaks copy-quality problems.
Vertical lines or streaks appear on copies and/or scans in the same direction that the paper feeds when
copying and/or scanning from the document feeder. Lines or streaks might be visible on the front and/or the
back side of the page. Copies and/or scans from the flatbed glass look normal. Printouts also look normal.
The line or streak might be black or in color, and can also be present on fax or digital send output (for
example, when using Scan to folder or Scan to email features.
NOTE: HP has determined that 99% of all lines and streaks on copies made by feeding the original
documents through the document feeder are caused by debris on the document feeder glass strip. Even
small specks can cause the light reflected off the original to be distorted, resulting in a line, streak, or
smudge on copies or scans made from the document feeder.
Even if the document feeder glass strip and/or flatbed glass has been wiped clean, the defect might persist.
Persistent vertical lines, bands, or streaks when copying from the document feeder might mean that the
debris causing the print quality are not readily visible and cannot be removed with a quick cleaning.
Use the procedures below to resolve persistent lines, bands, or streak copy-quality (CQ) problems.
Locate debris and thoroughly clean the document feeder glass
1. Place a blank sheet of paper in the document feeder and mark an X in the lower right corner as shown.
Vertical lines, bands, or streaks 453

Figure 4-163 Load the document feeder
2. Press the Start button to make a copy of the blank page.
3. Place the copied paper face-up on the flatbed glass with the X located as shown.
NOTE: Make sure the upper left corner of the copy is aligned with the upper left corner of the flatbed
glass.
Figure 4-164 Place the copy on the flatbed
4. Follow the line or streak on the paper to the area on the document feeder glass that is causing the CQ
problem.
Figure 4-165 Identify the CQ defect location

5. Use a fingernail to loosen any stubborn debris.
WARNING! Use only a fingernail. Other objects can scratch the document feeder glass.
Clean this specific area again (with a lint-free cloth dampened with water), and then dry the glass with a
soft, lint-free cloth.
Figure 4-166 Clean the glass
6. Make another copy or scan to determine if the defect is gone.
Clean the duplexer scanner glass (model specific)
NOTE: Not all MFP printers use a background selector for duplex printing.
If a Side 2 Background Selector cannot be located for the printer (it might not include one) skip this
procedure.
1. Release the latch and open the document feeder jam-access door.
Figure 4-167 Open the jam-access door
2. Unlock the Side 2 Background Selector by pressing and holding both green tabs inward towards each
other.
Vertical lines, bands, or streaks 455

Figure 4-168 Release the Side 2 Background Selector
3. While holding the green tabs, pull out and remove the Side 2 Background Selector.
Figure 4-169 Remove the Side 2 Background Selector
4. Rotate the top to reveal the white and black backside reflector (circled in blue).
NOTE: If the white and black areas do not come clean, wipe the surface thoroughly with a damp cloth
again. Dry the area with a soft, dry cloth to prevent spotting.
Figure 4-170 Locate the backside reflector

5. With the background selector removed from the document feeder, clean the inside of the scan module.
6. In the back area from where the background selector was removed, locate the Side 2 Scan Module glass
found under the top area.
NOTE: The glass surface of the Side 2 Scan module sits horizontally flat and might not be easily
viewable.
7. Use a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with water and apply pressure upwards behind the rollers to clean
the Side 2 Scan Module Glass, making sure to that the entire width of the glass is cleaned from left to
right.
NOTE: If needed, lens cleaner or non-abrasive glass cleaner can be applied to the cloth before cleaning
the glass. Spray only onto the cloth and not directly onto the glass or device. Do not spray water or glass
cleaner on the glass as it can seep under it and possibly damage the printer. Do not use abrasives,
acetone, benzene, ethyl alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride on the glass; these can damage it and/or leave
residue on the glass resulting in degraded copy/scan quality.
8. Reverse the removal steps to reinstall the Side 2 Background Selector.
9. Make another copy or scan to determine if the defect is gone.
Modify printer settings to improve scan or copy quality

Learn about printer settings to improve scan or copy quality.
Optimize printer settings to potentially improve scan or copy quality.
IMPORTANT: The printer settings described in this section are firmware dependent and might not be
available for a specific printer (for example, color adjustment settings do not apply to mono printers).
Image Adjustment settings
NOTE: Settings > Print (SFP) or Copy/Print (MFP) > Image Adjustment > Background Cleanup.
Use the sliders to perform a Background Cleanup, adjust the image Darkness as well as changing the
Sharpness and Contrast.
Use this feature to improve the overall quality of the copy (for example, adjusting the Darkness and
Sharpness. Use the Background Cleanup setting to remove faint images from the background or to remove a
light background color.
● Darkness: Adjust this setting to increase or decrease the amount of white and black in the colors.
● Contrast: Adjust this setting to increase or decrease the difference between the lightest and darkest color
on the page.
● Background Cleanup: Adjust this setting if copying a faint image is a problem.
● Sharpness: Adjust this setting to clarify or soften the image. Increasing the sharpness might make text
appear crisper, but decreasing it would make photographs appear smoother.
Optimize Text/Picture settings
NOTE: Settings > Scan/Digital Send Settings > Optimize Text/Picture.
Use to optimize the output for a particular type of content. You can optimize the output for text, printed
pictures, or a mixture.
Modify printer settings to improve scan or copy quality 457

Use this setting to optimize the output for a particular type of content.
● Mixed: Use to optimize the setting for text and for pictures.
● Text: Use to optimize the text portion of the copy when text and/or pictures are on the original.
● Printed picture: Use to optimize line drawing and preprinted images such as magazine clippings or pages
from a book. If you see bands of irregular intensity on copies, try selecting Printed picture to improve
quality.
● Photographs: Use to optimize photographic prints.
Color/Black settings
NOTE: Settings > Scan/Digital Send Settings > Color/Black.
Use to enable or disable color scanning.(some highlighters will not auto detect as color).
● Automatically detect color or black: When pages without color are detected, the printer creates an image
of the page in 1-bit black if other settings allow. If the other settings don't allow (File Type, for example),
the image is in grayscale.
● Automatically detect color or gray: When pages without color are detected, the printer creates an image
of the page in grayscale. Select this option for the best image quality for non-color pages.
● Color: Scans the documents in color.
● Black: Scans documents in black and white with a compressed file size.
● Black/Gray: Scans or prints documents in grayscale.
Light or faint copies (color models)

Learn how to resolve light or faint copy-quality problems.
Are you attempting to copy or scan highlighted text?
NOTE: When digitally sending or copying highlighted images or text objects, the image might appear
lighter than expected or does not show up at all with certain brands/types of highlighter pens.
Highlighters come in bright, often fluorescent colors. Fluorescent highlighter inks tend to reflect more light
than that which is absorbed by the paper source. This reflection might cause the image to not show up as well
as non-fluorescent colors depending upon the scanner/MFP being used.
The most common color for highlighters is yellow, but many other colors are also found such as pink, blue,
green, orange, and purples. Yellow is often the preferred color to use when making a photocopy as it tends to
not produce as much of a shadow on copies or scans.
There are different color and ink properties depending upon the brand of highlighters used. Due to these
differences, scanning of the images might vary greatly from not being seen at all to changing colors (for
example, orange highlighter might appear brown in the copy or scan or yellow highlighter might appear
green).
Automatic color detect
HP has a feature in all FutureSmart (LaserJet Enterprise Series only) printers which automatically detects
color on each page. Depending upon the amount of color information on a page, the scanner might determine
the page to be black and white due to a very, very small amount of color which might be considered

background artifacts. This helps to reduce the file size of sent files as well as toner usage on a copied page.
You might see small highlighted marks on pages print out in black and white or even disappear.
The black and white effect is due to the printer not seeing enough color on the page, in which case the whole
image is rendered as a black and white page. The highlighted mark disappearing might be due to the marker
characteristics not being detected by the scanner.
Does the printer have the latest firmware version installed?
No or I don't know.
A Firmware enhancement has been introduced for certain LaserJets to help with the reproduction of
highlighted images.
NOTE: Some Multifunction Printers (MFPs) using FutureSmart firmware v3.5.3 or later have improved color
reproduction of fluorescent highlighters when scanning or copying.
Use the following steps to identify the installed firmware version, and then upgrade the firmware if needed.
1. Print a configuration page (from the printer control panel).
2. On the printed configuration page look in the section marked Device Information, and then identify the
Firmware Datecode and Firmware Revision.
This is the current version of firmware installed on this printer.
3. In the US, go to http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj6700 or http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj6800MFP

http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX677MFP.
a. Select Get drivers, Software, and Firmware, and then select the appropriate product by name.
b. Select the driver language and operating system.
c. Locate the firmware download. If the firmware version is more recent than the one shown on the
printed configuration page, select Download.
4. Outside the U.S., go to www.hp.com/support.
a. Select your country/region.
b. Select Drivers & Downloads.
c. Enter the product name in the Find my product dialogue box, and then select Go.
TIP: Click on the How do I find my product name/number? link to see a short video on identifying
the printer name and number.
d. Select the appropriate product by name.
e. Select the driver language and operating system.
Light or faint copies (color models) 459

f. Locate the firmware download. If the firmware version is more recent than the one shown on the
printed configuration page, select Download.
5. Perform a firmware upgrade. See the Firmware upgrades topic in the product service manual.
Yes
These procedures help provide settings which affect the way highlighters are scanned or copied. A firmware
enhancement is available for certain printers that helps with the reproduction of highlighted images.
● Enable Firmware Enhancement
1. From the Home screen, select the desired scanning application (for example, Copy, E-Mail, Save to
Network Folder).
2. Select More Options > Optimize Text/Picture > Text button (not slider). This enables the improved
color reproduction of fluorescent highlighters.
TIP: Administrators can set Text as the default setting on the device.
● Alternative Settings
See Modify printer settings to improve scan or copy quality on page 457 for more information.
Performance and connectivity troubleshooting

Learn about performance and connectivity troubleshooting.
Solve fax or email problems

Learn about solving fax and email problems.
Fax or email troubleshooting information is not provided in this service manual. The most current information
is available in WISE. Search using model number then use "fax troubleshooting" as the search term.
For HP Channel partners, open the HP Partner First Portal located at https://partner.hp.com, and then do the
following:
For HP service personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search Engines (WISE) sites:
Americas (AMS)
● WISE - English
● WISE - Spanish
● WISE - Portuguese
● WISE - French

Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)
● WISE - English
● WISE - Japanese
● WISE - Korean
● WISE - Chinese (simplified)
● WISE - Chinese (traditional)
● WISE - Thai
Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)
● WISE - English
Solve performance problems

Review the following information and procedures to solve performance problems.
NOTE: Tray 1 and Tray 2 are optimal for paper pickup when using special paper or media other than
75-80gsm (20lb) plain paper. For Tray 1 and Tray 2 the printer increases the number of attempts to pick up a
page, which increases the reliability of successfully picking the page from the tray and decreases the
possibility of a mis-pick jam.
HP recommends using Tray 1 or Tray 2 if the printer is experiencing excessive or reoccurring jams from trays
other than Tray 1 and Tray 2, or for print jobs that require media other than 75-80gsm (20lb) plain paper.
Factors affecting print performance

Review the following information about factors affecting print performance.
Table 4-43 Solve performance problems
Problem Cause Solution
Pages print but are totally blank. The document might contain blank pages. Check the original document to see if
content is present on all of the pages.
Pages print but are totally blank. The printer might be malfunctioning. To check the printer, print a Configuration
page.
Pages print but are totally blank. Make sure that the printer is not feeding Make sure that the paper meets HP
multiple pages (especially if very thin specifications for this printer.
paper is used).
For a complete list of specific HP-brand
paper that this printer supports, go to
http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj6700
or http://www.hp.com/support/
colorlj6800MFP or http://www.hp.com/
support/colorlj6801MFP or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX654
or http://www.hp.com/support/
colorljX677MFP.
Pages print very slowly. Heavier paper types can slow the print job. Print on a different type of paper.
NOTE: Some software programs process

print jobs slowly.
Solve performance problems 461

Table 4-43 Solve performance problems (continued)
Problem Cause Solution
Pages print very slowly. Complex pages can print slowly. Proper fusing might require a slower print
speed to ensure the best print quality.
NOTE: Some software programs process
print jobs slowly.
Pages print very slowly. Large batches, narrow paper, and special Print in smaller batches, on a different type
paper such as gloss, transparency, of paper, or on a different size of paper.
NOTE: Some software programs process cardstock, and HP Tough Paper can slow
print jobs slowly. the print job.
Pages did not print. The printer might not be pulling paper Make sure paper is loaded in the tray
correctly. correctly.
Pages did not print. The paper is jamming in the printer. Clear the jam.
Pages did not print. The USB cable might be defective or ● Disconnect the USB cable at both
incorrectly connected. ends and reconnect it.
● Try printing a job that has printed in

the past.
● Try using a different USB cable.
Pages did not print. Other devices are running on the host The printer might not share a USB port.
computer. If an external hard drive or network
switchbox is connected to the same port
as the printer, the other device might be
interfering with the printer. To connect
and use the printer, disconnect the other
device or use two USB ports on the host
computer.
Pages did not print. The print job might not have arrived at the Check the printer status queue. Also, the
printer. Printing message should appear on the
control panel display.
Print speeds
Print speed is the number of pages that print in one minute. Print speed depends on different engine-process
speeds or operational pauses between printed pages during normal printer operation. Factors that determine
the print speed of the printer include the following:
● Page formatting time
The printer must pause for each page to be formatted before it prints. Complex pages take more time to
format, resulting in reduced print speed. However, most jobs print at full engine speed.
● Media size
Legal-size media reduces print speed because it is longer than the standard Letter- or A4–size media.
A reduce print speed is used when printing on narrow media to prevent the edges of the fuser from
overheating.
● Media mode
Some media types require a reduced print speed to achieve maximum print quality on that media. For
example, glossy, heavy, and specialty media (for example, envelopes or photos) require a reduced print
speed. To maximize the print speed for special media types, make sure that the correct media type in the
print driver is selected.

● Printer temperature
To prevent printer damage, print speed is reduced if the printer reaches a specific internal temperature
(thermal slow down). The starting temperature of the printer, ambient environment temperature, and the
print job size effect the number of pages that can be printed before the printer reduces the print speed.
Thermal slow down reduces print speed by printing four pages and then pausing for an amount of time
before printing continues.
● Other print speed reduction factors
Other factors (especially during large print jobs) that can cause reduced print speeds include:
– Density control sequence; occurs every 150 pages and takes about 120 seconds
The printer does not print

If the printer does not print at all, try the following solutions.
1. Make sure the printer is turned on and that the control panel indicates it is ready.
● If the control panel does not indicate the printer is ready, turn the printer off and then on again.
● If the control panel indicates the printer is ready, try sending the job again.
2. If the control panel indicates the printer has an error, resolve the error and then try sending the job
again.
3. Make sure the cables are all connected correctly. If the printer is connected to a network, check the
following items:
● Check the bottom LED next to the network connection on the printer. If the network is active, the
light is green.
● Make sure that a network cable and not a phone cord is used to connect to the network.
● Make sure the network router, hub, or switch is turned on and that it is working correctly.
4. Install the HP software for the printer. Using generic printer drivers can cause delays clearing jobs from
the print queue.
5. From the list of printers on your computer, right-click the name of this product, click Properties, and
open the Ports tab.
● If a network cable is used to connect to the network, make sure the printer name listed on the Ports
tab matches the one on the printer configuration page.
● If a USB cable is used, and the printer is connected to a wireless network, make sure the box is
checked next to Virtual printer port for USB.
6. If a personal firewall system on the computer is used, it might be blocking communication with the
printer. Try temporarily disabling the firewall to see if it is the source of the problem.
7. If the host computer or the printer is connected to a wireless network, low signal quality or interference
might be delaying print jobs.
The printer prints slowly

If the printer prints, but it seems slow, try the following solutions.
The printer does not print 463

1. Make sure the computer meets the minimum specifications for this printer. For
a list of specifications, go to this Web site: http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj6700
2. When the printer is configured to print on some paper types, such as heavy paper, the printer prints more
slowly so it can correctly fuse the toner to the paper. If the paper type setting is not correct for the type
of paper you are using, change the setting to the correct paper type.
3. If the host computer or the printer is connected to a wireless network, low signal quality or interference
might be delaying print jobs.
Solve connectivity problems

Review the following information and procedures to solve connectivity problems.
Solve USB connection problems

If you have connected the product directly to a computer, check the cable.
● Verify that the cable is connected to the computer and to the product.
● Verify that the cable is not longer than 2 m (6.65 ft). Try using a shorter cable.
● Verify that the cable is working correctly by connecting it to another product. Replace the cable if
necessary.
Solve wired network problems

Review the following information and procedures to solve wired network problems.
Introduction
Learn about solving wired network problems.
Certain types of problems can indicate there is a network communication problem. These problems include
the following issues:
● The periodic loss of ability to communicate with the printer
● The printer cannot be found during driver installation
● A periodic failure to print
Check the items in this topic to verify that the printer is communicating with the network. Before beginning,
print a configuration page from the printer control panel and locate the printer IP address that is listed on this
page.
Poor physical connection

Use the following procedure when the printer has a poor physical connection.
1. Verify that the printer is attached to the correct network port using a cable of the correct length.
2. Verify that cable connections are secure.
3. Look at the network port connection on the back of the printer, and verify that the amber activity light
and the green link-status light are lit.
4. If the problem continues, try a different cable or port on the hub.

The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the printer
Use the following procedure when the computer is using the incorrect IP address for the printer.
1. Open the printer properties and click the Ports tab. Verify that the current IP address for the printer is
selected. The printer IP address is listed on the printer configuration page.
2. If you installed the printer using the HP standard TCP/IP port, select the box labeled Always print to this
printer, even if its IP address changes.
3. If you installed the printer using a Microsoft standard TCP/IP port, use the hostname instead of the IP
address.
4. If the IP address is correct, delete the printer and then add it again.
The computer is unable to communicate with the printer

Use the following procedure when the computer is unable to communicate with the printer.
1. Test network communication by pinging the network.
a. Open a command-line prompt on your computer.
● For Windows, click Start, click Run, type cmd, and then press Enter.
● For macOS, go to Applications, then Utilities, and open Terminal.
b. Type ping followed by the IP address for your printer.
c. If the window displays round-trip times, the network is working.
2. If the ping command failed, verify that the network hubs are on, and then verify that the network
settings, the printer, and the computer are all configured for the same network.
The printer is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network
HP recommends leaving these settings in automatic mode (the default setting). If you change these settings,
you must also change them for your network.
New software programs might be causing compatibility problems

Verify that any new software programs are correctly installed and that they use the correct print driver.
The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly

Use the following procedure when the computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly.
1. Check the network drivers, print drivers, and the network redirection settings.
2. Verify that the operating system is configured correctly.
The printer is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect

Use the following procedure when the printer is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect.
1. Review the configuration page to check the status of the network protocol. Enable it if necessary.
2. Reconfigure the network settings if necessary.
The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the printer 465
5 Removal and replacement
When servicing the printer, several items must be considered to ensure a successful repair and to avoid
damage to the printer or personal injury. Learn about these considerations and find detailed instructions for
removing and replacing printer parts.
1. Customer self-repair (CSR) A parts and accessories

Customer self-repair (CSR) A parts are parts that a customer replaces without assistance from a field
technician. These parts can be replaced without the use of any tools.
Customer-replaceable units
Learn about customer-replaceable parts removal and replacement.
Internal parts and assemblies

Learn how to remove and replace the printer internal parts and assemblies.
Removal and replacement: Toner cartridges (6700/6800 models)

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the toner cartridges.
View a video of removing and replacing the toner cartridges.
Before performing service
CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes.
Cover the imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an extended period of
time.
If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot water sets
toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to https://parts.hp.com/
hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-1 Part information
Part number Description
W2130A HP 213A Black Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
W2130X HP 2130X High Yield Black Toner Cartridge
W2130Y HP 213Y Extra High Yield Black Toner Cartridge
466 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Table 5-1 Part information (continued)
W2130YC HP W2130YC Black Contract Toner Cartridge
W2131A HP 213A Cyan Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
W2131X HP 2131X High Yield Cyan Toner Cartridge
W2131Y HP 213Y Extra High Yield Cyan Toner Cartridge
W2131YC HP W2131YC Cyan Contract Toner Cartridge
W2132A HP 213A Yellow Original LaserJet Toner
W2132X HP 2132X High Yield Yellow Toner Cartridge
W2132Y HP 213Y Extra High Yield Yellow Toner Cartridge
W2132YC HP W2132YC Yellow Contract Toner Cartridge
W2133A HP 213A Magenta LaserJet Toner Cartridge
W2133X HP 2133X High Yield Magenta Toner Cartridge
W2133Y HP 213Y Extra High Yield Magenta Toner Cartridge
W2133YC HP W2133YC Magenta Contract Toner Cartridge
W2140Z HP 214Z Ultra High Yield Black Toner Cartridge (SFP)
W2140ZC HP W2140ZC Black Contract Toner Cartridge (SFP)
W2141Z HP 214Z Ultra High Yield Cyan Toner Cartridge (SFP)
W2141ZC HP W2141ZC Cyan Contract Toner Cartridge (SFP)
W2142Z HP 214Z Ultra High Yield Yellow Toner Cartridge (SFP)
W2142ZC HP W2142ZC Yellow Contract Toner Cartridge (SFP)
W2143Z HP 214Z Ultra High Yield Magenta Toner Cartridge (SFP)
W2143ZC HP W2143ZC Magenta Contract Toner Cartridge (SFP)
W2170Z HP 217Z Ultra High Yield Black Toner Cartridge (MFP)
W2170ZC HP W2170ZC Black Contract Toner Cartridge (MFP)
W2171Z HP 217Z Ultra High Yield Cyan Toner Cartridge (MFP)
W2171ZC HP W2171ZC Cyan Contract Toner Cartridge (MFP)
W2172Z HP 217Z Ultra High Yield Yellow Toner Cartridge (MFP)
W2172ZC HP W2172ZC Yellow Contract Tone Cartridge (MFP)
W2173Z HP 217Z Ultra High Yield Magenta Toner Cartridge (MFP)
W2173ZC HP W2173ZC Magenta Contract Toner Cartridge (MFP)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Post service test
Removal and replacement: Toner cartridges (6700/6800 models) 467

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the toner cartridges (6700/6800 models)

Follow these steps to remove a toner cartridge.

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. Install the toner cartridges (6700/6800 models)

Follow these steps to install a toner cartridge.

cartridge.
2. Hold both ends of the toner cartridge and rock it


into the printer.

shipping label.
Install the toner cartridges (6700/6800 models) 469

Removal and replacement: Toner cartridges (X654/X677 models)

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the toner cartridges.
View a video of removing and replacing the toner cartridges.
Cover the imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an extended period of
time.
W9240MC HP W9240MC Black Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (SFP)
W9241MC HP W9241MC Cyan Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (SFP)
W9242MC HP W9242MC Yellow Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (SFP)
W9243MC HP W9243MC Magenta Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (SFP)
W9250MC HP W9250MC Black Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (MFP)
W9251MC HP W9251MC Cyan Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (MFP)
W9252MC HP W9252MC Yellow Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (MFP)
W9253MC HP W9253MC Magenta Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (MFP)
W9260MC HP W9260MC Black Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (SFP)
W9261MC HP W9261MC Cyan Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (SFP)
W9262MC HP W9262MC Yellow Mngd LaserJet Toner (SFP)
W9263MC HP W9263MC Magenta Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (SFP)
W9270MC HP W9270MC Black Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (MFP)
W9271MC HP W9271MC Cyan Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (MFP)
W9272MC HP W9272MC Yellow Mngd LaserJet Toner (MFP)
W9273MC HP W9273MC Magenta Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (MFP)
Required tools

○ Make sure that the cartridge door is fully closed after replacing a toner cartridge.
Post service test
1. Eject the toner cartridges (X654/X677 models)

Follow these steps to eject a toner cartridge.
NOTE: Two methods are available to eject a toner cartridge using the control panel.
● Eject a toner cartridge with the printer in the Ready state.
See Eject a toner cartridge using the control panel (Ready state) on page 471.
● Eject a toner cartridge with the printer in a cartridge low or very low error state.
See Eject a toner cartridge using the control panel (error condition) on page 472.
Eject a toner cartridge using the control panel (Ready state)
Use the following steps to eject a toner cartridge when the printer is in the Ready state.
1. From the control panel Home screen, scroll to and select the Supplies button.
2. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.
Figure 5-1 Eject the toner cartridge (Ready state)
Touch the eject button to prepare the cartridge for

removal.
Eject the toner cartridges (X654/X677 models) 471

3. A prompt appears on the control-panel display to open the toner cartridge door.
Eject a toner cartridge using the control panel (error condition)
Use the following steps to eject a toner cartridge when the printer is in a cartridge low or very low error state.
1. On the control panel Home screen, Touch the error icon at the top of the display.
Figure 5-2 Eject the toner cartridge (error state) (1 of 2)
2. Touch the Eject button at the bottom of the display.
Figure 5-3 Eject the toner cartridge (error state) (2 of 2)
3. A prompt appears on the control-panel display to open the toner cartridge door.
2. Remove the toner cartridges (X654/X677 models)

Follow these steps to remove a toner cartridge.

NOTE: The toner cartridges must be released before removing them. See Eject the toner cartridges (X654/
X677 models) on page 471.
1. Open the toner cartridge door on the front of the

printer.


4. Install the toner cartridges (X654/X677 models)

Follow these steps to install a toner cartridge.

cartridge.
Unpack the replacement assembly 473

2. Hold both ends of the toner cartridge and rock it to
evenly distribute the toner that is inside.

into the printer.
4. Close the toner cartridge door.

shipping label.
Removal and replacement: Imaging drums (X654/X677 models)

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the imaging drums.
View a video of removing and replacing the image drums.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to an imaging drum, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes.
Cover the green imaging drum if it must be removed from the printer for an extended period of time.
W9280MC HP W9280MC Black Mngd Imaging Drum
W9281MC HP W9281MC Cyan Mngd Imaging Drum
W9282MC HP W9282MC Yellow Mngd Imaging Drum
W9283MC HP W9283MC Magenta Mngd Imaging Drum
Required tools
○ Make sure that the cartridge door is fully closed after replacing an image drum.
Post service test
1. Remove the imaging drums (X654/X677 models)

Follow these steps to remove an imaging drum.
NOTE: If necessary, remove two screws holding the

imaging drum access cover in place, and then lower the
cover to access the imaging drums. See the figure below.
Remove the imaging drums (X654/X677 models) 475

Figure 5-4 Remove two screws, open the cover
2. Grasp the end of the imaging drum cartridge and

pull it straight out of the printer.

3. Install the imaging drums (X654/X677 models)

Follow these steps to install an imaging drum.

1. Remove the new imaging drum from its package.
Save all packaging for recycling the used imaging
drum.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the imaging

drum, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the imaging drum if it must be
removed from the printer for an extended period
of time. Do not touch the blue imaging drum.
2. Hold both ends of the imaging drum and rock it

3. Align the imaging drum with its slot and insert it

into the printer.
NOTE: If necessary, close the imaging drum access

cover, and then install the two screws to secure the
cover. See the figure below.
Install the imaging drums (X654/X677 models) 477

Figure 5-5 Close the cover, install two screws
5. Pack the used imaging drum into the box that

the new imaging drum came in. See the enclosed
shipping label.
return the used imaging drum to HP for recycling.
Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU)

Learn about removing and replacing the toner collection unit (TCU).
View a video of removing and replacing the TCU.
Part number Part description
527F9A HP LaserJet Toner collection unit (TCU) with instruction guide

Required tools
Make sure that the front door is fully closed after replacing the TCU.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).
2. Lift the TCU slightly and then pull it out of the printer.
NOTE: Maintain the position of the TCU as you pull it out from the printer. This will ensure that you do
not spill any waste toner in the printer. Place the unit into the clear plastic bag the new TCU was
packaged in.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 479

3. Install the TCU

Follow these steps to install the toner collection unit (TCU).
1. Remove the new TCU from its package. Save all packaging for recycling the used TCU.
2. Install the new TCU by inserting it into the printer, and then lifting slightly to make sure it pushes all the
way in.

4. Pack the used TCU into the box that the new TCU came in. See the enclosed recycling guide for
information about recycling.
In the U.S. and Canada, a pre-paid shipping label is included in the box. In other countries/regions, go to
www.hp.com/recycle to print a pre-paid shipping label.
Adhere the pre-paid shipping label to the box, and return the used TCU to HP for recycling.
Removal and replacement: 3-bin stapler-stacker staple cartridge (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the 3-bin stapler/stacker staple cartridge.
View a video of removing and replacing the staple cartridge.
J8J96AJ8J96A HP Staple Cartridge Refill for the floor-standing finisher or 3-bin stapler-
stacker
Required tools
Post service test
Use the stapler to staple two pages together.
1. Remove the staple cartridge (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Follow these steps to remove the 3-bin stapler-stacker staple cartridge.
Removal and replacement: 3-bin stapler-stacker staple cartridge (3-bin stapler-stacker) 481
1. Open the 3-bin stapler-stacker staple door.
2. Pull down the colored handle on the staple carriage, and then pull the staple carriage straight out.

3. Install the staple cartridge (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Follow these steps to install the 3-bin stapler-stacker staple cartridge.
NOTE: Do not dispose of the staple carriage. The carriage is not an orderable or replaceable part. If the
carriage is disposed of, the entire staple cartridge assembly will need to be replaced.
1. Remove the staple cartridge from the carrier/sled and replace it with the new staple cartridge.
NOTE: Do not dispose of the staple carrier/sled. The sled is not an orderable or replaceable part.

1 2 3
2. Reinstall the staple carriage into the stapler by pressing the colored handle inward until it snaps into
place.
3. Close the 3-bin stapler-stacker staple door.
Removal and replacement: Finisher staple cartridge (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing finisher staple cartridge.
J8J96A HP Staple Cartridge Refill (3-bin SS)
Removal and replacement: Finisher staple cartridge (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 483

Required tools
Post service test
1. Remove the staple cartridge (floor-standing finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the floor-standing finisher staple cartridge.
1. Open the finisher door.
2. Pull down the colored handle on the staple carriage, and then pull the staple carriage straight out.


3. Install the staple cartridge (floor-standing finisher)

Follow these steps to install the floor-standing finisher staple cartridge.
NOTE: Do not dispose of the staple carriage. The carriage is not an orderable or replaceable part. If the
carriage is disposed of, the entire staple cartridge assembly will need to be replaced.
1. Remove the staple cartridge from the carrier/sled and replace it with the new staple cartridge.
NOTE: Do not dispose of the staple carrier/sled. The sled is not an orderable or replaceable part.
1 2 3
2. Reinstall the staple carriage into the stapler by pressing the colored handle inward until it snaps into
place.
Install the staple cartridge (floor-standing finisher) 485

3. Close the finisher door.
Removal and replacement: Convenience staple cartridge (convenience stapler models)

Learn about removing and replacing the convenience stapler staple cartridge.
Q7432A HP Staple Cartridge Pack for the convenience stapler
Required tools
Post service test
1. Remove the staple cartridge (convenience stapler)

Follow these steps to remove the convenience stapler staple cartridge.

1. Open the stapler door.
2. Pull the staple carriage straight out.

3. Install the staple cartridge (convenience stapler)

Follow these steps to install the convenience stapler staple cartridge.

1. Insert the new staple carriage into the stapler.
2. Close the stapler door.
Removal and replacement: Fuser

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the fuser.
View a video to remove and replace the fuser
Mean time to repair: 5 minutes
Service level: Basic
WARNING! The fuser is hot. Wait at least 30 minutes after turning the printer power off before removing
the fuser.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

527G2A HP LaserJet 110V Enhanced Fuser Kit (6700/6800 models)
527G3A HP LaserJet 220V Enhanced Fuser Kit (6700/6800 models)
527G4MC HP LaserJet Mngd 110V Enhanced Fuser Kit (X654/X677 models)
527G5MC HP LaserJet Mngd 220V Enhanced Fuser Kit (X654/X677 models)
Required tools
No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
Make sure that the right door is fully closed after replacing the fuser.
Post service test
Print a configuration page to make sure that the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the fuser

Follow these steps to remove the fuser.
CAUTION: The fuser is hot. Wait at least 10 minutes after turning the printer power off before removing
the fuser.
Figure 5-6 Open the right door
Remove the fuser 489

2. Squeeze the release levers on the handles (circle callouts), and then remove the fuser.
Figure 5-7 Remove the fuser

3. Install the fuser

Follow these steps to install the fuser.
1. Align the fuser with the opening in the printer.
Figure 5-8 Align the fuser with the opening

2. Slide the fuser into the printer, push in to install it, and then make sure that it is fully seated.
TIP: When the fuser is fully seated, the release levers on the handles make an audible click.
Figure 5-9 Install the fuser
Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB)

This document provides instructions about removing and replacing the image transfer belt (ITB) assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the image transfer belt.
To order a replacement assembly, use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To
order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts
527G9A HP LaserJet Image Transfer Belt Kit (6700/6800 models)
527H0MC HP LaserJet Mngd Image Transfer Belt (X654/X677 models)
Required tools
No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
Make sure that the right door is fully closed after replacing the ITB.
Post service test
Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB) 491

1. Remove the ITB
Follow these steps to remove the ITB.
2. Hold the two side levers and pull out the ITB assembly.
CAUTION: Do not touch the gray plastic belt. Skin oils and fingerprints on the belt can cause print-
quality problems.
Figure 5-11 Release the ITB


3. Install the ITB
Follow these steps to install the ITB.
1. Hold the ITB by the edges (do not touch the gray plastic belt).
2. Align the ITB with the slots in the printer, and then carefully push it into the printer.
3. Continue to carefully push the ITB into the printer until it is fully installed.
TIP: The right door should close easily if the ITB assembly is correctly installed.
Removal and replacement: Secondary transfer roller

Learn about removing and replacing the secondary transfer roller.
View a video of removing and replacing the T2 roller.
527H1MC HP LaserJet Managed Trans Roller Kit
Required tools
Make sure that the right door is fully closed after replacing the roller.
Post service test
1. Remove the secondary transfer roller

Follow these steps to remove the secondary transfer roller.
Install the ITB 493

2. Push the blue left end (callout 1) of the roller assembly to the right, and then lift that end of the
secondary transfer roller (callout 2).
Figure 5-13 Release the left end of the secondary transfer roller
2
1
3. With the left end of the roller lifted up, pull the roller to the left and out of the printer. Take care in
removing the right end of the roller from its holder.
Figure 5-14 Remove the secondary transfer roller

3. Install the secondary transfer roller

Follow these steps to install the secondary transfer roller.
1. Carefully align and insert the right end of the replacement roller into the holder
IMPORTANT: Make sure that right end of the roller assembly is fully seated in the holder.
Figure 5-15 Install right end of the secondary transfer roller
2. Push down on the blue left end until the roller snaps into place.
Figure 5-16 Secure the secondary transfer roller

Removal and replacement: Document feeder rollers (MFP models)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder rollers.
View a video of removing and replacing the document feeder rollers.
6H122A ADF Pick/Sep Roller Kit (6xxx Series)
6M1P3A ADF Pick/Sep Roller Kit (Flow 6xxx Series)
Required tools
Post service test
Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or prints.
1. Remove the ADF pickup and feed roller assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ADF pickup and feed roller assembly.
1. Open the document-feeder jam access door.
Figure 5-17 Open the document-feeder jam access door

2. Release the blue locking arm to drop the assembly down. Slide the pickup and feed roller assembly to
the left, and then pull it away from the document feeder to remove it.
Figure 5-18 Release the blue locking arm
2. Remove the ADF separation roller

Follow these steps to remove the ADF separation roller.
■ Lift the roller cover up and then slide the roller toward the front of the printer to remove it.
Figure 5-19 Release the separation roller cover

Remove the ADF separation roller 497

4. Install the ADF separation roller
Follow these steps to install the ADF separation roller.
■ Lower the separation roller into the document feeder, slide it to the right to install it, and then bring the
cover down over the roller and snap it into place.
Figure 5-20 Install the ADF separation roller
5. Install the ADF pickup and feed roller assembly

Follow these steps to install the pickup and feed roller assembly.
■ Position the pickup and feed roller assembly in the document feeder, slide the assembly to the right to
seat it in the ADF, and then push the lever up to lock the roller assembly in place.
Figure 5-21 Install the ADF pickup and feed roller assembly
Installation: Keyboard overlay (Flow MFP models)

Learn about installing a keyboard overlay.
Introduction
View a video of how to install the keyboard overlay.
Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cord before attempting to service the printer.
A7W12A Keyboard Overlay Kit - Chinese
A7W13A Keyboard Overlay Kit - (DN/FR-Swiss/GN)
A7W14A HP LaserJet Swedish Overlay Keyboard
Required tools
● No special tools are required to install this assembly.
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
1. Install the keyboard overlay (Flow MFP models)

Follow these steps to install the keyboard overlay.
1. Carefully peel the backing from the control panel overlay.
CAUTION: Do not touch the adhesive squares and be careful so that the adhesive squares do not come
off with the backing.
Figure 5-22 Remove the backing
Install the keyboard overlay (Flow MFP models) 499

2. Position the keyboard overlay on the keyboard by aligning the upper edge of the overlay with the top
edge of the keyboard.
Figure 5-23 Position the keyboard overlay top edge
3. With the top edge positioned, align the side edges of the overlay with the keyboard edges.
Figure 5-24 Position the keyboard overlay side edges
4. Place one hand under the keyboard and press upward (callout 1). Place the other hand on top of the
keyboard overlay and press downward (callout 2). Continue to press while sliding both hands to the right
(callout 3) to adhere the overlay to the keyboard.
Figure 5-25 Apply the keyboard overlay

2

5. Carefully remove the protective top sheet from the keyboard overlay.
Figure 5-26 Apply the keyboard overlay
CAUTION: Make sure that the adhesive squares do not come off of the keyboard with the protective
sheet.
Figure 5-27 Ensure that the squares do not stick to the top sheet
Removal and replacement: Tray 1 pickup and separation rollers

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 1 rollers.
View a video of removing and replacing theTray 1 rollers.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number for your
printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
527H3A HP LaserJet MP Tray Roller Kit
Required tools
Removal and replacement: Tray 1 pickup and separation rollers 501

Post service test
1. Remove the Tray 1 pickup roller

Follow these steps to remove and replace the Tray 1 pickup roller.
1. On the right side of the printer, release the lower of the two latches to open Tray 1.
Figure 5-28 Open Tray 1
2. Locate and release the blue pickup roller assembly release tab (callout 1).

3. Push the pickup roller assembly to the right and then away from the printer.
2. Remove the Tray 1 separation roller

Follow these steps to remove and replace the Tray 1 separation roller.
NOTE: Even if you want to replace only the separation roller, you must first remove the pickup roller
assembly.
1. Grasp the left- and right-side of the separation roller assembly, and then lift the assembly up.
Remove the Tray 1 separation roller 503

2. Pull the separation roller assembly straight out to remove it.

4. Install the Tray 1 separation roller

Follow these steps to install the Tray 1 separation roller.
CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy portion of the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause paper-handling
and print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves or thoroughly washing your hands
before handling the assembly.

1. Insert the separation roller assembly into the printer.
Figure 5-33 Insert the separation roller assembly
2. Push down on the Tray 1 separation roller until it snaps into place.
Figure 5-34 Secure the separation roller assembly
5. Install the Tray 1 pickup roller

Follow these steps to install the Tray 1 pickup roller.
Install the Tray 1 pickup roller 505

■ Insert the keyed right end of the pickup roller assembly into the provided slot, and then rotate the left end
into place to install it.
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 paper pickup roller and separation roller assemblies
Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 2 rollers.
View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 rollers.
527H2A HP LaserJet Tray 2-x Roller Kit
Required tools
Post service test
1. Remove the Tray 2 separation roller assembly

Learn about removing the Tray 2 separation roller assembly.
1. Depending on the printer model, perform one of the following steps.
● X654/X677 models: Open the lower right door.

2. Slide the blue lever (callout 1) to the right, and then remove the separation roller assembly (callout 2) by
pulling it out from the printer.
2. Remove the Tray 2 paper pickup roller assembly

Learn about removing the Tray 2 pickup rollers.
NOTE: Even if you want to replace only the pickup roller assembly, you must first remove the separation
roller assembly.
■ Locate the pickup roller assembly, and then pull it away from the printer to remove it.
NOTE: As the roller assembly can be hard to grip, you might need to reach under and behind the rollers to
securely grip it.

Remove the Tray 2 paper pickup roller assembly 507

4. Install the Tray 2 paper pickup roller assembly

Learn about installing the Tray 2 pickup roller assembly.
■ Position the pickup roller assembly in the printer in the correct orientation, and then press the assembly
into place.
5. Install the Tray 2 separation roller assembly

Learn about installing the Tray 2 separation roller assembly.

■ Insert the separation roller assembly into the printer to install it.
Figure 5-39 Install the separation roller assembly
2. Customer self-repair (CSR) B parts and accessories

Customer self-repair (CSR) B parts are parts that a customer replaces without assistance from a field
technician. These parts might require the use of tools.
Customer-replaceable units
Learn about customer-replaceable parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Keyboard (Flow MFP models)

Learn about removing and replacing the keyboard.
Introduction
View a video of how to remove and replace the keyboard.
1M0Q2A HP LaserJet Workflow Keyboard
Customer self-repair (CSR) B parts and accessories 509

Required tools
● Use the reversible screwdriver, the bracket, and the two screws included in the kit.
Post service test
1. Remove the control panel (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.
■ Pull the control panel out and tilt it up, and then remove the two thumbscrews on the control panel arm.
Remove the control panel by pulling it away from the printer.
Figure 5-40 Remove two thumbscrews
2. Remove the keyboard (MFP models)

Follow these steps to remove the keyboard.

1. On the back off the control panel, remove two screws, and then remove the bracket from the assembly.
Figure 5-41 Remove the bracket
2. Remove the flat flexible cable (FFC) connector cover.
Figure 5-42 Remove the FFC connector cover
3. Use the pull tab to disconnect the FFC from the connector in the control panel.
Figure 5-43 Disconnect the keyboard FFC
Remove the keyboard (MFP models) 511

4. Pull the keyboard away from the control panel.
Figure 5-44 Remove the keyboard

4. Install the keyboard (MFP models)

Follow these steps to install the keyboard.
1. Align the back of the keyboard with the back of the control panel and then join them by connecting the
hinges.
Figure 5-45 Connect the keyboard to the control panel

2. Connect the keyboard flat flexible cable (FFC) with the connector in the control panel.
Figure 5-46 Connect the keyboard FFC
3. Install the FFC cover. Make sure that the FFC pull tab does not stick out after the cover is installed.
Figure 5-47 Install the FFC cover
4. Use the reversible screwdriver to install the two bracket screws to attach the bracket to the control
panel.
Figure 5-48 Install the bracket
Install the keyboard (MFP models) 513

5. Install the control panel (MFP models)
Follow these steps to install the control panel.
■ Slide the control panel into the control panel arm, and then install the two thumbscrews on the control
panel arm.
Figure 5-49 Install the control panel
Removal and replacement: Hard-disk drive (HDD)

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the hard-disk drive (HDD).
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the hard-disk drive.
Turn the printer power off.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace the formatter, DC controller, and eMMC PCA or hard-disk drive simultaneously
during a single printer servicing. Doing so might cause the printer to become unstable or inoperable.
L41606-011 HDD, 500GB 5400RPM SED
L42243-021 HDD, 500GB 5400RPM FIPS/CCC OPAL2 7MM
6HN31A HP 500GB CCC FIPS TAA Hard Disk Drive
9EQ11A HP 500GB CCC FIPS Hard Disk Drive

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
Make sure that the formatter cover is fully seated, and that the screw is fastened.
Post service test
1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2) away from the printer to
remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-50 Remove the formatter cover
2. Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.
Remove the formatter cover 515

1. Release two pins from the formatter faceplate.
Figure 5-51 Release two pins
2. On the left side of the HDD, release the connector from the formatter, and then pull the HDD away from
the formatter.
Figure 5-52 Release the HDD

4. Install the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to install the hard-disk drive (HDD).

1. Align the connectors on the left side of the HDD with the connector on the formatter.
Figure 5-53 Align the connectors
2. Press the connectors together to seat the HDD on the formatter.
Figure 5-54 Install the HDD
3. Install the two pins through the formatter plate to secure the HDD.
Figure 5-55 Install two pins
Install the hard-disk drive (HDD) 517

5. Install the formatter cover
Follow these steps to install the formatter cover.
■ Slide the cover (callout 1) onto the printer, and then install one screw (callout 2) to secure it.
Figure 5-56 Install the cover
Removal and replacement: Dual in-line memory module (DIMM) (SFP models)
Learn about removing and replacing the dual in-line memory module (DIMM).
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the DIMM.
6QY68A HP 4GB DDR3Lx64 204-pin 933MHz DIMM
1M8J1A HP 4GB DDR3Lx64 204-pin 933MHz DIMM TAA
Required tools

Post service test

remove it.
2. Remove the dual in-line memory module (DIMM)

Follow these steps to remove the DIMM.
1. Pull the bottom edge of the DIMM away from the formatter to loosen the connector at the top of the
DIMM.
Figure 5-58 Pull the bottom edge of the DIMM

2. Pull down on the DIMM to remove it from the formatter.
Figure 5-59 Remove the DIMM

4. Install the DIMM

Follow these steps to install the DIMM.
1. Align the connector edge on the DIMM with the slot on the formatter.
Figure 5-60 Align the DIMM

2. Gently insert the top edge of the DIMM up into the formatter slot.
Figure 5-61 Insert the top edge into the formatter
3. Press the bottom edge of the DIMM against the formatter to seat it firmly in the formatter slot.
Figure 5-62 Install the DIMM

Install the formatter cover 521

Removal and replacement: Fax PCA (fax models)

Learn about removing and replacing the fax PCA.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the fax PCA.
B5L53-67901 Analog Fax Accessory 600
Required tools
Post service test
If possible, send and receive a fax from the printer.

remove it.
2. Remove the fax PCA (fax MFP models)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA.
■ Rotate end left end of the fax PCA away from the formatter (callout 1) to disconnect the connector, and
then slide the card away from the formatter faceplate (callout 2) to remove it.
Figure 5-65 Remove the fax PCA


4. Install the fax PCA (fax MFP models)

Follow these steps to install the fax PCA.
1. Align the fax port with the cut-out in the formatter faceplate, and then align the connector on the
back of the card with the formatter connector. Press the connectors together to seat the card on the
formatter.
Figure 5-66 Align the fax PCA
2. When installed, the port on the card should sit securely in the faceplate cut-out.
Figure 5-67 Check the fax PCA port

Removal and replacement: Workflow accelerator

Learn about removing and replacing the workflow accelerator card.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the workflow accelerator.
1M0Q5A HP LaserJet Workflow Accelerator Card
Required tools

Post service test

remove it.
2. Remove the workflow accelerator

Follow these steps to remove the workflow accelerator.
1. Pull the card away from the formatter to disconnect the connector and remove the card.
Figure 5-70 Remove the card

2. Remove the bracket from the workflow accelerator card.

4. Install the workflow accelerator

Follow these steps to install the workflow accelerator.
1. Slide the bracket onto the accelerator card.
Figure 5-72 Attach the bracket

2. Push the right edge of the card into the faceplate slots, and then align the connector on the back of the
card with the formatter connector.
Figure 5-73 Align the connectors
3. Press the connectors together to seat the card on the formatter.
Figure 5-74 Connect the connectors


Removal and replacement: USB expansion kit

Learn about removing and replacing the USB expansion kit.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the USB expansion kit.
4XN67A HP Internal USB Expansion Kit
Required tools
Post service test
Removal and replacement: USB expansion kit 529

remove it.
2. Remove the internal USB ports

Learn how to remove the internal USB ports.
1. Pull the card away from the formatter to disconnect the connector.
Figure 5-77 Remove the USB ports card

2. Pull the free end of the card away from the bracket, and then pull the captive end of the card out of the
bracket.
2
1

4. Install the internal USB ports

Learn how to install the internal USB ports.

1. Push the short edge of the card into the bracket, and then press the card into the bracket until it is firmly
seated.
Figure 5-79 Attach the bracket
1
2
2. Align the connector on the card with the formatter connector, and then press the connectors together to
seat the card on the formatter.
Figure 5-80 Install the card on the formatter
3. Install the formatter cover.


Removal and replacement: Solid state drive (SSD)

Learn about removing and replacing the solid state drive.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the SSD.
1M0Q4A HP LaserJet Secure Solid State Drive
Required tools
Post service test
Removal and replacement: Solid state drive (SSD) 533

remove it.

3. Install the SSD card only

Learn how to install the SSD card.

1. Place one end of the riser PCA into the cradle, and then press the other end of the card into the cradle.
Figure 5-83 Install PCA in cradle
1
2
2. Verify that the PCA is properly installed by listening for a click when it is pressed into place. Also verify
that the PCA is underneath the two indicated tabs at the end.
Figure 5-84 Verify PCA installation
3. Position the PCA cradle on the bracket.
Figure 5-85 Position the PCA cradle
Install the SSD card only 535

4. Close two clips at the end of the bracket to secure the PCA cradle.
Figure 5-86 Close the clips
5. Install the support cross member onto the bracket.
Figure 5-87 Install the cross member

6. Align the SSD card with the connector on the PCA. Note how the end of the SSD is keyed so that it can be
installed one way only.
Figure 5-88 Align the SSD card
7. Seat the SSD in the PCA connector, and then snap the other end of the SSD on the cross member.
Figure 5-89 Secure the SSD on the cross member
Install the SSD card only 537

8. Align the bracket assembly with the formatter connector.
Figure 5-90 Align the bracket assembly
9. Press the bracket assembly to firmly seat it in the formatter connector.
Figure 5-91 Install the bracket assembly

10. Install two pins to secure the bracket assembly to the formatter faceplate.
4. Install the SSD card with the HDD

Learn how to install the SSD card with an HDD.
1. Release two pins from the formatter faceplate.
Figure 5-93 Release two pins
Install the SSD card with the HDD 539

2. Remove the HDD assembly
Figure 5-94 Remove the HDD
3. Open two clips on the HDD bracket.
Figure 5-95 Open two clips

4. Remove the PCA cradle from the HDD bracket.
Figure 5-96 Remove the PCA cradle
5. Release one tab (callout 1), raise the end of the PCA up and off the cradle (callout 2), and then remove
the PCA from the cradle (callout 3).
Figure 5-97 Remove the PCA from the holder
6. Place one end of the new PCA on the cradle (callout 1), and then rotate the other end down onto the
cradle (callout 2). Make sure to orientate the PCA on the cradle as shown. Push down on the PCA to install
it on the cradle (an audible click is heard when it snaps into place).
NOTE: Make sure that the PCA is firmly seated under the clips on the cradle.

Figure 5-98 Install the PCA in the cradle
2 1
7. Align the PCA cradle with the bracket.
Figure 5-99 Align the PCA cradle

8. Close two clips to secure the PCA cradle to the bracket.
Figure 5-100 Close two clips
9. Install the support cross member onto the bracket.
Figure 5-101 Install the support cross member

10. Align the SSD card with the PCA connector. Note how the end of the SSD is keyed so that it can be
installed one way only.
Figure 5-102 Align the SSD card
11. Seat the SSD in the PCA connector, and then snap the other end of the SSD on the cross member.
Figure 5-103 Secure the SSD on the cross member

12. Align the bracket assembly with the formatter connector.
Figure 5-104 Align the bracket assembly
13. Press the bracket assembly to firmly seat it in the formatter connector.

5. Install the SSD card with USB

Learn how to install the SSD card with a USB card.

1. Remove the USB PCA from the formatter connector.
Figure 5-107 Remove the USB PCA
2. Install the SSD card on the board.
Figure 5-108 Install the SSD card
Install the SSD card with USB 547

3. Position the PCA cradle on the bracket.
Figure 5-109 Position the PCA cradle
4. Close two clips to secure the PCA cradle to the bracket.
Figure 5-110 Close two clips

5. Insert the board into the PCA connector.
Figure 5-111 Insert the board
6. Secure the board to the bracket (an audible click is heard when it snaps into place).
Figure 5-112 Secure the board to the bracket
Install the SSD card with USB 549

7. Align the bracket assembly with the formatter connector, and then press the bracket assembly to firmly
seat it in the formatter connector.


Installation: Near field communication (NFC) PCA

Learn about removing and replacing the NFC PCA.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the NFC PCA.
1M0Q3A HP JetDirect 3200w BLE/Wireless accessory
3JN69A HP JetDirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless accessory
Required tools
Post service test
Installation: Near field communication (NFC) PCA 551

1. Remove the HIP cover

Follow these steps to remove the HIP cover.
1. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release the tabs on the HIP cover.
Figure 5-116 Release the cover
2. Rotate the cover up and off of the printer to remove it.
Figure 5-117 Remove the cover
2. Install the wireless print server with NFC

Learn how to install the wireless print server with NFC.

1. Connect the USB cable to the print server.
Figure 5-118 Connect the USB cable to the print server
2. Connect the USB cable to the HIP port.
Figure 5-119 Connect the USB cable to the HIP port
Install the wireless print server with NFC 553

3. Install the printer server in the HIP cavity.
Figure 5-120 Install the printer server
Removal and replacement: embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC) (SFP models)

Learn about removing and replacing the embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC).
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the eMMC.
Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an extended
period of time.

B5L32-60002 eMMC 16GB
Required tools
Post service test

remove it.
2. Remove the embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC)

Follow these steps to remove the eMMC.

■ Locate the eMMC component on the formatter, and then pull it straight off of the formatter to remove it.
Figure 5-122 Remove the eMMC (SFP/MFP)

4. Install the eMMC

Follow these steps to install the eMMC.
1. Align the connector on the replacement eMMC (callout 1) with the connector on the formatter (callout 2),
and then push the eMMC onto the formatter to install it.
NOTE: The eMMC can only be installed in one direction on the formatter
Figure 5-123 Install the eMMC

2. Push in on the eMMC to install it in the connector.
Figure 5-124 Install the eMMC (SFP/MFP)
3. Verify that the eMMC is fully seated in the connector.
Figure 5-125 Verify the installation


3. Document feeder / scanner
Learn about document feeder and scanner parts removal and replacement.
Field-replaceable units (FRUs)

Learn about FRU parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Scanner control board (SCB) (MFP models)

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the scanner control board (SCB).
Service level: Intermediate
5851-8961 Scanner control interconnect board (SCIB) (6xxxx Series)
Required tools
Post service test


remove it.
2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover and formatter) removed that
might still be installed on the printer. However, the steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-128 Remove two screws
Remove the rear cover 559

2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-129 Remove the rear cover
3. Remove the rear upper cover (MFP models)

Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.
NOTE: The task below shows the rear upper cover on a 6800zfsw model. The cover on your model might
look different, but the process is the same.
■ Remove one screw, pry the right side away from printer, and then pull the cover in the direction indicated.
4. Remove the document feeder

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1).
TIP: These are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling, rotate the screw counterclockwise to
align it with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn it clockwise to tighten. Do not
overtighten. This will prevent stripping the threads inside the screw hole.

2. Disconnect one flat cable (callout 1), remove one ground screw (callout 2) to release the grounding cable,
and then disconnect the indicated connectors (callout 3) on the scanner control board.
Figure 5-132 Disconnect the flat cable, ground cable, and connectors
1 2 3
3. Tilt the document feeder back until it stops, and then lift it off of the scanner until it stops.
4. Support the document feeder, and then use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release two tabs on the
document feeder hinges.
Figure 5-133 Release two tabs
Remove the document feeder 561

5. Lift the document feeder up to remove it.
NOTE: While removing the document feeder, carefully pass the cables through the cable channel in the
scanner bed.
5. Remove the flatbed scanner assembly

Follow these steps to remove the sub-scanner assembly (SSA).
1. On the SCB, disconnect the cables indicated below.
Figure 5-134 Disconnect SCB connectors
2. Remove four screws.
Figure 5-135 Remove four screws
3. Pull the scan unit up to remove it from the printer.
NOTE: Carefully ensure that the cables do not catch on the cable guides as you lift the assembly.
6. Remove the scanner control board (SCB)

Follow these steps to remove the scanner control board (SCB).

■ On the SCB, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2). Slide the SCB to
the right, and then remove it from the integrated scanner assembly.
Figure 5-136 Disconnect connectors

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable
gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Removal and replacement: White backing (MFP models)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder white backing.

5851-8850 ADF white backing kit (6800/X677 models)
Required tools
Post service test


instructions.
Whole-unit replacement (WUR)

Learn about WUR parts removal and replacement.
Automatic document feeder (WUR)

Learn about automatic document feeder whole-unit replacement.
Removal and replacement: Document feeder (MFP models)

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the document feeder (MFP).
J1H98-60037 ADF WUR (6xxx Series Non-Workflow)
J1H98-60038 ADF WUR (6xxx Series Workflow)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip.
● Small flat-blade screwdriver.
Post service test
Use the document feeder to make a copy to make sure that it is properly functioning.
Whole-unit replacement (WUR) 565

remove it.




Remove the rear upper cover (MFP models) 567

1 2 3

scanner bed.

instructions.
Integrated scanner assembly (WUR)

Learn about integrated scanner assembly (ISA) whole-unit replacement.
Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner assembly (MFP models)

Learn how to remove and replace the sub-scanner assembly (SSA).
Service level: Medium

NOTE: The integrated scanner assembly (ISA) includes the sub-scanner assembly (SSA) and the automatic
document feeder (ADF).
6QN35-67006 Flatbed scanner (6xxx Series)
Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
Post service test
Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

remove it.





1 2 3
scanner bed.
5. Remove the flatbed scanner assembly

Follow these steps to remove the sub-scanner assembly (SSA).
Remove the flatbed scanner assembly 573

1. On the SCB, disconnect the cables indicated below.
Figure 5-151 Disconnect SCB connectors
2. Remove four screws.
Figure 5-152 Remove four screws
3. Pull the scan unit up to remove it from the printer.
NOTE: Carefully ensure that the cables do not catch on the cable guides as you lift the assembly.


instructions.
4. Removal and replacement: Internal parts and assemblies (base

printer)
Learn how to remove and replace the base printer internal parts and assemblies.

Covers, panels, and doors

Learn about covers, panels, and doors removal and replacement.
Removal and replacement: Formatter cover

Learn about removing and replacing the formatter cover.
RM2-4480-000CN Formatter cover assembly(all models)
RM2-4530-000CN Formatter cover assembly(Sub-cover MFP models only)
Required tools
Removal and replacement: Internal parts and assemblies (base printer) 575
Post service test

remove it.


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Front door

Learn about removing and replacing the front door.
RM2-4473-000CN Front door assembly (5700/5800 models)
RM2-4479-000CN Front door assembly (X57945/X654/X677 models)
RM2-4533-000CN Front door assembly (X557/6700/6800 models)
Required tools
Post service test
Make sure that the front door correctly opens and closes.
1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.
Removal and replacement: Front door 577

1. Pull the tray out until it stops.
Figure 5-154 Pull the tray out
2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.
Figure 5-155 Remove the tray
2. Remove the front door

Follow these steps to remove the front door.

2. At the left side of the door, release the link arm (callout 1) from the clip (callout 2) on the front-door
assembly.
Figure 5-156 Release the left link arm
3. At the right side of the door, release the link arm (callout 1) from the clip (callout 2) on the front-door
assembly.
Figure 5-157 Release the right link arm
2 1
Remove the front door 579

4. Remove two screws (callout 1), release the link lever (callout 2) from the front door assembly (callout 3),
and then remove the front door.
Figure 5-158 Remove the door
2
1 1

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Toner cartridge access door (X654/X677 models)

Learn about removing and replacing the toner cartridge access door.

Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an extended
period of time.
RM2-3678-000CN Toner supply door assembly
Required tools
Post service test
Make sure that the toner-cartridge door correctly opens and closes.
1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.
Remove Tray 2 581

1. Pull the tray out until it stops.
Figure 5-159 Pull the tray out
2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.
Figure 5-160 Remove the tray
2. Remove the cartridge access door (X654/X677 models)

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge access door.
1. Open the cartridge door.

2. At the right- and left-side of the door, remove two screws, and then remove the door.

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Rear cover

Learn about removing and replacing the rear cover.

RC5-9168-000CN Cover, rear (all models)
RC5-9409-000CN Cover, rear lower (X57945/X654/X677 models)
Required tools
Post service test

remove it.



instructions.
Removal and replacement: Rear upper cover (MFP models)

Learn about removing and replacing the rear upper cover.
RC6-1305-000CN Cover, rear upper
Required tools
Post service test

remove it.





instructions.
Removal and replacement: Left upper cover (MFP models)

Learn about removing and replacing the left upper cover.
RC5-9204-000CN Cover, left upper
Required tools
Post service test
Removal and replacement: Left upper cover (MFP models) 589

1. Remove the left upper cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.
CAUTION: If the cover is being removed to gain access to the main drive assembly, make sure that the
front door remains open. This keeps the main drive properly aligned.
2. At the left side of the printer, insert the small flat-blade screwdriver into the slot to release one tab
(callout 1).
Figure 5-169 Use a screwdriver to release the tab
3. Toward the front of the printer, release another tab.
Figure 5-170 Release the tab

4. Rotate the cover up to remove it.
Figure 5-171 Remove the left upper cover

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Left cover

Learn about removing and replacing the left cover.

RM2-4535-000CN Left cover assembly
Required tools
Post service test

remove it.

(callout 1).
Remove the left upper cover (MFP models) 593

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.
■ At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the
cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to release it.
Figure 5-176 Remove the left cover
1 2


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Left handle

Learn about removing and replacing the left handle.
RC5-9165-000CN Handle, left
Required tools
Post service test
Removal and replacement: Left handle 595

remove it.

(callout 1).


Remove the left cover 597

1 2
4. Remove the left handle

Follow these steps to remove the left handle.
■ At the left side of the printer, release one tab, and then slide the handle as indicated to release it.
Figure 5-182 Remove the handle


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Front left cover

Learn about removing and replacing the front left cover.
RC5-9198-000CN Cover, front left
Required tools
Post service test
Removal and replacement: Front left cover 599

1. Remove the front left cover
Follow these steps to remove the front left cover.
1. Perform one of the following steps.
● 6700/6800 models: Open the front door.
● X654/X677 models: Open the toner cartridge access door.
2. Pull the top part of the front left cover (callout 1) in the direction indicated, release one tab (callout 2),
and then slide the cover upward to release it.


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Front right cover

Learn about removing and replacing the front right cover.
RC5-9199-000CN Cover, front right
Required tools
Post service test
Removal and replacement: Front right cover 601

1. Remove the front right cover
Follow these steps to remove the front right cover.
● X654/X677 models: Open the right lower door.
3. Release one tab, and then slide the front right cover upward to remove it.
Figure 5-184 Remove the front right cover


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Right door

Learn about removing and replacing the right door.
RM2-3665-000CN Right door (6700/6800/X654/X677)
Required tools
Post service test
1. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.
Removal and replacement: Right door 603

3. 6700/6800 models: Remove the front right cover.
4. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then remove the PCA cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-186 Remove the PCA cover
2
1

5. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable (callout 2) from the cable clamp (callout
3).
Figure 5-187 Disconnect one connector
2
3
6. Release one tab (callout 1), slide the link arm (callout 2) in the direction indicated, and then remove it.
Figure 5-188 Remove the link arm
7. Close the front door a little, and then disconnect the joint that connects the two link arms.
Figure 5-189 Disconnect the link arms
Remove the right door 605

8. Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the link arm (callout 2).
9. Close the front door a little, and then remove the spring (callout 1) from the link arm (callout 2) and from
the shaft (callout 3).
Figure 5-191 Remove the spring
10. Release one tab (callout 1), slide the cable holder (callout 2) in the direction indicate, and then remove it.
Figure 5-192 Remove the cable holder

11. Remove the right door (callout 1) from the shaft (callout 2), and then unhook one spring (callout 3) from
the frame (callout 4).
Figure 5-193 Remove the door from the shaft
2 4
12. Slide the right door (callout 1) in the direction indicated to remove it.


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Right lower door (X654/X677 models)

Learn about removing and replacing the right lower door.
RM3-0004-000CN Right lower door assembly
Required tools
Post service test


2. Remove the right lower door (X654/X677 models)

Follow these steps to remove the right lower door.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the base frame (callout 2).
Figure 5-196 Remove the base frame
Remove the right lower door (X654/X677 models) 609

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the rear inner cover (callout 3)
downward to remove it.
Figure 5-197 Remove the rear inner cover
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right lower door assembly (callout 2) in the direction
indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-198 Remove the right lower door assembly


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Rear lower cover (X654/X677 models)

Learn about removing and replacing the rear lower cover.
RC5-9409-000CN Cover, rear lower
Required tools
Post service test

Removal and replacement: Rear lower cover (X654/X677 models) 611



3. Remove the rear lower cover (X654/X677 models)

Follow these steps to remove the rear lower cover.
Remove the rear lower cover (X654/X677 models) 613

■ Remove one screw (callout 1), slide the rear lower cover (callout 2) in the direction indicated below, and
then remove it.
Figure 5-203 Remove the rear lower cover

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Left lower cover (X654/X677 models)

Learn about removing and replacing the left lower cover.

RC5-9408-000CN Left lower cover
Required tools
Post service test

Remove the front right cover 615





then remove it.
4. Remove the left lower cover (X654/X677 models)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover.
■ Slide the left lower cover in the direction indicated, and then remove it.
Figure 5-209 Remove the left lower cover


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Output bin

Learn about removing and replacing the output bin.
RM2-4471-000CN Face down tray assembly
Required tools
Post service test
Removal and replacement: Output bin 619


packaged in.


(callout 1).

3. Remove the output bin
Follow these steps to remove the output bin.
■ Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the output tray (callout 2) towards the front (SFP models) or
left (MFP models) to remove it.
Figure 5-213 Remove the output bin

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Right handle

Learn about removing and replacing the right handle.

RC5-8516-000CN Handle, right door lower
Required tools
Post service test
1. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

3. 6700/6800 models: Remove the front right cover.
2
1

5. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable (callout 2) from the cable clamp (callout
3).
2
3
6. Release one tab (callout 1), slide the link arm (callout 2) in the direction indicated, and then remove it.
7. Close the front door a little, and then disconnect the joint that connects the two link arms.
Figure 5-218 Disconnect the link arms

8. Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the link arm (callout 2).
9. Close the front door a little, and then remove the spring (callout 1) from the link arm (callout 2) and from
the shaft (callout 3).
Figure 5-220 Remove the spring
10. Release one tab (callout 1), slide the cable holder (callout 2) in the direction indicate, and then remove it.
Figure 5-221 Remove the cable holder

11. Remove the right door (callout 1) from the shaft (callout 2), and then unhook one spring (callout 3) from
the frame (callout 4).
Figure 5-222 Remove the door from the shaft
2 4
12. Slide the right door (callout 1) in the direction indicated to remove it.
2. Remove the right handle

Follow these steps to remove the right handle.
Remove the right handle 627

■ Remove two screws (callout 1)., release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the right handle (callout 3) in
the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-224 Remove the handle
3 2

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Top cover (SFP models)

Learn about removing and replacing the top cover.

RM2-4517-000CN Top cover assembly
Required tools
Post service test

remove it.

packaged in.


1 2


6. Remove the top cover (SFP models)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover.
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable (callout 2) from the cable guide (callout
3).
Figure 5-230 Disconnect the connector

2. Remove two screws.
3. Release one tab (callout 1), release two USB cables (callout 2) and another cable (callout 3) from the
cable clamp (callout 4).
Figure 5-232 Release one tab
1
3
4. Remove two screws (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove the top cover (callout 3).
1 3
Remove the top cover (SFP models) 633

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Top cover (MFP models)

Learn about removing and replacing the top cover.
RC5-9172-000CN Cover, top assembly
Required tools

Post service test

(callout 1).


3. Remove the top cover (MFP models)


■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the top cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-238 Remove the top cover

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Top front cover (MFP models)

Learn about removing and replacing the top front cover.

RM2-4518-000CN Top front cover assembly
Required tools
Post service test

remove it.

(callout 1).




1 2

6. Remove the top front cover (MFP models)

Follow these steps to remove the top front cover.
Remove the top cover (MFP models) 641

3).
Figure 5-246 Disconnect one connector and release the cable
3. Remove one screw (callout 1), hold up the top front cover (callout 2), and then remove it.
Figure 5-248 Remove the top front cover

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Hardware Integration Pocket (HIP) cover

Learn about removing and replacing the Hardware Integration Pocket (HIP) cover.
RC4-0213-000CN Cover, Hardware integration pocket (HIP)
Required tools

Post service test
1. Remove the HIP cover

Follow these steps to remove the HIP cover.
1. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release the tabs on the HIP cover.
Figure 5-249 Release the cover
2. Rotate the cover up and off of the printer to remove it.


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Control panel (SFP models)

Learn about removing and replacing the control panel.
6QN28-67001 Control panel 10.9 cm (4.3 in)
Required tools
Post service test
Removal and replacement: Control panel (SFP models) 645

1. Remove the control panel (SFP)

1. Tilt the control panel up.
Figure 5-251 Remove one screw
2. Pull up the control panel cover. A small flat blade screwdriver might be helpful with this.
Figure 5-252 Remove the control panel cover

3. Remove one screw.
4. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to pry and hold one tab (callout 1), push the assembly (callout 2) to the
rear of the printer to release another tab (callout 3), and then lift the control panel up (callout 4), slightly
and gently.
CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt to completely remove the
control panel.
Figure 5-254 Release the tabs
4
2
1
Remove the control panel (SFP) 647

5. Disconnect one FFC, and then remove the control panel.
Figure 5-255 Remove the control panel

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Control panel (MFP models)

Learn about removing and replacing the control panel.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the control panel.

6QN37-67001 Control panel 23.3 cm (8 in)
6QN35-67003 Control panel 25.6 cm (10.1 in)
Required tools
Post service test
1. Remove the control panel (MFP)

■ Pull the control panel out and tilt it up, and then remove the two thumbscrews on the control panel arm.
Remove the control panel by pulling it away from the printer.
Figure 5-256 Remove two thumbscrews

Remove the control panel (MFP) 649

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Secondary transfer assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the secondary transfer assembly.
RM2-3586-000CN Secondary transfer assembly (5700/6700)
RM2-3628-000CN Secondary transfer assembly (5800/6800/X557/X57945)
RM2-3629-000CN Secondary transfer assembly (X654/X677)
Required tools

Post service test
1. Remove the secondary transfer assembly

Follow these steps to remove the secondary transfer assembly.
2
1
3).
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalled, make sure the cable is correctly routed through the cable guide.
Remove the secondary transfer assembly 651

Figure 5-259 Release the cable
● X654/6800/X677 models: Disconnect the J315 formatter connector.
● 6700 models: Disconnect the J305 formatter connector.
Figure 5-260 Disconnect a formatter connector

X654/MFP 6800/MFP X677 6700/6701
J311 J311
J312 J312
J313 J313
J301 J301
J314 J314
J315 J305
J316 J316
J302 J302
J317 J317
5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up the registration assembly (callout 2) off the secondary
transfer assembly (callout 3)
1
2

6. Close the secondary transfer assembly until it is only slightly open. Slide the assembly (callout 1) in
the direction indicated below, and then dislodge the hinge pin (callout 2) from the holder to remove the
assembly.
Reinstallation tip: Before removing the assembly, take note of where the assembly hinge pins fit into
the holes provided in the printer.
Figure 5-262 Remove the secondary transfer assembly
Reinstallation tip: On the assembly right side, make sure that the wire is nested in the plastic sleeve.
Slide the wire sleeve into its place, depressing the spring, and then twist the left side of the assembly
into place and allow the spring pressure to nest the hinge pin in its hole.


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Registration density sensor assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the registration density sensor assembly.
RM2-4492-000CN Density detect assembly
Required tools
Post service test
1. Remove the ITB

Follow these steps to remove the ITB.

2. Hold the two side levers and pull out the ITB assembly.
CAUTION: Do not touch the gray plastic belt. Skin oils and fingerprints on the belt can cause print-
quality problems.
Figure 5-264 Release the ITB


2
1
3).


X654/MFP 6800/MFP X677 6700/6701
J311 J311
J312 J312
J313 J313
J301 J301
J314 J314
J315 J305
J316 J316
J302 J302
J317 J317
1
2

assembly.
3. Remove the registration density sensor

Follow these steps to remove the registration density sensor.
1. Disconnect one connector (J314; callout 1), and then release the cable (callout 2) from the cable guides
(callout 3).

3

2. Remove two screws (callout 1). Pull out the registration density sensor assembly (callout 2) slightly
towards you, and then move the registration density sensor assembly in the direction indicated below.
Carefully pull out the right side first to remove the registration density sensor assembly.
NOTE: The shaft on the left side of the assembly is long and can break. Make sure to pivot the right side
of the assembly out first to ensure that the shaft does not break. When installing a registration density
sensor assembly, insert the shaft on the left side first, and then pivot the right side into the printer.
Figure 5-272 Release the assembly

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Registration assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the registration assembly.
RM2-4458-000CN Registration assembly
Required tools
Post service test


2
1
3).


X654/MFP 6800/MFP X677 6700/6701
J311 J311
J312 J312
J313 J313
J301 J301
J314 J314
J315 J305
J316 J316
J302 J302
J317 J317
1
2

assembly.
2. Remove the registration assembly

Follow these steps to remove the registration assembly.
1. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1). and then release the cable (callout 2) from the cable guide
(callout 3).
Figure 5-279 Release the connectors
1
2
Remove the registration assembly 663

2. Release two bosses (callout 1), and then release the link arm (callout 2) from the door.
Figure 5-280 Release the link arm
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the registration assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-281 Remove the registration assembly


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Paper pickup assembly (6700/6800 models)

Learn about removing and replacing the paper pickup assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the paper pickup assembly.
RM2-3508-000CN Paper pickup assembly (6700/6800 models)
Required tools
Post service test

Removal and replacement: Paper pickup assembly (6700/6800 models) 665

2
1
3).


X654/MFP 6800/MFP X677 6700/6701
J311 J311
J312 J312
J313 J313
J301 J301
J314 J314
J315 J305
J316 J316
J302 J302
J317 J317
1
2

assembly.
2. Remove the registration density sensor

Follow these steps to remove the registration density sensor.
1. Disconnect one connector (J314; callout 1), and then release the cable (callout 2) from the cable guides
(callout 3).

3

2. Remove two screws (callout 1). Pull out the registration density sensor assembly (callout 2) slightly
towards you, and then move the registration density sensor assembly in the direction indicated below.
Carefully pull out the right side first to remove the registration density sensor assembly.
NOTE: The shaft on the left side of the assembly is long and can break. Make sure to pivot the right side
of the assembly out first to ensure that the shaft does not break. When installing a registration density
sensor assembly, insert the shaft on the left side first, and then pivot the right side into the printer.
Figure 5-289 Release the assembly
3. Remove the paper pickup assembly (6700/6800 models)

Follow these steps to remove the paper pickup assembly.
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release the cable (callout 2) from the cable guide (callout 3),
remove one screw (callout 4), and then remove the pickup assembly (callout 5).
Figure 5-290 Remove the pickup assembly
4
3 1
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling, there are two holes. The screw goes in the upper hole where it
comes into contact with the grounding wire.
Remove the paper pickup assembly (6700/6800 models) 669

2. Remove the gear (callout 1) from the assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-291 Remove the gear

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Paper pickup assembly (X654/X677 models)

Learn about removing and replacing the paper pickup assembly.

RM2-3509-000CN Paper pickup assembly (X654/X677 models)
Required tools
Post service test

1. Open the toner cartridge access door.
2. Open the right lower door.


3. Remove the paper pickup assembly (X654/X677 models)

1. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the pickup assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-296 Remove the pickup assembly
1 2
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling, there are two holes. The screw goes in the upper hole where it
comes into contact with the grounding wire.
Remove the paper pickup assembly (X654/X677 models) 673

2. Remove the gear (callout 1) from the pickup assembly (callout 2).
2 1

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Delivery assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the delivery assembly.

RM2-3555-000CN Paper delivery assembly (6700/X654)
RM2-3556-000CN Paper delivery assembly (6800/X677)
Required tools
Post service test
1. Remove the fuser

the fuser.
Remove the fuser 675

2. Remove the delivery assembly

Follow these steps to remove the delivery assembly.
1. Pull the lever (callout 1) at the back of the cable cover (callout 2) to release one tab (callout 3), and then
remove the cable cover.
Figure 5-300 Remove the cable cover
2 3

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
3. Remove three screws (callout 1), remove one binding screw (callout 2), and then pull out the delivery
assembly (callout 3) away from the printer.
Figure 5-302 Remove the delivery assembly
1
2
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling, lift the flag (callout 1) to prevent the flag from entering the duct
(callout 2)
Figure 5-303 Lift the flag
1 2
Remove the delivery assembly 677

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Laser scanner assembly

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the laser scanner assembly.
RM2-3822-000CN Laser scanner assembly (5700, 55745, 5800, 57945)
RM2-3787-000CN Laser scanner assembly (6700, 654, 6800, 677)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip
Make sure that all of the connectors on the HVPS are fully seated.
Make sure that all of the connectors on the LVPS are fully seated.
Make sure that all of the connectors on the formatter are fully seated.
Make sure that the formatter cover is fully seated.
Post service test

remove it.


(callout 1).

1 2
4. Remove the laser scanner assembly

Follow these steps to remove the laser scanner assembly.
1. Unhook the spring (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), release the cable (callout 3) from the
laser scanner assembly (callout 4), and then pull out the laser scanner assembly slightly.
Figure 5-309 Unhook the spring
3
2
1 4

2. Disconnect the FFC (callout 1), and then pull the laser scanner assembly (callout 2) out of the printer.
Figure 5-310 Remove the assembly
1 2

instructions.
Removal and replacement: DC controller (DCC)

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the DC controller (DCC).

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the formatter, DC controller, and eMMC PCA or hard-disk drive simultaneously
during a single printer servicing. Doing so might cause the printer to become unstable or inoperable.
RM3-7753-000CN DC controller PCA (6700)
RM3-7754-000CN DC controller PCA (6800)
RM3-7757-000CN DC controller PCA (X654)
RM3-7758-000CN DC controller PCA (X677)
Required tools
Make sure that all of the connectors on the DC controller are fully seated.
Make sure that the formatter cover is fully seated, and that the thumbscrews are finger tight after replacing it.
Post service test

remove it.



3. Remove the DC controller

Follow these steps to remove the DC controller.
■ Disconnect all of the connectors on the DC controller, remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the
DC controller (callout 2).
IMPORTANT: Some of the flat flexible cable (FFC) connectors use hinged retainers to secure them to the
DC controller. The hinged retainers must be opened to release the FFCs.
Figure 5-314 Remove the DC controller

Remove the DC controller 685

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Formatter

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the formatter.
CAUTION: Under NO circumstances should a formatter from a different printer be installed during the repair
or troubleshooting processes. The formatter stores important data specific to the model of printer it is
installed in and is not deigned to be swapped or re-purposed in any way. Return a used formatter to HP.
change and might make a product unusable.
● 33.02.01 Used board/Disk installed errors.
If a used formatter is installed and causes this issue, the partner must cover the costs of the repair in the
form of a product replacement. There is no method in the field to recover a printer where a used formatter is
installed.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace the formatter, DC controller, and hard-disk drive simultaneously during a single
printer servicing. Doing so might cause the printer to become unstable or inoperable.

6QN27-67002 Formatter (57xx / X55xxx)
6QN27-67004 Formatter (57xx / X55xxx) (China/India)
Required tools
Post service test

remove it.

2. Remove the formatter

Follow these steps to remove the formatter.
1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.
2. Remove the fax PCA (callout 1) and the hard disk drive (HDD) (callout 2), and then remove seven screws
(callout 3) to remove the formatter.
Figure 5-316 Remove the formatter


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Formatter case assembly (SFP models)

Learn about removing and replacing the formatter case assembly for SFP models.
RM2-4520-000CN Formatter case assembly (SFP)
Required tools
Post service test
Removal and replacement: Formatter case assembly (SFP models) 689

remove it.



4. Remove the formatter case (SFP models)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter case.
1. Disconnect all the connectors on the DC controller PCA.
2. Remove the cable clamp (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then slide the DC controller stay
(callout 3) out to remove it.
NOTE: Be careful not to drop any of the screws into the low-voltage power supply assembly below the
DC controller.
Remove the formatter case (SFP models) 691

Figure 5-321 Remove the DC controller stay
3
1
3. Unhook one spring (callout 1), release the cable (callout 2) from the cable clamp (callout 3), remove four
screws (callout 4), and then remove the formatter case (callout 5).
Figure 5-322 Remove the formatter case
2
4
3 5
4. For a replacement formatter case only: Release the cable (callout 1) from the cable guide (callout 2),
release one tab (callout 3), and then remove the memory PCA (callout 4) from the formatter case (callout
5).
NOTE: Install the PCA on the replacement formatter case.

Figure 5-323 Remove the memory PCA
1
3
2
4

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Formatter case assembly (MFP) models

Learn about removing and replacing the formatter case assembly for MFP models.

RM2-4521-000CN Formatter case assembly (MFP)
Required tools
Post service test

remove it.


Remove the formatter 695

4. Remove the formatter case (MFP models)

1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), remove seven screws (callout 2), and then remove the formatter case
(callout 3).
2
2

5).

3 1

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Feed drive assembly (X654/X677 models)

Learn about removing and replacing the feed drive assembly.

RM2-3702-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly (X57945)
RM2-3683-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly (X654/X677)
Required tools
Post service test

remove it.



3. Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)

Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout 2).
NOTE: Unhook the spring from the formatter case, not the low-voltage power supply. The spring
should remain attached to the LVPS.
Figure 5-333 Unhook the spring and disconnect two connectors

1
2. Remove the FFC (callout 1), and then disconnect five connectors (callout 2).
NOTE: MFP only: Disconnect one additional connector (callout 3).

Figure 5-334 Disconnect the LVPS connectors
2 1
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the low-voltage power supply assembly (callout 2).
NOTE: The black ducting in the lower right corner can stick during the removal process.
Replacement LVPS only: Remove the spring (callout 3), and then install it on the replacement LVPS.
Figure 5-335 Remove the LVPS
2 3
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the LVPS, make sure that the spring (callout 1) is attached to both
the formatter case (callout 2) and the LVPS (callout 3).
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 701

Figure 5-336 Reinstalling the LVPS
4. Remove the feed drive assembly (X654/X677 models)

Follow these steps to remove the feed drive assembly.
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).
Figure 5-337 Disconnect connector, remove 3 screws
2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the feed drive assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-338 Remove the feed drive assembly

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Pickup drive assembly (6700/6800 models)

Learn about removing and replacing the pickup drive assembly.
RM2-3681-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly (5700/X557/5800)
RM2-3682-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly (6700/6800)
Required tools

Post service test

remove it.




1
2 1

2 3
4. Remove the pickup drive assembly (6700/6800 models)

Follow these steps to remove the pickup drive assembly.
1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).
Figure 5-346 Disconnect two connectors, remove three screws

1
2
2
Remove the pickup drive assembly (6700/6800 models) 707

2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the pickup drive assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-347 Remove the pickup drive assembly
Reinstallation tip: The indicated gears (callout 1), clutch (callout 2), shaft (callout 3), and bushing
(callout 4) are not fixed to the assembly plate. Ensure that these components do not fall apart when
installing or removing the paper pickup drive assembly.
Figure 5-348 Do not lose unfastened components
1
2


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Pickup drive assembly (X654/X677 models)

Learn about removing and replacing the pickup drive assembly.
RM2-3683-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly (X654/X677)
RM2-3702-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly (X57945)
Required tools
Removal and replacement: Pickup drive assembly (X654/X677 models) 709

Post service test





then remove it.
4. Remove the pickup drive assembly (X654/X677 models)

1. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).
Figure 5-354 Disconnect three connectors

2. Release the cable (callout 1) from the auto close assembly (callout 2) and the lifter drive assembly
(callout 3).
3 2
3. Remove the cable clamp (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then remove three screws
(callout 3).
Figure 5-356 Remove the cable clamp
1
3
3
Figure 5-357 Remove the pickup drive assembly
2 1
Remove the pickup drive assembly (X654/X677 models) 713

1
2


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Toner supply motor assembly (X654/X677 models)

Learn about removing and replacing the toner supply motor assembly.
RM2-3612-000CN Toner supply drive motor assembly (X654/X677 models)
Required tools
Post service test

Removal and replacement: Toner supply motor assembly (X654/X677 models) 715




then remove it.
4. Remove the toner supply motor assembly (X654/X677 models)

Follow these steps to remove the toner supply motor assembly.
■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then remove the toner supply
motor assembly (callout 3).
1
3
2


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly (6700/6800 models)

Learn about removing and replacing the lifter drive assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the lifter drive assembly.
RM2-3493-000CN Lifter drive assembly (5700/5800)
RM2-3500-000CN Lifter drive assembly (X557/6700/6800)
Required tools
Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly (6700/6800 models) 719

Post service test

remove it.




1

2 1
2 3

4. Remove the lifter drive assembly (6700/6800 models)

Follow these steps to remove the lifter drive assembly.
■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the lifter drive
assembly (callout 3).
2 1

Remove the lifter drive assembly (6700/6800 models) 723

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly (X654/X677 models)

Learn about removing and replacing the lifter drive assembly.
RM2-3501-000CN Lifter drive assembly (X57945/X654/X677)
Required tools
Post service test






then remove it.
4. Remove the lifter drive assembly (X654/X677 models)

1. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1).
Figure 5-378 Disconnect four connectors
Remove the lifter drive assembly (X654/X677 models) 727

2. Release the cable (callout 1) from the auto close assembly (callout 2) and from the lifter drive assembly
(callout 3).

33 21
12
3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the lifter drive assembly (callout 2).


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Auto close assembly (6700/6800 models)

Learn about removing and replacing the auto close assembly.
RM2-3559-000CN Auto close assembly
Required tools
Post service test

remove it.
Removal and replacement: Auto close assembly (6700/6800 models) 729





1

2 1
2 3

4. Remove the auto close assembly (6700/6800 models)

Follow these steps to remove the auto close assembly.
■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), release the cables (callout 3)
from the auto close assembly (callout 4), remove two screws (callout 5), remove the auto close assembly,
and then remove the drawer connector (callout 6) from the auto close assembly.
Figure 5-388 Remove the auto close assembly
2 1
5 5
3 4 6

Remove the auto close assembly (6700/6800 models) 733

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Auto close assembly (X654/X677 models)

Learn about removing and replacing the auto close assembly.
RM2-3559-000CN Auto close assembly
Required tools
Post service test






then remove it.
4. Remove the auto close assembly (X654/X677 models)

1. Disconnect six connectors (callout 1).
Figure 5-394 Disconnect six connectors
Remove the auto close assembly (X654/X677 models) 737

2. Release the cables (callout 1) from the auto close assembly (callout 2).
3. Remove two screws (callout 1), remove the auto close assembly (callout 2), and then remove the drawer
connector (callout 3) from the auto close assembly.
2 3


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 media size detect assembly (6700/6800 models)
Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 2 media size detect assembly.
RM2-3585-000CN Size detect assembly (6700/6800)
RM2-3634-000CN Size detect assembly (5700/X557)
RM2-3614-000CN Size detect assembly (5800)
Required tools
Post service test

Removal and replacement: Tray 2 media size detect assembly (6700/6800 models) 739
remove it.




1

2 1
2 3

4. Remove the auto close assembly (6700/6800 models)

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), release the cables (callout 3)
from the auto close assembly (callout 4), remove two screws (callout 5), remove the auto close assembly,
and then remove the drawer connector (callout 6) from the auto close assembly.
2 1
5 5
3 4 6
5. Remove the Tray 2 media size detect assembly (6700/6800 models)

Follow these steps to remove the Tray 2 media size detect assembly.
Remove the auto close assembly (6700/6800 models) 743

■ Pull out the Tray 2 media size detect assembly (callout 1) toward you.
Figure 5-405 Remove the Tray 2 media size detect assembly

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 media size detect assembly (X654/X677 models)
Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 2 media size detect assembly.

RM2-3614-000CN Size detect assembly (X654/X677 models)
Required tools
Post service test




then remove it.
4. Remove the auto close assembly (X654/X677 models)


2 3

5. Remove the Tray 2 media size detect assembly (X654/X677 models)
Follow these steps to remove the Tray 2 media size detect assembly.
■ Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull out the Tray 2 media size detect assembly (callout 2) toward you.
Figure 5-414 Remove the Tray 2 media size detect assembly

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Fuser drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the fuser drive assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the fuser drive assembly.
Remove the Tray 2 media size detect assembly (X654/X677 models) 749
RM2-4485-000CN Fixing drive assembly (5700/X577/5800/X57945)
RM2-4487-000CN Fixing drive assembly (6700/X654/6800/X677)
Required tools
Post service test
1. Remove the fuser

the fuser.


remove it.





1

2 1
2 3

5. Remove the fuser drive assembly

Follow these steps to remove the fuser drive assembly.
1. Disconnect all the connectors on the DC controller PCA, remove the cable clamp (callout 1), remove three
screws (callout 2), slide the DC controller stay (callout 3) out to remove it.
Remove the fuser drive assembly 755

2. Pull the lever (callout 1) of the cable cover (callout 2), release one tab (callout 3), and then remove the
cable cover.
4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove one screw (callout 2), release the cable (callout 3) from the
cable guide (callout 4), release one tab (callout 5), and then slide the connector cover (callout 6) upward
to remove it.
Figure 5-427 Remove the connector cover

5
6
2
4 1

5. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the fuser drive
2 3


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Main-drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the main drive assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the main drive assembly.
RM2-3506-000CN Main drive assembly (5700/5800)
RM2-3504-000CN Main drive assembly (X557/6700/6800)
RM2-3497-000CN Main drive assembly (X57945/X654/X677)
Required tools
Post service test
1. Remove the fuser

the fuser.


remove it.


(callout 1).





1
2 1

2 3



DC controller.
3
1

2
4
3 5
5).
1
3
2
4


(callout 3).
2
2
5).

3 1
Remove the formatter case (MFP models) 767

9. Remove the drive PCA
Follow these steps to remove the drive PCA.
screws (callout 2), and then slide the DC controller stay (callout 3) out to remove it.
2. Disconnect all the connectors on the drive PCA, remove one screw (callout 1), release two tabs (callout
2), and then remove the drive PCA (callout 3).
IMPORTANT: Some of these wires are very tightly connected. Take care when disconnecting them.
Figure 5-448 Remove the drive PCA
33
22
11
10. Remove the main-drive assembly

Follow these steps to remove the main-drive assembly.
NOTE: Make sure that the front door is closed when performing this procedure.

cable cover.
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling, align the pegs in the holes, and then set the cover against the
frame and rotate it up and into position.
Remove the main-drive assembly 769

3. Remove one screw (callout 1), release the cable (callout 2) from the cable guide (callout 3), release one
tab (callout 4), and then slide the connector cover (callout 5) upward to remove it.
5
1
3
2
4. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the link cover (callout 2) in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-452 Remove the link cover
5. Close the right door a little, and then release the link arm (callout 1) from the coupling (callout 2).
NOTE: This is a keyed connection. When disconnecting, make sure to line up the peg with the socket so
that you do not strip the peg.
Reinstallation tip: If the black link arm disconnects from the white link arm below it, it might be helpful
for reinstallation purposes to reattach the two link arms.

6. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release the cable (callout 2) from the fan cover (callout 3), release
four tabs (callout 4), and then remove the fan cover.
Figure 5-454 Remove the fan cover
1 2
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling this cover, seat the right side pegs into the chassis slots first.
7. Release the cables (callout 1) and the remove FFC (callout 2) from the cable guide (callout 3).
Figure 5-455 Release the cables

3

8. Remove seven screws (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the main drive assembly
(callout 3).
NOTE: All seven screws are on sheet metal tabs on the assembly.
NOTE: Ensure that the screws do not fall into the assembly.
Figure 5-456 Remove the main drive assembly
9. For reinstallation of the main drive, keep the following tips in mind.
● Reinstallation tip: Be sure to assemble main drive assembly with the front door assembly closed.
● Reinstallation tip: There are four gears on the main drive assembly that need to be lined up
correctly in order to successfully reinstall the main drive. For each gear, the triangle (callout 1) on the
inside of the gear should line up with the triangle (callout 2) stamped on the sheet metal chassis.
Also, the hole (callout 3) in the gear should line up with a hole in the chassis.

Figure 5-457 Correct gear alignment
● Reinstallation tip: In order to realign the four gears, you must remove the motor that locks the
gear auger above the four gears. To do this, disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two
screws (callout 2), and then remove the motor (callout 3).
Figure 5-458 Remove the motor
● Reinstallation tip: To realign the four gears, turn the gear (callout 1) in the direction indicated. By
turning that gear, the four gears (callout 2) that need to be in phase turn in tandem. Turn the four
gears to the correct phase position.

Figure 5-459 Align the gears
● NOTE: If you are installing a new main drive assembly, you do not need to perform the alignment
tasks. New assemblies are prealigned.


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Interlock assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the interlock assembly.
RM2-3675-000CN Interlock assembly (5700/X557/5800/X57945)
RM2-3676-000CN Interlock assembly (6700/X654/6800/X677)
Required tools
Post service test
1. Remove the fuser

the fuser.
Removal and replacement: Interlock assembly 775


remove it.


(callout 1).



1 2




1

2 1
2 3



DC controller.

3
1
2
4
3 5
5).

1
3
2
4

(callout 3).
2
2

5).

3 1

Remove the drive PCA 785

33
22
11

cable cover.

5
1
3
2

1 2


3
(callout 3).


12. Remove the interlock assembly

Follow these steps to remove the interlock assembly.
Remove the interlock assembly 791

■ At the right side of the printer, release one boss (callout 1), and then slide the interlock assembly (callout
2) in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-492 Remove the interlock assembly


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Waste toner duct assembly (X654/X677 models)

Learn about removing and replacing the waste toner duct assembly.
RM2-3590-000CN Waste toner duct assembly (X654/X677 models)
Required tools
Post service test
1. Remove the fuser

the fuser.
Removal and replacement: Waste toner duct assembly (X654/X677 models) 793

remove it.


(callout 1).



1 2




1

2 1
2 3



DC controller.

3
1
2
4
3 5
5).

1
3
2
4

(callout 3).
2
2

5).

3 1

Remove the drive PCA 803

33
22
11

cable cover.

5
1
3
2

1 2


3
(callout 3).


12. Remove the waste toner duct assembly (X654/X677 models)

Follow these steps to remove the waste toner duct assembly.
■ Release one tab (callout 1), slide the waste toner duct assembly (callout 2) in the direction indicated, and
then pull the waste toner duct assembly away from the printer.
Figure 5-525 Remove the waste toner duct assembly
Remove the waste toner duct assembly (X654/X677 models) 809

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Waste toner duct assembly (6700/6800 models)

Learn about removing and replacing the waste toner duct assembly.
RM2-3517-000CN Waste toner duct assembly (5700/5800)
RM2-3518-000CN Waste toner duct assembly (X557/6700/6800)
Required tools

Post service test

packaged in.

remove it.


(callout 1).


Remove the output bin 813


1 2
6. Remove the waste toner duct assembly (6700/6800 models)

Follow these steps to remove the waste toner duct assembly.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), pull the upper part of the contact holder (callout 2) forward, slide the contact
holder in the direction indicated, and then rotate the contact holder.
Figure 5-532 Slide the contact holder
2
1
2. Slide the contact holder (callout 1) in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-533 Remove the contact holder
3. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then slide the support plate (callout 2) in the direction indicated to
remove it.
Figure 5-534 Remove the support plate
Remove the waste toner duct assembly (6700/6800 models) 815

3).
2 1
5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the waste toner duct assembly (callout 2) upward to remove it.
Figure 5-536 Remove the waste toner duct assembly
2 1


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (6700/6800 models)

Learn about removing and replacing the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly.
RM2-3565-000CN Pre-exposure PCA holder (6700/6800 models)
Required tools
Post service test

Removal and replacement: Pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (6700/6800 models) 817
packaged in.
2. Remove the fuser

the fuser.


remove it.



(callout 1).



1 2

assembly.
assembly.

2 1
2
1 1



3).

1
3
1 3


3).

12. Remove the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (6700/6800 models)

Follow these steps to remove the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly.
Remove the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (6700/6800 models) 827

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-557 Remove three screws
2. Release eight tabs (callout 1).
Figure 5-558 Release eight tabs
3. Release five tabs (callout 1), and then remove the front inner cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-559 Remove the front inner cover

2

4. Release three tabs (callout 1), hold up the high-voltage PCA cover (callout 2), and then disconnect one
connector (callout 3).
Figure 5-560 Release three tabs
5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-561 Remove the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly
Remove the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (6700/6800 models) 829

6. Remove the link lever (callout 1) from the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-562 Remove the link lever

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (X654/X677 models)

Learn about removing and replacing the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly.

RM2-3673-000CN Pre-exposure PCA holder (X654/X677 models)
Required tools
Post service test


packaged in.
2. Remove the fuser

the fuser.


remove it.



(callout 1).



1 2

assembly.
assembly.

2 1
2
1 1



3).

1
3
1 3


3).

12. Remove the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (X654/X677 models)

Follow these steps to remove the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly.
Figure 5-583 Open the toner supply door
Remove the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (X654/X677 models) 841

3. Release eight tabs (callout 1).
Figure 5-585 Release eight tabs
4. Release five tabs (callout 1), and then remove the front inner cover (callout 2).

2

5. Release three tabs (callout 1), hold up the high-voltage PCA cover (callout 2), and then disconnect two
connectors (callout 3).
6. Release four tabs (callout 1), and then slide the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (callout 2) upward.
Figure 5-588 Release four tabs
1 1
Remove the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (X654/X677 models) 843

7. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (callout 2) in the
Figure 5-589 Remove the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly
8. Remove the link arm (callout 1) and two link levers (callout 2) from the pre-exposure PCA holder
Figure 5-590 Remove the link arm and two link levers


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Toner supply drive assembly (X654/X677 models)

Learn about removing and replacing the toner supply drive assembly.
RM2-3607-000CN Toner supply drive assembly
Required tools
Post service test
1. Remove the toner supply drive assembly (X654/X677 models)

Follow these steps to remove the toner supply drive assembly.
Removal and replacement: Toner supply drive assembly (X654/X677 models) 845
Since the disassembly procedures of the following four toner supply drive assemblies are similar, the
disassembly procedure of the 1st toner supply drive assembly (callout 1) is shown below as an example.
Figure 5-591 Toner supply drive assemblies
1 2 3 4
● First toner supply drive assembly (callout 1)
● Second toner supply drive assembly (callout 2)
● Third toner supply drive assembly (callout 3)
● Fourth toner supply drive assembly (callout 4)
2. Remove the front left cover.

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the cassette rail assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-594 Remove the cassette rail assembly
5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the toner cartridge rail assembly (callout 2) towards the front
to remove it.
Figure 5-595 Remove the toner cartridge rail assembly
Remove the toner supply drive assembly (X654/X677 models) 847

6. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove one screw (callout 2), slide the toner supply drive
assembly (callout 3) towards the front, and then slide the toner supply drive assembly downward to
remove it.
Figure 5-596 Remove the toner supply drive assembly
7. For reinstallation of the toner supply drive assembly, keep the following tips in mind.
● Reinstallation tip: Since a toner supply drive assembly can be installed in another station, be
careful not to mix. The exception is assemblies 2 and 4, which are the same.
● Reinstallation tip: On the first toner supply drive assembly, there are no gears (callout 1) and no
coupling (callout 2).
Figure 5-597 First toner supply drive assembly

1
● Reinstallation tip: On the second and fourth toner supply drive assemblies, there are 3 gears
(callout 1) and no coupling (callout 2).

Figure 5-598 Second and fourth toner supply drive assemblies
● Reinstallation tip: On the third toner supply drive assembly, there are three gears (callout 1) and a
Figure 5-599 Third toner supply drive assembly

1


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Toner supply assembly (X654/X677 models)

Learn about removing and replacing the toner supply assembly.
RM3-0846-000CN HP Toner supply service kit
Required tools
Post service test
1. Remove the toner supply assembly (X654/X677 models)

Follow these steps to remove the toner supply assembly.
NOTE: When replacing the toner supply assembly, always replace the toner supply buffer assembly/
intermediate pipe at the same time.
Since the disassembly procedures of the following four toner supply assemblies are similar, the disassembly
procedure of the first toner supply assembly (callout 1) is shown below as an example.

Figure 5-600 Toner supply assemblies
1 2 3 4
● First toner supply assembly (callout 1)
● Second toner supply assembly (callout 2)
● Third toner supply assembly (callout 3)
● Fourth toner supply assembly (callout 4)
Figure 5-601 Open the front door
Remove the toner supply assembly (X654/X677 models) 851

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), hold the handle (callout 2), and then release one tab (callout 3). Rotate
the toner supply assembly (callout 4) in the direction indicated, and then slide the assembly upward to
remove it.

3
1 2

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Toner supply buffer assembly/intermediate pipe (X654/X677 models)
Learn about removing and replacing the toner supply buffer assembly/intermediate pipe.

RM3-0846-000CN HP Toner supply service kit
Required tools
Post service test
1. Remove the toner supply assembly (X654/X677 models)

Follow these steps to remove the toner supply assembly.
NOTE: When replacing the toner supply assembly, always replace the toner supply buffer assembly/
intermediate pipe at the same time.
Since the disassembly procedures of the following four toner supply assemblies are similar, the disassembly
procedure of the first toner supply assembly (callout 1) is shown below as an example.
Figure 5-603 Toner supply assemblies
1 2 3 4
● First toner supply assembly (callout 1)
Remove the toner supply assembly (X654/X677 models) 853

● Second toner supply assembly (callout 2)
● Third toner supply assembly (callout 3)
● Fourth toner supply assembly (callout 4)
Figure 5-604 Open the front door
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), hold the handle (callout 2), and then release one tab (callout 3). Rotate
the toner supply assembly (callout 4) in the direction indicated, and then slide the assembly upward to
remove it.

3
1 2
2. Remove the toner supply drive assembly (X654/X677 models)

Follow these steps to remove the toner supply drive assembly.
Since the disassembly procedures of the following four toner supply drive assemblies are similar, the
disassembly procedure of the 1st toner supply drive assembly (callout 1) is shown below as an example.

Figure 5-606 Toner supply drive assemblies
1 2 3 4
● First toner supply drive assembly (callout 1)
● Second toner supply drive assembly (callout 2)
● Third toner supply drive assembly (callout 3)
● Fourth toner supply drive assembly (callout 4)
2. Remove the front left cover.

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the cassette rail assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-609 Remove the cassette rail assembly
5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the toner cartridge rail assembly (callout 2) towards the front
to remove it.
Figure 5-610 Remove the toner cartridge rail assembly
6. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove one screw (callout 2), slide the toner supply drive
assembly (callout 3) towards the front, and then slide the toner supply drive assembly downward to
remove it.
Figure 5-611 Remove the toner supply drive assembly

7. For reinstallation of the toner supply drive assembly, keep the following tips in mind.
● Reinstallation tip: Since a toner supply drive assembly can be installed in another station, be
careful not to mix. The exception is assemblies 2 and 4, which are the same.
● Reinstallation tip: On the first toner supply drive assembly, there are no gears (callout 1) and no
Figure 5-612 First toner supply drive assembly

1
● Reinstallation tip: On the second and fourth toner supply drive assemblies, there are 3 gears
(callout 1) and no coupling (callout 2).
Figure 5-613 Second and fourth toner supply drive assemblies
● Reinstallation tip: On the third toner supply drive assembly, there are three gears (callout 1) and a

Figure 5-614 Third toner supply drive assembly
1
3. Remove the toner supply buffer assembly/intermediate pipe (X654/X677 models)

Follow these steps to remove the toner supply buffer assembly/intermediate pipe.
NOTE: When replacing toner supply buffer assembly/intermediate pipe, always replace the toner supply
assembly at the same time.
Since the disassembly procedures of the following four toner supply buffer assemblies are similar, the
disassembly procedure of the first toner supply buffer assembly (callout 1) is shown below as an example.
Figure 5-615 Toner supply buffer assemblies
1 2 3 4
● First toner supply buffer assembly (callout 1)
● Second toner supply buffer assembly (callout 2)
● Third toner supply buffer assembly (callout 3)
● Fourth toner supply buffer assembly (callout 4)

■ Slide the toner supply buffer assembly (callout 1) frontward, and then slide the toner supply buffer
assembly (callout 1) and the intermediate pipe (callout 2) downward to remove them together.

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Feed assembly (X654/X677 models)

Learn about removing and replacing the feed assembly.

RM2-3479-000CN Paper feed assembly
Required tools
Post service test


2
1
3).

X654/MFP 6800/MFP X677 6700/6701
J311 J311
J312 J312
J313 J313
J301 J301
J314 J314
J315 J305
J316 J316
J302 J302
J317 J317
1
2
assembly.

2. Remove the registration assembly

Follow these steps to remove the registration assembly.
1. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1). and then release the cable (callout 2) from the cable guide
(callout 3).
Figure 5-623 Release the connectors
1
2
Remove the registration assembly 863

2. Release two bosses (callout 1), and then release the link arm (callout 2) from the door.
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the registration assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-625 Remove the registration assembly
3. Remove the feed assembly (X654/X677 models)

Follow these steps to remove the feed assembly.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the feed assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-626 Remove the feed assembly
2. Remove the gear (callout 1) from the feed assembly (callout 2).
1 2


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Low-voltage power supply (LVPS)

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
Table 5-82 LVPS part numbers
RM3-7724-000CN LVPS (110-127V) (5700/X557)
RM3-7725-000CN LVPS (220-240V) (5700/X557)
RM3-7726-000CN LVPS (110-127V) (6700/X654)
RM3-7727-000CN LVPS (220-240V) (6700/X654)
RM3-7728-000CN LVPS (110-127V) (6800/X677)
RM3-7729-000CN LVPS (220-240V) (6800/X677)
RM3-9012-000CN LVPS (110-127V) (5800/X57945)
RM3-9013-000CN LVPS (220-240V) (5800/X57945)
Required tools
Make sure that all of the connectors on the LVPS are fully seated.

Post service test

remove it.




1
2 1

2 3


instructions.
Removal and replacement: High-voltage power supply (HVPS)

Learn about removing and replacing the high-voltage power supply PCA.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the HVPS.
RM3-9040-000CN HV power supply PCA (5700/X557/5800)
RM3-9041-000CN HV power supply PCA (6700/6800)
RM3-9042-000CN HV power supply PCA (X57945)
RM3-9043-000CN HV power supply PCA (X654/X677)
Required tools
Post service test

Removal and replacement: High-voltage power supply (HVPS) 871

packaged in.

remove it.

(callout 1).


1 2


6. Remove the high-voltage power supply (HVPS)

Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage power supply (HVPS).
1. Remove two FFCs (callout 1) and disconnect two connectors (callout 2). Remove the FFC (callout 1) and
cable (callout 4) from the high-voltage PCA cover (callout 3), release three tabs (callout 5), and then
remove the high-voltage PCA cover.
Figure 5-641 Remove the high-voltage PCA cover

4 5 3
5 4 1 2 5
Reinstallation tip: The FFC (callout 2) is attached to the high-voltage PCA cover (callout 1) by double
sided tape. When removing the FFC from the high-voltage PCA cover, take care not to damage the FFC.
Remove the high-voltage power supply (HVPS) 875

Figure 5-642 Use caution with the taped FFC
2. Disconnect two connector (callout 1/2). Disconnect one connector (callout 3) (X654/X677 models only).
Remove one screw (callout 4), release two tabs (callout 5), and then remove the high-voltage power
supply assembly (callout 6).
Figure 5-643 Remove the HVPS
6 5
1
4
2 3
3. For reinstallation of the HVPS, keep the following tips in mind.
● Reinstallation tip: When installing the high-voltage power supply PCA (callout 1), confirm that the
contact springs (callout 2) are in the correct position (so that the PCA engages with the spring).

Figure 5-644 Verify that the contact springs are in the correct position
2
2
11
22
● Reinstallation tip: When installing the high-voltage PCA cover, confirm that the contact spring
(callout 1) is in the contact holder (callout 2).
Figure 5-645 Verify that the contact spring is in the holder


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Drive PCA

Learn about removing and replacing the drive PCA.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the drive PCA.
RM3-7722-000CN Driver PCA (6700/V654/6800/X677)
RM3-7723-000CN Driver PCA (5700/X557/5800/X57945)
Required tools

Post service test

remove it.




1
2 1

2 3


33
22
11


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Feed/toner supply controller PCA (X654/X677 models)

Learn about removing and replacing the feed/toner supply controller PCA.
RM3-7771-000CN Toner supply PCA (X654/X677 models)
Required tools
Post service test






then remove it.
4. Remove the feed/toner supply controller PCA (X654/X677 models)

Follow these steps to remove the feed/toner supply controller PCA.
■ Disconnect all the connectors on the feed/toner supply controller PCA. Remove two screws (callout 1),
remove two PCA spacers (callout 2), and then remove the feed/toner supply controller PCA (callout 3).
Figure 5-660 Remove the feed/toner supply controller PCA
2 1

Remove the feed/toner supply controller PCA (X654/X677 models) 887

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Right PCA

Learn about removing and replacing the right PCA.
RM3-7740-000CN Right PCA (5700)
RM3-7790-000CN Right PCA (X557/5800)
RM3-7791-000CN Right PCA (X57945)
RM3-7792-000CN Right PCA (6700)
RM3-7793-000CN Right PCA (6800)
RM3-7794-000CN Right PCA (X654/X677)
Required tools

Post service test
1. Remove the right PCA

Follow these steps to remove the right PCA.
2
1
Remove the right PCA 889

3. Disconnect all the connectors on the right PCA, release two tabs (callout 1), and then remove the right
PCA (callout 2).
Figure 5-663 Remove the right PCA
CAUTION: The FFCs are tightly packed and can be difficult to remove. A solution is to remove the FFCs
from the rear of the unit, remove the PCA, and then remove the FFCs to reinstall them on the back. This
option should be used only if needed and to ensure that the FFCs are not damaged.

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Rear PCA

Learn about removing and replacing the rear PCA.

View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the rear PCA.
RM3-9044-000CN Rear PCA (5700/5800)
RM3-9045-000CN Rear PCA (X557/6700/6800)
RM3-9046-000CN Rear PCA (X57945/X654/X677)
Required tools
Post service test

remove it.





1

2 1
2 3

4. Remove the rear PCA

Follow these steps to remove the rear PCA.
■ Disconnect all the connectors on the rear PCA, remove one screw (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2),
and then remove the rear PCA (callout 3).
NOTE: Grounding wires are mounted on the top of this PCA. Use care when removing it. Pull the bottom
part out first, and then slide the assembly down to cleanly release from the spring wires at the top.
Figure 5-671 Remove the rear PCA

3
Reinstallation tip: When installing the rear PCA, confirm that each contact spring (callout 1) is in the
correct position (so that the PCA engages with the springs).
Remove the rear PCA 895

Figure 5-672 Correct spring position


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Environmental sensor PCA

Learn about removing and replacing the environmental sensor PCA.
WP2-5473-000CN Sensor, humidity HSU-08FDB2A
Required tools
Post service test

remove it.
Removal and replacement: Environmental sensor PCA 897



3. Remove the environmental sensor PCA

Follow these steps to remove the environmental sensor PCA.
■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), release one boss (callout 3), and then
remove the environmental sensor PCA (callout 4).
Figure 5-676 Remove the environmental sensor PCA
3
4 2

Remove the environmental sensor PCA 899

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Drum home position PCA

Learn about removing and replacing the drum home position sensor PCA.
RM3-7647-000CN Drum position sensor PCA
Required tools
Post service test

remove it.




1

2 1
2 3

4. Remove the drum home position sensor PCA

Follow these steps to remove the drum home position sensor PCA.
1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the PCA holder (callout 2) in the direction indicated to remove
it.
Figure 5-684 Remove the PCA holder

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove the drum home
position sensor PCA (callout 3).
Figure 5-685 Remove the drum home position sensor PCA
1 3

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Drum motor

Learn about removing and replacing the drum motor.

RM3-7788-000CN Drum motor assembly
Required tools
Post service test

remove it.



1
2 1

2 3
4. Remove the drum motor

Follow these steps to remove the drum motor.
Remove the drum motor 909

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the drum motor
(callout 3).
2
2

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Developer motor

Learn about removing and replacing the developer motor.

RM2-3625-000CN Developing motor assembly
Required tools
Post service test

remove it.



1
2 1

2 3
4. Remove the developer motor

Follow these steps to remove the developer motor.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the motor (callout
3).
2
2

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB) motor

Learn about removing and replacing the ITB motor.

RM3-7797-000CN ITB motor assembly
Required tools
Post service test

remove it.



1
2 1

2 3
4. Remove the image transfer belt (ITB) motor

Follow these steps to remove the image transfer belt (ITB) motor.
Remove the image transfer belt (ITB) motor 919

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the motor (callout
3).
2 2


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Developer alienation motor

Learn about removing and replacing developer alienation motor.
RK2-6027-000CN Motor, stepping (Developer alienation motor)
Required tools
Post service test

Removal and replacement: Developer alienation motor 921

remove it.

(callout 1).



1 2



DC controller.
3
1

2
4
3 5
5).
1
3
2
4


(callout 3).
2
2
5).

3 1

7. Remove the developer alienation motor
Follow these steps to remove the developer alienation motor.
■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the motor (callout
3).

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Fuser motor

Learn about removing and replacing the fuser motor.

RM2-4488-000CN Fixing motor assembly (Fuser motor)
Required tools
Post service test

remove it.





1

2 1
2 3

4. Remove the fuser motor

Follow these steps to remove the fuser motor.
Remove the fuser motor 933

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then remove the motor
(callout 3).

3
2 2

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Duplex motor

Learn about removing and replacing the duplex motor.

RK2-7751-000CN Motor, stepping (Duplex motor; 5700/X557/5800/X57945)
RM2-4489-000CN Motor assembly (Duplex motor; 6700/X654/6800/X677)
Required tools
Post service test

remove it.



1
2 1

2 3
4. Remove the duplex motor

Follow these steps to remove the duplex motor.

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then remove the motor
(callout 3).
11
22
33


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Power-supply fan

Learn about removing and replacing power supply fan.
RK3-2277-000CN Fan (Power supply fan)
Required tools
Post service test


remove it.




1

2 1
2 3

4. Remove the power supply fan

Follow these steps to remove the power supply fan.
1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the fan holder (callout 2) in the direction indicated to remove
it.
NOTE: Take care not to pull any cables as you remove this assembly.
Figure 5-749 Remove the fan holder

2. Release five tabs (callout 1), and then remove the power supply fan (callout 2).
Figure 5-750 Release the fan

2

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Cartridge fan

Learn about removing and replacing the cartridge fan.

RK3-0762-000CN Fan (Cartridge fan; X57945/6700/X654/6800/X677)
RK3-1637-000CN Fan (Cartridge fan; 5700/X557/5800)
Required tools
Post service test

remove it.



1
2 1

2 3
4. Remove the cartridge fan

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge fan.
Remove the cartridge fan 949

1 2
2. Pull out the cartridge fan (callout 1) toward you, and then remove the sponge (callout 2) from the
cartridge fan.
Figure 5-759 Remove the fan sponge


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Fuser fan

Learn about removing and replacing the fuser fan.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the fuser fan.
RK3-0762-000CN Fan (Fuser fan)
Required tools
Post service test

Removal and replacement: Fuser fan 951

remove it.



DC controller.
3
1

2
4
3 5
5).
1
3
2
4


(callout 3).
2
2
5).

3 1

5. Remove the fuser fan
Follow these steps to remove the fuser fan.
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), slide the fan holder (callout 3) in the
direction indicated, and then pull the fan holder (callout 3) out of the printer.
Figure 5-768 Remove the fan holder

2
2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the fuser fan (callout 2).
Figure 5-769 Remove the fan from the holder


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Exhaust fan

Learn about removing and replacing the exhaust fan.
RK3-0760-000CN Fan (Exhaust fan)
Required tools
Post service test
1. Remove the fuser

Removal and replacement: Exhaust fan 957

the fuser.
2. Remove the exhaust fan

Follow these steps to remove the exhaust fan.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), slide the fan duct assembly (callout 2) in the direction indicated, and then
remove it.
Figure 5-772 Remove the fan duct assembly
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the exhaust fan (callout 2).
Figure 5-773 Remove the fan


instructions.
5. Input device - 550-sheet paper feeder

Learn how to remove and replace the 550-sheet paper feeder parts and assemblies.


Removal and replacement: Front left cover (550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the paper feeder left cover.
RC5-9200-000CN Cover, front left (1x550-sheet paper feeder)
Required tools
Post service test

1. Remove the front left cover (550-sheet paper feeder)

Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray front left cover.
■ Flex the upper part of the front left cover (callout 1) in the direction indicated, release one tab (callout 2),
and then slide the front left cover upward to remove it.
Figure 5-774 Remove the front left cover (550-sheet paper feeder)

Remove the front left cover (550-sheet paper feeder) 961

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the paper feeder front right cover.
RC5-9201-000CN Cover, front right (1x550-sheet paper feeder)
Required tools
Post service test
1. Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder)

Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray front right cover.
1. Open the paper feeder right door.

2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the front right cover (callout 2) upward to remove it.
Figure 5-775 Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder)

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Right door (550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the paper right door.

RM3-0004-000CN Right door assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder)
Required tools
Post service test

2. Remove the right door (550-sheet paper feeder)

Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray right door.

1
2
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right door assembly (callout 2) in the direction indicated to
remove it.
Figure 5-779 Remove the right door (550-sheet paper feeder)
Remove the right door (550-sheet paper feeder) 965

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the paper feeder rear cover.
RC5-9409-000CN Cover, rear (1x550-sheet paper feeder)
Required tools

Post service test


1
2
Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder) 967

remove it.
3. Remove the rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder)

Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray rear cover.

■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the rear cover (callout 2) in the direction indicated to remove
it.
Figure 5-784 Remove the rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder)

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Left cover (550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the paper feeder left cover.

RC5-9408-000CN Cover, left (1x550-sheet paper feeder)
Required tools
Post service test


1
2
Remove the right door (550-sheet paper feeder) 971

remove it.

it.
4. Remove the left cover (550-sheet paper feeder)

Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray left cover.

■ Slide the left cover (callout 1) in the direction indicated to remove it.

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Pickup assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the paper feeder pickup assembly.

RM2-3617-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder)
Required tools
Post service test


it.
3. Remove the paper pickup assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove one screw (callout 2), and then remove the pickup
2 1
Remove the rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder) 975

1 2

4. Release one alignment pins (callout 1), and then lower the left end of the assembly (callout 2)—the end
near the tray cavity.
Figure 5-796 Lower the end of the assembly
5. Slide the paper pickup assembly to the left to release it from the drive gear on the lifter drive assembly.
Figure 5-797 Release the assembly from the drive gear


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the paper feeder lifter drive assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the lifter drive assembly.
RM2-3501-000CN Lifter drive assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder)
Required tools

Post service test


1
2

remove it.


it.
4. Remove the lifter drive assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)

Remove the lifter drive assembly (550-sheet paper feeder) 981

2. Release cables (callout 1) from the auto close assembly (callout 2).and the lifter drive assembly (callout
3). Remove two screws (callout 4), and then remove the lifter drive assembly.
Figure 5-804 Remove the lifter drive assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)
3 2
4 1

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Pickup drive assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the paper feeder pickup drive assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the pickup drive assembly.

RM2-3617-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder)
Required tools
Post service test


1
2

remove it.

it.
4. Remove the pickup drive assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)


2. Release the cables (callout 1) from the auto close assembly (callout 2) and the lifter drive assembly
(callout 3).
3 2
(callout 3).
Figure 5-812 Remove the cable clamp

1 2
3
3

Figure 5-813 Remove the pickup drive assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)
2
1
1
2


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Auto close assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the paper feeder auto close assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the auto close assembly.
RM2-3559-000CN Auto close assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder)
Required tools

Post service test


1
2

remove it.


it.
4. Remove the auto close assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)

Remove the auto close assembly (550-sheet paper feeder) 991

2 3


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Media size detection assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)
Learn about removing and replacing the paper feeder media size detection assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the media size detection assembly.
RM2-3614-000CN Size detect assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder)
Required tools
Post service test

Removal and replacement: Media size detection assembly (550-sheet paper feeder) 993

1
2

remove it.


it.
4. Remove the auto close assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)


2 3
5. Remove the media size detection assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)

Follow these steps to remove the media size detection assembly.
Remove the media size detection assembly (550-sheet paper feeder) 997
■ Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the media size detect assembly (callout 2) toward you to remove
it.

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Controller PCA (550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the paper-feeder controller PCA.

RM3-8051-000CN Paper feeder controller PCA (1x550-sheet paper feeder)
Required tools
Post service test



1
2
remove it.

it.
4. Remove the controller PCA (550-sheet paper feeder)

Follow these steps to remove the controller PCA.
■ Disconnect all the connectors on the paper feeder controller PCA, remove two screws (callout 1), remove
two PCA spacers (callout 2), and then remove the paper feeder controller PCA (callout 3).
Figure 5-837 Remove the controller PCA (550-sheet paper feeder)

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Separation roller assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the paper feeder separation roller assembly.
527H2A HP LaserJet Tray 2-x Roller Kit (1x550-sheet paper feeder)
Required tools

Post service test
1. Remove the separation roller assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing the 550-sheet paper feeder separation roller assembly.
2. Slide the lever (callout 1) to the right, and then remove the roller assembly (callout 2) by pulling it out
from the printer.
Figure 5-838 Remove the roller assembly

Remove the separation roller assembly (550-sheet paper feeder) 1003

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Pickup roller assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing and replacing the paper feeder pickup roller assembly.
527H2A HP LaserJet Tray 2-x Roller Kit
Required tools
Post service test
1. Remove the separation roller assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing the 550-sheet paper feeder separation roller assembly.

from the printer.
2. Remove the paper pickup roller assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)

Learn about removing the 550-sheet paper feeder pickup rollers.
roller assembly.
■ Locate the pickup roller assembly (callout 1) and then pull it away from the printer to remove it.

Remove the paper pickup roller assembly (550-sheet paper feeder) 1005
instructions.
6. Removal and replacement: 2,100-sheet paper deck

Learn how to remove and replace the 2,100-sheet paper deck parts and assemblies.


Removal and replacement: Right door (HCI)

Learn about removing and replacing the HCI right door.
RM3-0035-000CN Right door assembly (2,100-sheet paper deck HCI)
Required tools

Post service test
1. Remove the right door (HCI)

Follow these steps to remove the HCI right door.
1. Open the HCI tray, and then open the right door.
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the right door (callout 2) in the direction indicated to
remove it.
Figure 5-841 Remove the right door (HCI)

Remove the right door (HCI) 1007

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Front left cover/left cover (HCI)

Learn about removing and replacing the HCI front left cover/left cover.
RC5-9696-000CN Cover, front left (2,100-sheet paper deck HCI)
RC5-9692-000CN Cover, left (2,100-sheet paper deck HCI)
Required tools
Post service test


remove it.
2. Remove the rear cover (HCI)

Follow these steps to remove the HCI rear cover.
it.
Figure 5-843 Remove the rear cover (HCI)

1
3. Remove the front left cover/left cover (HCI)

Follow these steps to remove the HCI front left cover/left cover.
Remove the rear cover (HCI) 1009

2. Remove the left cover (callout 1) together with the front left cover (callout 2). Release one tab (callout 3),
and then slide the front left cover upward to remove it from the left cover.
Figure 5-845 Remove the front left cover from the left cover (HCI)


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Rear cover (HCI)

Learn about removing and replacing the HCI rear cover.
RC5-9693-000CN Cover, rear (2,100-sheet paper deck HCI)
Required tools
Post service test

Removal and replacement: Rear cover (HCI) 1011

remove it.

it.

1


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Rear lower cover (HCI)

Learn about removing and replacing the HCI rear lower cover.
RC5-9695-000CN Cover, rear lower (2,100-sheet paper deck HCI)
Required tools
Post service test
Removal and replacement: Rear lower cover (HCI) 1013

remove it.

it.

1
3. Remove the rear lower cover (HCI)

Follow these steps to remove the HCI rear lower cover.

■ Bend the left edge of the rear lower cover (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then pull the rear
lower cover toward you from the left end of it to remove it.
Figure 5-850 Remove the rear lower cover (HCI)


instructions.

Removal and replacement: Cassette assembly (HCI)

Learn about removing and replacing the HCI cassette.
RM3-0023-000CN Tray assembly (2,100-sheet paper deck HCI)
Required tools
Post service test
1. Remove the cassette (HCI)

Follow these steps to remove the HCI cassette.

1. Open the HCI cassette assembly.
Figure 5-851 Open the HCI cassette
2. Press the left and right release levers (callout 1).
Figure 5-852 Press the release levers
Remove the cassette (HCI) 1017

3. Pull the HCI cassette assembly (callout 1) out of the HCI chassis.
Figure 5-853 Remove the tray cassette (HCI)

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Pickup assembly (HCI)

Learn about removing and replacing the HCI paper pickup assembly.

RM2-3509-000CN Paper pickup assembly (2,100-sheet paper deck HCI)
Required tools
Post service test

remove it.

2. Remove the paper pickup assembly (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI paper pickup assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the inner cover (callout 3)
Figure 5-855 Remove the inner cover
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove one screw (callout 2), and then remove the pickup
Figure 5-856 Remove the pickup assembly (HCI)
2 3


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Auto close assembly (HCI)

Learn about removing and replacing the HCI auto close assembly.

RM2-0918-000CN Auto close assembly (2,100-sheet paper deck HCI)
Required tools
Post service test


2. Remove the auto close assembly (HCI)

Follow these steps to remove the HCI auto close assembly.
Remove the auto close assembly (HCI) 1023

■ Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the auto close assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-861 Remove the auto close assembly (HCI)

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly (HCI)

Learn about removing and replacing the HCI lifter drive assembly.

RM3-0021-000CN Lifter drive assembly (2,100-sheet paper deck HCI)
Required tools
Post service test

remove it.

it.

1
3. Remove the lifter drive assembly (HCI)

Follow these steps to remove the HCI lifter drive assembly.
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1)., release the cable (callout 2) from the cable clamps (callout 3).

2. Remove two screws (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the lifter drive assembly
(callout 3).
Figure 5-865 Remove the lifter drive assembly (HCI)
3 1


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Pickup alienation assembly (HCI)

Learn about removing and replacing the HCI pickup alienation assembly.
RM3-0022-000CN Pick estrangement assembly (2,100-sheet paper deck HCI)
Required tools
Post service test


remove it.

it.

1
3. Remove the pickup alienation assembly (HCI)

Follow these steps to remove the HCI pickup alienation assembly.

1. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1), and then release the cable (callout 2) from the cable clamps
(callout 3).
3 1
2 1
2. Release the cable (callout 1) from the pickup alienation assembly (callout 2), remove two screws (callout
3), and then remove the pickup alienation assembly.
Figure 5-869 Remove the pickup alienation assembly (HCI)
Reinstallation tip: When reassembling the pickup alienation assembly, line up the hole (callout 1) in the
gear overlaps the position of the hole (callout 2) in the pickup alienation assembly.

Figure 5-870 Align hole in gear with hole in chassis
11
22


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Pickup drive assembly (HCI)

Learn about removing and replacing the HCI pickup drive assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the pickup drive assembly.
RM2-3617-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly (2,100-sheet paper deck HCI)
Required tools
Post service test


remove it.

it.

1
3. Remove the pickup alienation assembly (HCI)

Follow these steps to remove the HCI pickup alienation assembly.

(callout 3).
3 1
2 1
2. Release the cable (callout 1) from the pickup alienation assembly (callout 2), remove two screws (callout
3), and then remove the pickup alienation assembly.
Figure 5-874 Remove the pickup alienation assembly (HCI)
Reinstallation tip: When reassembling the pickup alienation assembly, line up the hole (callout 1) in the
gear overlaps the position of the hole (callout 2) in the pickup alienation assembly.

Figure 5-875 Align hole in gear with hole in chassis
11
22
4. Remove the pickup drive assembly (HCI)

Follow these steps to remove the HCI pickup drive assembly.
(callout 3).
Figure 5-876 Disconnect connectors and remove screws

1 2
3
3
Remove the pickup drive assembly (HCI) 1035

Figure 5-877 Remove the pickup drive assembly (HCI)

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Controller PCA (HCI)

Learn about removing and replacing the HCI controller PCA.

RM3-8071-000CN HCI controller PCA (2,100-sheet paper deck HCI)
Required tools
Post service test

Remove the cassette (HCI) 1037

2. Remove the front left cover/left cover (HCI)

Follow these steps to remove the HCI front left cover/left cover.

2. Remove the left cover (callout 1) together with the front left cover (callout 2). Release one tab (callout 3),
and then slide the front left cover upward to remove it from the left cover.
Figure 5-882 Remove the front left cover from the left cover (HCI)
3. Remove the controller PCA (HCI)

Follow these steps to remove the HCI controller PCA.
Remove the controller PCA (HCI) 1039

■ Disconnect all the connectors on the HCI controller PCA. Remove two screws (callout 1), remove two PCA
spacers (callout 2), and then remove the HCI controller PCA (callout 3).
Figure 5-883 Remove the controller PCA (HCI)
2 1

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Separation roller assembly (HCI)

Learn about removing and replacing the HCI separation roller assembly.

527H2A HP LaserJet Tray 2-x Roller Kit (2,100-sheet paper deck HCI)
Required tools
Post service test
1. Remove the separation roller assembly (HCI)

Learn about removing the HCI separation roller assembly.
NOTE: The 550-sheet paper feeder is shown in the graphics below. The steps for the HCI rollers are the
same.
from the printer.
Remove the separation roller assembly (HCI) 1041

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Pickup roller assembly (HCI)

Learn about removing and replacing the HCI pickup roller assembly.
527H2A HP LaserJet Tray 2-x Roller Kit (2,100-sheet paper deck HCI)
Required tools

Post service test
1. Remove the separation roller assembly (HCI)

Learn about removing the HCI separation roller assembly.
same.
from the printer.
2. Remove the paper pickup roller assembly (HCI)

Learn about removing the HCI pickup rollers.
roller assembly.
same.
Remove the separation roller assembly (HCI) 1043

■ Locate the pickup roller assembly (callout 1) and then pull it away from the printer to remove it.

instructions.
7. Output device - 3-bin staple stacker multi-bin mailbox

Learn how to remove and replace the 3-bin staple stacker multi-bin mailbox parts and assemblies.


Removal and replacement: Rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the rear cover.
RC6-1305-000CN Cover, rear (3-bin SS)
Required tools
Post service test
1. Remove the rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker rear cover.
Covers, panels, and doors 1045

1. Remove the printer formatter cover by removing one screw (callout 1) and then sliding the cover (callout
2) in the direction indicated. Slide the 3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover assembly (callout 3) in the
Figure 5-887 Remove the 3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover
1
3
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), release three tabs (callout 2), and then remove the rear cover (callout 3).
3 1


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Staple cover and staple door (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing and replacing the staple cover and door.
RM3-0483-000CN Staple cover assembly (3-bin SS)
RM3-0484-000CN Staple door assembly (3-bin SS)
Required tools
Post service test
1. Remove the staple cover and staple door (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker staple cover and staple door.
1. Open the stapler-stacker door assembly and the stapler door.
Removal and replacement: Staple cover and staple door (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1047
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the staple cover (callout 2) and the staple door (callout 3)
together.
4. Remove two shafts (callout 1), and then remove the staple door (callout 2) from the staple cover (callout
3).
Figure 5-891 Remove the staple door from the staple cover

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Right upper cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the right upper cover.
RC6-1308-000CN Cover, right upper (3-bin SS)
Required tools

Post service test
1. Remove the right upper cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker right upper cover.
1. Open the stapler-stacker door assembly.
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the right upper cover (callout
3).
Figure 5-892 Remove the 3-bin stapler-stacker right upper cover
3 2


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Right corner cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the right corner cover.
RC6-1307-000CN RC6-1307-000CN (3-bin SS)
Required tools
Post service test

Removal and replacement: Right corner cover (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1051

1
3
3 1


3).
3 2
3. Remove the right corner cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker right corner cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove the right corner cover (callout
3).
Figure 5-896 Remove the right corner cover
2
3

Remove the right corner cover (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1053

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Right lower cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the right lower cover.
RC6-1309-000CN Cover, right lower (3-bin SS)
Required tools
Post service test

1
3
3 1

Remove the rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1055

together.
3).

3).
3 2

3).
2
3
5. Remove the right lower cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker right lower cover.
Remove the right upper cover (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1057

■ Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right lower cover (callout 2) in the direction indicated to
remove it.
Figure 5-904 Remove the right lower cover
1 2

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Rear inner cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the rear inner cover.

RM3-0485-000CN Rear inner cover assembly (3-bin SS)
Required tools
Post service test

1
3

3 1
2. Remove the rear inner cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker rear inner cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1) release three tabs (callout 2), and then remove the rear inner cover (callout
3).
2 3


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Stapler-stacker door assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the stapler-stacker door.
RM2-4167-000CN Right door assembly (3-bin SS)
Required tools
Post service test
Removal and replacement: Stapler-stacker door assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1061

1
3
3 1


together.
3).
Remove the staple cover and staple door (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1063
3).
3 2

3).
2
3


remove it.
1 2
6. Remove the stapler-stacker door assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker door assembly.
1. Remove two shafts (callout 1), and then open the feed guide (callout 2).
Figure 5-916 Remove two shafts

1
Remove the stapler-stacker door assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1065

2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the left bushing (callout 2) in the direction indicated to remove
it.
Figure 5-917 Remove the left bushing
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right bushing (callout 2) in the direction indicated to
remove it.
Figure 5-918 Remove the right bushing

4. Remove right and left shafts (callout 1), and then remove the stapler-stacker door assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-919 Remove the stapler-stacker door assembly
1 1


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Stacking wall assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the stacking wall.
RM3-0480-000CN Stacking wall assembly (3-bin SS)
Required tools
Post service test


1
3
3 1

together.
3).

3).
3 2

3).
2
3


remove it.
1 2


1

it.
remove it.

1 1
7. Remove the output bin 1 assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker output bin 1 assembly.

1. Release one boss (callout 1), rotate the pin (callout 2) in the direction indicated, and then remove the pin.
Figure 5-932 Remove the pin

3
2 2
1 1
2. Remove the output bin 1 assembly (callout 1).

1
8. Remove the stapler assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker stapler assembly.
Remove the stapler assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1075

1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then remove the stapler
assembly (callout 3) and the plate (callout 4) together.
Figure 5-934 Remove the stapler assembly and the plate

2
1
3 4
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the plate (callout 2) from the stapler assembly (callout
3).
Figure 5-935 Remove the plate from the stapler assembly

3
9. Remove the MBM fan (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker mailbox/booklet-maker fan.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove one screw (callout 2), and then remove the fan holder
(callout 3) together with the fan (callout 4).
Figure 5-936 Remove the fan holder and fan
3 2
4 1
2. Release two tabs (callout 1), remove the duct 1 (callout 2) and the duct 2 (callout 3), and then remove the
MBM fan (callout 4) from the holder.

1
10. Remove the upper feed assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker upper feed assembly.
Remove the upper feed assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1077

1. Release the cable (callout 1) from cable guide (callout 2), release one tab (callout 3), and then remove
the inner cover (callout 4).
3
2
2. Release the cable (callout 1) from cable clamps (callout 2), and then disconnect three connectors (callout
3).
2 1 3
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the guide (callout 2).
Figure 5-940 Remove the guide

1

4. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the upper feed assembly (callout 2).
CAUTION: Be sure that the paper guides extend into the tray area when reinstalling the upper feed
assembly. The guides can be damaged if they are trapped behind the in-cave frame when the assembly
is seated in the frame.
Figure 5-941 Remove the upper feed assembly
11. Remove the stacking wall assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker stacking wall assembly.
1. Release one tab (callout 1).
Remove the stacking wall assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1079

2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the stacking wall assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-943 Remove the stacking wall assembly
2 1

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the stapler assembly.

RK2-8148-000CN Stapler assembly (3-bin SS)
Required tools
Post service test

together.
3).



2
1
3 4
3).

3


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Jogger assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the jogger assembly.
RM3-0481-000CN Jog assembly (3-bin SS)
Required tools
Post service test


1
3
3 1

together.
3).

3. Remove the jogger assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker jogger assembly.
1. Release the cable (callout 1) from the cable clamp (callout 2), and then disconnect one connector (callout
3).

2 1 3
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the jogger assembly (callout 2) in the direction indicated to
remove it.
Figure 5-955 Remove the jogger assembly

Remove the jogger assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1087

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Output bin 1 (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing output bin 1.
RM2-4173-000CN Tray assembly (3-bin SS)
Required tools
Post service test



3
2 2
1 1

1

Remove the output bin 1 assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1089

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Upper feed assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the upper feed assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the upper feed assembly.
RM2-4169-000CN Upper paper feed assembly (3-bin SS)
Required tools

Post service test

1
3
3 1


together.

3).

3).
3 2


3).
2
3

remove it.
1 2



1
it.
remove it.

1 1


2
1
3 4

3).

3

3
2

3).
2 1 3

1


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Lower feed assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the lower feed assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the lower feed assembly.

RM2-4168-000CN Lower paper feed assembly (3-bin SS)
Required tools
Post service test

1
3

3 1

together.
3).


3).
3 2

3).
2
3

Remove the right corner cover (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1103

remove it.
1 2


3
2 2
1 1


1


1

it.
remove it.

1 1


2
1
3 4
Remove the stapler assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1107

3).

3

3 2
4 1


1

3
2

3).
2 1 3

1

11. Remove the stacking wall assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker stacking wall assembly.
Remove the stacking wall assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1111

2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the stacking wall assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-999 Remove the stacking wall assembly
2 1
12. Remove the lower feed assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker lower feed assembly.
1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).
Figure 5-1000 Disconnect two connectors

1

2. Remove the cable (callout 1) by pulling it through the chassis.
Figure 5-1001 Remove the cable
3. Remove one screw (callout 1), remove the cover (callout 2), remove three screws (callout 3), and then
remove the lower feed assembly (callout 4).
Figure 5-1002 Remove the lower feed assembly

3
1 2 4


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Solenoid assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the solenoid assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the solenoid assembly.
RM2-1040-010CN Solenoid assembly (3-bin SS)
Required tools
Post service test


1
3
3 1

together.
3).

3. Remove the jogger assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker jogger assembly.
1. Release the cable (callout 1) from the cable clamp (callout 2), and then disconnect one connector (callout
3).

2 1 3
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the jogger assembly (callout 2) in the direction indicated to
remove it.
Figure 5-1009 Remove the jogger assembly

Remove the jogger assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1117


3
2 2
1 1

1


3 2
4 1

1
6. Remove the solenoid assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker solenoid assembly.
Remove the solenoid assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1119

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable (callout 2) from the cable stoppers
(callout 3).
2 3
2. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the solenoid assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-1015 Remove the solenoid assembly

1


instructions.
Removal and replacement: MBM fan (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the 3-bin stapler-stacker mailbox/booklet-maker fan.
RK2-8153-000CN Fan (3-bin SS)
Required tools
Post service test

Removal and replacement: MBM fan (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1121

1
3
3 1


3 2
4 1

1


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Stapler-stacker feed motor (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the feed motor.
RK2-8149-000CN Motor, stepping DC (3-bin SS)
Required tools
Post service test


1
3
3 1

Remove the MBM fan (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1125

3 2
4 1

1
3. Remove the feed motor (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker feed motor.

■ Release the cable (callout 1) from the cable clamp (callout 2), disconnect one connector (callout 3), remove
two screws (callout 4), and then remove the stapler-stacker feed motor (callout 5).
Figure 5-1024 Remove the feed motor

1 2 3

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Controller PCA (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the 3-bin stapler-stacker controller PCA.

RM3-7950-000CN Staple stacker PCA (3-bin SS)
Required tools
Post service test

1
3

3 1
2. Remove the controller PCA (3-bin stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker controller PCA.
1. Disconnect all the connectors on the controller PCA.
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove the controller PCA (callout
3).
Figure 5-1027 Remove the controller PCA

2
1 3

Remove the controller PCA (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1129

instructions.
8. Output device - floor-standing staple stacker

Learn how to remove and replace the floor-standing staple stacker parts and assemblies.


Removal and replacement: Front door (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker front door.
RM2-3857-000CN Front cover assembly (FSSS)
Required tools

Post service test
1. Remove the front door assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker front door assembly.
2. Push the stopper (callout 1) in the direction indicated, and then pull up the front door assembly (callout
2) to remove it.
Figure 5-1028 Remove the front door assembly

1
Remove the front door assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1131

3. Remove the hinge (callout 1) from the front door assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-1029 Remove the hinge

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Upper and lower output bins (floor-standing stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker upper and lower output bins.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the upper and lower output bins.

RM2-3837-000CN Tray assembly (FSSS)
Required tools
Post service test
1. Remove the output bins (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker output bins.
Remove the output bins (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1133

■ Release one boss (callout 1), rotate the pin (callout 2) in the direction indicated, and then remove the pin.
Remove either the upper bin (callout 3) or the lower bin (callout 4) with this process.
Figure 5-1030 Remove either bin
2 2
1 1


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Left upper rear cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker left upper rear cover.
RC6-0213-000CN Cover, rear left (FSSS)
Required tools
Post service test
1. Remove the left upper rear cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker left upper rear cover.
Removal and replacement: Left upper rear cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1135

1
2. Release one boss (callout 1).
Figure 5-1032 Release one boss
3. Pull up the left upper rear cover (callout 1) to remove it.
Figure 5-1033 Remove the left upper rear cover

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Left lower rear cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker left lower rear cover.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the left lower rear cover.
RC6-0213-000CN Cover, rear left (FSSS)
Required tools

Post service test
1. Remove the left lower rear cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker left lower rear cover.

1

3. Pull up the left lower rear cover (callout 1) to remove it.
Figure 5-1036 Remove the left lower rear cover

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Rear cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker rear cover.

RC5-0223-000CN Cover, rear (FSSS)
Required tools
Post service test


1

2. Remove the rear cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker rear cover.
Remove the rear cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1141

1. Release three tabs (callout 1).
2. Remove the rear cover (callout 1).


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Rear upper cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker rear upper cover.
RM2-3864-000CN Rear upper cover assembly (FSSS)
Required tools
Post service test

Removal and replacement: Rear upper cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1143


1


1
Remove the left lower rear cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1145



4. Remove the rear upper cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker rear upper cover.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release two tabs (callout 2).
Figure 5-1050 Remove one screw and release two tabs
Remove the rear upper cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1147

2. Remove the rear upper cover (callout 1).
Figure 5-1051 Remove the rear upper cover

instructions.
Removal and replacement: MBM front cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker mailbox/booklet-maker front cover.

RC6-0214-000CN Cover, MBM front (FSSS)
Required tools
Post service test
1. Remove the MBM front cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker mailbox/booklet-maker front cover.
Remove the MBM front cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1149

2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the MBM front cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-1053 Remove the MBM front cover

instructions.
Removal and replacement: MBM rear cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker mailbox/booklet-maker rear cover.

RC5-0215-000CN Cover, MBM rear (FSSS)
Required tools
Post service test


1
Remove the left upper rear cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1151

2. Remove the MBM rear cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker mailbox/booklet-maker rear cover.

1. On the inside of the cover, release one tab (callout 1).
2. Release another tab (callout 1).
Figure 5-1058 Release another tab
3. Release another tab (callout 1), and then remove the MBM rear cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-1059 Remove the MBM rear cover
2 1
Remove the MBM rear cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1153

instructions.
Removal and replacement: MBM top cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker mailbox/booklet-maker top cover.
RM2-3863-000CN MBM cover assembly (FSSS)
Required tools

Post service test


1





2 1
4. Remove the MBM top cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker mailbox/booklet-maker top cover.


1
2. Remove the MBM top cover (callout 1).
Figure 5-1069 Remove the MBM top cover

1


instructions.
Removal and replacement: MBM output bin (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker mailbox/booklet-maker output bin.
RC6-0513-000CN Tray, MBM (FSSS)
Required tools
Post service test



1



2 1

4. Remove the MBM output bin (floor-standing stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker mailbox/booklet-maker output bin.
■ Press the left and right stoppers (callout 1) to remove the shaft (callout 2), and then remove the MBM
output bin (callout 3).
Figure 5-1078 Remove the MBM output bin
2 2
1 1


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Front inner upper cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker front inner upper cover.
RC6-0186-000CN Cover, front inner upper (FSSS)
Required tools
Post service test

Removal and replacement: Front inner upper cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1165
2) to remove it.

1


3. Remove the front inner upper cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker front inner upper cover.
Remove the front inner upper cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1167

■ Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the front inner upper cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-1083 Remove the front inner upper cover

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Front inner lower cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker front inner lower cover.

RM2-3862-000CN Lower front inner cover assembly (FSSS)
Required tools
Post service test


2) to remove it.

1
2. Remove the front inner lower cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker front inner lower cover.

■ Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the front inner lower cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-1086 Remove the front inner lower cover
1
2

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Front inner cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker front inner cover.

RM2-3861-000CN Front inner cover assembly (FSSS)
Required tools
Post service test


2) to remove it.

1




1
2

5. Remove the front inner cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker front inner cover.

■ Remove three screws (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the front inner cover (callout
3).

1
2 3

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Foot front cover (tall model only) (floor-standing stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker foot front cover (tall finishers).

RC6-0226-000CN Cover, foot front (tall model) (FSSS)
Required tools
Post service test


2) to remove it.

1


1
2
3. Remove the foot front cover (tall floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the tall floor-standing stapler-stacker foot front cover.
■ Remove two screws (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the foot front cover (callout
3).
Figure 5-1097 Remove the foot front cover (tall finisher)

1
3 2

Remove the foot front cover (tall floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1179

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Foot front cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker foot front cover (regular-size
finishers).
RC6-0220-000CN Cover, foot front (FSSS)
Required tools

Post service test

2) to remove it.

1

2. Remove the foot front cover (standard floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the standard floor-standing stapler-stacker foot front cover.

2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the foot front cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-1101 Remove the foot front cover (standard finisher)

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Foot rear cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker foot rear cover.

RC6-0222-000CN Cover, foot rear (FSSS)
Required tools
Post service test


1



3. Remove the foot rear cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker foot rear cover.

1. Tall finishers only: Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the tall foot rear cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-1107 Remove the tall finisher cover
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the foot rear cover (callout 1).
Figure 5-1108 Remove the foot rear cover


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Foot center cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker foot center cover.
RC6-0227-000CN Cover, foot center (FSSS)
Required tools
Post service test


2) to remove it.

1

Remove the front inner lower cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1189

1
2


1





3).

1
3 2

Remove the foot front cover (standard floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1193



8. Remove the foot center cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker foot center cover.
■ Release three tabs (callout 1), and then remove the foot center cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-1122 Remove the foot center cover

1

Remove the foot center cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1195

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Foot cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker foot cover.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the foot cover.
RC6-0229-000CN Cover, foot (FSSS)
Required tools
Post service test


2) to remove it.

1


1




3).

1
3 2



Remove the foot rear cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1201

7. Remove the foot center cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker foot center cover.

■ Release three tabs (callout 1), and then remove the foot center cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-1135 Remove the foot center cover

1
8. Remove the foot cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker foot cover.
■ Release two tabs (callout 1), and then remove the foot cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-1136 Remove the foot cover
Remove the foot cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1203

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker stapler assembly.
RK2-8148-000CN Stapler assembly (FSSS)
Required tools

Post service test

2) to remove it.

1


1
2


3).

1
3 2
4. Remove the stapler (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker stapler assembly.
■ Release the cable (callout 1) from the cable clamp (callout 2), disconnect two connectors (callout 3),
remove one screw (callout 4), and then remove the stapler (callout 5).
Figure 5-1141 Remove the stapler
3
5
4 1

Remove the stapler (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1207

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Controller PCA (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker controller PCA.
RM3-7931-000CN Staple stacker PCA (FSSS)
Required tools
Post service test



1



1



4. Remove the controller PCA (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker controller PCA.

■ Disconnect all the connectors on the controller PCA, remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the
controller PCA (callout 2).
Figure 5-1150 Remove the controller PCA
1
2

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Power supply assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker power supply assembly.

RM2-3854-000CN Sub power supply assembly (FSSS)
Required tools
Post service test


1




1



5. Remove the power supply assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker power supply assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable (callout 2) from cable clamps (callout 3).

1 3
2. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), release the cable (callout 2) from the cable clamp (callout 3),
remove the FFC (callout 4), and then release the cable (callout 5) from the cable clamps (callout 6).
Figure 5-1162 Disconnect two connectors
3 2 1 4 5
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the power supply assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-1163 Remove the power supply assembly
Remove the power supply assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1219

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Height wall upper assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker upper height wall.
RM2-3845-000CN Height wall upper assembly (FSSS)
Required tools

Post service test

2) to remove it.

1





1

4. Remove the upper height wall assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker upper height wall assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).
2. Release four inner tabs (callout 1) with a pointed tool.
Figure 5-1172 Release four inner tabs
Figure 5-1173 The four tabs viewed from the other side of the assembly
Remove the upper height wall assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1225

3. Release three tabs (callout 1), and then remove the height wall upper assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-1174 Remove the upper height wall assembly

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Height wall lower assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker lower height wall.

RM2-3844-000CN Height wall lower assembly (FSSS)
Required tools
Post service test


2) to remove it.

1





1


1


2 2
1 1
6. Remove the lower height wall (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker lower height wall.

2. Release two inner tabs (callout 1) with a pointed tool.
Figure 5-1187 Release two inner tabs
Figure 5-1188 The two tabs viewed from the other side of the assembly
Remove the lower height wall (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1233

3. Release three tabs (callout 1), and then remove the lower height wall assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-1189 Remove the lower height wall assembly

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Lifter base upper assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker upper lifter base.

RM2-3843-000CN Lifter base upper assembly (FSSS)
Required tools
Post service test


2) to remove it.

1





1

2 2
1 1

Remove the MBM output bin (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1239

6. Remove the upper lifter base assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker upper lifter base assembly.

Do not touch the center (callout 1) of the upper lifter base assembly (callout 2) because grease is applied to
the center.
Figure 5-1202 Avoid touching the center
■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release the cable clamp (callout 2), remove eight screws (callout 3),
and then remove the upper lifter base assembly (callout 4).
Figure 5-1203 Remove the upper lifter base assembly

3
2
1
4


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Lifter base lower assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker lower lifter base.
RM2-3842-000CN Lifter base lower assembly (FSSS)
Required tools
Post service test


2) to remove it.

1



1

2 2
1 1


5. Remove the lower lifter base assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker lower lifter base assembly.

Do not touch the center (callout 1) of the lower lifter base assembly (callout 2) because grease is applied to
the center.
and then remove the lower lifter base assembly (callout 4).
Figure 5-1215 Remove the lower lifter base assembly

3
1


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Delivery assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker delivery assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the delivery assembly.
RM2-3836-000CN Paper delivery assembly (FSSS)
Required tools
Post service test


2) to remove it.

1




1


1


2 2
1 1







the center.

3
2
1
4

the center.
Remove the lower lifter base assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1257


3
1
10. Remove the delivery assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker delivery assembly.

remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the delivery assembly (callout 5).

2 4

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Punch assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker punch assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the punch assembly.

RM2-3834-000CN Punch assembly (FSSS)
Required tools
Post service test


2) to remove it.

1






1




1


2 1




9. Remove the punch assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker punch assembly.
Remove the punch assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1269

2. Remove one FFC (callout 1), disconnect seven connectors (callout 2), and then release the cable (callout
3) from the cable clamps (callout 4).
Figure 5-1259 Remove one FFC
4. Remove the punch assembly (callout 1).
Figure 5-1261 Remove the punch assembly

instructions.
Removal and replacement: SWB assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker SWB assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the SWB assembly.
RM2-3867-000CN Switch back assembly (FSSS)
Required tools

Post service test

2) to remove it.

1






2 2
1 1


1




1


2 1








the center.

3
2
1
4
12. Remove the SWB assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker SWB assembly.
Remove the SWB assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1283

1. Release one tab (callout 1), remove the sensor PCA (callout 2), disconnect one connector (callout 1), and
then release the cable (callout 4) from the cable clamps (callout 5).
2 3 5
1 4
2. Release the cable (callout 1) from the cable clamps (callout 2), and then disconnect six connectors
(callout 3).
3
1
(callout 3).
1 3

6. Remove the SWB assembly (callout 1).
Figure 5-1292 Remove the SWB assembly

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Drum assembly/door handle rail assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker drum assembly and door handle rail
assembly.
RM2-3848-000CN Drum assembly (FSSS)
RM2-3849-000CN Door handle rail assembly (FSSS)
Required tools

Post service test

2) to remove it.

1




1
2



3).

1
2 3


2 2
1 1
7. Remove the drum assembly/door handle rail assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker drum assembly and door handle rail assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Remove the drum assembly/door handle rail assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1291
2. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the door handle rail assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-1302 Remove the door handle rail assembly

1
3. Remove the drum assembly (callout 1).
Figure 5-1303 Remove the drum assembly
Reinstallation tip: When installing the drum assembly, align the projection (callout 1) on the drum
assembly (callout 2) with the mark (callout 3) on the sheet metal (callout 4).

Figure 5-1304 Align the drum
1 2 3
Reinstallation tip: When installing the door handle rail assembly and drum assembly, the shaft (callout 1)
of drum assembly is inserted into the hole (callout 2) of the door handle rail assembly, and the shaft (callout
3) is inserted into the hole (callout 4) of the door handle rail assembly.
Figure 5-1305 Lining up the shafts
2 1
3
4


instructions.
Removal and replacement: Drum drive assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker drum drive assembly.
RM2-3847-000CN Drum drive assembly (FSSS)
Required tools
Post service test

Removal and replacement: Drum drive assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1295

2) to remove it.

1




1
2




1


1







1

1 2 3
2 1
3
4
10. Remove the drum drive assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker drum drive assembly.
1. Disconnect all the connectors on the controller PCA, and then release the cables (callout 1) from the
cable clamps (callout 2).

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the controller PCA (callout 2) and the plate (callout 3)
together.
Figure 5-1328 Remove the controller PCA and the plate together
1 2
3. Release the cable (callout 1) from the cable clamps (callout 2), and then disconnect one connector
(callout 3).
4. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the drum drive assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-1330 Remove the drum drive assembly
Remove the drum drive assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1307

instructions.
Removal and replacement: IMF assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker IMF assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the IMF assembly.
RM2-3839-000CN IMF assembly (FSSS)
Required tools

Post service test

2) to remove it.

1







1


2 1

2 2
1 1



1




Remove the output bins (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1317

2 2
1 1



Remove the upper lifter base assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1319

the center.

3
2
1
4



1

1


2 3 5
1 4
(callout 3).
3
1
(callout 3).
1 3




the center.
Remove the lower lifter base assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1325


3
1


2 4


Remove the punch assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1327


1
2


3).

1
2 3

1

1 2 3
2 1
3
4
22. Remove the drum drive assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker drum drive assembly.

together.
1 2
3. Release the cable (callout 1) from the cable clamps (callout 2), and then disconnect one connector
(callout 3).
4. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the drum drive assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-1386 Remove the drum drive assembly
Remove the drum drive assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1333

23. Remove the IMF assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker IMF assembly.
■ Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the IMF assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-1387 Remove the IMF assembly

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Alignment assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing and replacing the floor-standing stapler-stacker alignment assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the alignment assembly.

RM2-3833-000CN Alignment assembly (FSSS)
Required tools
Post service test


2) to remove it.

1






1



2 1

2 2
1 1


1




Remove the rear upper cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1343



2 2
1 1




the center.

3
2
1
4

Remove the MBM top cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1347


1

1


2 3 5
1 4
(callout 3).
3
1
(callout 3).
1 3




the center.


3
1


2 4

Remove the delivery assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1353



1
2


3).

1
2 3

3).

1
3 2



Remove the foot rear cover (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1357



1
1 2 3

2 1
3
4
25. Remove the alignment assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker)

Learn about removing the floor-standing stapler-stacker alignment assembly.
Remove the alignment assembly (floor-standing stapler-stacker) 1361

together.
1 2
3. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the prop (callout 2).

5. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the prop (callout 2).
6. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the alignment assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-1450 Remove the alignment assembly
1 2


instructions.

6 Parts and diagrams
Printer parts information including exploded assembly diagrams and part number lists.

Learn about the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) parts and assemblies.
Integrated scanner assembly

Parts diagram and part list for the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).
Parts and diagrams 1365

Figure 6-1 Integrated scanner assembly
2
4
Table 6-1 Integrated scanner assembly
Ref Part number Description Qty
No
1 J1H98-60037 ADF WUR (6xxx Series Non-Workflow) 1
1 J1H98-60038 ADF WUR (6xxx Series Workflow) 1
2 6QN35-67006 Flatbed scanner 1
3 1M0Q2A HP LaserJet Workflow Keyboard
4 5851-8688 Handle (Lunar Grey Dark/ Cement Dark) 1
4 5851-8689 Handle (Lunar Comet Red Dark) 1
4 5851-8690 Handle (Lunar Cosmic Green Dark) 1
4 5851-8691 Handle (Lunar Constellation Yellow) 1
4 5851-8692 Handle (Lunar Aurora Purple Dark) 1
4 5851-8693 Handle (OOV white) 1
1366 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Table 6-1 Integrated scanner assembly (continued)
No
Not shown 5851-8849 ADF damper 1
Not shown 5851-8842 ADF hinge kit (6xxx Series) 1
Not shown 5851-8850 ADF white backing kit 1
Not shown 6H122A ADF Pick/Sep Roller Kit (6xxx Series) 1
Not shown 6M1P3A ADF Pick/Sep Roller Kit (Flow 6xxx Series) 1
Not shown 5851-8844 ADF roller cover (6xxx Series) 1
Not shown A7W12A Keyboard Overlay Kit - Chinese 1
Not shown A7W13A Keyboard Overlay Kit - (DN/FR-Swiss/GN) 1
Not shown A7W14A HP LaserJet Swedish Overlay Keyboard 1
Base printer
Learn about the printer engine parts and assemblies.
Control panels
Parts diagrams and part lists for the control panels.
Control panels
Parts diagrams and parts lists for the printer control panels.
Figure 6-2 Control panels
1
2
Table 6-2 Control panels
No
1 6QN28-67001 Control panel 10.9 cm (4.3 in) 1
2 6QN35-67003 Control panel 25.6 cm (10.1 in) 1
Base printer 1367

Table 6-2 Control panels (continued)
No
2 6QN37-67001 Control panel 23.3 cm (8 in)

Parts diagrams and part lists for the covers, panels, and doors.
Parts and diagrams: Covers 6700 models

Parts diagram and parts list for the SFP printer covers.
Figure 6-3 Covers 6700 models

SFP 6700
A07
A07 2
A07
A07 3
4
12
A01 A07
11
A02
8
9
A06
A03
A04 6 A07
LLC
7
10 A05 LLC

Table 6-3 Covers 6700 models
Key Part number Qty Description
No
1 RM2-4471-000CN 1 Face down tray assembly
2 RM2-4517-000CN 1 Cover, top assembly
3 RM2-4480-000CN 1 Formatter cover assembly
4 RC5-9168-000CN 1 Cover, rear lower
5 RM2-3665-000CN 1 Right lower door assembly
6 RC5-8516-000CN 1 Handle, right door lower
7 RC5-9199-000CN 1 Cover, front right
8 RC5-9165-000CN 1 Handle, left
9 RC5-9198-000CN 1 Cover, front left
10 RM2-4533-000CN 1 Front door assembly
11 RM2-4535-000CN 1 Left cover assembly
12 RC5-9204-000CN 1 Cover, left upper
LLC 527H3A 1 HP LaserJet MP Tray Roller Kit
Not shown RC4-0213-000CN 1 Cover, Hardware integration pocket (HIP)

Parts and diagrams: Covers X654 models
Parts diagram and parts list for the SFP printer covers.
Figure 6-4 Covers X654 models
A07
1
A07 2
16 A07 A07
3
A01 4
15
A07
14
5
13 A07
10
A07
A02
A06
A03
A04 8
A05
11
9 7
12
6
LLC
LLC
Table 6-4 Covers X654 models
No
Parts and diagrams: Covers X654 models 1371

Table 6-4 Covers X654 models (continued)
No
2 RM2-4517-000CN 1 Cover, top assembly
5 RC5-9409-000CN Cover, rear lower
12 RM2-3678-000CN 1 Toner supply door assembly
14 RC5-9408-000CN 1 Left lower cover

Parts and diagrams: Covers 6800 models
Parts diagram and parts list for the MFP printer covers.
Figure 6-5 Covers 6800 models

MFP 6800
A07
1
A07
A07
3
A07
5
4
6
14
A01 A07
13
A02
10
11
A06
A03
A04 8 A07
LLC
9
12 A05 LLC
Table 6-5 Covers 6800 models
No
2 RC5-9172-000CN 1 Cover, top assembly
3 RM2-4518-000CN 1 Top front cover assembly
Parts and diagrams: Covers 6800 models 1373

Table 6-5 Covers 6800 models (continued)
No

Parts and diagrams: Covers X677 models
Figure 6-6 Covers X677 models

MFP X677
A07
1
A07
A07
18 A07 3
5
4
A01 6
17
A07
16
7
15 A07
12
A07
A02
A06
A03
A04 10
A05
13
9
11
14
8
LLC
LLC
Parts and diagrams: Covers X677 models 1375

Table 6-6 Covers X677 models
No
2 RC5-9172-000CN 1 Cover, top assembly
3 RM2-4518-000CN 1 Top front cover assembly
14 RM2-3678-000CN 1 Toner supply door assembly
16 RC5-9408-000CN 1 Left lower cover

Parts diagrams and part lists for the internal parts and assemblies.
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 7)6700/6800 models

Parts diagram and parts list for the internal printer assemblies.
Figure 6-7 Internal assemblies (1 of 7) 6700/6800 models

A30
3 A01 A28
A27
2
6
A30
5
1 4
A29
SFP 6700/MFP 6800 7
11 (J102) A28
A26
(J191)
B
SFP 6700/MFP 6800
A25 A02
(J338)
(J338D)
10
A23 A03
A24 A19
A30 A04
A22 A20 A05
A A06
A21
8
A07
A16
A17 A30
A18 A30 LLC
EDISON/EDISON mSKU/CURIE
A15 A
A10 (J326)
(J942)
(J203) A08
(J216)
A14
(J209A)
9
A09
A13
(J943A) (J944A)
B A30
A12
A11
Internal parts and assemblies 1377

Table 6-7 Internal assemblies (1 of 7) 6700/6800 models
Ref Part number Qty Description
No
1 RM2-3504-000CN Main drive assembly
2 RM2-3625-000CN 1 Developing motor assembly
3 RM3-7647-000CN 1 Drum position sensor PCA
4 RM3-7788-000CN 1 Drum motor assembly
5 RM2-7360-000CN 1 T1 solenoid assembly
6 RK2-6027-000CN 1 Motor, stepping
7 RM3-7797-000CN 1 ITB motor assembly
8 RM3-7792-000CN 1 Right PCA
9 RM3-7722-000CN 1 Driver PCA
10 RM2-3787-000CN 1 Laser scanner assembly
11 RK3-0825-000CN 1 Cable, flat SCN


SFP 6700/MFP 6800
1
(J351)
MFP 6800
A02
SFP 6700/MFP 6800 A20 (J124D)
LLC A01 A20 (J124)
A03
A20
A18 A19
SFP 6700/MFP 6800
A17
A04
A16
LLC
A15
A14 (J305/J315)
A20 A05
2
A20 A13 (J314)

A12 A10 (J311)
A20 (J313)
4 (J312)
A20
A04
(J353) 3 A20
A11
HOPPER/BELL
A06
A09 5
A08
A20
A07
No
1 RM2-3518-000CN 1 Waste toner duct assembly
2 RM2-3586-000CN 1 Secondary transfer assembly 6700
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (2 of 7)6700/6800 models 1379

Table 6-8 Internal assemblies (2 of 7) 6700/6800 models (continued)
No
3 RM2-4458-000CN 1 Registration assembly
4 RM2-4492-000CN 1 Density detect assembly
5 RM2-3565-000CN 1 Pre-exposure PCA holder
Not shown as 527F9A 1 HP LaserJet Toner Collection Unit

Ref No


SFP 6700
A18
1
2
2
A01
3 A01
1 3
SFP 6700/MFP 6800
MFP 6800 8 A18
A06 A07 A18
A04 A15
A18 4
6
A05 A03
1 (J931)
2 A08 7
9 A
3 A01 (J206)
A09
10
A17
A15
A18
A14
A10
A17 A11
(J130)
A14 A13 (J125)
A (J204)
(J121)
A18 (J905D)
A12 (J290)
(J292)
(J293)
A16
No
1 RM2-4520-000CN 1 Formatter case assembly (6700)
1 RM2-4521-000CN 1 Formatter case assembly (MFP 6800)
2 RM2-7138-000CN 1 Memory PC board assembly
3 RK3-0817-000CN 1 Cable, flat FMTR
3 RK3-0837-000 1 CABLE, FLAT, FMTR

No
4 RM2-4488-000CN 1 Fixing motor assembly
5 RM2-4489-000CN 1 Motor assembly
7 RM2-4487-000CN 1 Fixing drive assembly
8 RK3-0762-000CN 1 Fan
9 RK3-0762-000CN 1 Fan
10 RM2-3555-000CN 1 Paper delivery assembly (6700)
10 RM2-3556-000CN 1 Paper delivery assembly (MFP 6800)
10 RM2-3556-000CN 1 Paper delivery assembly (MFP 6800)
Not shown as 1M0Q0A 1 HP MFP Analog Fax 702 Accessory

Ref No
Not shown as 1M0Q1A 1 HP MFP Analog Fax 703 Accessory

Ref No
Not shown as 1M0Q3A 1 HP JetDirect 3200w BLE/Wireless accessory

Ref No
Not shown as 1M0Q4A 1 HP LaserJet Secure Solid State Drive

Ref No
Not shown as 1M0Q5A 1 HP LaserJet Workflow Accelerator Card

Ref No
Not shown as 1M8J0A 1 HP 4GB DDR3Lx64 204-pin 933MHz DIMM

Ref No
Not shown as 1M8J1A 1 HP 4GB DDR3Lx64 204-pin 933MHz DIMM TAA

Ref No
Not shown as 3JN69A 1 HP JetDirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless accessory

Ref No
Not shown as 527G0A 1 HP LaserJet 110V Fuser Kit

Ref No
Not shown as 527G1A 1 HP LaserJet 220V Fuser Kit

Ref No
Not shown as 527G2A 1 HP LaserJet 110V Enhanced Fuser Kit

Ref No

Ref No

Ref No

Ref No
Not shown as 6HN31A 1 HP 500GB CCC FIPS TAA Hard Disk Drive
Ref No
Not shown as 6QY68A 1 HP 2GB DDR3Lx32 120-pin 933MHz DIMM

Ref No

No
Not shown as 9EQ11A 1 HP 500GB CCC FIPS Hard Disk Drive

Ref No
Not shown as B5L32-60002 1 eMMC 16GB

Ref No
Not shown as B5L32-67001 1 eMMC 32GB

Ref No
Not shown as L41606-011 1 HP Removable Hard Drive Enclosure

Ref No
Not shown as NA 1 HDD, 500GB 5400RPM FIPS/CCC OPAL2 7MM

Ref No


SFP 6700/MFP 6800
2
A04
A03
1
(J132) (J131)
(J261)
A02 (J262)
(J121D)
A06
(J354) (J136A/J136B)
(J706L)
(J138/
(J706D) (J121)
A05 J137A)
(J104)
(J323/J322A)
A19 5 6
A19 (J321A/J321B)
(J208)
A20
9 4 (J103)
3
7
(J207)
A17
(J115)
(J114)
A16 8
A07 (J301)
(J302)
A20
A15
A
A14
A13
SFP 6700/MFP 6800

A20
A18
A11
A12
A10
A
A09
SFP 6700/MFP 6800
No
1 RK3-0760-000CN 1 Fan
2 RK3-1509-000CN 1 Cable, flat HVT

No
3 RM3-9045-000CN 1 Rear PCA
4 RM3-7753-000CN 1 DC controller PCA
5 RK3-1692-000CN 1 Cable, flat rear
6 RK3-0821-000CN 1 Cable, flat drive
8 RK3-1694-000CN 1 Cable, flat right
9 RM3-9041-000CN 1 HV power supply PCA
Not shown 6QN32-67002 1 Formatter (67xx / X65xxx)
Not shown 6QN32-67004 1 Formatter (67xx / X65xxx) (China/India)


4 MFP 6800
SFP 6700/MFP 6800 (J243F)

(J106)
(J202A) (J112) A01 (J247)
1 2 (J248) 3 A03 A04
(J246)
A02
(J1) (J243)
(J379)
(J105)
A12
A11
A05
A06
A07
A08
A10
A09
LLC
No
1 RM2-3676-000CN 1 Interlock assembly
2 RK3-2277-000CN 1 Fan
3 WP2-5473-000CN 1 Sensor, humidity HSU-08FDB2A
4 RK3-0827-000CN 1 Cable, flat LVPS
5 RM3-7726-000CN 1 LVPS (110-127V) (6700)
5 RM3-7727-000CN 1 LVPS (220-240V) (6700)
5 RM3-7728-000CN 1 LVPS (110-127V) (MFP 6800)
5 RM3-7729-000CN 1 LVPS (220-240V) (MFP 6800)
LLC 527G8A 1 HP LaserJet Image Transfer Belt
LLC 527G9A 1 HP LaserJet Image Transfer Belt Kit


A11
(J336)
2
(J336D)
SFP 6700/ A11

MFP 6800
4
(J346)
SFP 6700/
MFP 6800
(J337A) 3
A10
A11
A11 5
A01
A11 A09
A07 A06
(J316A)
A11
LLC
A08 6
A11
LLC
A05 A11 A04 A02 A11
A11 A11
A03
No
1 RM2-3559-000CN 1 Auto close assembly
2 RM3-8001-000CN 1 Drawer cable assembly
3 RM2-3585-000CN 1 Size detect assembly
4 RM2-3500-000CN 1 Lifter drive assembly
5 RM2-3682-000CN 1 Paper pickup drive assembly

No
6 RM2-3508-000CN 1 Paper pickup assembly
7 RM2-3616-000CN 1 Cassette assembly
LLC 527H2A 1 HP LaserJet Tray 2-x Roller Kit


1
No
1 W2130A 1 HP 213A Black Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
1 W2130X 1 HP 2130X High Yield Black Toner Cartridge
1 W2130Y 1 HP 213Y Extra High Yield Black Toner Cartridge
1 W2130YC 1 HP W2130YC Black Contract Toner Cartridge
1 W2131A 1 HP 213A Cyan Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
1 W2131X 1 HP 2131X High Yield Cyan Toner Cartridge
1 W2131Y 1 HP 213Y Extra High Yield Cyan Toner Cartridge
1 W2131YC 1 HP W2131YC Cyan Contract Toner Cartridge
1 W2132A 1 HP 213A Yellow Original LaserJet Toner
1 W2132X 1 HP 2132X High Yield Yellow Toner Cartridge
1 W2132Y 1 HP 213Y Extra High Yield Yellow Toner Cartridge
1 W2132YC 1 HP W2132YC Yellow Contract Toner Cartridge
1 W2133A 1 HP 213A Magenta LaserJet Toner Cartridge
1 W2133X 1 HP 2133X High Yield Magenta Toner Cartridge
1 W2133Y 1 HP 213Y Extra High Yield Magenta Toner

Cartridge
1 W2133YC 1 HP W2133YC Magenta Contract Toner Cartridge
1 W2140Z 1 HP 214Z Ultra High Yield Black Toner Cartridge

(SFP)
1 W2140ZC 1 HP W2140ZC Black Contract Toner Cartridge

(SFP)
1 W2141Z 1 HP 214Z Ultra High Yield Cyan Toner Cartridge

(SFP)
1 W2141ZC 1 HP W2141ZC Cyan Contract Toner Cartridge

(SFP)
1 W2142Z 1 HP 214Z Ultra High Yield Yellow Toner Cartridge

(SFP)

No
1 W2142ZC 1 HP W2142ZC Yellow Contract Toner Cartridge

(SFP)
1 W2143Z 1 HP 214Z Ultra High Yield Magenta Toner

Cartridge (SFP)
1 W2143ZC 1 HP W2143ZC Magenta Contract Toner Cartridge

(SFP)
1 W2170Z 1 HP 217Z Ultra High Yield Black Toner Cartridge

(MFP)
1 W2170ZC 1 HP W2170ZC Black Contract Toner Cartridge

(MFP)
1 W2171Z 1 HP 217Z Ultra High Yield Cyan Toner Cartridge

(MFP)
1 W2171ZC 1 HP W2171ZC Cyan Contract Toner Cartridge

(MFP)
1 W2172Z 1 HP 217Z Ultra High Yield Yellow Toner Cartridge

(MFP)
1 W2172ZC 1 HP W2172ZC Yellow Contract Tone Cartridge

(MFP)
1 W2173Z 1 HP 217Z Ultra High Yield Magenta Toner

Cartridge (MFP)
1 W2173ZC 1 HP W2173ZC Magenta Contract Toner Cartridge

(MFP)

Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 9)X654/X677 models
Figure 6-14 Internal assemblies (1 of 9) X654/X677 models

A32
3 A01 A30
A29
2
6
A30
5
1 4
A31
SFP X654/MFP X677
7
11
A30
A28 B
A27
(J338)
(J338D)
A02
10
A25 A03
A26 A21
A32 A04
A24 A22 A05
A A06
A23
8
A07
A18
A19 A32
A20 A32 LLC
A16
A15
A
A10 (J326)
A17
(J942)
(J203) A08
(J216)
(J209B)
A14
9
A09
A13 B A32
(J944B)
A12
A11
Table 6-14 Internal assemblies (1 of 9) X654/X677 models
No
1 RM2-3497-000CN Main drive assembly
2 RM2-3625-000CN 1 Developing motor assembly
3 RM3-7647-000CN 1 Drum position sensor PCA
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 9)X654/X677 models 1391

Table 6-14 Internal assemblies (1 of 9) X654/X677 models (continued)
No
4 RM3-7788-000CN 1 Drum motor assembly
5 RM2-7360-000CN 1 T1 solenoid assembly
6 RK2-6027-000CN 1 Motor, stepping
7 RM3-7797-000CN 1 ITB motor assembly
9 RM3-7722-000CN 1 Driver PCA
10 RM2-3787-000CN 1 Laser scanner assembly
11 RK3-0825-000CN 1 Cable, flat SCN


1
MFP X677
(J351) A02
A21 (J124D)
LLC
A01 A21 (J124)
A03
A19
A21
A20
A18
SFP X654/MFP X677

A17
LLC
A16
A15 (J135)
A21
A04
A10
2
A11
A21 A14 (J314)
A13 (J311)
(J313)
A21 4
A21 (J312)
A12
A21
(J355) 3 A21
(J353)
A21
A08
A09
A05
5
A21
A06
A07
No
1 RM2-3590-000CN 1 Waste toner duct assembly
3 RM2-4458-000CN 1 Registration assembly
4 RM2-4492-000CN 1 Density detect assembly
5 RM2-3673-000CN 1 Pre-exposure PCA holder
Not shown 527F9A 1 HP LaserJet Toner collection unit (TCU)

Figure 6-16 Internal assemblies (3 of 9)X654/X677 models

MFP X677 SFP X654
A19 A19
A02
1
2
2
A01
3 A01 1 3
SFP X654/MFP X677
8 A19
A06 A07 A19
A04 A16
4
6
A05 A03
(J931)
A08 7
8 A
(J206)
A09
A19
10
A16 A18
A19
A15
A10
A18 A11
A13
(J130)
A14 (J125)
A15
A (J204)
(J121)
A19 (J905D)
A12 (J290)
(J292)
(J293)
A17
No
1 RM2-4521-000CN 1 Formatter case assembly
2 RM2-7138-000CN 1 Memory PC board assembly
3 RK3-0817-000CN 1 Cable, flat FMTR (X654)
3 RK3-0847-000CN 1 Cable, flat FMTR (X677)
4 RM2-4488-000CN 1 Fixing motor assembly

No
5 RM2-4489-000CN 1 Motor assembly
7 RM2-4487-000CN 1 Fixing drive assembly
8 RK3-0762-000CN 2 Fan
10 RM2-3555-000CN 1 Paper delivery assembly (MFP X677)
10 RM2-3556-000CN 1 Paper delivery assembly (MFP X677)
Not shown 1M0Q0A 1 HP MFP Analog Fax 702 Accessory
Not shown 1M0Q1A 1 HP MFP Analog Fax 703 Accessory
Not shown 1M0Q3A 1 HP JetDirect 3200w BLE/Wireless accessory
Not shown as 1M0Q4A 1 HP LaserJet Secure Solid State Drive

Ref No
Not shown 1M0Q5A 1 HP LaserJet Workflow Accelerator Card
Not shown 1M8J0A 1 HP 4GB DDR3Lx64 204-pin 933MHz DIMM
Not shown 1M8J1A 1 HP 4GB DDR3Lx64 204-pin 933MHz DIMM TAA
Not shown 3JN69A 1 HP JetDirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless accessory
Not shown 527G0A 1 HP LaserJet 110V Fuser Kit
Not shown 527G1A 1 HP LaserJet 220V Fuser Kit
Not shown 527G2A 1 HP LaserJet 110V Enhanced Fuser Kit
Not shown 527G4MC 1 HP LaserJet Mngd 110V Enhanced Fuser Kit
Not shown 527G5MC 1 HP LaserJet Mngd 220V Enhanced Fuser Kit
Not shown 6HN31A 1 HP 500GB CCC FIPS TAA Hard Disk Drive
Not shown 6QY68A 1 HP 2GB DDR3Lx32 120-pin 933MHz DIMM
Not shown 9EQ11A 1 HP 500GB CCC FIPS Hard Disk Drive
Not shown B5L32-60002 1 eMMC 16GB
Not shown B5L32-67001 1 eMMC 32GB
Not shown L41606-011 1 HP Removable Hard Drive Enclosure
Not shown NA 1 HDD, 500GB 5400RPM FIPS/CCC OPAL2 7MM


SFP X654/MFP X677 2
A03
1
(J132) (J131)
(J261)
A02 (J262)
(J354) (J706L) (J136C)

(J139)
(J706D) A04
(J104)
(J324) 5
A10 A10 6
(J321C)
A11 (J208)
9 4 (J103)
3
7
(J207)
A09
(J115)
(J114)
A08 8
A05 (J301)
(J302)
A11
A07
A06
No
1 RK3-0760-000CN 1 Fan
2 RK3-1509-000CN 1 Cable, flat HVT
3 RM3-9046-000CN 1 Rear PCA
5 RK3-1693-000CN 1 Cable, flat rear
8 RK3-1694-000CN 1 Cable, flat right
9 RM3-9043-000CN 1 HV power supply PCA

No

Figure 6-18 Internal assemblies (5 of 9)X654/X677 models

4 MFP X677
SFP X654/MFP X677 (J243F)

(J106)
(J202A) (J112) A01 (J247)
1 2 (J248) 3 A03 A04
(J246)
A02
(J1) (J243)
(J379)
(J105)
A12
A11
A05
A06
A07
A08
A10
A09
LLC
No
1 RM2-3676-000CN 1 Interlock assembly
2 RK3-2277-000CN 1 Fan
3 WP2-5473-000CN 1 Sensor, humidity HSU-08FDB2A
4 RK3-0827-000CN 1 Cable, flat LVPS
5 RM3-7726-000CN 1 LVPS (110-127V) (X654)
5 RM3-7727-000CN 1 LVPS (220-240V)(X654)
5 RM3-7728-000CN 1 LVPS (110-127V)(MFP X677)
5 RM3-7729-000CN 1 LVPS (220-240V)(MFP X677)
LLC 527H0MC 1 HP LaserJet Mngd Image Transfer Belt
LLC 527H1MC 1 HP LaserJet Managed Trans Roller Kit

Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (6 of 9) X654/X677 models

A02
(J151)
(J431) (J423)
(J421) (J336C)
(J692D) (J693D)
(J957D) (J956D) (J991D)
(J694D)
(J955D) (J401) A03
(J695D) (J992D)
(J954D)
(J993D)
(J994D)
(J411)
(J412)
A22
(J416)
(J998)
(J999)
(J976)
1
(J989) A05 (J411D)
A01 A22
(J435)
A04
2 A22
(J417)
(J499)
3
(J499D)
(J410)
4
5
A21 A22
A22
A 7
B C A06 A07
D (J976)
A22
A18
A15 8
A19
A22
(J411DH)
LLC
A20
9
A22
LLC
A16
A22 A14
A12 A22
A22
A17
A22 A08
A13
A09
A11
A
10 B
C A10
No
1 RM3-7771-000CN 1 Toner supply PCA

No
4 RM2-3614-000CN 1 Size detect assembly
6 RM2-3612-000CN 1 Toner supply drive motor assembly
8 5851-7005 1 Assy-USB A F Panel Mount To WTB 335mm
10 RM2-3616-000CN 1 Cassette assembly
LLC 527H2A 1 HP LaserJet Tray 2-x Roller Kit
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (6 of 9) X654/X677 models 1401

Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (7 of 9) X654/X677 models

1
(J327B) A03
A16
A07
(J35)
A01 A02
A16
2
A16 A04
A05
A05
A16
A06
A07
A16
3
A10
A04
A14
A15
A16
A13
A12
A08
A16
A11
A15
A09
A10 A16
A04
No
1 RM2-3601-000CN 1 Waste toner carry assembly
3 RM2-3479-000CN 1 Paper feed assembly


A
A10
4
B
A09
A A10
B
3
A10
A10
A10 A08
1
A10
A09
A01
A07
A06 A02
A03
A04
A05
No
1 RM2-3609-000CN 2 Toner supply drive assembly
4 RM3-0846-000CN 1 HP Toner supply service kit
Not shown 5851-8886 1 Kit-Inline Scan Bar (Mngd)

2
1
No
1 W9240MC 2 HP W9240MC Black Mngd LaserJet Toner

Cartridge (SFP)
1 W9241MC 1 HP W9241MC Cyan Mngd LaserJet Toner

Cartridge (SFP)
1 W9242MC 1 HP W9242MC Yellow Mngd LaserJet Toner

Cartridge (SFP)
1 W9243MC 1 HP W9243MC Magenta Mngd LaserJet Toner

Cartridge (SFP)

Cartridge (MFP)

Cartridge (MFP)
1 W9252MC 1 HP W9252MC Yellow Mngd LaserJet Toner

Cartridge (MFP)

Cartridge (MFP)

Cartridge (SFP)

Cartridge (SFP)
1 W9262MC 1 HP W9262MC Yellow Mngd LaserJet Toner (SFP)

Cartridge (SFP)

Cartridge (MFP)

Cartridge (MFP)
1 W9272MC 1 HP W9272MC Yellow Mngd LaserJet Toner (MFP)

Cartridge (MFP)

No
2 W9280MC 1 HP W9280MC Black Mngd Imaging Drum
2 W9281MC 1 HP W9281MC Cyan Mngd Imaging Drum
2 W9282MC 1 HP W9282MC Yellow Mngd Imaging Drum
2 W9283MC 1 HP W9283MC Magenta Mngd Imaging Drum
Input devices
Learn about the input devices.
Input device - 550-sheet paper feeder

Learn about the 550-sheet paper feeder parts and assemblies.

Covers, panels, and doors (550-sheet paper feeder)

Parts diagram and part list for the 550-sheet paper feeder covers, panels, and doors.
Figure 6-23 550-sheet paper feeder covers, panels, and doors

6
1
A01
3 2

Table 6-23 550-sheet paper feeder covers, panels, and doors
No
1 RC5-9409-000CN Cover, rear lower 1
2 RM3-0004-000CN Right lower door assembly 1
3 RC5-9201-000CN Cover, front right 1
4 RM2-3640-000CN Cassette assembly 1
5 RC5-9200-000CN Cover, front left 1
6 RC5-9408-000CN Cover, left 1

Internal parts and assemblies (550-sheet paper feeder)

Parts diagram and part list for the 550-sheet paper feeder main body.
Figure 6-24 550-sheet paper feeder internal parts and assemblies

(J531F) A02
A17 (J544F)
(J532F)
(J63)
1 (J64)
(J21) A17
(J532FD)
(J511D)
A01 2
(J511F)
4 A17
(J551)
A17
3 (J512)
5
(J512D)
(J541)
6 7
A15 A16
A17
8
A17
A03
(SW16)
(J21) A17
A13 A12
9
A10 A04
A05 (J532)
A14 LLC
A11
A17 A05
A17
LLC
A09
A17 A08 10
A06
A17
A17
A17
A07

Table 6-24 550-sheet paper feeder internal parts and assemblies
No
1 RM3-8051-000CN Paper feeder controller PCA 1
2 RM3-8058-000CN Drawer upper cable assembly 1
3 RC5-9398-000CN Holder, drawer connector upper 1
4 RM2-3559-000CN Auto close assembly 2
5 RM3-8059-000CN Drawer lower cable assembly 1
6 RM2-3614-000CN Size detect assembly 1
7 RM2-3501-000CN Lifter drive assembly 1
8 RM2-3617-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly 1
9 5851-7005 Assy-USB A F Panel Mount To WTB 335mm 1
9 RM2-3509-000CN Paper pickup assembly 1
Not shown as 6QN57A 550-sheet paper feeder (tray) 1

Ref No

Input device - 2,100-sheet high capacity input (HCI) paper feeder
Learn about the 2,100-sheet paper feeder parts and assemblies.
Parts and diagrams: HCI covers

Parts diagram and parts list for the HCI covers.
Figure 6-25 HCI Covers

1
6
A01
A01
A01
Table 6-25 HCI Covers
No
1 RC5-9693-000CN 1 Cover, rear
3 RM3-0035-000CN 1 Right door assembly
4 RM3-0023-000CN 1 Tray assembly
6 RC5-9692-000CN 1 Cover, left
Input device - 2,100-sheet high capacity input (HCI) paper feeder 1409
Parts and diagrams: HCI main body
Parts diagram and parts list for the HCI main body.
Figure 6-26 HCI main body

(J76) A03
(J77) A01
(J74)
(J71) (J70)
(J542) (J531H)
(J82)
(J544H)
A19 (J532HD)
(J532H)
2 A06
1 A02 A05
A04 A19
(J511HD) 3
A19
(SW8/J74)
5
A19 (SW9/J76)
(SW10/J77)
(J511H)
A07
4
(J552)
6
A18
A19
7
A19
(SW13)
(J82)
A08
A19 A09
A16 A17 A19

3
A19
A10
A15 (J532)
LLC
A13 LLC
A14
9 A11
A19 A12
8
A19 A11 A19

A13
Table 6-26 HCI main body
No
1 RM3-8071-000CN 1 HCI controller PCA
3 WC2-5806-000CN 1 Button switch
4 RC5-9398-000CN 1 Holder, drawer connector upper
6 RM3-0022-000CN 1 Pick estrangement assembly
Not shown as 6QN57A 1 2,100-sheet HCI feeder/stand

Ref No

Output devices
Learn about the output devices.
Output device - Floor stand staple stacker (FSSS)

Learn about the FSSS output device.

Parts and diagrams: Floor stand staple stacker (FSSS) covers 6800/X677 models
Parts diagram and parts list for the FSSS covers.
Figure 6-27 Floor stand staple stacker covers 6800/X677 models

2
3
13
4
13
A01
12
5
10
6
11
A01
9 7
A01
A01
8
A01
Table 6-27 Floor stand staple stacker covers 6800/X677 models
No
1 RC6-0214-000CN 1 Cover, MBM front
Output devices 1411

Table 6-27 Floor stand staple stacker covers 6800/X677 models (continued)
No
2 RM2-3863-000CN 1 MBM cover assembly
3 RC5-0215-000CN 1 Cover, MBM rear
4 RM2-3864-000CN 1 Rear upper cover assembly
6 RC6-0222-000CN 1 Cover, foot rear
7 RC6-0222-000CN 1 Cover, foot rear
8 RC6-0226-000CN 1 Cover, foot front (tall model)
9 RC6-0220-000CN 1 Cover, foot front
10 RM2-3857-000CN 1 Front cover assembly
11 RC6-0229-000CN 1 Cover, foot
12 RC6-0227-000CN 1 Cover, foot center
13 RC6-0213-000CN 1 Cover, rear left

Parts and diagrams: Floor stand staple stacker (FSSS) main body 6800/X677 models (1 of 2)
Parts diagram and parts list for the FSSS printer covers.
Figure 6-28 Floor stand staple stacker main body 6800/X677 models
3
1
2
A
16
A15
A
A13 A13
15
5 4
A15 6
A15
A01
7
A15 A03
A02 A04
A06
14 A05
A15
A06
A14
13 A08
8
A07
A13
A09
A
A13
A15
A10
A15
A15 9
12
A15 A14
A11
10
A11
A12
A15
11 A12
Table 6-28 Floor stand staple stacker main body 6800/X677 models
No
2 RM2-3834-000CN 1 Punch assembly
3 RC6-0513-000CN 1 Tray, MBM
4 RM3-7934-000CN 1 Sensor PCA
5 RM2-3867-000CN 1 Switch back assembly

Table 6-28 Floor stand staple stacker main body 6800/X677 models (continued)
No
6 RC6-0186-000CN 1 Cover, front inner upper
7 RM2-3839-000CN 1 IMF assembly
8 RM3-7937-000CN 1 LED PCA
9 RM3-7738-000CN 1 Sensor PCA
10 RM2-3865-000CN 1 Punch box assembly
11 RM2-3862-000CN 1 Lower front inner cover assembly
12 RM2-3842-000CN 1 Lifter base lower assembly
13 RM2-3844-000CN 1 Height wall lower assembly
14 RM2-3836-000CN 1 Paper delivery assembly
15 RM2-3843-000CN 1 Lifter base upper assembly
16 RM2-3845-000CN 1 Height wall upper assembly

Parts and diagrams: Floor stand staple stacker (FSSS) main body 6800/X677 models (2 of 2)
Parts diagram and parts list for the FSSS printer covers.
Figure 6-29 Floor stand staple stacker main body 6800/X677 models
(J83)
(J79) (J88)
(J89)
A21 (J68) (J76)
(J77D)
(J138D) (J80D)
(J140D) (J87) A03
(J85D) (J750D) (J792D) (J790D)
A04
A01 A02
(J760)
(J173) A05
(J167)
(J750)
(J761) (J72)
A21
(J751) (J792) (J790)
(J752) (J741) (J768)
2 (J765) (J780)
3 (J766)
A07
1 A08
(J871) (J716)
A09
A06
A19
4
A10
A A12 A11
A18
A21
A13 A21
A21
A A21
A21 A21
8 5
10 A14
A21
9
A17 A
A13
A21
A20
A16
A21 6
A15
A21
Table 6-29 Floor stand staple stacker main body 6800/X677 models
No
1 RM2-3848-000CN 1 Drum assembly
2 RM2-3847-000CN 1 Drum drive assembly
3 RM2-3854-000CN 1 Sub power supply assembly
4 RM3-7931-000CN 1 Staple stacker PCA
5 RM2-3866-000CN 1 Side plate assembly right
6 RM2-3833-000CN 1 Alignment assembly
Parts and diagrams: Floor stand staple stacker (FSSS) main body 6800/X677 models (2 of 2) 1415
Table 6-29 Floor stand staple stacker main body 6800/X677 models (continued)
No
7 RK2-8148-000CN 1 Stapler assembly
8 RM2-3849-000CN 1 Door handle rail assembly
9 RC6-2402-000CN 1 Cover, front inner right lower
10 RM2-3861-000CN 1 Front inner cover assembly
Output device - Intermediate paper transfer unit (IPTU)

Learn about the IPTU output device.
Parts and diagrams: Intermediate paper transfer unit 6800/X677 models

Figure 6-30 Intermediate paper transfer unit 6800/X677 models

2
1
A02
A01
A02
Table 6-30 Intermediate paper transfer unit 6800/X677 models
No
1 RM2-3858-000CN 1 Paper feed assembly
2 RC6-2406-000CN 1 Cover, harness
3 RM2-3859-000CN 1 Connecting assembly
Output device - 3-bin staple stacker

Learn about the 3-bin staple stacker output device.

Parts and diagrams: 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/X677 models

Figure 6-31 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/X677 models

A03
1
A02
A03
9 10
A01
A03 3
7 4
5
6
A03
Table 6-31 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/X677 models
No
2 RC6-1307-000CN 1 Cover, corner right
3 RC6-1308-000CN 1 Cover, right upper
4 RM2-4167-000CN 1 Right door assembly
5 RC6-1309-000CN 1 Cover, right lower
6 RC6-1310-000CN 1 Cover, stapler rear
7 RM3-0483-000CN 1 Staple cover assembly
8 RM3-0484-000CN 1 Staple door assembly
9 RM3-0485-000CN 1 Rear inner cover assembly
10 RC6-2356-000CN 1 Cover, left front

Parts and diagrams: 3 bin staple stacker main body 6800/X677 models
Figure 6-32 3 bin staple stacker main body 6800/X677 models

4
3
(J401B)
(J101B) A05
2
A25 5
2 (J9916)
A04 (J1240)
1 (J503B) A25
(J402B)
(J301B) A06
A25
A07
A01 (J15) 6
A02
(FAN21)
A24 (J505B)
A03
A09
A25 A10 A08
13
(M22)
(J15)
A25
A11 A23
7
A13
A22 (SW21)
A14
A10
12 A12
A25 A14
(J301B)
A21 A25 10 (J302B)
A17
A18
A19 9 (J204C)
(J205) (J203C)
(J201C)
A20 (J502B)
(SW4)
(J7301D) 8
(J27)
(J19)
(J26) A15
A25
11 A25
A16
A25
Table 6-32 3 bin staple stacker main body 6800/X677 models
No
1 RM2-4168-000CN 1 Lower paper feed assembly
2 RC5-0353-000CN 1 Pin, tray fixed
4 RM3-0481-000CN 1 Jog assembly
5 RM3-7950-000CN 1 Staple stacker PCA
6 RK2-8153-000CN 1 Fan

Table 6-32 3 bin staple stacker main body 6800/X677 models (continued)
No
7 RK2-8149-000CN 1 Motor, stepping DC
8 RM2-4169-000CN 1 Upper paper feed assembly
9 RK2-8148-000CN 1 Stapler assembly
10 RM2-1040-010CN 1 Solenoid assembly
12 WC4-5136-000CN 1 Microswitch
13 RM3-0480-000CN 1 Stacking wall assembly
Parts and diagrams: 3 bin staple stacker main body 6800/X677 models 1419
Alphabetical parts list
Table 6-33 Alphabetical parts list
Description Part number Table and page
2,100-sheet HCI feeder/stand 6QN57A HCI main body on page 1410
550-sheet paper feeder (tray) 6QN57A 550-sheet paper feeder internal

parts and assemblies on page
1408
ADF Pick/Sep Roller Kit (6xxx Series) 6H122A Integrated scanner assembly on
page 1366
ADF Pick/Sep Roller Kit (Flow 6xxx Series) 6M1P3A Integrated scanner assembly on
page 1366
ADF WUR (6xxx Series Non-Workflow) J1H98-60037 Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
ADF WUR (6xxx Series Workflow) J1H98-60038 Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
ADF damper 5851-8849 Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
ADF hinge kit (6xxx Series) 5851-8842 Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
ADF roller cover (6xxx Series) 5851-8844 Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
ADF white backing kit 5851-8850 Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
Alignment assembly RM2-3833-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main

body 6800/X677 models on page
1415
Assy-USB A F Panel Mount To WTB 335mm 5851-7005 Internal assemblies (6 of 9)

X654/X677 models on page
1400
Assy-USB A F Panel Mount To WTB 335mm 5851-7005 Internal assemblies (7 of 9)

1402
Assy-USB A F Panel Mount To WTB 335mm 5851-7005 550-sheet paper feeder internal
1408
Assy-USB A F Panel Mount To WTB 335mm 5851-7005 3 bin staple stacker main body
6800/X677 models on page
1418
Auto close assembly RM2-0918-000CN HCI main body on page 1410
Auto close assembly RM2-3559-000CN Internal assemblies (6 of 7)

6700/6800 models on page
1387
Auto close assembly RM2-3559-000CN Internal assemblies (6 of 9)

1400
Auto close assembly RM2-3559-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder internal

1408

Table 6-33 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Button switch WC2-5806-000CN HCI main body on page 1410
CABLE, FLAT, FMTR RK3-0837-000 Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
Cable, flat FMTR RK3-0817-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381

1395

1395
Cable, flat HVT RK3-1509-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 7)

1384
Cable, flat HVT RK3-1509-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 9)

1397
Cable, flat LVPS RK3-0827-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 7)

1386
Cable, flat LVPS RK3-0827-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 9)

1399
Cable, flat SCN RK3-0825-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 7)

1378
Cable, flat SCN RK3-0825-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 9)

1391
Cable, flat drive RK3-0819-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 7)

1384

1397

1384

1397
Cable, flat rear RK3-1692-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 7)

1384
Cable, flat rear RK3-1693-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 9)

1397
Alphabetical parts list 1421

Cable, flat right RK3-1694-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 7)

1384
Cable, flat right RK3-1694-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 9)

1397
Cassette assembly RM2-3616-000CN Internal assemblies (6 of 7)

1387
Cassette assembly RM2-3616-000CN Internal assemblies (6 of 9)

1400
Cassette assembly RM2-3640-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder covers,

panels, and doors on page 1407
Connecting assembly RM2-3859-000CN Intermediate paper transfer unit

1416
Control panel 10.9 cm 4.3 in 6QN28-67001 Control panels on page 1367
Control panel 23.3 cm 8 in 6QN37-67001 Control panels on page 1367
Control panel 25.6 cm 10.1 in 6QN35-67003 Control panels on page 1367
Cover, Hardware integration pocket (HIP) RC4-0213-000CN Covers 6700 models on page
1370
Cover, Hardware integration pocket (HIP) RC4-0213-000CN Covers X654 models on page
1371
Cover, Hardware integration pocket (HIP) RC4-0213-000CN Covers 6800 models on page
1373
Cover, Hardware integration pocket (HIP) RC4-0213-000CN Covers X677 models on page
1376
Cover, MBM front RC6-0214-000CN Floor stand staple stacker covers

1411
Cover, MBM rear RC5-0215-000CN Floor stand staple stacker covers

1411
Cover, corner right RC6-1307-000CN 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/

X677 models on page 1417
Cover, foot RC6-0229-000CN Floor stand staple stacker covers

1411
Cover, foot center RC6-0227-000CN Floor stand staple stacker covers

1411
Cover, foot front RC6-0220-000CN Floor stand staple stacker covers

1411

Cover, foot front (tall model) RC6-0226-000CN Floor stand staple stacker covers
1411
Cover, foot rear RC6-0222-000CN Floor stand staple stacker covers

1411
Cover, foot rear RC6-0222-000CN Floor stand staple stacker covers

1411
Cover, front inner right lower RC6-2402-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main
1415
Cover, front inner upper RC6-0186-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main
1413
Cover, front left RC5-9198-000CN Covers 6700 models on page

1370
Cover, front left RC5-9198-000CN Covers X654 models on page

1371
Cover, front left RC5-9198-000CN Covers 6800 models on page

1373
Cover, front left RC5-9198-000CN Covers X677 models on page

1376
Cover, front left RC5-9200-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder covers,

Cover, front left RC5-9696-000CN HCI Covers on page 1409
Cover, front right RC5-9199-000CN Covers 6700 models on page

1370
Cover, front right RC5-9199-000CN Covers X654 models on page

1371
Cover, front right RC5-9199-000CN Covers 6800 models on page

1373
Cover, front right RC5-9199-000CN Covers X677 models on page

1376
Cover, front right RC5-9201-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder covers,

Cover, harness RC6-2406-000CN Intermediate paper transfer unit

1416
Cover, left RC5-9408-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder covers,

Cover, left RC5-9692-000CN HCI Covers on page 1409
Cover, left front RC6-2356-000CN 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/

Cover, left upper RC5-9204-000CN Covers 6700 models on page

1370

Cover, left upper RC5-9204-000CN Covers X654 models on page

1371
Cover, left upper RC5-9204-000CN Covers 6800 models on page

1373
Cover, left upper RC5-9204-000CN Covers X677 models on page

1376
Cover, rear RC5-0223-000CN Floor stand staple stacker covers

1411
Cover, rear RC5-9693-000CN HCI Covers on page 1409
Cover, rear RC6-1305-000CN 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/

Cover, rear left RC6-0213-000CN Floor stand staple stacker covers

1411
Cover, rear lower RC5-9168-000CN Covers 6700 models on page

1370
Cover, rear lower RC5-9168-000CN Covers X654 models on page

1371
Cover, rear lower RC5-9168-000CN Covers 6800 models on page

1373

1376

1371

1376
Cover, rear lower RC5-9409-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder covers,

Cover, rear lower RC5-9695-000CN HCI Covers on page 1409
Cover, right lower RC6-1309-000CN 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/

Cover, right upper RC6-1308-000CN 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/

Cover, stapler rear RC6-1310-000CN 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/

Cover, top assembly RC5-9172-000CN Covers 6800 models on page

1373
Cover, top assembly RC5-9172-000CN Covers X677 models on page

1376
Cover, top assembly RM2-4517-000CN Covers 6700 models on page

1370
Cover, top assembly RM2-4517-000CN Covers X654 models on page

1371

DC controller PCA RM3-7753-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 7)

1384

1384

1397
Density detect assembly RM2-4492-000CN Internal assemblies (2 of 7)

1379
Density detect assembly RM2-4492-000CN Internal assemblies (2 of 9)

1393
Developing motor assembly RM2-3625-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 7)

1378
Developing motor assembly RM2-3625-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 9)

1391
Door handle rail assembly RM2-3849-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main
1415
Drawer cable assembly RM3-8001-000CN Internal assemblies (6 of 7)

1387
Drawer cable assembly RM3-8038-000CN Internal assemblies (6 of 9)

1400
Drawer cable assembly RM3-8079-000CN HCI main body on page 1410
Drawer lower cable assembly RM3-8059-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder internal

1408
Drawer upper cable assembly RM3-8058-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder internal

1408
Driver PCA RM3-7722-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 7)

1378
Driver PCA RM3-7722-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 9)

1391
Drum assembly RM2-3848-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main

1415
Drum drive assembly RM2-3847-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main

1415

Drum motor assembly RM3-7788-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 7)

1378
Drum motor assembly RM3-7788-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 9)

1391
Drum position sensor PCA RM3-7647-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 7)

1378
Drum position sensor PCA RM3-7647-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 9)

1391
Face down tray assembly RM2-4471-000CN Covers 6700 models on page

1370
Face down tray assembly RM2-4471-000CN Covers X654 models on page

1371
Face down tray assembly RM2-4471-000CN Covers 6800 models on page

1373
Face down tray assembly RM2-4471-000CN Covers X677 models on page

1376
Fan RK2-8153-000CN 3 bin staple stacker main body

1418
Fan RK3-0760-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 7)

1384

1397

1381

1381

1395

1386

1399
Fixing drive assembly RM2-4487-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381

Fixing drive assembly RM2-4487-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
Fixing motor assembly RM2-4488-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
Fixing motor assembly RM2-4488-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
Flatbed scanner 6QN35-67006 Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
Formatter (67xx / X65xxx) 6QN32-67002 Internal assemblies (4 of 7)

1384

1397
Formatter (67xx / X65xxx) (China/India) 6QN32-67004 Internal assemblies (4 of 7)

1384

1397

1384

1397

1384

1397
Formatter case assembly RM2-4520-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381

1381

1395
Formatter cover assembly RM2-4480-000CN Covers 6700 models on page

1370
Formatter cover assembly RM2-4480-000CN Covers X654 models on page

1371


1373

1376

1373

1376
Front cover assembly RM2-3857-000CN Floor stand staple stacker covers

1411
Front door assembly RM2-4479-000CN Covers X654 models on page

1371
Front door assembly RM2-4479-000CN Covers X677 models on page

1376
Front door assembly RM2-4533-000CN Covers 6700 models on page

1370
Front door assembly RM2-4533-000CN Covers 6800 models on page

1373
Front inner cover assembly RM2-3861-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main
1415
HCI controller PCA RM3-8071-000CN HCI main body on page 1410
HDD, 500GB 5400RPM FIPS/CCC OPAL2 7MM NA Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
HDD, 500GB 5400RPM FIPS/CCC OPAL2 7MM NA Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
HP 2130X High Yield Black Toner Cartridge W2130X Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
HP 2131X High Yield Cyan Toner Cartridge W2131X Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
HP 2132X High Yield Yellow Toner Cartridge W2132X Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
HP 2133X High Yield Magenta Toner Cartridge W2133X Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
HP 213A Black Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge W2130A Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
HP 213A Cyan Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge W2131A Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389

HP 213A Magenta LaserJet Toner Cartridge W2133A Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
HP 213A Yellow Original LaserJet Toner W2132A Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
HP 213Y Extra High Yield Black Toner Cartridge W2130Y Internal assemblies (7 of 7)
1389
HP 213Y Extra High Yield Cyan Toner Cartridge W2131Y Internal assemblies (7 of 7)
1389
HP 213Y Extra High Yield Magenta Toner Cartridge W2133Y Internal assemblies (7 of 7)
1389
HP 213Y Extra High Yield Yellow Toner Cartridge W2132Y Internal assemblies (7 of 7)
1389
HP 214Z Ultra High Yield Black Toner Cartridge (SFP) W2140Z Internal assemblies (7 of 7)
1389
HP 214Z Ultra High Yield Cyan Toner Cartridge (SFP) W2141Z Internal assemblies (7 of 7)
1389
HP 214Z Ultra High Yield Magenta Toner Cartridge (SFP) W2143Z Internal assemblies (7 of 7)
1389
HP 214Z Ultra High Yield Yellow Toner Cartridge (SFP) W2142Z Internal assemblies (7 of 7)
1389
HP 217Z Ultra High Yield Black Toner Cartridge (MFP) W2170Z Internal assemblies (7 of 7)
1389
HP 217Z Ultra High Yield Cyan Toner Cartridge (MFP) W2171Z Internal assemblies (7 of 7)
1389
HP 217Z Ultra High Yield Magenta Toner Cartridge (MFP) W2173Z Internal assemblies (7 of 7)
1389
HP 217Z Ultra High Yield Yellow Toner Cartridge (MFP) W2172Z Internal assemblies (7 of 7)
1389
HP 2GB DDR3Lx32 120-pin 933MHz DIMM 6QY68A Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
HP 2GB DDR3Lx32 120-pin 933MHz DIMM 6QY68A Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395

HP 4GB DDR3Lx64 204-pin 933MHz DIMM 1M8J0A Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
HP 4GB DDR3Lx64 204-pin 933MHz DIMM 1M8J0A Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
HP 4GB DDR3Lx64 204-pin 933MHz DIMM TAA 1M8J1A Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
HP 4GB DDR3Lx64 204-pin 933MHz DIMM TAA 1M8J1A Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
HP 500GB CCC FIPS Hard Disk Drive 9EQ11A Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
HP 500GB CCC FIPS Hard Disk Drive 9EQ11A Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
HP 500GB CCC FIPS TAA Hard Disk Drive 6HN31A Internal assemblies (3 of 7)
1381
HP 500GB CCC FIPS TAA Hard Disk Drive 6HN31A Internal assemblies (3 of 9)
1395
HP JetDirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless accessory 3JN69A Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
HP JetDirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless accessory 3JN69A Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
HP JetDirect 3200w BLE/Wireless accessory 1M0Q3A Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
HP JetDirect 3200w BLE/Wireless accessory 1M0Q3A Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
HP LaserJet 110V Enhanced Fuser Kit 527G2A Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381

1395

1381

1395

HP LaserJet 110V Fuser Kit 527G0A Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381

1395

1381

1395

1381

1395

1381

1395
HP LaserJet Image Transfer Belt 527G8A Internal assemblies (5 of 7)

1386
HP LaserJet Image Transfer Belt Kit 527G9A Internal assemblies (5 of 7)

1386
HP LaserJet MP Tray Roller Kit 527H3A Covers 6700 models on page

1370
HP LaserJet MP Tray Roller Kit 527H3A Covers X654 models on page

1371
HP LaserJet MP Tray Roller Kit 527H3A Covers 6800 models on page

1373
HP LaserJet MP Tray Roller Kit 527H3A Covers X677 models on page

1376
HP LaserJet Managed Trans Roller Kit 527H1MC Internal assemblies (5 of 9)

1399
HP LaserJet Mngd 110V Enhanced Fuser Kit 527G4MC Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
HP LaserJet Mngd 220V Enhanced Fuser Kit 527G5MC Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395

HP LaserJet Mngd Image Transfer Belt 527H0MC Internal assemblies (5 of 9)

1399
HP LaserJet Secure Solid State Drive 1M0Q4A Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
HP LaserJet Secure Solid State Drive 1M0Q4A Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
HP LaserJet Swedish Overlay Keyboard A7W14A Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
HP LaserJet Toner Collection Unit 527F9A Internal assemblies (2 of 7)

1379
HP LaserJet Toner collection unit (TCU) 527F9A Internal assemblies (2 of 9)

1393
HP LaserJet Tray 2-x Roller Kit 527H2A Internal assemblies (6 of 7)

1387
HP LaserJet Tray 2-x Roller Kit 527H2A Internal assemblies (6 of 9)

1400
HP LaserJet Workflow Accelerator Card 1M0Q5A Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
HP LaserJet Workflow Accelerator Card 1M0Q5A Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
HP LaserJet Workflow Keyboard 1M0Q2A Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
HP MFP Analog Fax 702 Accessory 1M0Q0A Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381

1395

1381

1395
HP Removable Hard Drive Enclosure L41606-011 Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
HP Removable Hard Drive Enclosure L41606-011 Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395

HP Toner supply service kit RM3-0846-000CN Internal assemblies (8 of 9)

1403
HP W2130YC Black Contract Toner Cartridge W2130YC Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
HP W2131YC Cyan Contract Toner Cartridge W2131YC Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
HP W2132YC Yellow Contract Toner Cartridge W2132YC Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
HP W2133YC Magenta Contract Toner Cartridge W2133YC Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
HP W2140ZC Black Contract Toner Cartridge (SFP) W2140ZC Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
HP W2141ZC Cyan Contract Toner Cartridge (SFP) W2141ZC Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
HP W2142ZC Yellow Contract Toner Cartridge (SFP) W2142ZC Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
HP W2143ZC Magenta Contract Toner Cartridge (SFP) W2143ZC Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
HP W2170ZC Black Contract Toner Cartridge (MFP) W2170ZC Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
HP W2171ZC Cyan Contract Toner Cartridge (MFP) W2171ZC Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
HP W2172ZC Yellow Contract Tone Cartridge (MFP) W2172ZC Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
HP W2173ZC Magenta Contract Toner Cartridge (MFP) W2173ZC Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
HP W9240MC Black Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (SFP) W9240MC Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
HP W9241MC Cyan Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (SFP) W9241MC Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
HP W9242MC Yellow Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (SFP) W9242MC Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405

HP W9243MC Magenta Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (SFP) W9243MC Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
HP W9250MC Black Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (MFP) W9250MC Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
HP W9251MC Cyan Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (MFP) W9251MC Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
HP W9252MC Yellow Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (MFP) W9252MC Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
HP W9253MC Magenta Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (MFP) W9253MC Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
HP W9260MC Black Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (SFP) W9260MC Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
HP W9261MC Cyan Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (SFP) W9261MC Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
HP W9262MC Yellow Mngd LaserJet Toner (SFP) W9262MC Internal assemblies (9 of 9)

1405
HP W9263MC Magenta Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (SFP) W9263MC Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
HP W9270MC Black Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (MFP) W9270MC Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
HP W9271MC Cyan Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (MFP) W9271MC Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
HP W9272MC Yellow Mngd LaserJet Toner (MFP) W9272MC Internal assemblies (9 of 9)

1405
HP W9273MC Magenta Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (MFP) W9273MC Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
HP W9280MC Black Mngd Imaging Drum W9280MC Internal assemblies (9 of 9)

1405
HP W9281MC Cyan Mngd Imaging Drum W9281MC Internal assemblies (9 of 9)

1405
HP W9282MC Yellow Mngd Imaging Drum W9282MC Internal assemblies (9 of 9)

1405

HP W9283MC Magenta Mngd Imaging Drum W9283MC Internal assemblies (9 of 9)

1405
HV power supply PCA RM3-9041-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 7)

1384
HV power supply PCA RM3-9043-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 9)

1397
Handle (Lunar Aurora Purple Dark) 5851-8692 Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
Handle (Lunar Comet Red Dark) 5851-8689 Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
Handle (Lunar Constellation Yellow) 5851-8691 Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
Handle (Lunar Cosmic Green Dark) 5851-8690 Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
Handle (Lunar Grey Dark/ Cement Dark) 5851-8688 Integrated scanner assembly on
page 1366
Handle (OOV white) 5851-8693 Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
Handle, left RC5-9165-000CN Covers 6700 models on page

1370
Handle, left RC5-9165-000CN Covers X654 models on page

1371
Handle, left RC5-9165-000CN Covers 6800 models on page

1373
Handle, left RC5-9165-000CN Covers X677 models on page

1376
Handle, right door lower RC5-8516-000CN Covers 6700 models on page

1370
Handle, right door lower RC5-8516-000CN Covers X654 models on page

1371
Handle, right door lower RC5-8516-000CN Covers 6800 models on page

1373
Handle, right door lower RC5-8516-000CN Covers X677 models on page

1376
Height wall lower assembly RM2-3844-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main
1413
Height wall upper assembly RM2-3845-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main
1413
Holder, drawer connector upper RC5-9398-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder internal

1408

Holder, drawer connector upper RC5-9398-000CN HCI main body on page 1410
IMF assembly RM2-3839-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main

1413
ITB motor assembly RM3-7797-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 7)

1378
ITB motor assembly RM3-7797-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 9)

1391
Interlock assembly RM2-3676-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 7)

1386
Interlock assembly RM2-3676-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 9)

1399
Jog assembly RM3-0481-000CN 3 bin staple stacker main body

1418
Keyboard Overlay Kit - (DN/FR-Swiss/GN) A7W13A Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
Keyboard Overlay Kit - Chinese A7W12A Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
Kit-Inline Scan Bar (Mngd) 5851-8886 Internal assemblies (8 of 9)

1403
LED PCA RM3-7937-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main

1413
LVPS (110-127V) RM3-7726-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 7)

1386

1399

1386

1399

1386

1399


1386

1399
Laser scanner assembly RM2-3787-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 7)

1378
Laser scanner assembly RM2-3787-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 9)

1391
Left cover assembly RM2-4535-000CN Covers 6700 models on page

1370
Left cover assembly RM2-4535-000CN Covers X654 models on page

1371
Left cover assembly RM2-4535-000CN Covers 6800 models on page

1373
Left cover assembly RM2-4535-000CN Covers X677 models on page

1376
Left lower cover RC5-9408-000CN Covers X654 models on page

1371
Left lower cover RC5-9408-000CN Covers X677 models on page

1376
Lifter base lower assembly RM2-3842-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main
1413
Lifter base upper assembly RM2-3843-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main
1413
Lifter drive assembly RM2-3500-000CN Internal assemblies (6 of 7)

1387
Lifter drive assembly RM2-3501-000CN Internal assemblies (6 of 9)

1400
Lifter drive assembly RM2-3501-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder internal

1408
Lifter drive assembly RM3-0021-000CN HCI main body on page 1410
Lower front inner cover assembly RM2-3862-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main
1413
Lower paper feed assembly RM2-4168-000CN 3 bin staple stacker main body
1418

MBM cover assembly RM2-3863-000CN Floor stand staple stacker covers

1411
Main drive assembly RM2-3497-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 9)

1391
Main drive assembly RM2-3504-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 7)

1378
Memory PC board assembly RM2-7138-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
Memory PC board assembly RM2-7138-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
Microswitch WC4-5136-000CN 3 bin staple stacker main body

1418
Motor assembly RM2-4489-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
Motor assembly RM2-4489-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
Motor, stepping RK2-6027-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 7)

1378
Motor, stepping RK2-6027-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 9)

1391
Motor, stepping DC RK2-8149-000CN 3 bin staple stacker main body

1418
Paper delivery assembly RM2-3555-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381

1395

1381

1381

1395

Paper delivery assembly RM2-3836-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main

1413
Paper feed assembly RM2-3479-000CN Internal assemblies (7 of 9)

1402
Paper feed assembly RM2-3858-000CN Intermediate paper transfer unit

1416
Paper feeder controller PCA RM3-8051-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder internal

1408
Paper pickup assembly RM2-3508-000CN Internal assemblies (6 of 7)

1387
Paper pickup assembly RM2-3509-000CN Internal assemblies (6 of 9)

1400
Paper pickup assembly RM2-3509-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder internal

1408
Paper pickup assembly RM2-3509-000CN HCI main body on page 1410
Paper pickup drive assembly RM2-3617-000CN Internal assemblies (6 of 9)

1400
Paper pickup drive assembly RM2-3617-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder internal

1408
Paper pickup drive assembly RM2-3617-000CN HCI main body on page 1410

1387

1395
Pick estrangement assembly RM3-0022-000CN HCI main body on page 1410
Pin, tray fixed RC5-0353-000CN 3 bin staple stacker main body

1418
Pre-exposure PCA holder RM2-3565-000CN Internal assemblies (2 of 7)

1379
Pre-exposure PCA holder RM2-3673-000CN Internal assemblies (2 of 9)

1393
Punch assembly RM2-3834-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main

1413

Punch box assembly RM2-3865-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main

1413
Rear PCA RM3-9045-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 7)

1384
Rear PCA RM3-9046-000CN Internal assemblies (4 of 9)

1397
Rear inner cover assembly RM3-0485-000CN 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/
Rear upper cover assembly RM2-3864-000CN Floor stand staple stacker covers
1411
Registration assembly RM2-4458-000CN Internal assemblies (2 of 7)

1379
Registration assembly RM2-4458-000CN Internal assemblies (2 of 9)

1393
Right PCA RM3-7792-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 7)

1378

1378

1391
Right door assembly RM2-4167-000CN 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/

Right door assembly RM3-0035-000CN HCI Covers on page 1409
Right lower door assembly RM2-3665-000CN Covers 6700 models on page

1370
Right lower door assembly RM2-3665-000CN Covers X654 models on page

1371
Right lower door assembly RM2-3665-000CN Covers 6800 models on page

1373

1376

1371

1376
Right lower door assembly RM3-0004-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder covers,


Secondary transfer assembly RM2-3586-000CN Internal assemblies (2 of 7)

1379

1379

1393
Sensor PCA RM3-7738-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main

1413
Sensor PCA RM3-7934-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main

1413
Sensor, humidity HSU-08FDB2A WP2-5473-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 7)

1386
Sensor, humidity HSU-08FDB2A WP2-5473-000CN Internal assemblies (5 of 9)

1399
Side plate assembly right RM2-3866-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main
1415
Size detect assembly RM2-3585-000CN Internal assemblies (6 of 7)

1387
Size detect assembly RM2-3614-000CN Internal assemblies (6 of 9)

1400
Size detect assembly RM2-3614-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder internal

1408
Solenoid assembly RM2-1040-010CN 3 bin staple stacker main body

1418
Stacking wall assembly RM3-0480-000CN 3 bin staple stacker main body

1418
Staple cover assembly RM3-0483-000CN 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/

Staple door assembly RM3-0484-000CN 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/

Staple stacker PCA RM3-7931-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main

1415
Staple stacker PCA RM3-7950-000CN 3 bin staple stacker main body

1418

Stapler assembly RK2-8148-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main

1415
Stapler assembly RK2-8148-000CN 3 bin staple stacker main body

1418
Sub power supply assembly RM2-3854-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main
1415
Switch back assembly RM2-3867-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main

1413
T1 solenoid assembly RM2-7360-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 7)

1378
T1 solenoid assembly RM2-7360-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 9)

1391
Toner supply PCA RM3-7771-000CN Internal assemblies (6 of 9)

1400
Toner supply door assembly RM2-3678-000CN Covers X654 models on page

1371
Toner supply door assembly RM2-3678-000CN Covers X677 models on page

1376
Toner supply drive assembly RM2-3607-000CN Internal assemblies (8 of 9)

1403

1403

1403
Toner supply drive motor assembly RM2-3612-000CN Internal assemblies (6 of 9)

1400
Top front cover assembly RM2-4518-000CN Covers 6800 models on page

1373
Top front cover assembly RM2-4518-000CN Covers X677 models on page

1376
Tray assembly RM2-3837-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main

1413
Tray assembly RM2-4173-000CN 3 bin staple stacker main body

1418
Tray assembly RM3-0023-000CN HCI Covers on page 1409

Tray, MBM RC6-0513-000CN Floor stand staple stacker main

1413
Upper paper feed assembly RM2-4169-000CN 3 bin staple stacker main body
1418
Waste toner carry assembly RM2-3601-000CN Internal assemblies (7 of 9)

1402
Waste toner duct assembly RM2-3518-000CN Internal assemblies (2 of 7)

1379
Waste toner duct assembly RM2-3590-000CN Internal assemblies (2 of 9)

1393
eMMC 16GB B5L32-60002 Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381

1395

1381

1395

Numerical parts list
Table 6-34 Numerical parts list
Part number Description Table and page
1M0Q0A HP MFP Analog Fax 702 Accessory Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381

1395

1381

1395
1M0Q2A HP LaserJet Workflow Keyboard Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
1M0Q3A HP JetDirect 3200w BLE/Wireless accessory Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
1M0Q3A HP JetDirect 3200w BLE/Wireless accessory Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
1M0Q4A HP LaserJet Secure Solid State Drive Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
1M0Q4A HP LaserJet Secure Solid State Drive Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
1M0Q5A HP LaserJet Workflow Accelerator Card Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
1M0Q5A HP LaserJet Workflow Accelerator Card Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
1M8J0A HP 4GB DDR3Lx64 204-pin 933MHz DIMM Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
1M8J0A HP 4GB DDR3Lx64 204-pin 933MHz DIMM Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
1M8J1A HP 4GB DDR3Lx64 204-pin 933MHz DIMM TAA Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
1M8J1A HP 4GB DDR3Lx64 204-pin 933MHz DIMM TAA Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
3JN69A HP JetDirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless accessory Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381

Table 6-34 Numerical parts list (continued)
3JN69A HP JetDirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless accessory Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
527F9A HP LaserJet Toner Collection Unit Internal assemblies (2 of 7)

1379
527F9A HP LaserJet Toner collection unit (TCU) Internal assemblies (2 of 9)

1393
527G0A HP LaserJet 110V Fuser Kit Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381

1395

1381

1395
527G2A HP LaserJet 110V Enhanced Fuser Kit Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381

1395

1381

1395
527G4MC HP LaserJet Mngd 110V Enhanced Fuser Kit Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
527G5MC HP LaserJet Mngd 220V Enhanced Fuser Kit Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395

1381

1395

1381
Numerical parts list 1445


1395
527G8A HP LaserJet Image Transfer Belt Internal assemblies (5 of 7)

1386
527G9A HP LaserJet Image Transfer Belt Kit Internal assemblies (5 of 7)

1386
527H0MC HP LaserJet Mngd Image Transfer Belt Internal assemblies (5 of 9)

1399
527H1MC HP LaserJet Managed Trans Roller Kit Internal assemblies (5 of 9)

1399
527H2A HP LaserJet Tray 2-x Roller Kit Internal assemblies (6 of 7)

1387
527H2A HP LaserJet Tray 2-x Roller Kit Internal assemblies (6 of 9)

1400
527H3A HP LaserJet MP Tray Roller Kit Covers 6700 models on page

1370
527H3A HP LaserJet MP Tray Roller Kit Covers X654 models on page

1371
527H3A HP LaserJet MP Tray Roller Kit Covers 6800 models on page

1373
527H3A HP LaserJet MP Tray Roller Kit Covers X677 models on page

1376
5851-7005 Assy-USB A F Panel Mount To WTB 335mm Internal assemblies (6 of 9)

1400
5851-7005 Assy-USB A F Panel Mount To WTB 335mm Internal assemblies (7 of 9)

1402
5851-7005 Assy-USB A F Panel Mount To WTB 335mm 550-sheet paper feeder internal
1408
5851-7005 Assy-USB A F Panel Mount To WTB 335mm 3 bin staple stacker main body
1418
5851-8688 Handle (Lunar Grey Dark/ Cement Dark) Integrated scanner assembly on
page 1366
5851-8689 Handle (Lunar Comet Red Dark) Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
5851-8690 Handle (Lunar Cosmic Green Dark) Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366

5851-8691 Handle (Lunar Constellation Yellow) Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
5851-8692 Handle (Lunar Aurora Purple Dark) Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
5851-8693 Handle (OOV white) Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
5851-8842 ADF hinge kit (6xxx Series) Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
5851-8844 ADF roller cover (6xxx Series) Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
5851-8849 ADF damper Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
5851-8850 ADF white backing kit Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
5851-8886 Kit-Inline Scan Bar (Mngd) Internal assemblies (8 of 9)

1403
6H122A ADF Pick/Sep Roller Kit (6xxx Series) Integrated scanner assembly on
page 1366
6HN31A HP 500GB CCC FIPS TAA Hard Disk Drive Internal assemblies (3 of 7)
1381
6HN31A HP 500GB CCC FIPS TAA Hard Disk Drive Internal assemblies (3 of 9)
1395
6M1P3A ADF Pick/Sep Roller Kit (Flow 6xxx Series) Integrated scanner assembly on
page 1366
6QN28-67001 Control panel 10.9 cm 4.3 in Control panels on page 1367
6QN32-67002 Formatter (67xx / X65xxx) Internal assemblies (4 of 7)

1384

1397
6QN32-67004 Formatter (67xx / X65xxx) (China/India) Internal assemblies (4 of 7)

1384

1397

1384

1397
6QN35-67003 Control panel 25.6 cm 10.1 in Control panels on page 1367


1384

1397
6QN35-67006 Flatbed scanner Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
6QN37-67001 Control panel 23.3 cm 8 in Control panels on page 1367
6QN57A 2,100-sheet HCI feeder/stand HCI main body on page 1410
6QN57A 550-sheet paper feeder (tray) 550-sheet paper feeder internal

1408
6QY68A HP 2GB DDR3Lx32 120-pin 933MHz DIMM Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
6QY68A HP 2GB DDR3Lx32 120-pin 933MHz DIMM Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
9EQ11A HP 500GB CCC FIPS Hard Disk Drive Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
9EQ11A HP 500GB CCC FIPS Hard Disk Drive Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
A7W12A Keyboard Overlay Kit - Chinese Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
A7W13A Keyboard Overlay Kit - (DN/FR-Swiss/GN) Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
A7W14A HP LaserJet Swedish Overlay Keyboard Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
B5L32-60002 eMMC 16GB Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381

1395

1381

1395
J1H98-60037 ADF WUR (6xxx Series Non-Workflow) Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366
J1H98-60038 ADF WUR (6xxx Series Workflow) Integrated scanner assembly on

page 1366

L41606-011 HP Removable Hard Drive Enclosure Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
L41606-011 HP Removable Hard Drive Enclosure Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
NA HDD, 500GB 5400RPM FIPS/CCC OPAL2 7MM Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
NA HDD, 500GB 5400RPM FIPS/CCC OPAL2 7MM Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
RC4-0213-000CN Cover, Hardware integration pocket (HIP) Covers 6700 models on page
1370
RC4-0213-000CN Cover, Hardware integration pocket (HIP) Covers X654 models on page
1371
RC4-0213-000CN Cover, Hardware integration pocket (HIP) Covers 6800 models on page
1373
RC4-0213-000CN Cover, Hardware integration pocket (HIP) Covers X677 models on page
1376
RC5-0215-000CN Cover, MBM rear Floor stand staple stacker covers

1411
RC5-0223-000CN Cover, rear Floor stand staple stacker covers

1411
RC5-0353-000CN Pin, tray fixed 3 bin staple stacker main body

1418
RC5-8516-000CN Handle, right door lower Covers 6700 models on page

1370
RC5-8516-000CN Handle, right door lower Covers X654 models on page

1371
RC5-8516-000CN Handle, right door lower Covers 6800 models on page

1373
RC5-8516-000CN Handle, right door lower Covers X677 models on page

1376
RC5-9165-000CN Handle, left Covers 6700 models on page

1370
RC5-9165-000CN Handle, left Covers X654 models on page

1371
RC5-9165-000CN Handle, left Covers 6800 models on page

1373
RC5-9165-000CN Handle, left Covers X677 models on page

1376
RC5-9168-000CN Cover, rear lower Covers 6700 models on page

1370

RC5-9168-000CN Cover, rear lower Covers X654 models on page

1371
RC5-9168-000CN Cover, rear lower Covers 6800 models on page

1373

1376
RC5-9172-000CN Cover, top assembly Covers 6800 models on page

1373
RC5-9172-000CN Cover, top assembly Covers X677 models on page

1376
RC5-9198-000CN Cover, front left Covers 6700 models on page

1370
RC5-9198-000CN Cover, front left Covers X654 models on page

1371
RC5-9198-000CN Cover, front left Covers 6800 models on page

1373
RC5-9198-000CN Cover, front left Covers X677 models on page

1376
RC5-9199-000CN Cover, front right Covers 6700 models on page

1370
RC5-9199-000CN Cover, front right Covers X654 models on page

1371
RC5-9199-000CN Cover, front right Covers 6800 models on page

1373
RC5-9199-000CN Cover, front right Covers X677 models on page

1376
RC5-9200-000CN Cover, front left 550-sheet paper feeder covers,

RC5-9201-000CN Cover, front right 550-sheet paper feeder covers,

RC5-9204-000CN Cover, left upper Covers 6700 models on page

1370
RC5-9204-000CN Cover, left upper Covers X654 models on page

1371
RC5-9204-000CN Cover, left upper Covers 6800 models on page

1373
RC5-9204-000CN Cover, left upper Covers X677 models on page

1376
RC5-9398-000CN Holder, drawer connector upper 550-sheet paper feeder internal

1408
RC5-9398-000CN Holder, drawer connector upper HCI main body on page 1410
RC5-9408-000CN Cover, left 550-sheet paper feeder covers,


RC5-9408-000CN Left lower cover Covers X654 models on page

1371
RC5-9408-000CN Left lower cover Covers X677 models on page

1376

1371

1376
RC5-9409-000CN Cover, rear lower 550-sheet paper feeder covers,

RC5-9692-000CN Cover, left HCI Covers on page 1409
RC5-9693-000CN Cover, rear HCI Covers on page 1409
RC5-9695-000CN Cover, rear lower HCI Covers on page 1409
RC5-9696-000CN Cover, front left HCI Covers on page 1409
RC6-0186-000CN Cover, front inner upper Floor stand staple stacker main
1413
RC6-0213-000CN Cover, rear left Floor stand staple stacker covers

1411
RC6-0214-000CN Cover, MBM front Floor stand staple stacker covers

1411
RC6-0220-000CN Cover, foot front Floor stand staple stacker covers

1411
RC6-0222-000CN Cover, foot rear Floor stand staple stacker covers

1411
RC6-0222-000CN Cover, foot rear Floor stand staple stacker covers

1411
RC6-0226-000CN Cover, foot front (tall model) Floor stand staple stacker covers
1411
RC6-0227-000CN Cover, foot center Floor stand staple stacker covers

1411
RC6-0229-000CN Cover, foot Floor stand staple stacker covers

1411
RC6-0513-000CN Tray, MBM Floor stand staple stacker main

1413
RC6-1305-000CN Cover, rear 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/


RC6-1307-000CN Cover, corner right 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/

RC6-1308-000CN Cover, right upper 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/

RC6-1309-000CN Cover, right lower 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/

RC6-1310-000CN Cover, stapler rear 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/

RC6-2356-000CN Cover, left front 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/

RC6-2402-000CN Cover, front inner right lower Floor stand staple stacker main
1415
RC6-2406-000CN Cover, harness Intermediate paper transfer unit

1416
RK2-6027-000CN Motor, stepping Internal assemblies (1 of 7)

1378
RK2-6027-000CN Motor, stepping Internal assemblies (1 of 9)

1391
RK2-8148-000CN Stapler assembly Floor stand staple stacker main

1415
RK2-8148-000CN Stapler assembly 3 bin staple stacker main body

1418
RK2-8149-000CN Motor, stepping DC 3 bin staple stacker main body

1418
RK2-8153-000CN Fan 3 bin staple stacker main body

1418
RK3-0760-000CN Fan Internal assemblies (4 of 7)

1384

1397

1381

1381

1395

RK3-0817-000CN Cable, flat FMTR Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381

1395
RK3-0819-000CN Cable, flat drive Internal assemblies (4 of 7)

1384

1397

1384

1397
RK3-0825-000CN Cable, flat SCN Internal assemblies (1 of 7)

1378
RK3-0825-000CN Cable, flat SCN Internal assemblies (1 of 9)

1391
RK3-0827-000CN Cable, flat LVPS Internal assemblies (5 of 7)

1386
RK3-0827-000CN Cable, flat LVPS Internal assemblies (5 of 9)

1399
RK3-0837-000 CABLE, FLAT, FMTR Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381

1395
RK3-1509-000CN Cable, flat HVT Internal assemblies (4 of 7)

1384
RK3-1509-000CN Cable, flat HVT Internal assemblies (4 of 9)

1397
RK3-1692-000CN Cable, flat rear Internal assemblies (4 of 7)

1384
RK3-1693-000CN Cable, flat rear Internal assemblies (4 of 9)

1397

RK3-1694-000CN Cable, flat right Internal assemblies (4 of 7)

1384
RK3-1694-000CN Cable, flat right Internal assemblies (4 of 9)

1397

1386

1399
RM2-0918-000CN Auto close assembly HCI main body on page 1410
RM2-1040-010CN Solenoid assembly 3 bin staple stacker main body

1418
RM2-3479-000CN Paper feed assembly Internal assemblies (7 of 9)

1402
RM2-3497-000CN Main drive assembly Internal assemblies (1 of 9)

1391
RM2-3500-000CN Lifter drive assembly Internal assemblies (6 of 7)

1387
RM2-3501-000CN Lifter drive assembly Internal assemblies (6 of 9)

1400
RM2-3501-000CN Lifter drive assembly 550-sheet paper feeder internal

1408
RM2-3504-000CN Main drive assembly Internal assemblies (1 of 7)

1378
RM2-3508-000CN Paper pickup assembly Internal assemblies (6 of 7)

1387
RM2-3509-000CN Paper pickup assembly Internal assemblies (6 of 9)

1400
RM2-3509-000CN Paper pickup assembly 550-sheet paper feeder internal

1408
RM2-3509-000CN Paper pickup assembly HCI main body on page 1410
RM2-3518-000CN Waste toner duct assembly Internal assemblies (2 of 7)

1379

RM2-3555-000CN Paper delivery assembly Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381

1395

1381

1381

1395
RM2-3559-000CN Auto close assembly Internal assemblies (6 of 7)

1387
RM2-3559-000CN Auto close assembly Internal assemblies (6 of 9)

1400
RM2-3559-000CN Auto close assembly 550-sheet paper feeder internal

1408
RM2-3565-000CN Pre-exposure PCA holder Internal assemblies (2 of 7)

1379
RM2-3585-000CN Size detect assembly Internal assemblies (6 of 7)

1387
RM2-3586-000CN Secondary transfer assembly Internal assemblies (2 of 7)

1379
RM2-3590-000CN Waste toner duct assembly Internal assemblies (2 of 9)

1393
RM2-3601-000CN Waste toner carry assembly Internal assemblies (7 of 9)

1402
RM2-3607-000CN Toner supply drive assembly Internal assemblies (8 of 9)

1403

1403

1403

RM2-3612-000CN Toner supply drive motor assembly Internal assemblies (6 of 9)

1400
RM2-3614-000CN Size detect assembly Internal assemblies (6 of 9)

1400
RM2-3614-000CN Size detect assembly 550-sheet paper feeder internal

1408
RM2-3616-000CN Cassette assembly Internal assemblies (6 of 7)

1387
RM2-3616-000CN Cassette assembly Internal assemblies (6 of 9)

1400
RM2-3617-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly Internal assemblies (6 of 9)

1400
RM2-3617-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly 550-sheet paper feeder internal

1408
RM2-3617-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly HCI main body on page 1410
RM2-3625-000CN Developing motor assembly Internal assemblies (1 of 7)

1378
RM2-3625-000CN Developing motor assembly Internal assemblies (1 of 9)

1391

1379

1393
RM2-3640-000CN Cassette assembly 550-sheet paper feeder covers,

RM2-3665-000CN Right lower door assembly Covers 6700 models on page

1370
RM2-3665-000CN Right lower door assembly Covers X654 models on page

1371
RM2-3665-000CN Right lower door assembly Covers 6800 models on page

1373

1376
RM2-3673-000CN Pre-exposure PCA holder Internal assemblies (2 of 9)

1393

RM2-3676-000CN Interlock assembly Internal assemblies (5 of 7)

1386
RM2-3676-000CN Interlock assembly Internal assemblies (5 of 9)

1399
RM2-3678-000CN Toner supply door assembly Covers X654 models on page

1371
RM2-3678-000CN Toner supply door assembly Covers X677 models on page

1376

1387

1395
RM2-3787-000CN Laser scanner assembly Internal assemblies (1 of 7)

1378
RM2-3787-000CN Laser scanner assembly Internal assemblies (1 of 9)

1391
RM2-3833-000CN Alignment assembly Floor stand staple stacker main

1415
RM2-3834-000CN Punch assembly Floor stand staple stacker main

1413
RM2-3836-000CN Paper delivery assembly Floor stand staple stacker main

1413
RM2-3837-000CN Tray assembly Floor stand staple stacker main

1413
RM2-3839-000CN IMF assembly Floor stand staple stacker main

1413
RM2-3842-000CN Lifter base lower assembly Floor stand staple stacker main
1413
RM2-3843-000CN Lifter base upper assembly Floor stand staple stacker main
1413
RM2-3844-000CN Height wall lower assembly Floor stand staple stacker main
1413
RM2-3845-000CN Height wall upper assembly Floor stand staple stacker main
1413

RM2-3847-000CN Drum drive assembly Floor stand staple stacker main

1415
RM2-3848-000CN Drum assembly Floor stand staple stacker main

1415
RM2-3849-000CN Door handle rail assembly Floor stand staple stacker main
1415
RM2-3854-000CN Sub power supply assembly Floor stand staple stacker main
1415
RM2-3857-000CN Front cover assembly Floor stand staple stacker covers

1411
RM2-3858-000CN Paper feed assembly Intermediate paper transfer unit

1416
RM2-3859-000CN Connecting assembly Intermediate paper transfer unit

1416
RM2-3861-000CN Front inner cover assembly Floor stand staple stacker main
1415
RM2-3862-000CN Lower front inner cover assembly Floor stand staple stacker main
1413
RM2-3863-000CN MBM cover assembly Floor stand staple stacker covers

1411
RM2-3864-000CN Rear upper cover assembly Floor stand staple stacker covers
1411
RM2-3865-000CN Punch box assembly Floor stand staple stacker main

1413
RM2-3866-000CN Side plate assembly right Floor stand staple stacker main
1415
RM2-3867-000CN Switch back assembly Floor stand staple stacker main

1413
RM2-4167-000CN Right door assembly 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/

RM2-4168-000CN Lower paper feed assembly 3 bin staple stacker main body
1418
RM2-4169-000CN Upper paper feed assembly 3 bin staple stacker main body
1418

RM2-4173-000CN Tray assembly 3 bin staple stacker main body

1418
RM2-4458-000CN Registration assembly Internal assemblies (2 of 7)

1379
RM2-4458-000CN Registration assembly Internal assemblies (2 of 9)

1393
RM2-4471-000CN Face down tray assembly Covers 6700 models on page

1370
RM2-4471-000CN Face down tray assembly Covers X654 models on page

1371
RM2-4471-000CN Face down tray assembly Covers 6800 models on page

1373
RM2-4471-000CN Face down tray assembly Covers X677 models on page

1376
RM2-4479-000CN Front door assembly Covers X654 models on page

1371
RM2-4479-000CN Front door assembly Covers X677 models on page

1376
RM2-4480-000CN Formatter cover assembly Covers 6700 models on page

1370
RM2-4480-000CN Formatter cover assembly Covers X654 models on page

1371

1373

1376
RM2-4487-000CN Fixing drive assembly Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
RM2-4487-000CN Fixing drive assembly Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
RM2-4488-000CN Fixing motor assembly Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
RM2-4488-000CN Fixing motor assembly Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395
RM2-4489-000CN Motor assembly Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
RM2-4489-000CN Motor assembly Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395

RM2-4492-000CN Density detect assembly Internal assemblies (2 of 7)

1379
RM2-4492-000CN Density detect assembly Internal assemblies (2 of 9)

1393
RM2-4517-000CN Cover, top assembly Covers 6700 models on page

1370
RM2-4517-000CN Cover, top assembly Covers X654 models on page

1371
RM2-4518-000CN Top front cover assembly Covers 6800 models on page

1373
RM2-4518-000CN Top front cover assembly Covers X677 models on page

1376
RM2-4520-000CN Formatter case assembly Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381

1381

1395

1373

1376
RM2-4533-000CN Front door assembly Covers 6700 models on page

1370
RM2-4533-000CN Front door assembly Covers 6800 models on page

1373
RM2-4535-000CN Left cover assembly Covers 6700 models on page

1370
RM2-4535-000CN Left cover assembly Covers X654 models on page

1371
RM2-4535-000CN Left cover assembly Covers 6800 models on page

1373
RM2-4535-000CN Left cover assembly Covers X677 models on page

1376
RM2-7138-000CN Memory PC board assembly Internal assemblies (3 of 7)

1381
RM2-7138-000CN Memory PC board assembly Internal assemblies (3 of 9)

1395

RM2-7360-000CN T1 solenoid assembly Internal assemblies (1 of 7)

1378
RM2-7360-000CN T1 solenoid assembly Internal assemblies (1 of 9)

1391

1371

1376
RM3-0004-000CN Right lower door assembly 550-sheet paper feeder covers,

RM3-0021-000CN Lifter drive assembly HCI main body on page 1410
RM3-0022-000CN Pick estrangement assembly HCI main body on page 1410
RM3-0023-000CN Tray assembly HCI Covers on page 1409
RM3-0035-000CN Right door assembly HCI Covers on page 1409
RM3-0480-000CN Stacking wall assembly 3 bin staple stacker main body

1418
RM3-0481-000CN Jog assembly 3 bin staple stacker main body

1418
RM3-0483-000CN Staple cover assembly 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/

RM3-0484-000CN Staple door assembly 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/

RM3-0485-000CN Rear inner cover assembly 3 bin staple stacker covers 6800/
RM3-0846-000CN HP Toner supply service kit Internal assemblies (8 of 9)

1403
RM3-7647-000CN Drum position sensor PCA Internal assemblies (1 of 7)

1378
RM3-7647-000CN Drum position sensor PCA Internal assemblies (1 of 9)

1391
RM3-7722-000CN Driver PCA Internal assemblies (1 of 7)

1378
RM3-7722-000CN Driver PCA Internal assemblies (1 of 9)

1391
RM3-7726-000CN LVPS (110-127V) Internal assemblies (5 of 7)

1386


1399

1386

1399

1386

1399

1386

1399
RM3-7738-000CN Sensor PCA Floor stand staple stacker main

1413
RM3-7753-000CN DC controller PCA Internal assemblies (4 of 7)

1384

1384

1397
RM3-7771-000CN Toner supply PCA Internal assemblies (6 of 9)

1400
RM3-7788-000CN Drum motor assembly Internal assemblies (1 of 7)

1378
RM3-7788-000CN Drum motor assembly Internal assemblies (1 of 9)

1391
RM3-7792-000CN Right PCA Internal assemblies (1 of 7)

1378

1378


1391
RM3-7797-000CN ITB motor assembly Internal assemblies (1 of 7)

1378
RM3-7797-000CN ITB motor assembly Internal assemblies (1 of 9)

1391
RM3-7931-000CN Staple stacker PCA Floor stand staple stacker main

1415
RM3-7934-000CN Sensor PCA Floor stand staple stacker main

1413
RM3-7937-000CN LED PCA Floor stand staple stacker main

1413
RM3-7950-000CN Staple stacker PCA 3 bin staple stacker main body

1418
RM3-8001-000CN Drawer cable assembly Internal assemblies (6 of 7)

1387
RM3-8038-000CN Drawer cable assembly Internal assemblies (6 of 9)

1400
RM3-8051-000CN Paper feeder controller PCA 550-sheet paper feeder internal

1408
RM3-8058-000CN Drawer upper cable assembly 550-sheet paper feeder internal

1408
RM3-8059-000CN Drawer lower cable assembly 550-sheet paper feeder internal

1408
RM3-8071-000CN HCI controller PCA HCI main body on page 1410
RM3-8079-000CN Drawer cable assembly HCI main body on page 1410
RM3-9041-000CN HV power supply PCA Internal assemblies (4 of 7)

1384
RM3-9043-000CN HV power supply PCA Internal assemblies (4 of 9)

1397
RM3-9045-000CN Rear PCA Internal assemblies (4 of 7)

1384

RM3-9046-000CN Rear PCA Internal assemblies (4 of 9)

1397
W2130A HP 213A Black Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
W2130X HP 2130X High Yield Black Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
W2130Y HP 213Y Extra High Yield Black Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7 of 7)
1389
W2130YC HP W2130YC Black Contract Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
W2131A HP 213A Cyan Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
W2131X HP 2131X High Yield Cyan Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
W2131Y HP 213Y Extra High Yield Cyan Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7 of 7)
1389
W2131YC HP W2131YC Cyan Contract Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
W2132A HP 213A Yellow Original LaserJet Toner Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
W2132X HP 2132X High Yield Yellow Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
W2132Y HP 213Y Extra High Yield Yellow Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7 of 7)
1389
W2132YC HP W2132YC Yellow Contract Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
W2133A HP 213A Magenta LaserJet Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
W2133X HP 2133X High Yield Magenta Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
W2133Y HP 213Y Extra High Yield Magenta Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7 of 7)
1389

W2133YC HP W2133YC Magenta Contract Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
W2140Z HP 214Z Ultra High Yield Black Toner Cartridge (SFP) Internal assemblies (7 of 7)
1389
W2140ZC HP W2140ZC Black Contract Toner Cartridge (SFP) Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
W2141Z HP 214Z Ultra High Yield Cyan Toner Cartridge (SFP) Internal assemblies (7 of 7)
1389
W2141ZC HP W2141ZC Cyan Contract Toner Cartridge (SFP) Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
W2142Z HP 214Z Ultra High Yield Yellow Toner Cartridge (SFP) Internal assemblies (7 of 7)
1389
W2142ZC HP W2142ZC Yellow Contract Toner Cartridge (SFP) Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
W2143Z HP 214Z Ultra High Yield Magenta Toner Cartridge (SFP) Internal assemblies (7 of 7)
1389
W2143ZC HP W2143ZC Magenta Contract Toner Cartridge (SFP) Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
W2170Z HP 217Z Ultra High Yield Black Toner Cartridge (MFP) Internal assemblies (7 of 7)
1389
W2170ZC HP W2170ZC Black Contract Toner Cartridge (MFP) Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
W2171Z HP 217Z Ultra High Yield Cyan Toner Cartridge (MFP) Internal assemblies (7 of 7)
1389
W2171ZC HP W2171ZC Cyan Contract Toner Cartridge (MFP) Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
W2172Z HP 217Z Ultra High Yield Yellow Toner Cartridge (MFP) Internal assemblies (7 of 7)
1389
W2172ZC HP W2172ZC Yellow Contract Tone Cartridge (MFP) Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
W2173Z HP 217Z Ultra High Yield Magenta Toner Cartridge (MFP) Internal assemblies (7 of 7)
1389

W2173ZC HP W2173ZC Magenta Contract Toner Cartridge (MFP) Internal assemblies (7 of 7)

1389
W9240MC HP W9240MC Black Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (SFP) Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
W9241MC HP W9241MC Cyan Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (SFP) Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
W9242MC HP W9242MC Yellow Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (SFP) Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
W9243MC HP W9243MC Magenta Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (SFP) Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
W9250MC HP W9250MC Black Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (MFP) Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
W9251MC HP W9251MC Cyan Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (MFP) Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
W9252MC HP W9252MC Yellow Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (MFP) Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
W9253MC HP W9253MC Magenta Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (MFP) Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
W9260MC HP W9260MC Black Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (SFP) Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
W9261MC HP W9261MC Cyan Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (SFP) Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
W9262MC HP W9262MC Yellow Mngd LaserJet Toner (SFP) Internal assemblies (9 of 9)

1405
W9263MC HP W9263MC Magenta Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (SFP) Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
W9270MC HP W9270MC Black Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (MFP) Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
W9271MC HP W9271MC Cyan Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (MFP) Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
W9272MC HP W9272MC Yellow Mngd LaserJet Toner (MFP) Internal assemblies (9 of 9)

1405

W9273MC HP W9273MC Magenta Mngd LaserJet Toner Cartridge (MFP) Internal assemblies (9 of 9)
1405
W9280MC HP W9280MC Black Mngd Imaging Drum Internal assemblies (9 of 9)

1405
W9281MC HP W9281MC Cyan Mngd Imaging Drum Internal assemblies (9 of 9)

1405
W9282MC HP W9282MC Yellow Mngd Imaging Drum Internal assemblies (9 of 9)

1405
W9283MC HP W9283MC Magenta Mngd Imaging Drum Internal assemblies (9 of 9)

1405
WC2-5806-000CN Button switch HCI main body on page 1410
WC4-5136-000CN Microswitch 3 bin staple stacker main body

1418
WP2-5473-000CN Sensor, humidity HSU-08FDB2A Internal assemblies (5 of 7)

1386
WP2-5473-000CN Sensor, humidity HSU-08FDB2A Internal assemblies (5 of 9)

1399

A Certificate of Volatility
Review the certificates of volatility for the printer.
Certificate of Volatility
Review the certificates of volatility for the printers.
Figure A-1 Certificate of Volatility SFP (1 of 2)

Hewlett-Packard Certificate of Volatility
Model(s): Part Number(s): Address:
HP Color LaserJet X654dn=6QQ00A Hewlett Packard Company
Enterprise X65455/65 and X65455dn=49L02A 11311 Chinden Blvd
6700/01 X65465dn=49L04A Boise, ID 83714
6700dn=6QN33A
6701dn=58M42A
Volatile Memory
Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
DRAM 2GB Yes No Temporary storage for When the printer is powered
system operation and print off the memory is erased
buffer
Non-Volatile Memory
Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)?
Type (Flash, EEPROM, Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
etc):
EEPROM 32KB Yes No Store customer setting data for There are no steps to clear this
backup /restore data
etc): 4MB Yes No BIOS There are no steps to clear this
SPI data
Mass Storage
Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Type (HDD, Tape, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
eMMC 16GB Yes No Stores data, OS, Firmware update
applications, digitally
signed firmware images, or
persistent data, and
temporary data for Initiate a non-secure fast erase
processing system from the EWS
functions
USB
Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e. Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Explanation: Print Jobs and device firmware updates
Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device?
Explanation:
1468 Appendix A Certificate of Volatility

Figure A-2 Certificate of Volatility SFP (2 of 2)
RF/RFID
Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics? (e.g. Cellular phone,
Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth:
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications:
Other Transmission Capabilities
Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:

Specifications:
Other Capabilities
Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data
whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Specifications:
Author Information
Name Title Email Business Unit
System Engineer Technical.Marketing@hp.com IPG
Date Prepared: 11/07/2022
Certificate of Volatility 1469

Figure A-3 Certificate of Volatility MFP (1 of 2)
Hewlett-Packard Certificate of Volatility
Model(s): Part Number(s): Address:
HP Color LaserJet X677dn=6QQ01A Hewlett Packard Company
Enterprise X67755/65 and X677zs=6QQ02A 11311 Chinden Blvd
6800/01 X677s=76H08A Boise, ID 83714
X677z=76H09A
X677z+=6QQ03A+632P2A
X67755dn=49K86A
X67765dn=49K90A
X67755zs=49K87A
X67765zs=49K91A
X67755z+=49K88A+632P2A
X67765z+=49K92A+632P2A
6800dn=6QN35A
6800zf=6QN36A
6800zfsw=6QN37A
6800zfw+=6QN38A+632P1A
6801zfsw=76H10A
6801zfw+=76H11A+632P1A
Volatile Memory
Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)?
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
DRAM 6GB Yes No Temporary storage for When the printer is powered
system operation and print off the memory is erased
buffer
Non-Volatile Memory
Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)?
etc):
EEPROM 32KB Yes No Store customer setting data for There are no steps to clear this
backup /restore data
etc): 4MB Yes No BIOS There are no steps to clear this
SPI data
Mass Storage
Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Type (HDD, Tape, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
HDD 500GB Yes No Stores data, OS, Firmware update
applications, digitally
signed firmware images, or
persistent data, and
temporary data for Initiate a non-secure fast erase
processing system from the EWS
functions
USB
Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e. Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)?
Explanation: Print Jobs, scan upload, and device firmware updates
Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device?
Explanation:
1470 Appendix A Certificate of Volatility

Figure A-4 Certificate of Volatility MFP (2 of 2)
RF/RFID
Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics? (e.g. Cellular phone,
Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below
Purpose:
Specifications:
Other Transmission Capabilities
Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:

Specifications:
Other Capabilities
Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data
whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Specifications:
Author Information
Name Title Email Business Unit
System Engineer Technical.Marketing@hp.com IPG
Date Prepared: 11/07/2022
Certificate of Volatility 1471

Glossary of terms
802.11
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN) communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN
Standards Committee (IEEE 802).
802.11b/g/n
802.11b/g/n can share the same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps,
802.11n supports bandwidth up to 150 Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices might occasionally suffer interferences from
microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.
AC
An electric current that reverses its direction many times a second at regular intervals. For example, the 110V line
current found in a typical US electrical wall receptacle.
AC Control Module (PageWide)

The AC Control Module controls the heating elements in the airflow assembly. Functions include voltage monitoring
(ensuring correct operation in a low-quality-power environment), isolation (low voltage heater control signals are
isolated from the high voltage AC power for safety), AC switching (power is switched on/off to the heater), and
heating element configuration (heating element configuration is changed between series and parallel for temperature
predictability).
ADF
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a device that automatically feeds an original sheet (or multiple sheets) of paper
into the image scanner. The document feeder is a component of the integrated scanner assembly (ADF and image
scanner).
Airflow System (PageWide)

The airflow system conditions the printed pages to avoid page curling due to the ink on the page. The airflow system
functionally consists of a fan and heating elements. The pressurized air is blown on the page through the nozzles that are
placed on the paper path of the airflow system between print and eject zone.
BOOTP
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually
done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP servers assigns an IP
address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables “diskless workstation” computers to obtain an IP address
prior to loading any advanced operating system.
CCD
A Charged Coupled Device (CCD) is the scanner module which enables a scan job. A CCD locking mechanism is used to hold
the CCD module to prevent any damage when the printer is moved.
1472 Glossary of terms

CIS
A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) scanner captures an image using the printer's optical path. Red, green, and blue LEDs
sequentially illuminate a small strip of the document (often called a raster line), and the optical system captures each
color in a single row of Charged Coupled Device (CCD) sensors that cover the entire page width.
Collation
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is selected, the device prints an entire set
before printing additional copies.
Control Panel
The control panel is a flat, typically vertical panel or screen where the user can control and/or monitor the printer. The
control panel is found on the front of the printer.
Coverage
Coverage is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For example, 5% coverage means that an
A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text on it. If the paper or original has complicated images or a large amount of
text, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as the coverage.
DC
An electric current flowing in one direction only. Typically, a low voltage load current supplied to an electrical assembly.
DCC
The DC controller (DCC) controls the operation of the printer sub-systems and electrical components. the DCC sends out
various signals to operate motors, solenoids, and other printer components based on the print command and image data
that the host computer sends the formatter.
Default
The value or setting that is in effect when a printer is unboxed, reset, or initialized.
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration
parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the client host to participate
on an IP network. The DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.
Digital Send Software

Digital send software allows a mufti-function printer (MFP) to scan and send information quickly and securely to email,
network folders, other printers, and fax services.
DIMM
A Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM) is a small circuit board that holds memory. The DIMM stores all data within the
printer, such as printing data and received fax data.
DPI
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in
a higher resolution (more visible detail in the image and a larger file size).
Duplex
A mechanism that automatically turns over a sheet of paper so that the printer can print (or scan) on both sides of the
paper. A printer equipped with a duplex unit can print on both sides of the paper during one print cycle.
Glossary of terms 1473

Duty Cycle
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month. Generally, the printer has
the lifespan limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually within
the warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month the printer limit is 2,400 pages a day
(assuming 20 working days/month).
Dynamic Security
Dynamic Security is a toner cartridge design and process for authenticating genuine HP supplies. HP printers use toner
cartridges that have security chips or electronic circuitry. Cartridges using a non-HP chip, or modified chip, or non-HP
circuitry might not work (now or in the future).
e-Duplex
Single-pass electronic duplex (e-Duplex) printer use two separate scan modules to scan the front-side and back-side of
an e-duplex copy job page in a single pass through the document feeder.
EMC
EMC is a measure of a device's ability to operate as intended in its shared operating environment while, at the same time,
not affecting the ability of other equipment within the same environment to operate as intended.
EMI
EMI is the electromagnetic energy which affects the functioning of an electronic device. Electronic devices (like printers)
are a source of EMI. Because it is rare for electronics to operate in isolation, products are generally engineered to function
in the presence of some amount of EMI.
eMMC
An embedded Multi-Media Card is a compact memory device consisting of NAND flash memory and a simple storage
controller.
Emulation
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another. An emulator duplicates the functions of
one system with a different system, so that the second system behaves like the first system. Emulation focuses on exact
reproduction of external behavior. This is different from simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the system
being simulated, often considering its internal state.
EPS
Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) is a PostScript (PS) code file which is used for storing font and vector graphic image
information.
ESD
An electrostatic discharge (ESD) is a sudden flow of electricity between two electrically charged objects caused by
contact, an electrical short, or dielectric breakdown. Discharge of built up static electricity.
Ethernet
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and
signaling for the physical layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control (MAC)/data link layer of the
OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. Ethernet has become the most widespread LAN technology in
use during the 1990s to present.
Ferrite
A ferrite is used to reduce the amount of radio frequency noise (or interference) in a wire or cable. A ferrite enables
proper EMC/EMI performance for regulatory purposes.

FFC
Flat Flexible Cables (FFCs) are designed for Printed Circuit Assembly (PCA) to PCA connections (for example, connecting a
fax PCA to the formatter).
FIH
A Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) is a port that enables HP multifunction printers (MFPs) to use third-party devices to
extend the capabilities of the MFP.
Firmware
The formatter stores the printer firmware. A remote firmware upgrade process is used to overwrite and upgrade the
firmware.
Flash memory
Flash memory is non-volatile, meaning it retains stored data even when the power is turned off.
Flow integrated scanner assembly

A printer scanner assembly that includes a slide-out external physical keyboard.
Formatter (LaserJet)
The formatter controls printer functions like receiving and processes print data, developing and coordinating data
placement and timing with the DC controller PCA, storing font and customer configuration information, communicating
with the host computer, and monitoring control panel functions and relaying printer status information through the
control panel.
FTP
FTP stands for File Transfer Protocol. FTP is a protocol designed for transferring files over the Internet. Files stored on
an FTP server can be accessed using an FTP client, such as a web browser, FTP software program, or a command line
interface.
Fuser Unit
The fuser unit is part of a laser printer that adheres the toner onto the printed page. It consists of a heat roller and a
pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to make sure that the
toner stays on the paper permanently (which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer).
Gateway
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and a telephone line. A gateway is used to
connect two different computer networks, especially a connection to the Internet.
Grayscale
Shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of a color image printed in monochrome. Colors are represented by
a range of gray shades from white to black.
Halftone
Halftone is a way of reproducing a photograph or other image in which the various tones of gray or color are produced
by variously sized dots of ink or toner. Halftone simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly colored areas
consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots.
HDD
A Hard-Disk Drive (HDD) (commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk) is a non-volatile storage device which stores
digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.

IEEE
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international non-profit, professional organization for the
advancement of technology related to electricity.
Image scanner
The image scanner (or Sub Scanner Assembly) contains the components to digitally scan an original source document.
The image scanner is a component of the integrated scanner assembly (ADF and image scanner).
IP address
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that a device uses in order to identify and communicate with other
devices on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard.
IPM
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a method of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of
single-sided sheets a printer can complete in one minute.
IPP
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing and managing print jobs, media size,
resolution, etc. IPP can be used locally, or over the internet to reach hundreds of printers. IPP also supports access
control, authentication, and encryption, making it a capable and secure printing solution.
ISA
The Integrated Scanner Assembly (ISA) includes the document feeder and image scanner.
ISO
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international standard-setting body composed of
representatives from national standards bodies. In produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards.
JBIG
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality. It was
designed for compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used for other images.
JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a commonly used standard method of loss compression for photographic
images. It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web.
LDAP
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services
running over TCP/IP.
LED
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that can indicate the status of a printer (formatter LEDs) or a
component in a contact image sensor (CIS) scanner that helps capture an image.
LEDM
Low end data model (LEDM) provides one consistent data representation method and defines the dynamic and
capabilities tickets shared between clients and devices, as well as the access protocol, event, security, and discovery
methods.
LPDC
Late point differentiation configuration (LPDC) allows the channel partner to configure the speed to the printer depending
on the customer’s order. LPDC configuration is stored on the Trusted Platform Module (TPM).

LVPS - SMPS
Low Voltage Power Supplies (LVPS) and Switching Mode Power Supplies (SMPS) supply direct current (DC) voltages to
various printer components and assemblies.
MAC address
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique
48–bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (for example, 00–00–0c-34–11–4e). This
address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by the manufacturer and used as an aid for routers
trying to locate machines on a large network.
MEt
HP Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) effectively doubles the standard memory through a variety of font- and
data-compression methods. MEt is available only in Printer Command Language (PCL) mode; it is not functional when
printing in PostScript (PS) mode.
MFP
A Multi Function Printer (MFP) is a printer that incorporates multiple functionalities in a single physical body. For
example, an MFP printer can scan, digitally send, fax, copy, and print.
MHV
Miniature High Voltage (MHV) is designed for high voltage applications of BNC connectors (DC voltage between 500 V and
5 kV).
Modem
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also demodulates such a carrier signal to
decode transmitted information.
MPCA (PageWide)
The MPCA integrates both formatter (LaserJet) and engine control electronics (DC controller) into a single assembly. The
Main PCA (MPCA) controls printer functions like receiving and processes print data, developing and coordinating data
placement, storing font and customer configuration information, communicating with the host computer, and monitoring
control panel functions and relaying printer status information through the control panel.
NAND
NAND is not an acronym (the term is short for NOT AND a Boolean operator and logic gate). NAND (flash) memory is
non-volatile, meaning it retains stored data even when the power is turned off.
NVRAM
Nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM) is used to store I/O and information about the print environment
configuration (stored data even when the power is turned off).
OPC
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a
laser printer. It is usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape. An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears
the drum surface during its usage in the printer, and it should be replaced appropriately due to wear from contact with
the cartridge development brush, cleaning mechanism, and paper.
Originals
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph, or text which is copied, reproduced, or translated to
produce additional copies. The original itself is not copied or derived from something else.

PCA
Printed Circuit Assembly (PCA). Once the printed circuit board (PCB) is complete, electronic components must be
assembled to form a functional printed circuit assembly or PCA.
PCL
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol. PCL has
become an industry standard. Originally developed for early Inkjet printers, PCL has been released in varying levels for
thermal, dot matrix printers and laser printers.
PDF
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems. A PDF represents two
dimension documents in a device independent and resolution independent format.
PJL
Printer job language (PJL) is an integral part of printer configuration, in addition to the standard PCL and PostScript
(PS). With standard cabling, the printer can use PJL to perform a variety of functions like dynamic I/O switching,
context-sensitive switching, and isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the next.
PML
Printer management language (PML) allows remote configuration of the printer and status read-back from the printer
through the I/O ports.
PostScript (PS)
PostScript (PS) is a Page Description Language (PDL) and programming language used primarily in electronic and desktop
publishing. PostScript is run in an interpreter to generate an image.
PPM
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works, meaning the number of
pages a printer can produce in one minute.
Print Media
Media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used in a printer, scanner, fax, or copier.
Printer Driver
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer.
Printhead (PageWide)
The printhead converts the digital firing instructions from the printer electronics into properly formed and timed
microscopic drops of the four ink colors.
Printhead Wiper (PageWide)

The printhead wiper system keeps the printhead nozzles firing correctly throughout the life of the printer as it performs
the wiping and capping functions. The wiping function cleans the nozzles of ink residue and particulates. The capping
function keeps the nozzles moist during storage and when the printer is idle.
Protocol
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer between two
computing endpoints.

RAM
Random Access Memory (RAM) is the printer memory device where the data in current use is kept so it can be quickly
retrieved by the device's processor. This memory is an important factor in avoiding errors and printing documents
properly. Printer memory is used to store, and process print jobs as they are sent to the printer from a computer. After
printing, the job is cleared from the memory to make room for more print jobs. Printer memory is directly linked to
two print characteristics: speed and print quality. More memory allows you to print faster and print larger, high-quality
graphics.
REDI sensor
An optical reflective edge detection interrupter (REDI) sensor. Usually used in conjunction with mirrors to sense the
presence or absence of paper in the paper path. These sensors are carefully aligned and calibrated at the factory, so care
must be taken when servicing these sensors.
Resolution
The sharpness of an image is measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the DPI, the greater the resolution.
SCB
The Scanner Control Board (SCB) controls the functions of the image scanner components in the Sub Scanner Assembly
(SSA).
Service fluid and aerosol management systems (PageWide)

There are two types of service fluid, shipping fluid and ink. The service fluid management system is contained entirely
within the duplex module. Service fluid is discharged as droplets from the printhead, and then collected in a container
inside the duplex module. Some of the droplets are called aerosol because they are lighter than air. Aerosol can float
inside the printer and collect on the lens of optical sensors, producing false failures. The aerosol management system
transports the aerosol and collects it in a safe place. Aerosol management consists of an aerosol fan, mounted on the
rear wall of the air flow assembly, which creates air flow that pulls the aerosol through the holes in the platen and into
the aerosol filter inside the duplex module.
SFP
A single-function printer only processes print jobs sent from a host computer or from an USB port on the printer.
SMB
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous
communications between nodes on a network. SMB also provides an authenticated inter-process communication
mechanism.
SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for email transmissions across the internet. SMTP is a relatively
simple, text-based protocol, where one or more recipient of a message is specified, and the message text is transferred.
It is a client server protocol where the client transmits an email message to the server.
SODIMM
Small outline dual in-line memory module (SODIMM) is a thin profile memory storage device (a smaller alternative to a
standard DIMM device).
SSA
The Sub-Scanner Assembly is the image scanner component of the Integrated Scanner Assembly (ISA, which includes the
document feeder and the image scanner).
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is the network
address and which part is the host address.

TCP/IP
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP) are the set of communications protocols that
implement the protocol stack on which the internet and most commercial networks run.
TIFF
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bit mapped image format. TIFF describes image data that
typically come from scanners. TIFF images use tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included
in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image
processing applications.
Toner Cartridge
A bottle or container that holds toner, which is used in a machine like a printer. Toner is a powder used in laser printers
and photocopiers. The toner forms the text and images on printed paper. Toner can be fused by a combination of
heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind the fibers in the paper.
TPM
The HP Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is a security accessory for printers. The TPM strengthens protection of encrypted
credentials and data stored on your printer. Certificate private keys are both generated by and protected by the TPM.
Once installed, the printer and the TPM are sealed, and the printer owns the TPM. The TPM may not be moved to another
device without losing its ownership from the original printer. Installing a TPM accessory might necessitate a firmware
upgrade. The TPM prevents the printer from starting if the TPM is missing. If the TPM is removed from the printer, a
control-panel error message appears indicating that the TPM is missing.
NOTE: The TPM is not a service part for some printer models. Check the printer service manual to determine if the
TPM is a replaceable service part.
TWAIN
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN compliant scanner with TWAIN-compliant software,
a scan can be initiated from the program. TWAIN is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh
operating systems.
URL
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and resources on the internet. The first part of the
address indicates what protocol to use. The second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource
is located.
USB
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers
and peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple
peripherals.
Walk-up USB
Some printers support direct printing from a USB flash drive (the walk-up USB port is usually near the control panel).
Watermark
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light.
Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282. Watermarks have been used by paper makers to identify their
product, and also on postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting.
XPS
XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language (PDL) and a new document format
developed by Microsoft. This has benefits for portable document and electronic documents. It is an XML-based
specification based on a new print path and vector-based, device-independent document format.

ZIF Connector
Zero insertion force (ZIF) connectors use a mechanical locking method to secure Flat Flexible Cables (FFCs) to a Printed
Circuit Assembly (PCA).

Index
Symbols/Numerics 76.00.24 326 locating SFP transactional 3

blank pages
10/100/1000 functions
A troubleshooting 461
theory of operations 59
2,100-sheet paper feeder HCI accessories, input
C
parts and diagrams 1409 550-sheet paper feeder 102
3 bin staple stacker covers MFP HCI 105 cables
parts 1417 accessories, output USB, troubleshooting 461
3 bin staple stacker main body MFP 3-bin stapler-stacker 109 Calibrate/Cleaning menu, control
parts 1418 floor-standing stapler- panel 268
3-bin staple stacker output devices stacker 114 Calibrate/Cleaning menu, control-
parts and diagrams 1416 acoustic specifications 30 panel menu 269
3-bin stapler-stacker assemblies 2,100-sheet paper deck calibration
controller 109 remove and replace 1006 operations 90
delivery functions, other 109 assemblies 3-bin staple stacker calibration, color
electrical components 111 multi-bin mailbox theory 77
fan control 109 remove and replace 1044, 1130 calibration)
jam detection 109 assemblies 550-sheet paper feeder operation 90
motor control 109, 113 remove and replace 960 cartridge
other functions 113 assemblies base printer, remove and developing unit engagement and
output accessories 109 replace 575 disengagement 77
paper path 109 auto on / auto off mode eject 471
550-sheet paper feeder setup and operation 56 life detection 77
controller 102 automatic document feeder memory chip 77
electrical components 102, 103 whole-unit replacement 565 presence detection 77
input accessories 102 remove 468, 472
jam detection 102 B replacing 468, 473
motor control 102, 104 toner level detection 77
backup error
other functions 105 caution iv
32.WX.YZ error 325
paper path 102, 109 certificate of volatility 1468
reset error 325
parts and diagrams 1406 Channel partners
restore error 325
parts, main body 1407 WISE v
Backup/Restore (Maintenance) menu
pickup and feed functions, checklists
control-panel menu 268
other 102 pre-troubleshooting 128
base printer
550-sheet paper feeder covers, circuit base printer, diagrams 217
configuration 10
panels, and doors circuit diagrams
information 3
whole unit replacement 1406 high-voltage power supply 61,
parts and diagrams 1367
550-sheet paper feeder paper path 70
specifications 14
theory of operation 102, 109 low-voltage power supply 61
basic printer operation 54
550-sheet tray cleaning page 268, 269
bin, output
jams 369 print 442
locating MFP managed 7
550-sheet trays clutches
locating MFP transactional 5
jams 327 theory of operation 61
locating SFP managed 3
1482 Index
cold rest control-panel menu) DC controller firmware error
reset 279 Service (Maintenance) 270 70.WX.YZ error 326
color self calibration Troubleshooting DC motors 61, 65
theory 77 (Maintenance) 271 defeating
component diagnostics USB Firmware Upgrade interlocks 286
solve problems 178 (Maintenance) 270 defeating interlocks
components controller solve problems 174, 287
DC controller 61 550-sheet paper feeder 102 definitions and terms
engine-control unit 61 floor-standing stapler- glossary 1472
fuser control 71 stacker 109, 114 delivery functions, other
intermediate transfer belt HCI 105 3-bin stapler-stacker 109
(ITB) 77, 88 conventions used iv floor-standing stapler-
low-voltage power supply 67 cooling stacker 114
pickup, feed, and delivery 91 areas and fans 61, 67 determine problem source 128
secondary transfer roller copy-quality problems development
assembly 90 light or faint copies 458 image formation 83
toner cartridge 77 modify printer settings to development process 77, 79
configuration improve scan or copy devices, input
base printer 10 quality 457 information 31
printer 1 vertical lines, bands, or devices, output
configuration page streaks 453 information 33
determine installed copy-quality troubleshooting 451 diagnostics
firmware 132 Copy/Print (Settings) menu (MFP) component, solve
find information 228 control-panel menu 153 problems 178
solve problems 228 CoV engine 286
configurations, 6700/X654/X65455/ certificate of volatility 1468 diagram
X65465 11 covers 3-bin stapler-stacker 33
configurations, 6800/X677/X67755/ remove and replace parts 575, floor-standing stapler-
X67765 12 960, 1006, 1045, 1130 stacker 34
connectivity and performance covers MFP IPTU 37
troubleshooting 460 parts 1373, 1375 diagrams, block
connector error covers SFP solve problems 180
65.WX.YZ error 326 parts 1369, 1371 diagrams, external plug and port
connector locations covers, panels, and doors locations 180
external plug and port parts and diagrams 1369, diagrams, general circuit base
diagrams 180 1406, 1411, 1417 printer 217
printed circuit assembly CPMD 309 diagrams, major component
diagrams 208 customer self-repair (CSR) A parts locations 187
control panel 59 and accessories 466 diagrams, printed circuit assembly
locating MFP managed 7 customer self-repair (CSR) B parts connector locations 208
locating MFP transactional 5 and accessories 509 diagrams, sensors and
locating SFP managed 3 customer-replaceable units switches 181
locating SFP transactional 3 remove and replace parts 466, diagrams, timing chart 216
parts 1367 509 digital sending error (firmware)
solve problems 135, 292 44.WX.YZ error 326
control panel diagnostic D dimensions, printer 23, 24, 27
flowcharts 148 disable cartridge check
DC controller
control panel messages 309 solve problems 177, 289
components 61
control panel, system diagnostics document feeder
fans 61, 67
solve problems 292 jams 369, 371
motors 61, 65
control panels locating MFP managed 7
theory of operation 61
parts and diagrams 1367 locating MFP transactional 5
DC controller communication error
control-panel menu locating SFP managed 3
55.WX.YZ error 326
Maintenance 268 paper-feeding problems
(MFP) 434
Index 1483
remove and replace parts 558 engine FRUs, internal firmware communication error
whole unit replacement 1365 parts and diagrams 1377, 49.WX.YZ error 326
document feeder / scanner 1407, 1413, 1418 firmware install error
information, configurations, and engine laser scanner system 99.WX.YZ error 327
specifications 1 laser scanner safety 78 hard disk error 327
parts and diagrams 1365 engine test remote firmware upgrade
theory of operations 53 solve problems 134, 286 error 327
document feeder and scanner engine-control unit firmware locations
information 1 components 61 active and repository 281
document feeder error engine, printer firmware upgrade
31.WX.YZ error 325 parts and diagrams 1367 firmware version
doors event log 319 determine 132
parts and diagrams 1369, event log error (firmware) firmware upgrade)
1406, 1411, 1417 42.WX.YZ error 326 embedded web server 131
remove and replace parts 575, exhaust fans 61, 67 USB flash drive, control
960, 1006, 1045, 1130 external plug and port diagrams panel 131
drum locations 180 USB flash drive, pre-boot
remove 475 menu 131
replacing 476 F firmware, upgrade
drum cleaning 77, 79 downloading 131
factory settings
duplexer firmware, version determine
reset 279, 281
jams 327, 369 find information 132
failure detection
duplexer error firmware, version determining 131
laser/scanner 77
69.WX.YZ error 326 flash memory
motors 61, 65
duplexing unit theory of operations 60
faint copies
motors 61, 65 flatbed
copy-quality problems 458
scanning and image capture MFP
fan control
E only 54
3-bin stapler-stacker 109
Floor stand staple stacker covers
easy-access USB port floor-standing stapler-
MFP
locating MFP managed 7 stacker 114
parts 1411
locating MFP transactional 5 fan error
Floor stand staple stacker main body
locating SFP managed 3 58.WX.YZ error 326
MFP
eject fans
parts 1413, 1415
toner cartridges 471 DC controller 61, 67
floor stand staple stacker output
electrical components exhaust 61, 67
devices
550-sheet paper feeder 102 intake 61, 67
floor-standing stapler- theory of operation 61
floor-standing stapler-stacker
stacker 116 Fax (Settings) menu (MFP)
controller 114
HCI 105 control-panel menu 249
delivery functions, other 114
electrical specifications 30 fax functions
electrical components 116
email problems theory of operations 59
fan control 114
get help from WISE 460 fax ports
jam detection 114
Embedded Jetdirect error locating MFP 10
motor control 114, 120, 121
80.WX.YZ error 326 fax problems
other functions 121
engine get help from WISE 460
output accessories 114
diagnostics 286 field-replaceable units
paper path 114
test page 286 covers, panels, and doors 575,
floor-standing stapler-stacker paper
engine error (LaserJet) 960, 1006, 1045, 1130
path
46.WX.YZ error 326 remove and replace parts 558,
63.WX.YZ error 326 575, 960, 1006, 1044, 1130
flowcharts
engine error (PageWide) firmware
troubleshooting 128, 129
61.WX.YZ error 326 determine the installed
format disk
version 132
solve problems 281
1484 Index
formatter electrical components 105, 107 fusing process 77, 79
locating MFP 10 input accessories 105 laser-beam exposure 77, 79
formatter control system 56 jam detection 105 primary charging 77, 79
front door motor control 105, 108 primary transfer process 77, 79
locating MFP managed 7 other functions 108 secondary transfer process 77,
locating MFP transactional 5 paper path 105 79
locating SFP managed 3 pickup and feed functions, separation process 77, 79
locating SFP transactional 3 other 105 image-information system 77
FRUs HCI covers image-quality troubleshooting 435
remove and replace parts 558, parts 1409 imaging drums
575, 960, 1006, 1044, 1130 HCI main body remove 475
FRUS, internal parts 1410 replacing 476
parts and diagrams 1377, HCI paper path individual component test
1407, 1413, 1418 theory of operation 105 solve problems 179
functions high-voltage power supply (HVPS) information
fuser control 71 operations 61, 70 document feeder and scanner 1
low-voltage power supply 67, home button is unresponsive 148, input devices 31
69 151 output devices 33
toner cartridge 88 HP internal users printer 1
fuser WISE v printer base 3
jams 360, 362, 366, 369, 407, HVPS (high-voltage power supply) information pages
409, 413 operations 61, 70 configuration page 228
fuser control Jetdirect page 228
fuser control functions 77 I information, configurations, and
theory of operation 71 specifications
I/O functions
fuser control functions ADF / scanner 1
fuser control 77 document feeder / scanner 1
image capture system
fuser error scanner / document feeder 1
scanning MFP only 54
41.WX.YZ error 325 initial rotation period 54, 55
image defects, repetitive ruler 436
laser scanner error 325 input accessory error
image formation development
paper path error 325 67.WX.YZ error 326
fuser error (LaserJet) input devices
image formation fusing
50.WX.YZ error 326 information 31
fuser heater parts and diagrams 1406
image formation ITB cleaning
protection 76 remove and replace, 2,100-sheet
fusing paper deck 1006
image formation laser-beam
image formation 85 remove and replace, 550-sheet
exposure
fusing process 77, 79 paper feeder 960
input, 2,100-sheet paper feeder HCI
image formation pre-exposure
G parts and diagrams 1409
input, 550-sheet paper feeder
General (Settings) menu image formation primary charging
control-panel menu 234 theory of operation 82
input/output error
glossary image formation primary transfer
40.WX.YZ error 325
terms and definitions 1472 theory of operation 83
input/output functions
image formation secondary transfer
H theory of operations 59
install
image formation separation
hard disk partition error tray 1 pickup roller 505
98.WX.YZ error 327 installation
image quality
hardware integration pocket (HIP) printer 39
check toner-cartridge
locating SFP managed 3 installation, base printer 41
status 441
hardware integration pocket (HIP) is installation, document feeder /
image-formation process
not functioning 148, 152 scanner 39
development process 77, 79
HCI intake fans 61, 67
drum cleaning 77, 79
controller 105
Index 1485
integrated scanner assembly (ISA) internal assemblies 3-bin staple duplexer 327, 369
ISA stacker multi-bin mailbox 1044, fuser 360, 362, 366, 369, 407,
whole-unit replacement, 1130 409, 413
integrated scanner internal assemblies 550-sheet paper HCI 109
assembly 569 feeder 960 in right door 357, 404
whole-unit replacement 569 internal assemblies base locations 327, 369
interface ports printer 575 output bin 327, 368, 369, 415,
locating MFP 10 internal diagnostics error 416, 418, 420, 424, 427
locating SFP 4 90.WX.YZ error 327 Tray 1 327, 369
interlocks video display error 327 Tray 2 327, 332, 369, 379
defeating 286 internal parts 2,100-sheet paper Tray 4 343, 350, 390, 397
Intermediate paper transfer unit MFP deck Jetdirect page
parts 1416 remove and replace 1006 solve problems 228
intermediate paper transport unit internal parts 3-bin staple stacker job accounting error (firmware)
output devices multi-bin mailbox 48.WX.YZ error 326
parts and diagrams 1416 remove and replace 1044, 1130 job management error
intermediate transfer belt (ITB) internal parts 550-sheet paper (firmware) 326
components 77, 88 feeder job pipeline error
operations 77, 88 remove and replace 960 (firmware) 326
internal assemblies (1 of 7), internal parts and assemblies job parser error (firmware)
parts 1377 parts and diagrams 1377, 47.WX.YZ error 326
internal assemblies (1 of 9), 1407, 1413, 1418 printer calibration error 326
parts 1391 internal parts and assemblies,
internal assemblies (2 of 7), remove and replace 466, 509, K
parts 1379 558, 650, 973, 1016, 1080, 1204
keyboard 59
internal assemblies (2 of 9), internal parts base printer, remove
parts 1393 and replace 575 L
internal assemblies (3 of 7), internal test and information pages
parts 1381 solve problems 228 laser scanner
Internal assemblies (3 of 9), ITB (intermediate transfer belt) failure detection 78
parts 1395 operation 77, 88 laser scanner error (LaserJet)
internal assemblies (4 of 7), ITB cleaning 51.WX.YZ error 326
parts 1384 image formation 85 52.WX.YZ error 326
Internal assemblies (4 of 9), laser scanner functions
parts 1397 J failure detection 78
internal assemblies (5 of 7), laser scanner safety
jam detection
parts 1386 engine laser scanner system 78
3-bin stapler-stacker 109, 114
Internal assemblies (5 of 9), laser-beam exposure 77, 79
550-sheet feeder 105, 122
parts 1399 image formation 82
550-sheet paper feeder 102
internal assemblies (6 of 7), laser/scanner
floor-standing stapler-
parts 1387 failure detection 77
stacker 114
internal assemblies (6 of 9), operations 77
HCI 105, 109
parts 1400 last rotation period 54, 55
jam error (LaserJet)
internal assemblies (7 of 7), latent image formation 77, 79
13.WX.YZ error 325
parts 1389 light copies
jam error (PageWide)
internal assemblies (7 of 9) , copy-quality problems 458
13.WX.YZ error 325
parts 1402 lines, bands, streaks
jams
internal assemblies (8 of 9), copy-quality problems 453
parts 1403 link speed, change 175, 289
550-sheet feeder 105, 122
internal assemblies (9 of 9), low-voltage power supply
550-sheet tray 369
parts 1405 functions 69
550-sheet trays 327
internal assemblies 2,100-sheet over-current/over-voltage
auto-navigation 327, 371
paper deck 1006 protection 69
causes of 328, 371
safety 69
document feeder 369, 371
1486 Index
voltage descriptions 68 Service (Maintenance) O
low-voltage power supply (HVPS) menu 270
on/off button
operations 61 Service menu 268
LVPS (low-voltage power supply) Settings menu 233
locating MFP transactional 5
operations 61 Support Tools menu 268
locating SFP managed 3
Troubleshooting (Maintenance)
locating SFP transactional 3
M menu 271
operating-environment range
USB Firmware Upgrade
maintenance printer 30
(Maintenance) menu 270
printer 39 operation
maintenance, base printer 41 Sleep delay 56
menu 268
maintenance, document feeder / Sleep mode 56
menus control panel, control panel
scanner 39 operation sequence 54, 55
Calibrate/Cleaning) 268
major component diagrams operations
menus, control panel
locations 187 laser/scanner 77
Calibrate/Cleaning 269
major component locations toner cartridge memory 77
motor control
diagrams 187 other functions
3-bin stapler-stacker 109, 113
Manage Supplies (Settings) menu floor-standing stapler-
550-sheet paper feeder 102,
control-panel menu 260 stacker 121
104
manual sensor test, tray/bin other functions, 3-bin stapler-
floor-standing stapler-
solve problems 180 stacker
stacker 114, 120, 121
manual sensor tests theory of operation 113
HCI 105, 108
solve problem 179 other functions, 550-sheet paper
motor error (LaserJet)
memory feeder
59.WX.YZ error 326
included 14, 16, 17, 20 theory of operation 105
motors
toner cartridge 77 other functions, HCI
DC controller 61, 65
Memory Enhancement technology theory of operation 108
failure detection 61, 65
theory of operations 60 output accessory error
pickup, feed, and delivery
Memory Enhancement technology 66.WX.YZ error 326
system 91, 95
(MEt) 56 output bin
stepping 61, 65
memory error clear jams 327, 368, 369, 415,
82.WX.YZ error 326 416, 420, 424, 427
movement of paper through printer
EMMC error 326 locating MFP managed 7
See pickup, feed, and delivery
hard disk error 326 locating SFP managed 3
memory functions locating SFP transactional 3
N
theory of operations 60 output bin, base printer
menu, control panel Near Field Communication error locating MFP transactional 5
Backup/Restore (Maintenance) 81.WX.YZ error 326 output bin, finisher
menu 268 Bluetooth error 326 locating MFP transactional 5
Backup/Restore menu 268 external I/O card error 326 output device, 3-bin staple stacker
Calibrate/Cleaning menu 268, internal EIO error 326 parts and diagrams 1416
269 wireless error 326 output device, floor stand staple
Copy/Print (Settings) menu network port stacker
(MFP) 153 locating SFP 4 parts and diagrams 1411
Fax (Settings) menu (MFP) 249 Networking (Settings) menu output device, intermediate paper
General (Settings) menu 234 control-panel menu 263 transport unit
Manage Supplies (Settings) networks parts and diagrams 1416
menu) 260 supported 14, 16, 17, 20 output devices
Networking (Settings) no control panel sound 148, 150 information 33
menu 263 note iv parts and diagrams 1411
Print (Settings) menu (SFP) 153 NVRAM remove and replace, 3-bin staple
Reports menu 232 theory of operations 60 stacker multi-bin
Scan/Digital Send (Settings) mailbox 1044, 1130
menu (MFP) 240
Index 1487
over-current/over-voltage floor-standing stapler- internal parts and
protection stacker 114 assemblies 1377, 1407,
low-voltage power supply 69 HCI 105 1413, 1418
OXPd/Web kit error printer 91 output devices 1411
45.WX.YZ error 326 paper path sensors test (not panels 1369, 1406, 1411, 1417
available for this printer) scanner / document
P solve problems 179 feeder 1365
paper path test parts internal 2,100-sheet paper
page error
solve problems 178 deck
21.WX.YZ error 325
partial clean (disk) remove and replace 1006
pages
solve problems 281 parts internal 3-bin staple stacker
blank 461
parts multi-bin mailbox
not printing 461
3 bin staple stacker covers remove and replace 1044, 1130
printing slowly 461
MFP 1417 parts internal 550-sheet paper
pages per minute 14, 16, 17, 20
3 bin staple stacker main body feeder
panels
MFP 1418 remove and replace 960
parts and diagrams 1369,
550-sheet paper feeder covers, parts internal base printer, remove
1406, 1411, 1417
panels, and doors 1406 and replace 575
remove and replace parts 575,
550-sheet paper feeder main parts, internal assemblies (1 of
960, 1006, 1045, 1130
body 1407 7) 1377
paper
control panel 1367 parts, internal assemblies (1 of
jams 327, 328, 369, 371
covers MFP 1373, 1375 9) 1391
selecting 442
covers SFP 1369, 1371 parts, internal assemblies (2 of
paper feeder, 2,100-sheet HCI
document feeder and scanner 7) 1379
whole units 1365 parts, internal assemblies (2 of
paper feeder, 550-sheet
Floor stand staple stacker covers 9) 1393
MFP 1411 parts, internal assemblies (3 of
parts, main body 1407
Floor stand staple stacker main 7) 1381
whole unit replacement
body MFP 1413, 1415 parts, Internal assemblies (3 of
part 1406
HCI covers 1409 9) 1395
paper handling
HCI main body 1410 parts, internal assemblies (4 of
solve problems 327
Intermediate paper transfer unit 7) 1384
paper handling error (LaserJet)
MFP 1416 parts, Internal assemblies (4 of
56.WX.YZ error 326
parts and diagrams 9) 1397
paper jams
2,100-sheet paper feeder parts, internal assemblies (5 of
550-sheet tray 369
HCI 1409 7) 1386
550-sheet trays 327
550-sheet paper feeder 1406 parts, Internal assemblies (5 of
document feeder 369, 371
ADF / scanner 1365 9) 1399
duplexer 327, 369
base printer 1367 parts, internal assemblies (6 of
fuser 360, 362, 366, 369, 407,
control panels 1367 7) 1387
409, 413
covers, panels, and doors 1369, parts, internal assemblies (6 of
locations 327, 369
1406, 1411, 1417 9) 1400
output bin 327, 368, 369, 415,
document feeder / parts, internal assemblies (7 of
416, 418, 420, 424, 427
scanner 1365 7) 1389
right door 357, 404
doors 1369, 1406, 1411, 1417 parts, internal assemblies (7 of
Stapler stacker 418
engine, printer 1367 9) 1402
Tray 1 327, 369
f3-bin staple stacker output parts, internal assemblies (8 of
Tray 2 327, 332, 369, 379
device 1416 9) 1403
Tray 4 343, 350, 390, 397
floor stand staple stacker output parts, internal assemblies (9 of
paper movement
device 1411 9) 1405
operation 91
input devices 1406 performance and connectivity
paper path
intermediate paper transport unit troubleshooting 460
output device 1416 periods of the operation
550-sheet paper feeder 102
sequence 54, 55
1488 Index
personal identification number (PIN) printer information, configuration, customer-replaceable
service menu 275 and specifications units 466, 509
pickup and feed functions, other document feeder and scanner document feeder / scanner 558
550-sheet paper feeder 102 specifications 1 field-replaceable units 558,
HCI 105 document feeder and scanner 575, 960, 1006, 1044, 1130
pickup, feed, and delivery views 1 integrated scanner assembly
components 91 printer installation and maintenance (ISA), whole-unit
overview 91 base printer 41 replacement 569
PJL (printer job language) 56, 58 document feeder / scanner 39 whole-unit replacement 565
PML (printer management printer job language (PJL) 56, 58 remove and replace, internal parts
language) 56 printer management language and assemblies 466, 509, 558,
power (PML) 56 650, 973, 1016, 1080, 1204
consumption 30 printer memory error remove and replace, internal parts
power connection 20.WX.YZ error 325 and assemblies base
locating SFP 4 printer resets printer 575
power management solve problems 279 repetitive image defect ruler 436
theory of operation 57 printer settings replacing
power on troubleshooting 284 copy-quality problems 457 imaging drums 476
power on troubleshooting printer, base toner cartridges 468, 473
overview 284 configuration 10 reports
power switch information 3 event log 319
locating SFP transactional 3 specifications 14 supplies status page 309
power-on checks printing Reports menu
troubleshooting process 284 period in operation control-panel menu 232
pre-boot menu options 309 sequence 54, 55 resets
pre-exposure troubleshooting 461 printer 279
image formation 81 Process Cleaning Page 268, 269 revision history iii
pre-troubleshooting checklist 128 protection right door
primary charging fuser heater 76 locating MFP managed 7
image formation 82 locating MFP transactional 5
primary charging process 77, 79 R locating SFP managed 3
Print (Settings) menu (SFP) locating SFP transactional 3
RAM
control-panel menu 153 Right door
print a cleaning page 442 jams 357, 404
real-time clock error
print bar error (PageWide) roller, tray 1 pickup
11.WX.YZ error 325
62.WX.YZ error 326 install 505
removal and replacement 466
print-quality troubleshooting 436 remove 502
remove
print/stop test
imaging drums 475
solve problems 177 S
toner cartridges 468, 472
printed circuit assembly diagrams
tray 1 pickup roller 502 safety
connector locations 208
remove and replace low-voltage power supply 69
printer
2,100-sheet paper deck, internal scan or copy quality improvement
information, configuration, and
parts and assemblies 1006 copy-quality problems 457
specifications 1
3-bin staple stacker multi-bin Scan/Digital Send (Settings) menu
installation and
mailbox, internal parts and (MFP)
maintenance 39
assemblies 1044, 1130 control-panel menu 240
operating-environment
550-sheet paper feeder, internal scanner
range 30
parts and assemblies 960 remove and replace parts 558
resets 279
remove and replace parts scanner and document feeder
space requirements 30
automatic document feeder, information 1
printer engine
whole-unit replacement 565 scanner error
covers, panels, and doors 575, 30.WX.YZ error 325
960, 1006, 1045, 1130 scanner tests (MFP)
solve problems 176
Index 1489
troubleshooting 176 Settings (Fax) menu (MFP) individual component test 179
scanner, image control-panel menu 249 internal test and information
whole unit replacement Settings (General) menu pages 228
part 1365 control-panel menu 234 LED diagnostics 175, 289
scanner/document feeder Settings (Manage Supplies) menu) link speed 175, 289
information, configurations, and control-panel menu 260 major component locations
specifications 1 Settings (Networking) menu diagrams 187
parts and diagrams 1365 control-panel menu 263 manual sensor test 179
theory of operations 53 Settings (Print, SFP) menu output is curled or
scanning control-panel menu 153 wrinkled 327, 433
image capture MFP only 54 Settings (Scan/Digital Send) menu paper does not feed
secondary transfer (MFP) automatically 327, 435
image formation 84 control-panel menu 240 paper does not feed from Tray 2-
secondary transfer assembly Settings menu X 327, 432
operation 90 control-panel menu 233 paper handling 327
secondary transfer processes 77, sleep delay paper path sensors test (not
79 operation 56 available for this
secondary transfer roller assembly sleep mode printer) 179
components 90 operation 56 paper path test 178
operations 90 sleep settings 56 performance and connectivity
secondary transfer roller assembly) solenoids troubleshooting 460
operation 90 pickup, feed, and delivery power-on checks 284
security system 91, 95 print-quality
dynamic security 77 theory of operation 61 troubleshooting 436
security error solve connectivity problems 464 print/stop test 177
33.WX.YZ error 325 solve performance problems 461 printed circuit assembly
sensor error factors affecting print connector location
54.WX.YZ error 326 performance 461 diagrams 208
58.WX.YZ error 326 print speeds 462 printer does not pick up
sensors printer does not print 463 paper 327
pickup, feed, and delivery printer prints slowly 463 printer does not pick up paper or
system 91, 93 solve problems misfeeds 327
theory of operation 61 circuit diagrams 217 printer feeds incorrect page
sensors and switches diagrams configuration page 228 size 327, 431
3-bin stapler-stacker 181 control panel 135, 292 printer picks up multiple sheets
550-sheet paper feeder 181 control panel messages 309 of paper 327
base printer 181 copy-quality printer pulls from incorrect
floor-standing stapler- troubleshooting 451 tray 327, 431
stacker 181 CPMD 309 printer resets 279
HCI 181 defeating interlocks 174, 287 printer will not duplex or
separation diagrams, block 180 duplexes incorrectly 327,
image formation 84 disable cartridge check 177, 432
separation process 77, 79 289 scanner tests (MFP) 176
Service (Maintenance) menu engine test 134, 286 sensors and switches
control-panel menu 270 external plug and port location diagrams 181
service and support diagrams 180 service menu 275
WISE v firmware upgrade 131 system diagnostics, control
service ID firmware, determine panel 292
restore 279 version 132 timing chart diagrams 216
service menu format disk and partial clean tray/bin manual sensor
personal identification number functions 281 test 180
(PIN) 275 image-quality troubleshooting tools 134
solve problems 275 troubleshooting 435 solving
Settings (Copy/Print, MFP) menu individual component direct-connect problems 464
control-panel menu 153 diagnostics 178
1490 Index
space requirements DC controller 61 toner
printer 30 fans 61 image formation, use
specifications floor-standing stapler-stacker during 77, 79
base printer 14 paper path 114 toner cartridge
electrical and acoustic 30 fuser control 71 developing unit engagement and
printer 1 HCI other functions 108 disengagement 77
specifications, document feeder and HCI paper path 105 diagnostic test 286
scanner image formation functions 88
printer information, development 83 life detection 77
configuration, and image formation fusing 85 memory chip 77
specifications 1 image formation ITB presence detection 77
standby period 54, 55 cleaning 85 toner level detection 77
stapler image formation laser-beam toner cartridges 77
locating MFP managed 7 exposure 82 components 77
locating MFP transactional 5 image formation pre- eject 471
Stapler stacker exposure 81 error conditions 77
clear jams 418 image formation primary operations 77
stepping motors 61, 65 charging 82 remove 468, 472
supplies image formation primary replacing 468, 473
eject toner cartridges 471 transfer 83 theory of operation 86
remove imaging drums 475 image formation secondary touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no
remove toner cartridges 468, transfer 84 image) 148
472 image formation separation 84 touchscreen control panel 59
replacing imaging drums 476 low-voltage power supply 67 touchscreen has an unresponsive
replacing toner cartridges 468, motors 61 zone 148, 149
473 scanning and image capture 54 transfer processes 77, 79
supplies error (LaserJet) sensors 61 transfer unit
10.WX.YZ error 325 solenoids 61 operation 77, 88
supplies error (PageWide) switches 61 tray
17.WX.YZ error 325 toner cartridges 86 location assemblies, 550-sheet
supplies status page 309 theory of operations paper feeder 31
Support Tools menu 10/100/1000 functions 59 location assemblies, HCI paper
control-panel menu 268 ADF / scanner 53 feeder 32
switches base printer 54 Tray 1
pickup, feed, and delivery document feeder / scanner 53 jams 327, 369
system 91, 93 fax functions 59 locating MFP managed 7
theory of operation 61 firmware 60 locating MFP transactional 5
system error (LaserJet) flash memory 60 locating SFP managed 3
62.WX.YZ error 326 I/O functions 59 locating SFP transactional 3
input devices 102 tray 1 pickup roller
T input/output functions 59 install 505
Memory Enhancement remove 502
terms and definitions
technology 60 Tray 2
glossary 1472
memory functions 60 jams 327, 332, 369, 379
tests
NVRAM 60 locating MFP managed 7
disable cartridge check 286
output devices 109 locating MFP transactional 5
engine 286
printer, base 54 locating SFP managed 3
RAM 60 locating SFP transactional 3
3-bin stapler-stacker other
scanner / document feeder 53 Tray 3
functions 113
USB functions 59 locating MFP managed 7
550-sheet paper feeder other
USB hosts functions 59 locating MFP transactional 5
functions 105
wireless functions 59 locating SFP managed 3
550-sheet paper feeder paper
timing chart, diagrams 216 Tray 4
path 102, 109
tip iv jams 343, 350, 390, 397
clutches 61
Index 1491
locating MFP transactional 5 power subsystem 284 weight, printer 23, 24, 27
tray motor error (LaserJet) power-on checks 284 whole-unit replacement
60.WX.YZ error 326 troubleshooting process overview automatic document
tray/bin, manual sensor test power on 284 feeder 565
solve problems 180 troubleshooting tools integrated scanner assembly
trays control panel messages 309 (ISA) 569
capacity 14, 16, 17, 20 copy-quality remove and replace parts 565
included 14, 16, 17, 20 troubleshooting 451 wireless functions
locating MFP managed 7 CPMD 309 theory of operations 59
locating MFP transactional 5 determine the problem WISE
locating SFP managed 3 source 128 email problems 460
locating SFP transactional 3 diagrams, block 180 fax problems 460
troubleshooting firmware upgrade 131 HP internal users and Channel
blank pages 461 image-quality partners v
check toner-cartridge troubleshooting 435 WUR
status 441 individual component automatic document
checklist 128 diagnostics 178 feeder 565
control panel 135, 292 performance and connectivity integrated scanner assembly
defeating interlocks 174, 287 troubleshooting 460 (ISA) 569
direct-connect problems 464 print-quality remove and replace parts 565
disable cartridge check 177, troubleshooting 436
289 solve problems 134
engine test 134, 286
event log 319 U
flowchart 128, 129
upgrade, product firmware 131
format disk and partial clean
functions 281
(Maintenance) menu
individual component test 179
control-panel menu 270
jams 327, 328, 369, 371
USB functions
LED diagnostics 175, 289
link speed 175, 289
USB hosts functions
manual sensor test 179
network problems 464
USB port
pages not printing 461
locating SFP transactional 3
pages printing slowly 461
troubleshooting 461
paper path sensors test (not
available for this V
printer) 179
paper path test 178 vertical lines, bands, or streaks
print/stop test 177 copy-quality problems 453
printer resets 279 views, document feeder and scanner
scanner tests (MFP) 176 printer information,
service menu 275 configuration, and
supplies status page 309 specifications 1
system diagnostics, control voltage descriptions
panel 292 low-voltage power supply 68
tray/bin manual sensor
test 180 W
USB cables 461 waiting period 54, 55
wired network 464 warning iv
Troubleshooting (Maintenance) Web-based Interactive Search
menu Engine (WISE)
control-panel menu 271 HP internal users and Channel
troubleshooting process partners v
power on 284
1492 Index

Service Manual X677

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual X677

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual X677

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HP Color LaserJet Enterprise 6700, 6701

HP Color LaserJet Enterprise X654, X65455, X65465

This guide provides theory of operation, troubleshooting, and repair information.

© Copyright 2023 HP Development Company,

Reproduction, adaptation, or translation

The information contained herein is subject to

The only warranties for HP products and

View a list of document revisions.

Table Revision history

Revision number Revision date Revision notes

1 03/2023 Service manual initial release.

Learn about the conventions used in this publication.

TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts.

NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.

iv Conventions used in this guide

Learn about access to additional service and support information.

Additional service and support for channel partners

Find information about the following topics.

● Service manuals, service cost data, and service advisories

● The latest control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting information

● Remove and replace part instructions and videos

● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues

● Printer specifications, warranty, and regulatory information

● Install, configure, and how to information

Access WISE for Channel partners (HP Partner Portal)

3. Select the Technical Support (WISE) item.

4. Select the Technical Documentation item.

5. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

Access WISE for Channel partners (CSDP)

2. Select the Knowledge and Training item.

3. Select theHP Technical Documentation item.

4. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

Additional service and support for HP internal personnel

View a video of how to access WISE for internal HP users.

Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)

● WISE - Chinese (simplified)

● WISE - Chinese (traditional)

Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)

Additional technical support WISE videos

vi HP service and support

1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications .......................................................................................................1

2 Printer installation and maintenance..................................................................................................................................39

3 Theory of operation .............................................................................................................................................................53

4 Solve problems ..................................................................................................................................................................123

5 Removal and replacement.................................................................................................................................................466

6 Parts and diagrams......................................................................................................................................................... 1365

Appendix A Certificate of Volatility.................................................................................................................................... 1468

Appendix B Glossary of terms............................................................................................................................................ 1472

Index ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1482

View a video of how to access WISE for internal HP users....................................................................................................... vi

View a video of how to replace the toner cartridges...............................................................................................................42

View a video of how to replace the toner cartridges...............................................................................................................43

View a video of how to replace the imaging drums................................................................................................................ 45

View a video of how to access WISE (HP channel partners)..................................................................................................128

View a video of how to access WISE (HP channel partners)..................................................................................................309

View a video of how to access WISE (HP channel partners)..................................................................................................325

View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 1..........................................................................................................................328

View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 2..........................................................................................................................332

View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 4..........................................................................................................................344

View a video of how to clear a jam in the output bin............................................................................................................ 368